Owner's Manual

WEB EDITION OWNER'S MANUAL

VÄLKOMMEN!

We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an cle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impairment that automobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encour- could hinder your ability to drive. age you to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and oper- Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and emis- ating instructions in this manual. sion standards. If you have any questions regarding your vehicle, please We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times in contact your Volvo retailer or see the article "Contacting Volvo" for infor- this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a vehi- mation on getting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada. CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION SAFETY Contacting Volvo 12 Changing settings in different types 46 General safety information 58 of apps Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance 12 Occupant safety 58 Using the center display 47 Additional information about your vehicle 12 Reporting safety defects 59 Using the owner's manual 51 General information about the XC90 14 Recall information 60 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid On-board digital owner's manual 53 Safety during pregnancy 60 Volvo and the environment 18 Navigating in the digital owner's manual 54 Whiplash protection system 61 Owner's manual and the environment 19 Glass 55 Seat belts 62 IntelliSafe—driver support 19 Technician certification 55 Seat belt pretensioners 63 Sensus 20 Buckling and unbuckling seat belts 63 Owner's manual in mobile devices 23 Door and seat belt reminders 65 Options, accessories and the On- 24 board Diagnostic (OBDII) socket Child safety 66 Child restraints Owner's information 25 68 Infant seats Driver distraction 26 70 Convertible seats Volvo Structural Parts Statement 27 72 Booster cushions Crash event data 28 75 ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors Volvo ID 29 76 Lower child seat attachment points Center display overview 30 77 Top tether anchors Changing center display settings 32 78 Using the center display keyboard 33 Integrated booster cushion* 79 Function view buttons 38 Raising the integrated booster cushion* 80 Navigating in the center display's views 40 Stowing the integrated booster cushion* 81 Symbols in the center display status bar 45 Occupant weight sensor 82 Safety mode 85

2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Starting or moving a vehicle in safety 86 Trip computer 94 Voice control 117 mode Displaying trip computer information 95 Using voice commands 118 Airbag system 87 Displaying trip statistics 96 Voice control for cell phones 118 Driver/passenger side airbags 87 HomeLink® Wireless Control System* 97 Voice control for radio and media 119 Inflatable curtains 90 Programming the HomeLink® Wire- 98 Climate system voice commands 119 Side impact airbags 91 less Control System* Navigation system voice commands 121 Instruments and controls 100 Voice control settings 122 Adjusting the power door mirrors 102 Indicator symbols in the instrument panel 123 Laminated panoramic roof* 103 Instrument panel 125 Operating the laminated panoramic roof* 104 Instrument panel App menu 126 Power windows 106 Hybrid-related information in the 127 instrument panel Operating the power windows 106 Instrument panel licenses Rearview mirror 107 129 Warning symbols in the instrument panel Using sun shades 108 134 Compass Settings view 108 136 Calibrating the compass Categories in Settings view 109 136 Lighting panel and controls Changing system settings in Set- 111 137 tings view Low beam headlights 139 Changing settings in apps 112 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) 139 Resetting the settings view 112 High and low beam headlights 140 Resetting user data when the vehicle 113 Active Bending Lights* 142 changes owners Brake lights 143 Ambient temperature sensor 113 Rear fog lights 143 Clock 114 Hazard warning flashers 144 Head-up display (HUD)* 114 Parking lights 144

3 CLIMATE Approach lighting 145 Adjusting function settings in the 164 Climate control system 174 multifunctional front seats* Home safe lighting 145 Perceived temperature 174 Rear seats 166 Passenger compartment lighting 145 Climate system sensors 175 Easy access to and from the driver seat 166 Using turn signals 148 Parking climate (preconditioning) 175 Adjusting the second row head restraints 167 Messages in the instrument panel 148 Activating/deactivating the parking 177 and center display Adjusting the second row backrest tilt 168 climate timer Handling messages in the instru- 150 Folding the second row backrests 169 Activating/deactivating the climate 177 ment panel and center display comfort retaining function* Moving the second row seats for- 171 Handling messages stored from the 151 ward/rearward Preconditioning timer 178 instrument panel and center display Getting into and out of the third row 171 Setting the parking climate (precon- 178 Using the instrument panel App menu 153 of seats ditioning) timer Using the windshield wipers 153 Folding the third row backrests 172 Starting and stopping preconditioning 180 Activating/deactivating the rain sensor 154 Preconditioning symbols and messages 181 Windshield and headlight washers 155 Air quality 182 Tailgate window wiper and washer 156 Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* 182 Steering wheel 157 Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* 182 Adjusting the steering wheel 158 Passenger compartment air filter 183 Seats 158 Automatic climate control 183 Manually operated front seats 159 Climate system controls 184 Power front seats* 160 Climate system controls in the center 185 display Adjusting power front seats* 160 Rear climate system controls on the 186 Adjusting the passenger's seat from 161 tunnel console the driver's seat* Setting the blower speed 187 Using the power seat memory function* 161 Setting the temperature 188 Multifunctional front seats* 162 Turning recirculation on and off 190 Operating multifunctional front seats* 163

4 LOADING AND STORAGE LOCKS AND ALARM Defrosting windows and mirrors 191 Cargo space 204 Locks and remote keys 220 Turning steering wheel heating* on 193 Passenger compartment storage spaces 204 Alarm 220 and off Using the glove compartment 205 Automatically arming/disarming the 222 Air conditioning 194 alarm Tunnel console 206 Turning seat heating* on and off 195 Deactivating the alarm without a 222 Sun visors 207 functioning remote key Turning front seat ventilation* on and off 196 Electrical sockets 208 Child safety locks 222 Air distribution 197 Loading 211 Antenna locations for the start and 224 Opening/closing/directing air vents 198 Grocery bag holder 213 lock system Adjusting air distribution 198 Cargo net 213 Start and lock system type designations 224 Air distribution table 200 Steel cargo grid* 215 Immobilizer 225 Load anchoring eyelets 216 Changing the remote key's battery 226 Cargo compartment cover* 217 Remote key's range 229 Remote key 229 Restricted key* 231 Detachable key blade 232 Foot movement tailgate operation* 233 Locking and unlocking confirmation 234 Locking/unlocking from inside the 236 vehicle Locking/unlocking from outside the 237 vehicle Locking/unlocking the tailgate 238 Power tailgate* 240 Locking/unlocking with the detacha- 242 ble key blade

5 DRIVER SUPPORT Driver support systems 246 Other Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 274 Changing tolerance for the 294 functions Automatic Speed Limiter Driver support system camera 246 Radar sensor 275 Deactivating/reactivating the Speed 295 Camera limitations 247 Limiter* Radar sensor - type approval 276 Driver support system radar unit 250 Turning the Speed Limiter* off 296 Adaptive cruise control passing 276 Radar sensor limitations 251 assistance Road Sign Information (RSI)* 297 Cruise Control (CC) 254 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) - fault 277 Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* operation 298 Starting and activating Cruise Control 254 tracing Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* limitations 299 Changing Cruise Control speed 255 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) sym- 278 bols and messages Park Assist* 299 Deactivating/resuming Cruise 256 Control (CC) City Safety™ 279 Activating/deactivating Park Assist 301 Turning Cruise Control off 257 City Safety warning level settings 281 Park Assist limitations 301 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* 258 Detecting cyclists and pedestrians 282 Park assist symbols and messages 303 with City Safety Starting and activating Adaptive 260 Park Assist Camera (PAC)* 304 City Safety in crossing traffic Cruise Control (ACC) 283 Park Assist Camera (PAC)* trajectory 306 Deactivating/resuming Adaptive 261 Rear Collision Warning (RCW) 284 lines and fields Cruise Control (ACC) City Safety limitations 285 Starting the Park Assist Camera (PAC)* 308 Changing Adaptive Cruise Control 263 City Safety™ troubleshooting 287 Park Assist Camera (PAC)* limitations 308 (ACC) speed City Safety symbols and messages 289 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* 309 Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control 264 time interval Speed limiter (SL)* 290 Using Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* 310 Pilot Assist* 265 Starting and activating the Speed 291 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations 313 Limiter (SL)* Starting and activating Pilot Assist 268 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols and 315 Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)* 291 messages 269 maximum speed Adjustable steering force* Setting a Pilot Assist time interval 271 316 Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* 292 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Pilot Assist auto-hold brake function 272 316 Activating/deactivating the 293 Pilot Assist limitations Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 317 272 sport mode

6 STARTING AND DRIVING Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 318 Starting and driving 338 Driving with a trailer 359 symbols and messages Brakes 338 Detachable trailer hitch 360 Roll stability control (RSC) 320 Brake functions 340 Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) 361 Driver Alert Control (DAC) 320 Auto-hold brake function 341 Ignition modes 362 Driver Alert Control limitations 321 Brake assist system 341 Battery drain 364 Using Driver Alert Control (DAC) 321 Braking effect after a collision 342 Starting the engine 364 Distance Alert* 322 Emergency brake lights 342 Turning the engine off 366 Using Distance Alert* 323 Hill Descent Control (HDC) 342 Driving systems 366 Distance Alert* limitations 323 Hill Start Assist 343 Hybrid battery charging cable 367 Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* 324 Parking brake 344 Hybrid charging cable circuit breaker 369 Blind Spot Information (BLIS) On/Off * 325 Using the parking brake 344 Hybrid-related symbols and messages 370 Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* limitations 326 Parking brake malfunctions 346 Preparations for charging the hybrid 372 battery Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* 326 Before a long distance trip 347 Stopping hybrid battery charging 373 Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic 327 Driving economically 347 Alert (CTA)* Initiating hybrid battery charging 374 Driving through standing water 349 Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* limitations 328 Charging the hybrid battery 375 Overheating the engine and transmission 349 Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* with 330 Hybrid battery charge status 377 Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* symbols Winter driving 350 Charger status indicators 379 and messages Towing eyelet 351 Hybrid battery charging current 379 Driving lane assistance 331 Towing recommendations 352 Long-term storage of a vehicle with 380 Activating/deactivating Lane 333 Fuel 353 Departure Warning (LDW) a hybrid battery Octane rating 354 Activating/deactivating Lane 333 Using the electric motor in city driving 381 Keeping Aid (LKA)* Opening/closing the fuel filler door 355 Drive modes 382 Driving lane assistance symbols and 335 Emission controls 356 ECO drive mode 386 messages Jump starting 357 Automatic transmission 387

7 INFOTAINMENT Gear selector positions 387 The infotainment system 396 CD (media) player* 414 Shiftlock 389 Sound settings 396 Playing media 414 Gear shift indicator 390 Radio 397 Media searches 416 Steering wheel paddles* 390 Radio settings 397 Playing media through the 417 AUX/USB sockets Low Speed Control (LSC) 391 RBDS radio 398 Streaming media through a Blue- 417 All Wheel Drive (AWD) 392 Changing and searching for radio 398 tooth connection stations Suspension and leveling control* 392 Media sound settings 417 HD Radio™reception 399 Gracenote 418 Switching HD Radio on and off 401 Video 419 HD Radio sub-channels 401 Media player technical data 419 HD Radio limitations 402 Internet connected vehicle 420 SiriusXM® Satellite radio* 403 Connecting to the Internet 421 Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio radio* 404 Apps (applications) 422 SiriusXM® Satellite radio* settings 405 Bluetooth settings 423 Phone 406 Downloading, updating and uninstal- 424 Pairing a cell phone 407 ling apps Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone 408 Internet connection troubleshooting 425 Handling phone calls 409 Tethering (Wi-Fi sharing) 425 Handling text messages 410 Deleting Wi-Fi networks 426 Phone settings 411 Wi-Fi technology and security 426 Text message settings 412 Vehicle modem settings 426 Connecting a Bluetooth® device 412 Infotainment system license information 427 Connecting a device via the 412 Terms, conditions and confidentiality 431 AUX/USB socket Media player 413

8 WHEELS AND TIRES MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Tires 434 Using the tire sealing system 453 Volvo's service program 462 Tire sidewall designations 435 Inflating a tire with the tire sealing 457 System updates 464 system compressor Wheel (rim) designations 437 Remote updates 465 Refilling coolant 458 Tire terminology 437 Vehicle status 465 Tire direction of rotation 438 Booking service and repairs 465 Tread wear indicator 439 Wi-Fi connection to a workshop 468 Loading specifications 439 Climate system service 469 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 440 Start battery 469 Snow tires and chains 441 Hybrid battery 471 Checking tire inflation pressure 441 Battery symbols 472 Changing tires 443 Fuses 473 Tools in the cargo compartment 443 Replacing fuses 473 Jack 443 Fuses in the engine compartment 474 Wheel bolts 444 Fuses in the passenger compartment 478 Removing a wheel 444 Fuses in the cargo compartment 481 Installing a wheel 446 Replacing bulbs 483 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 447 Removing the rectangular headlight 485 cover Checking inflation pressure 448 Replacing low beam headlight bulbs 485 Reinflating tires equipped with the 449 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Replacing High Beam headlight bulbs 486 Calibrating the Tire Pressure 450 Replacing parking light bulbs 487 Monitoring System (TPMS) Replacing front turn signal bulbs 487 Tire Pressure Monitoring System 451 type approval Bulb specifications 488 Tire sealing system 451 Hoisting the vehicle 489 Opening and closing the hood 491

9 SPECIFICATIONS INDEX Engine compartment overview 492 Label information 508 Index 521 Engine oil 493 Dimensions 511 Checking and refilling engine oil 494 Weights 513 Windshield wipers in the service position 495 Air conditioning refrigerant 515 Replacing wiper blades 496 Hybrid battery specifications 515 Refilling the windshield washer fluid 498 Brake fluid specification and volume 516 reservoir Coolant specifications and volumes 516 Cleaning the exterior 498 Engine specifications 517 Cleaning the interior 500 Engine oil specifications and volume 518 Cleaning the center display 502 Fuel tank volume 518 Corrosion protection 503 Tire inflation pressure table 519 Paint damage 503 Transmission fluid specification and 520 Touching up paint damage 504 volume Polishing and waxing 505

10 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION

Contacting Volvo Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance Additional information about your Use the following contact information if you Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON vehicle would like to get in touch with Volvo in the Uni- CALL roadside assistance. Volvo Cars' website and support site provide ted States or Canada. additional information about your vehicle. Additional information, features, and benefits of In the USA: this program are described in a separate informa- Support on the Internet tion package in your glove compartment. Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR code If you require assistance, dial: Customer Care Center below to visit the site, which is available in most In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63- markets. 1 Volvo Drive, VOLVO) P.O. Box 914 In Canada 1-800-263-0475 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 1-800-458-1552 NOTE www.volvocars.com/us Some vehicles may be equipped with Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect, which QR code to the support site In Canada: will allow access to the call center and addi- The information on the support site is searchable tional features directly from the vehicle. This Volvo Cars of Canada and is grouped into different categories. It is in addition to the Volvo On Call Roadside includes support for e.g., Internet-based services National Customer Service Assistance program mentioned above. and functions, Volvo On Call (VOC), the naviga- 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect will be tion system and apps. Video and step-by-step Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 a customer pay subscription offer after an ini- instructions explain various procedures such as tial complimentary trial period. how to connect the vehicle to the Internet via a 1-800-663-8255 cell phone. www.volvocars.com/ca Downloadable information Maps Sensus Navigation system maps can be downloaded from the support site.

12 INTRODUCTION

Mobile apps For certain model year 2014 and 2015 Volvos, the owner's manual is available in the form of an app. The VOC app can also be found here. Owner's manuals for earlier model Volvos Owner's manuals for earlier model Volvos are available in PDF format. Quick Guides and supplements can also be found on the support site. Select a model and a model year and download the desired information. Contact Contact information for customer support and the nearest Volvo retailer are available on the site. Related information • Using the owner's manual (p. 51) • On-board digital owner's manual (p. 53) • Volvo ID (p. 29)

13 INTRODUCTION

General information about the functionality that differs from a vehicle powered speeds; the gasoline engine is used at higher XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid exclusively by a gasoline engine. The electric speeds or during more active driving. The XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid is motor powers the vehicle primarily at low driven like any other vehicle but it has certain

14 INTRODUCTION

Overview

}}

15 INTRODUCTION

|| Electrical current for charging the hybrid bat- WARNING too cold or hot. Preconditioning prepares the tery vehicle's drive systems and passenger compart- A number of electrical components in the Electric motor for powering the rear wheels ment before the vehicle is driven to help reduce XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid use wear and energy consumption. high-voltage current and can be extremely Hybrid battery dangerous if handled incorrectly. These com- Charging the hybrid battery ponents and any orange wiring in the vehicle Drive modes (change in the center display or may only be handled by trained and qualified by using the drive mode control in the tunnel Volvo service technicians. CAUTION console) Never connect the charging cable if there is a Instrument panel showing unique hybrid-rela- Hybrid-unique functions risk of thunderstorms/lightning. ted information Drive modes WARNING Different drive modes can be selected while driv- The XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid uses a ing, e.g., electric power only or a combination of lithium-ion battery that can be charged in several Please be aware that there is no sound from electric and gasoline power. The vehicle calcu- ways: the engine when the vehicle is being powered lates the optimal combination of drivability, driving • A charging cable can be connected from the by the electric motor and it may be difficult to experience, environmental impact and fuel econ- detect by children, pedestrians, cyclists and vehicle to a 110-volt AC socket. Charging omy for the selected drive mode. See also the animals. This is especially true at low speeds. time depends on the strength of the current. article "Drive modes" for additional information. • When the brakes are applied lightly, the elec- High-voltage electrical current Instrument panel tric motor is used for engine braking, during In certain driving situations, hybrid-unique infor- which the vehicle's kinetic energy is conver- mation may be displayed in the instrument panel, ted into electric current that is used to help such as: a hybrid battery gauge (current charge recharge the hybrid battery. level), the current drive mode, a symbol that illu- • The hybrid battery is also recharged to a cer- minates when the gasoline engine is being used, tain extent when the gasoline engine is in a Hybrid Guide and the level of energy regenera- operation. tion. Preconditioning Related information Drive modes (p. 382) In order to function optimally, the hybrid battery • (and its related electrical systems) and the gaso- • Hybrid-related information in the instrument line engine (and its drive systems) should be at panel (p. 127) the correct operating temperature. The hybrid • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 375) battery's capacity is reduced considerably if it is

16 INTRODUCTION

• Preparations for charging the hybrid battery (p. 372) • Starting the engine (p. 364)

17 INTRODUCTION

Volvo and the environment refinement of conventional gasoline-powered Volvo XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid Volvo is committed to the well-being of its cus- internal combustion engines, Volvo is actively • If possible, precondition the vehicle with the tomers. As a natural part of this commitment, we looking at advanced technology alternative-fuel charging cable before driving. care about the environment in which we all live. vehicles. • If preconditioning is not possible in cold Concern for the environment means an everyday weather, use the seat and steering wheel involvement in reducing our environmental When you drive a Volvo, you become our partner heating primarily. Avoid heating the entire impact. in the work to lessen the car's impact on the passenger compartment, which reduces the environment. To reduce your vehicle's environ- hybrid battery's charge level. Volvo's environmental activities are based on a mental impact, you can: Choose the Pure drive mode to help mini- holistic view, which means we consider the over- • • Maintain proper air pressure in your tires. mize electric power consumption. all environmental impact of a product throughout Tests have shown decreased fuel economy • In hilly terrain, put the gear selector in mode its complete life cycle. In this context, design, pro- with improperly inflated tires. duction, product use, and recycling are all impor- B to utilize the electric motor's braking func- Follow the recommended maintenance tant considerations. In production, Volvo has • tion when the accelerator pedal is released. schedule in your Warranty and Service partly or completely phased out several chemicals This helps charge the hybrid battery. Records Information booklet. including CFCs, lead chromates, asbestos, and • Select the Save drive mode for higher cadmium; and reduced the number of chemicals • Drive at a constant speed whenever possible. speeds when driving farther than is possible used in our plants 50% since 1991. • See a trained and qualified Volvo service using the electric motor only. technician as soon as possible for inspection Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into Related information if the check engine (malfunction indicator) production a three-way catalytic converter with a light illuminates, or stays on after the vehicle • Driving economically (p. 347) Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen sen- has started. sor, in 1976. The current version of this highly efficient system reduces emissions of harmful • Properly dispose of any vehicle-related waste substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the exhaust pipe such as used motor oil, used batteries, brake by approximately 95 – 99% and the search to pads, etc. eliminate the remaining emissions continues. • When cleaning your vehicle, please use gen- Volvo is the only automobile manufacturer to uine Volvo car care products. All Volvo car offer CFC-free retrofit kits for the air conditioning care products are formulated to be environ- system of all models as far back as the 1975 mentally friendly. model 240. Advanced electronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to continuous environmental

18 INTRODUCTION

Owner's manual and the IntelliSafe—driver support • High and low beam headlights (p. 140) environment IntelliSafe is Volvo's philosophy regarding vehi- • Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 326) The wood pulp in Volvo's printed owner's infor- cle safety. It encompasses a number of systems, • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 324) mation comes from FSC® (Forest Stewardship both standard and optional, that are designed to • City Safety™ (p. 279) Council®) certified forests and other responsible help make driving and traveling in a Volvo safer. sources. • Driving lane assistance (p. 331) Support • Airbag system (p. 87) FSC® Systems that help make driving safer are an inte- gral part of IntelliSafe. These include optional • Roll stability control (RSC) (p. 320) features such as Adaptive Cruise Control* that • Seat belts (p. 62) helps maintain a set distance to a vehicle ahead, • General safety information (p. 58) Park Assist Pilot*, which assists in parking the vehicle, Cross Traffic Alert*, Blind Spot Information*, etc. Accident prevention Systems such as City Safety are designed to automatically apply the brakes in situations in The symbol above indicates that the wood pulp is which the driver does not have time to react. FSC® certified. Lane Keeping Aid* alerts the drive if the vehicle inadvertently crosses a lane's/road's side marker Related information line. • Volvo and the environment (p. 18) Protection The vehicle is equipped with e.g., seat belt pretensioners that pull the seat belts taut in critical situations when there is a collision risk and numerous airbags designed to help provide cushioning if certain types of collisions should occur. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 258) • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 309)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 19 INTRODUCTION

Sensus Sensus provides an intelligent interface and Sensus is the core of your personal Volvo experi- Internet-connected service with an intuitive navi- ence and provides information, entertainment gation structure that offers access to relevant and features that make owning your vehicle eas- information when it is needed, with minimal dis- ier. tractions. Sensus also includes all of your vehicle's solu- This is Sensus tions relating to entertainment, connecting to the Internet, navigation and the user interface between the driver and the vehicle. Sensus makes communication between you, the vehicle and the digital world around you possible.

20 INTRODUCTION

Information when it's needed, where it's needed

Information is presented in different displays depending on how it should be prioritized (generic illustration) Head-up-display* ately, such as traffic warnings, speed information Instrument panel and navigation. Road sign information and incoming phone calls are also displayed here. The head-up display is controlled from the right-side steering wheel keypad and the center display.

The head up-display presents types of informa- The instrument panel displays information such tion that the driver should be aware of immedi- as speed, an incoming phone call or the track }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 21 INTRODUCTION

|| that is currently playing. It is controlled using both Voice control system steering wheel keypads. The voice control system ena- Center display bles the driver to operate certain vehicle functions without removing his/her hands from the steering wheel and it understands natural speech. Use voice commands to e.g., play a track on the infotainment system, make a phone call, raise the passenger compartment temperature or to read a text message. For additional information about all of the functions/system, see the respective articles in the on-board owner's manual or the printed supplement. Many of the vehicle's main functions are con- Related information trolled from the center display, a touchscreen that • Using the center display (p. 47) reacts to taps or other gestures. The number of Center display overview (p. 30) physical buttons is thereby minimized. The screen • can be operated with or without gloves. • Navigating in the center display's views (p. 40) The center display is used to control e.g., the cli- Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 114) mate and infotainment systems and to adjust the • power seats*. The information shown here can be • Instrument panel (p. 125) dealt with by the driver or the front seat passen- • Voice control (p. 117) ger.

22 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INTRODUCTION

Owner's manual in mobile devices The app contains videos and exterior/interior Related information Owner's information mobile app1 can be down- views of the vehicle with certain components/ • Using the owner's manual (p. 51) loaded from the App Store and Google Play and functions highlighted in hotspots, which lead • Additional information about your vehicle is adapted for both cell phones and tablets. directly to related information. It is easy to navi- (p. 12) These apps also contain videos and interior/ gate between the various categories and articles exterior hotspot views of the vehicle that you can and the contents are searchable. click on for additional information.

This QR code will take you directly to the app or you can search for "Volvo manual" in the App Store or Google Play.

The mobile app is available at the App Store and Google Play

1 Certain models and mobile devices

23 INTRODUCTION

Options, accessories and the On- NOTE WARNING board Diagnostic (OBDII) socket Do not export your Volvo to another If your vehicle is involved in an accident, We strongly recommend that Volvo owners • country before investigating that coun- unseen damage may affect its drivability and install only genuine, Volvo-approved accesso- try's applicable safety and exhaust emis- safety. ries, and that accessory installations be per- sion requirements. In some cases it may formed only by a trained and qualified Volvo be difficult or impossible to comply with WARNING service technician. these requirements. Modifications to the emission control system(s) may render CALIFORNIA proposition 65 Optional or accessory equipment described in your Volvo not certifiable for legal opera- this manual is indicated by an asterisk. Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and tion in the U.S., Canada and other coun- certain vehicle components contain or emit Optional or accessory equipment may not be tries. chemicals known to the state of California to available in all countries or markets. Please note • All information, illustrations and specifica- cause cancer, and birth defects or other that some vehicles may be equipped differently, tions contained in this manual are based reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids depending on special legal requirements. on the latest product information availa- contained in vehicles and certain products of ble at the time of publication. Please note component wear contain or emit chemicals Contact your Volvo retailer for additional informa- known to the State of California to cause can- tion. that some vehicles may be equipped dif- cer, and birth defects or other reproductive ferently, depending on special legal harm. requirements. Optional equipment described in this manual may not be available in all markets. WARNING • Some of the illustrations shown are Certain components of this vehicle such as air generic and may not depict the exact bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, adap- model for which this manual is intended. tive steering columns, and button cell batter- Volvo reserves the right to make model ies may contain Perchlorate material. Special • handling may apply for service or vehicle end changes at any time, or to change speci- of life disposal. fications or design without notice and without incurring obligation. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate.

• Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to ensure compatibility with the performance, safety, and emission systems in your vehicle. Additionally, a trained and qualified Volvo

24 INTRODUCTION

service technician knows where accessories Connecting equipment to the On-board Owner's information may and may not be safely installed in your Diagnostic (OBDII) socket Complete on-board digital owner's information is Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained available on the center display, as a mobile app and qualified Volvo service technician before and on Volvo's support website. installing any accessory in or on your vehicle. WARNING • Accessories that have not been approved by Volvo Cars takes no responsibility for the con- The printed owner's manual in the glove compart- Volvo may or may not be specifically tested sequences of connecting non-authorized ment is an excerpt from the digital information equipment to the On-board Diagnostic for compatibility with your vehicle. Addition- and contains important texts, the latest updates (OBDII) socket. This socket should only be ally, an inexperienced installer may not be used by a trained and qualified Volvo service and instructions that can be useful in situations familiar with some of your car's systems. technician. where it is not practical to read the information • Any of your car's performance and safety on the screen. systems could be adversely affected if you Changing the language used for the on-board install accessories that Volvo has not tested, information could mean that some of the infor- or if you allow accessories to be installed by mation displayed may not comply with national or someone unfamiliar with your vehicle. local statutes and regulations. Damage caused by unapproved or improperly • If the content of the on-board digital informa- installed accessories may not be covered by tion and the printed manual differ, the printed your new vehicle warranty. See your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for information always has precedence. more warranty information. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses WARNING that may result from the installation of non- The driver is always responsible for operating genuine accessories. the vehicle in a safe manner and adhering to current laws and traffic regulations. The diagnostic socket OBDII under the dashboard on the driver's side It is also important that the vehicle be operated, maintained and serviced according to Volvo's recommendations/instructions in the owner's manual.

}}

25 INTRODUCTION

|| Related information Driver distraction WARNING • Owner's manual in mobile devices (p. 23) Please keep the following warnings in mind Never use a hand-held cellular telephone when operating/servicing your vehicle. • • Navigating in the digital owner's manual while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit (p. 54) A driver has a responsibility to do everything pos- cellular telephone use by a driver while • On-board digital owner's manual (p. 53) sible to ensure his or her own safety and the the vehicle is moving. safety of passengers in the vehicle and others • If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga- sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions is part tion system, set and make changes to of that responsibility. your travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked. Driver distraction results from driver activities that are not directly related to controlling the vehicle • Never program your audio system while in the driving environment. Your new Volvo is, or the vehicle is moving. Program radio pre- can be, equipped with many feature-rich enter- sets with the vehicle parked, and use your programmed presets to make radio use tainment and communication systems. These quicker and simpler. include hands-free cellular telephones, navigation systems, and multipurpose audio systems. You • Never use portable computers or per- may also own other portable electronic devices sonal digital assistants while the vehicle for your own convenience. When used properly is moving. and safely, they enrich the driving experience. Improperly used, any of these could cause a dis- Accessory installation traction. • We strongly recommend that Volvo owners install only genuine, Volvo-approved acces- For all of these systems, we want to provide the sories, and that accessory installations be following warning that reflects the strong Volvo performed only by a trained and qualified concern for your safety. Never use these devices Volvo service technician. or any feature of your vehicle in a way that dis- tracts you from the task of driving safely. Distrac- • Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to tion can lead to a serious accident. In addition to ensure compatibility with the performance, this general warning, we offer the following guid- safety, and emission systems in your vehicle. ance regarding specific newer features that may Additionally, a trained and qualified Volvo service technician knows where accessories be found in your vehicle: may and may not be safely installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained

26 INTRODUCTION

and qualified Volvo service technician before Related information Volvo Structural Parts Statement installing any accessory in or on your vehicle. • Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 27) Volvo has always been and continues to be a • Accessories that have not been approved by leader in automotive safety. Volvo may or may not be specifically tested for compatibility with your vehicle. Addition- Volvo engineers and manufactures vehicles ally, an inexperienced installer may not be designed to help protect vehicle occupants in the familiar with some of your car's systems. event of a collision. • Any of your car's performance and safety Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of a systems could be adversely affected if you collision. This energy absorption system including, install accessories that Volvo has not tested, but not limited to, structural components such as or if you allow accessories to be installed by bumper reinforcement bars, bumper energy someone unfamiliar with your vehicle. absorbers, frames, rails, fender aprons, A-pillars, • Damage caused by unapproved or improperly B-pillars and body panels must work together to installed accessories may not be covered by maintain cabin integrity and protect the vehicle your new vehicle warranty. See your Warranty occupants. and Service Records Information booklet for The supplemental restraint system including but more warranty information. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses not limited to air bags, side curtain air bags, and that may result from the installation of non- deployment sensors work together with the genuine accessories. above components to provide proper timing for air bag deployment. WARNING Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North America does not support the use of aftermarket, alterna- The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner and for comply- tive or anything other than original Volvo parts for ing with current statutes and regulations. collision repair. It is also essential to maintain and service the In addition Volvo does not support the use or re- vehicle according to Volvo's recommendations use of structural components from an existing as stated in the owner's information and the vehicle that has been previously damaged. service and warranty booklet. Although these parts may appear equivalent, it is If the on-board information differs from the difficult to tell if the parts have been previously printed owner's manual, the printed informa- replaced with non-OE parts or if the part has tion always takes precedence. been damaged as a result of a prior collision. The }}

27 INTRODUCTION

|| quality of these used parts may also have been Crash event data recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi- affected due to environmental exposure. This vehicle is equipped with an event data tions and the EDR never registers who is driving the vehicle or the location of a crash or a near Related information recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit- crash-like situation. However, other parties, such Crash event data (p. 28) • uations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data • Contacting Volvo (p. 12) a road obstacle, data that will assist in under- with the type of personally identifying data rou- standing how a vehicle's systems performed. tinely acquired during a crash investigation. To The EDR is designed to record data related to read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The is needed. EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such Furthermore, your vehicle is equipped with a data as: number of computers whose task is to continuously control and monitor the vehicle’s operation. How various systems in your vehicle were operat- They can also register some of this information ing; • Whether or not the driver and passenger during normal driving conditions, most importantly safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if if they detect a fault relating to the vehicle’s operat all) the driver was depressing the accelerator ation and functionality or upon activation of the and/or brake pedal; and, • How fast the vehicle vehicle’s active safety systems (e.g. City Safety was traveling. and the auto-brake function). Some of the regis- • How various systems in your vehicle were tered information is required by technicians when operating; carrying out service and maintenance to enable • Whether or not the driver and passenger them to diagnose and rectify any faults that have safety belts were buckled/fastened; occurred in the vehicle and to enable Volvo to ful- • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing fill legal and other regulatory requirements. Infor- the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, mation thus registered in the vehicle is registered in the vehicle’s computers until the vehicle is • How fast the vehicle was traveling. serviced or repaired. In addition to the above, the These data can help provide a better understand- registered information may – on an aggregated ing of the circumstances in which crashes and basis – be used for research and product devel- injuries occur. opment purposes in order to continuously EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a improve the safety and quality of Volvo vehicles. non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are For additional information, contact:

28 INTRODUCTION

In the United States Volvo ID Registering your Volvo ID to the vehicle Volvo Cars of North America, LLC A Volvo ID can be used to access a number of If your Volvo ID was created using the Volvo On on-line services2 Call mobile app, the ID has to be registered to Customer Care Center the vehicle: 1 Volvo Drive, P.O. box 914 Creating a Volvo ID 1. With the vehicle connected to the Internet, Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 A Volvo ID can be created in two ways: download the Volvo ID app from the Remote update service in the center display's App 1-800-458-1552 Using the Volvo ID app view. See also the article "Downloading, www.volvocars.com/us 1. If you have not already done so, download updating and uninstalling apps." the Volvo ID app from the Remote update 2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID. In Canada service. 3. Follow the instructions that will be sent auto- Volvo Cars of Canada 2. Start the app and register a personal email address. matically to the email address linked to your National Customer Service Volvo ID. 3. Follow the instructions that will be sent auto- > Your Volvo ID is now registered to the 9130 Leslie Street matically to this email address. vehicle and the Volvo ID services available Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 > A Volvo ID has now been created and has can be used. 1-800-663-8255 been automatically registered to the vehicle. The Volvo ID services available can Advantages of having a Volvo ID www.volvocars.com/ca now be used. • Only one user name and password are Using the Volvo On Call (VOC) app required to access online services. 1. Download the latest version of the VOC app • If you change a user name or password for to your cell phone from e.g., the App Store, one of the online service (e.g., VOC), it/they Windows Phone or Google Play. will also be automatically changed for the other services. 2. Start the app and create a Volvo ID on the start page. Related information Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps 3. Register a personal email address and then • (p. 424) follow the instructions that will be sent automatically to this address. • Connecting to the Internet (p. 421)

2 These services vary and may be subject to change. Consult your Volvo retailer.

29 INTRODUCTION

Center display overview Many of the vehicle's functions are controlled from the center display.

Three of the center display's basic views. Swipe to the right/left to access the Function/App view

30 INTRODUCTION

Function view: vehicle functions can be acti- The extra sub-view: the most recently used vated/deactivated by tapping. Certain func- apps/vehicle functions that do not belong in tions are called "trigger functions", which any of the other sub-views are listed here. open settings windows, e.g., Camera and Tap the sub-view to expand it. parking functions. Settings for the head-up Climate bar: information and direct access to display* are also started from Function view settings such as temperature, seat heating* but the actual interaction is controlled from and blower speed. Tap the symbol at the the steering wheel keypad buttons and the center of the Climate bar to open Climate instrument panel. view for additional settings. Home view: the initial view shown when the center display is started. Related information Using the center display (p. 47) App (Application) view: shows apps that have • been downloaded (third-party apps) as well • Function view buttons (p. 38) as ones for integrated functions such as FM • Symbols in the center display status bar radio. Tap an icon to open the app. (p. 45) Status bar: vehicle activities are shown at the • Settings view (p. 108) top of the screen. Network/connection infor- • Media player (p. 413) mation is shown on the left side of the bar. • Phone (p. 406) Media-related information, the clock and information about background activities are • Climate system controls in the center display shown to the right. (p. 185) Top view: pull down the tab to open Top view. • Cleaning the center display (p. 502) From here, you can access Settings, Owner's manual and stored messages. Navigation: leads to map navigation. Tap the sub-view to expand it. Media: the most recently used media-related apps. Tap the sub-view to expand it. Phone: used to access phone-related functions. Tap the sub-view to expand it.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 31 INTRODUCTION

Changing center display settings 1. Press and hold the Home button below the 3. Pull the control under Screen Touch to the The center display activates automatically when screen. desired level to change volume or turn off the driver's door is opened. Settings can be > The screen will go dark. However, the cli- the sound for tapping the screen or Keypad made for e.g., sounds, background and themes. mate bar remains visible and apps or Touch. other functions connected to the display Changing the screen's appearance Turning off and reactivating the center remain active. The screen can also be display cleaned while it is turned off. (theme) 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top 2. Reactivate by pressing the Home button view. briefly. 2. > The view that was displayed when the Tap My Car Displays Themes. screen was turned off will be displayed 3. Select a theme, e.g., Minimalistic or again. Chrome Rings. In addition, the settings: Normal and Bright can NOTE also be selected. For Normal, the screen's back- • The display cannot be turned off while a ground is dark and the text is light. This is the message requiring action is on the default setting. If Bright is selected, the back- screen. ground will be light and the text will be dark, • The display turns off automatically when which can increase readability in strong ambient Home button for the center display the ignition is switched off and the driv- lighting. When the center display is turned off, the screen er's door is opened. These alternatives are always available and do goes dark to avoid disturbing the driver. However, not shift automatically according to changes in the climate bar remains visible and apps or other Turning off or changing the volume of ambient lighting. functions connected to the display remain active. center display sounds Related information System sounds in the center display can be turned off or their volume can be changed: • Using the center display (p. 47) Sensus (p. 20) 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top • view. • Settings view (p. 108) • Cleaning the center display (p. 502) 2. Tap Sound System Volumes.

32 INTRODUCTION

Using the center display keyboard A keyboard can be used on the center display to enter characters and search for e.g., destinations using the navigation system, adding contacts in phone book, etc. It is also possible to use handwriting on the screen. Entering text using the keyboard The keyboard will only appear at the bottom of the center display in situations when it is possible to write on the screen.

}}

33 INTRODUCTION

Keyboard function buttons (the appearance may vary depending on language settings, context, etc.) Field for possible search hits. The word word to select it. The keyboard may not sup- The characters that can be entered are lan- changes as new letters are added. Scroll in port all language selections, in which case guage-dependent (see point 7). Tap a char- the list using the left/right arrows. Tap a this line on the screen will not be displayed. acter to enter it.

34 INTRODUCTION

Several buttons (depending on the context below). Tap to display a list of possible lan- 3. Select and one or more of the languages in for which the keyboard is being used) will be guages and tap a language to use it. the list. displayed here. In certain cases, it can be Tap to enter blank spaces. > The makes it possible to change the key- used to enter @, .com or to start a new line. board layout and characters available Press to hide the keyboard. In cases where Tap to erase one character at a time. depending on the language(s) selected. this is not possible, the button will not be dis- Tap to enable handwriting. See the section When more than one language played. "Handwritten text" below. has been selected, this button 3 Tap once to enter one uppercase letter. Entering text and performing searches using the (7) will appear on the key- Double-tap for Caps lock (tap again to keyboard are done somewhat differently in the board. return to lowercase letters). Letters entered navigation system. See the section "Filtering des- after the !, . and ? characters will automati- tination search results" below. cally be uppercase. The first letter in the text field or in text fields intended for names, Tap the button above the keyboard to confirm the To shift between keyboard languages: addresses or company names will also auto- text that has been entered (not shown in the 1. Press and hold the button (7). illustration). This button's appearance differs matically be uppercase. The first letter in text > A list will be displayed. fields intended for passwords, web depending on the context. 2. Tap the desired language. If more than four addresses or email addresses will automati- Changing keyboard languages cally be lowercase unless upper case is languages have been selected in Settings, In order to change keyboard languages, they chosen. scroll in the list. must first be selected under Settings. Press to display the numbers that can be > The keyboard layout and characters avail- entered. When numbers are displayed, tap The keyboard language can be changed without able will change to the selected language. changing the language used for the other sys- to resume entering text or to tems/menus in the vehicle. enter special characters. Tap to change the keyboard language (in this 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and Settings example, UK English is the selected lan- tap . guage). The characters available will change 2. Tap System Keyboard Layouts. according to the selected language (2). This button will only be displayed if several keyboard languages have been selected (see the section "Changing keyboard languages"

3 In the example illustration, the button shows "UK". }}

35 INTRODUCTION

|| Special characters Entering characters 1. Enter a handwritten character (1) using a fin- gertip or by holding e.g., a pen near the screen. > Several character suggestions will appear (3). The most likely character will be at the top of the list.

CAUTION Do not touch the screen with sharp objects because this could cause scratches. Area for entering characters. 2. Continue entering characters. é To enter language-specific characters such as Text box where the characters entered in or è (if available): > If no other choice is made, the character area (1) appear. at the top of the list will be used. Tap one 1. Press and hold a character key. Suggested characters. Scroll in the list if of the other characters in the list to use it > A box with available characters will open. necessary. instead. 2. Tap the desired character. If none of the spe- Blank spaces. cial characters is selected, the key's initial character will be entered. Tap to erase one character at a time. Handwritten text Tap to return to the standard keyboard. Tap button (10), see the overview illustration Press to hide the keyboard. In cases where above, to enter the handwriting mode. this is not possible, the button will not be displayed. Tap to change the keyboard language.

36 INTRODUCTION

Erasing/changing handwritten characters New lines

Erase a character by swiping over the handwriting area Create a new line by drawing above the characters as (1) shown in the illustration Characters can be erased/changed in several Related information ways: • Using the center display (p. 47) • Tap the desired character in the list (3). • Center display overview (p. 30) • Tap button (5) to erase the character and • Navigating in the center display's views start again. (p. 40) • Sweep horizontally from right to left over the handwriting area (1). Erase several characters by swiping over the area several times. • Tap the "x" in the text box (2) to delete all characters.

37 INTRODUCTION

Function view buttons on-screen function buttons. From the Home Different types of buttons The Function view, which is one of the center view, swipe from left to right on the screen to There are three different types of vehicle function display's basic views, contains all of the vehicle's come to the Function view. buttons as listed in the following table.

Type of button Functions Vehicle function affected Function buttons Have On/Off modes. Most of the buttons in the function view are function buttons. An LED indicator light to the left of the button's icon will illuminate when a function is active. Press the button to turn the function on or off. Start buttons Do not have On/Off modes. • Camera. Pressing a start button opens a function's window, e.g., a window for adjusting the • Headrest fold. driver's seat. • Functions for folding down a seat. • Head-up display adjustments. Parking buttons Have On/Off and scanning modes. • Park In. Similar to function buttons but have an additional parking scanning mode. • Park Out.

Button modes function is initially activated, an additional text will be displayed (certain functions only) in the button for approx. 5 seconds, after which the button will be displayed with the LED indicator illuminated. Press the button briefly to deactivate the function.

A function is deactivated (off) when the LED indicator is A function is activated (on) when the LED indicator is off green When a function or parking button's LED indicator is green, the function is activated. When a

38 INTRODUCTION

The yellow triangle indicates that the function is not working correctly Related information • Center display overview (p. 30) • Navigating in the center display's views (p. 40) • Categories in Settings view (p. 109)

39 INTRODUCTION

Navigating in the center display's sub-view contains the most recently used app/ NOTE views vehicle function that is not related to the other In Home view's standard mode (reached There are 5 different basic views in the center three sub-views. For example, if the most recently • by pressing the Home button briefly), an display: Home view, Top view, Climate view, App used app/vehicle function is a music app, the Media sub-view will be displayed. animation explaining how to access the view and Function view. The display is activated different views will be shown on the automatically when the driver's door is opened. The sub-views display brief information about the screen. respective apps. • Some functions may be disabled when Home view The first time the vehicle is started, some of the the vehicle is moving. Home view is displayed when the screen is acti- Home view's sub-views will not contain any infor- vated. It consists of four sub-views: Navigation, mation. Media, Phone and an extra sub-view. The extra

40 INTRODUCTION

Expanding/minimizing a sub-view

The Media sub-view shown minimized (left) and expanded (right) • To expand a sub-view, tap the screen anywhere in the sub-view to access the respec- }}

41 INTRODUCTION

|| tive app's basic functions. When a sub-view is expanded, the Home view's fourth sub- view will temporarily not be displayed. • To minimize a sub-view, tap anywhere on the screen. Opening/closing a sub-view in full-screen mode The extra sub-view and the Navigation sub-view can be opened in full-screen mode to show additional information and possible settings. In expanded mode, open the app in full-screen mode by tap- Home button for the center display ping the symbol. Status bar Current vehicle activities are shown in the status bar at the top of the screen. Network and connection information is shown to the left. Brief Tap on the symbol or the Home information about currently running apps and the button below the screen to clock are shown to the right. return to the expanded view. Top view Top view when expanded The top view has a tab at the center of the status bar. Pull down (expand) the Top view by swiping Top view provides access to: the tab downward. Settings It is always possible to return to Home view by • pressing the Home button. Press the Home but- • Owner's manual ton twice to return to Home view's standard view • The vehicle's stored messages from full-screen. To leave (minimize) Top view, tap the screen outside of this view or tap at the bottom of Top view and swipe upward. The views behind will become visible again. Top view is not available when the

42 INTRODUCTION ignition is being started/switched off or when a App view When applicable, swipe downward to scroll in the message is displayed on the screen. list of apps (depending on the number of apps Going to Top view from an app currently running). To pull down Top view when an app is running To move an app, press and hold it. It will become (e.g., FM radio): slightly bigger and transparent and can then be dragged to the desired position and released. • Tap FM Radio Settings to display these settings. Return to Home view by swiping the screen from • Tap Owner's manual to open an article left to right or by pressing the Home button. related to the specific app. Function view This applies only to your vehicle's factory- installed apps. This is not possible for third- party apps that have been downloaded. Climate view The climate bar, where the most common climate system settings can be made, is located at the bottom of the screen and is always visible. Tap the symbol at the center of the climate bar to open Climate view for access to additional climate system settings. App view Tap the symbol to close Climate view Swipe the screen from right to left to access App and return to a previous view. view from Home view. This displays factory-installed apps such as FM as well as any apps that have been downloaded. Brief information will be displayed for certain apps, for example missed phone calls, etc. Tap an app to open it.

Function view with vehicle function buttons }}

43 INTRODUCTION

|| Swipe the screen from left to right to access Function view from Home view. From Function view, you can activate/deactivate various vehicle functions such as Drive Modes, Speed limit adaptation and Park Assist. When applicable, swipe upward to scroll in the list of functions (depending on the number of functions). Activate/deactivate a function by tapping its button. Certain functions will open in their own windows. To move a function button, press and hold it. It will become slightly smaller and transparent and can then be dragged to the desired position and released. Related information • Using the center display (p. 47) • Center display overview (p. 30) • Function view buttons (p. 38) • Symbols in the center display status bar (p. 45) • Changing settings in different types of apps (p. 46) • Climate system controls (p. 184)

44 INTRODUCTION

Symbols in the center display status Symbol Meaning • Warning symbols in the instrument panel bar (p. 134) The following table provides an overview of the Remote diagnostics active. • Messages in the instrument panel and center symbols used in the center display's status bar. display (p. 148) Action in progress. The status bar shows current vehicle activities and in certain cases, also their status. Due to lim- PreconditioningA in progress. ited space in the status bar, not all symbols will be displayed at all times. Audio source being played.

Symbol Meaning Audio source paused. Roaming activated. Phone call in progress. Cell phone network signal strength. Audio source muted. Bluetooth device connected. News broadcasts from current radio B Bluetooth activated but no device station . connected. Traffic information being receivedB. Connected to a Wi-Fi network. Clock. Tethering activated. (Wi-Fi hotspot). A Hybrid models only. B Not available in all markets. Vehicle modem activated. Related information Connected to the Internet via USB. • Navigating in the center display's views (p. 40) Type of cell phone connection (2G, • Indicator symbols in the instrument panel 3G, etc.). (p. 123)

45 INTRODUCTION

Changing settings in different types of apps App view, which is one of the center display's basic views, contains all of the vehicle's apps (applications/programs). Access this view by swiping the screen from right to left. Basic apps A number of apps are standard and are part of Volvo Sensus, such as FM Radio, USB and CD. To change settings in a basic app: 1. Open the app, for example Phone, either on the home screen or full-screen from App view. 2. Pull down Top view. 3. Tap Phone settings. 4. Change the desired settings and confirm. 5. Press the Home button, tap the screen outside of Top view or pull Top view up. Third-party apps Third party apps have to be selected and downloaded. In these apps, setting are made from within the app, not from Top view.

46 INTRODUCTION

Using the center display The screen reacts differently depending on CAUTION Many of the vehicle's functions can be con- whether the user taps, drags or swipes on the Do not touch the screen with sharp objects trolled and settings can be made from the screen. This makes it possible to move between because this could cause scratches. screen in the center console, referred to in this views, mark objects, scroll in lists and move apps owner's information as the center display, which by touching the screen in various ways. The fol- is a touchscreen. lowing table lists the gestures that can be used on the screen: Using the center display's touchscreen An infrared film on the screen enables it to react functionality if a finger is directly in front of the screen (but Two people can interact with the screen at the not actually touching it). This makes it possible to same time, e.g., to adjust the temperature for the use the screen while wearing gloves. driver and passenger sides.

Procedure Gesture Result Tap once. Marks an object, confirms a selection or activates a function. Double-tap. Zooms in on an object such as a map. Press and hold. "Grabs" an object so that it can be dragged. Press and hold on the screen and drag the object to the desired position.

Tap with two fingers. Zooms out from an object such as a map.

}}

47 INTRODUCTION

|| Procedure Gesture Result Drag Moves between screen views, scrolls in a list, text or a view. Press and hold to drag apps or objects in a list.

Swipe Moves between screen views, scrolls in a list, text or a view

Stretch Zooms in.

Pinch Zooms out.

48 INTRODUCTION

Returning to Home view ble). Swipe the screen to scroll up or down in the Using center display controls 1. Press the Home button briefly. view to display information that may be outside of > The most recent Home view mode will be the view. displayed. Scrolling in lists, articles or views 2. Press again briefly. A scroll indicator on the screen shows that it is > All of the Home view's sub-views will possible to scroll up or down in the view. Press return to standard mode. the indicator and move it up or down or swipe up or down anywhere in the view. NOTE From Home view's standard mode, press the Home button to start animated on-screen instructions describing how to display the var- 4 ious views. Temperature control Digital controls are available for many of the vehi- Moving apps and vehicle function buttons cle's functions. For example, to set the tempera- Apps and function buttons can be moved and ture: organized in their respective views. • Drag the control to the desired temperature 1. Press and hold an app/button. • Tap +/− to raise or lower the temperature > The app/button will change size and incrementally, or become transparent. It can then be The scroll indicator on the right side of the center dis- Tap the desired temperature on the control play • moved. Related information 2. Drag the app/button to an available position • Navigating in the center display's views in the view. (p. 40) A maximum of 48 lines can be utilized for placing • Settings view (p. 108) apps/buttons. To move an app/button outside of • Sensus (p. 20) the visible view, drag it to the bottom of the view. A new line will then be added where the app/ button can be placed (this line may not be visi-

4 Generic illustration. The temperature in your vehicle may be set to degrees Fahrenheit. }}

49 INTRODUCTION

|| • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps (p. 424) • Using the center display keyboard (p. 33)

50 INTRODUCTION

Using the owner's manual Options and accessories Risk of injury Reading your owner's manual is a good way of Optional or accessory equipment described in familiarizing yourself with the features and sys- this manual is indicated by an asterisk. tems in your vehicle. Optional or accessory equipment may not be available in all countries or markets. Please note On-board owner's manual that some vehicles may be equipped differently, Reading the owner's manual is a good way to depending on special legal requirements. become familiar with your vehicle and to learn to Contact your Volvo retailer for additional informa- utilize the features and functions that it offers. tion. Pay particular attention to the warnings provided. Footnotes Volvo reserves the right to make model changes at any time, or to change specifications or design Certain pages of this manual contain information without notice and without incurring obligation. in the form of footnotes at the bottom of the page. This information supplements the text that Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back- © Volvo Car Corporation the footnote number refers to (a letter is used if ground, white text/image on a black background. the footnote refers to text in a table). Decals of this type are used to indicate potential Printed owner's information danger. Ignoring a warning of this type could We advise keeping printed owner's information in Messages result in serious injury or death. the vehicle for quick access to necessary infor- There are several displays in the vehicle that mation and how to contact Volvo if help is show messages generated by various systems required. and functions in the vehicle. The appearance of these texts differs slightly from normal texts (for Illustrations example: Phone, Accept). Some of the illustrations used in your owner's information may be generic and will give a gen- Decals eral view of a certain feature or function. For There are various types of decals in the vehicle example, some illustrations describing climate whose purpose is to provide important informa- system functions may display a temperature in tion in a clear and concise way. The importance degrees Celsius but the same information applies of these decals is explained as follows, in to Fahrenheit. descending order of importance.

}}

51 INTRODUCTION

|| Risk of damage to the vehicle White ISO symbols and white text/image on a Arrows containing letters are used to indi- black background. These decals provide general cate movement. information. If there are no illustrations associated with a step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure are NOTE indicated by ordinary numbers. The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual are Position lists examples only and are not intended to be Red circles containing a number are used in reproductions of the decals actually used in general overview illustrations in which certain the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indica- components are pointed out. The corres- tion of how they look and their approximate ponding number is also used in the position location in the vehicle. The applicable infor- list's description of the various components. mation for your particular vehicle can be Bullet lists found on the respective decals in the vehicle. Bullets are used to differentiate a number of White ISO symbols and white text/image on a components/functions/points of information that black or blue warning background and space for Types of lists can be listed in random order. a message. If the information on decals of this Procedures type is ignored, damage to the vehicle could For example: Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or actions result. Coolant that must be carried out in a certain order, are • Information arranged in numbered lists in this manual. • Engine oil If there is a series of illustrations associated Illustrations with step-by-step instructions, each step in Some of the illustrations and images shown in the procedure is numbered in the same way the owner's manual are generic and may differ as the corresponding illustration. slightly from the equipment in your vehicle Lists in which letters are used can be found depending the level of instrumentation or market. with series of illustrations in cases where the Related information order in which the instructions are carried out Related information offers references to articles is not important. containing information associated with the infor- Arrows with or without numbers are used to mation that you are currently reading. indicate the direction of a movement.

52 INTRODUCTION

Continues on next page On-board digital owner's manual • Start: the on-board information's start page, } }This symbol can be found at the lower right When printed owner's information refers to digi- showing an introductory text. corner to indicate that the current topic continues tal owner's information, this is the on-board infor- • Categories: all articles sorted by category. on the following page. mation available in the vehicle's center display. An article may be listed in several categories. Continuation from previous page • Quick Guide: A selection of useful articles. || This symbol can be found at the upper left • Exterior: Exterior views of the vehicle in corner to indicate that the current topic is a con- which certain areas/components are high- tinuation from the previous page. lighted as hotspots. Tap a hotspot to come to a relevant article. Related information • Interior: Interior views of the vehicle in which • On-board digital owner's manual (p. 53) certain areas/components are highlighted as • Owner's manual in mobile devices (p. 23) hotspots. Tap a hotspot to come to a relevant article. • Additional information about your vehicle (p. 12) • Favorites: Quick access to articles that have been tagged as favorites.

NOTE The on-board owner's information cannot be accessed while the vehicle is moving.

Related information • Navigating in the digital owner's manual (p. 54)

The digital on-board owner's manual is accessed from the center display's Top view There are a number of ways to find information in the digital owner's manual, which can be accessed from the manual's top menu by tapping .

53 INTRODUCTION

Navigating in the digital owner's To open the digital owner's information, pull down 1. Tap followed by Exterior/Interior. Owner's manual the center display's Top view and tap > Exterior/interior views will be displayed manual The digital on-board owner's manual is . with hotspots, which lead to relevant arti- accessed from the center display. The contents There are several ways of finding information. cles. Swipe the screen horizontally to are searchable and it is easy to navigate among scroll among the views. the varios sections. To access the owner's manual's menu, tap in the upper bar. 2. Tap a hotspot. > The title of a relevant article will be dis- Searching using categories played. The articles in the owner's manual are structured in main and sub-categories. The same article may 3. Tap the title to open the article. Tap the left appear in several pertinent categories in order to arrow to go back or to begin a new make them easier to find. search. 1. Tap followed by Categories. Quick Guide. > The main categories will be listed. The heading Quick Guide in the owner's manual's menu leads to a selection of articles that 2. Tap a main category ( ). may be helpful in familiarizing you with your vehi- > A list of sub-categories and ( ) and article's most common features and functions. These articles can also be found through catego- cles ( ) will be displayed. ries but have been gathered here for quick 3. Tap an article to open it. Tap the left arrow to access. Tap an article to read it in its entirety. go back or to begin a new search. Favorites Interior and exterior hotspots This is a list of articles that have been saved as Exterior and interior views of the vehicle where favorites. The most recently saved one will be at certain components are pointed out are called the top of the list. Tap an article to read it in its hotspots. entirety.

The digital on-board owner's manual is accessed from the center display's Top view

54 INTRODUCTION

Saving/deleting favorites Glass Technician certification Save an article as a favorite by tapping the star In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo sup- ( ) at the upper right when an article is open. Laminated glass ports certification by the National Institute for The windshield and panoramic roof* are made of The star symbol will be filled in ( ) when its arti- Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). laminated glass, which is reinforced to help pre- cle has been saved as a favorite. vent break-ins and to provide additional sound- Certified technicians have demonstrated a high To delete a favorite, tap its star again. proofing. Laminated glass is optional for the degree of competence in specific areas. Besides other side windows. passing exams, each technician must also have Using the search function worked in the field for two or more years before a 1. Tap the magnifying glass icon ( ) in the certificate is issued. These professional techni- owner's manual's upper menu. A keyboard cians are best able to analyze vehicle problems will appear at the bottom of the screen. and perform the necessary maintenance proce- Laminated glass symbol5 dures to keep your Volvo at peak operating con- 2. Enter a word, e.g., "seat belt." dition. > Suggested articles will be displayed as Related information more characters are entered. • Laminated panoramic roof* (p. 103) XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid Technicians performing work on a vehicle with 3. Confirm by tapping the article. To leave Power windows (p. 106) • electrification should also have the necessary search mode tap the up-arrow next to the • Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 191) training and specialized certification required for search box. • Using sun shades (p. 108) performing repairs and/or maintenance on a Related information • Rearview mirror (p. 107) vehicle with electrification. • On-board digital owner's manual (p. 53) • Power windows (p. 106) WARNING • Using the center display keyboard (p. 33) • Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 114) A number of electrical components in the • Activating/deactivating the rain sensor XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid use (p. 154) high-voltage current and can be extremely • Windshield and headlight washers (p. 155) dangerous if handled incorrectly. These components and any orange wiring in the vehicle Tailgate window wiper and washer (p. 156) • may only be handled by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians.

5 This symbol is not shown on the windshield or panoramic roof.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 55

SAFETY SAFETY

General safety information If the dedicated warning symbol is not Occupant safety The vehicle is equipped with a number of safety functioning, the general warning sym- Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. systems for the driver and passengers. bol will illuminate instead and the same message will be displayed in the instru- Volvo's concern for safety In the event of an accident, there are a number of ment panel. Our concern for safety dates back to 1927 when sensors in the vehicle that react and trigger the first Volvo rolled off the production line. safety systems such as Roll Stability Control, air- Related information Three-point seat belts (a Volvo invention), safety bags, seat belt pretensioners, etc., depending on • Safety during pregnancy (p. 60) cages, and energy-absorbing impact zones were the severity of the collision. There are also • Seat belts (p. 62) designed into Volvo vehicles long before it was mechanical systems such as the Whiplash • Airbag system (p. 87) fashionable or required by government regulation. Protection System. • Safety mode (p. 85) We will not compromise our commitment to Warning symbol in the instrument panel • Whiplash protection system (p. 61) safety. We continue to seek out new safety features and to refine those already in our vehicles. The warning symbol in the instrument • Child safety (p. 66) panel illuminates when the ignition is in You can help. We would appreciate hearing your mode II or higher. It will go out after suggestions about improving automobile safety. approx. 6 seconds if no faults are We also want to know if you ever have a safety detected in the airbag system. concern with your vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at: WARNING 1-800-663-8255. • If the SRS warning light stays on after the engine has started or if it illuminates while you are driving, have the vehicle inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. • Never try to repair any component or part of the SRS yourself. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction and serious injury. All work on these systems should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

58 SAFETY

Occupant safety reminders Reporting safety defects You can also obtain other information How safely you drive doesn't depend on how old The following information will help you report any about motor vehicle safety from http:// you are but rather on: perceived safety-related defects in your vehicle. www.safercar.gov, where you can also • How well you see. Reporting safety defects in the U.S. enter your vehicle's VIN (Vehicle Identi- • Your ability to concentrate. If you believe that your vehicle has a fication Number) to see if it has any • How quickly you make decisions under defect which could cause a crash or open recalls. stress to avoid an accident. could cause injury or death, you should Volvo strongly recommends that if your The following suggestions are intended to help immediately inform the National High- you cope with the ever changing traffic environ- vehicle is covered under a service cam- ment. way Traffic Safety Administration paign, safety or emission recall or simi- (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Volvo • Never drink and drive. lar action, it should be completed as Cars of North America, LLC. If NHTSA • If you are taking any medication, consult your soon as possible. Please check with physician about its potential effects on your receives similar complaints, it may open your local retailer or Volvo Cars of driving abilities. an investigation, and if it finds that a North America, LLC if your vehicle is • Take a driver-retraining course. safety defect exists in a group of vehi- covered under these conditions. cles, it may order a recall and remedy • Have your eyes checked regularly. NHTSA can be reached at: • Keep your windshield and headlights clean. campaign. However, NHTSA cannot • Replace wiper blades when they start to become involved in individual problems Internet: leave streaks. between you, your retailer, or Volvo http://www.nhtsa.gov • Take into account the traffic, road, and Cars of North America, LLC. To contact weather conditions, particularly with regard to NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Telephone: stopping distance. Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT • Never send text messages while driving. 1-888-327-4236 (1-888-327-4236). • Refrain from using or minimize the use of a cell phone while driving. (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to: Reporting safety defects in Canada NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transpor- If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could Related information cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you • Recall information (p. 60) tation, Washington D.C. 20590. should immediately inform Transport Canada in • Reporting safety defects (p. 59) addition to notifying Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. }}

59 SAFETY

|| Transport Canada can be contacted at: Recall information Safety during pregnancy 1-800-333-0510 The seat belt should always be worn during On our website, select the tab YOUR VOLVO and Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500 pregnancy. However, it is crucial that it be worn the heading RECALL INFORMATION will be dis- correctly. Fax: 1-819-994-3372 played at the lower left side of the screen. Enter your Vehicle Identification Number for your vehi- Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road cle (found at the base of the windshield). If your Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z 0A1 vehicle has any open Recalls, they will be dis- Related information played on this page. • Recall information (p. 60) Volvo customers in Canada • Occupant safety (p. 58) For any questions regarding open recalls for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Volvo retailer. If your retailer is unable to answer your questions, please contact Volvo Customer Rela- tions at 905 695-9626, Monday through Friday, 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. EST or by e-mail at [email protected]. You may also write us at: Volvo Cars of Canada The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to National Customer Service the side of the belly. The lap section should lay 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the belly. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 Remove all slack from the belt and ensure that it www.tc.gc.ca fits close to the body without any twists. Related information As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers • Occupant safety (p. 58) should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehi- • Reporting safety defects (p. 59) cle as they drive (which means they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). Within this context, they should strive to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between their belly and the steering wheel.

60 SAFETY

Related information Whiplash protection system WARNING • Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 63) The Whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con- Occupants in the front seats must never sists of specially designed hinges and brackets • • Adjusting power front seats* (p. 160) sit out of position. The occupant's back on the front seat backrests designed to help • Manually operated front seats (p. 159) must be as upright as comfort allows and absorb some of the energy generated in a colli- • Operating multifunctional front seats* be against the seat back with the seat sion from the rear (when the vehicle is rear- belt properly fastened. (p. 163) ended). • If your vehicle has been involved in a rear- Function end collision, the front seat backrests In the event of certain rear-end collisions, the must be inspected by a trained and quali- hinges and brackets of the front seat backrests fied Volvo service technician, even if the are designed to change position slightly to allow seats appear to be undamaged. Certain the backrest/head restraint to help support the components in the WHIPS system may need to be replaced. occupant's head before moving slightly rearward. This movement helps absorb some of the forces • Do not attempt to service any component that could result in whiplash. in the WHIPS system yourself.

WARNING WARNING • The WHIPS system is designed to sup- • Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind the plement the other safety systems in your front seats could impede the function of vehicle. For this system to function prop- the WHIPS system. erly, the three-point seat belt must be If the rear seat backrests are folded worn. Please be aware that no system • down, cargo must be secured to prevent can prevent all possible injuries that may it from sliding forward against the front occur in an accident. seat backrests in the event of a collision • The WHIPS system is designed to func- from the rear. This could interfere with tion in certain collisions from the rear, the action of the WHIPS system. depending on the crash severity, angle and speed.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61 SAFETY

|| Seat belts WARNING Seat belts should always be worn by all occu- Never repair the belt yourself; have this pants of your vehicle. Children should be prop- • work done by a trained and qualified erly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster Volvo service technician only. seat determined by age, weight and height. • Any device used to induce slack into the Most states and provinces make it mandatory for shoulder belt portion of the three-point occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts. belt system will have a detrimental effect on the amount of protection available to Reversible seat belt pretensioners you in the event of a collision. Reversible seat belt pretensioners is a system in • The seat back should not be tilted too far the front seats that pulls the seat belts slightly back. The shoulder belt must be taut in taut prior to a collision. This function helps posi- Do not place any objects behind the front seats that order to function properly. tion the front seat occupants to help improve the could impede the WHIPS function Do not use child safety seats or child effects of other safety systems, e.g., the airbag • booster cushions/backrests in the front system. WARNING passenger's seat. We also recommend that children who have outgrown these Any contact between the front seat backrests Seat belt maintenance devices sit in the rear seat with the seat and the folded rear seat or a rear-facing child Check periodically that the seat belts are in good belt properly fastened. seat could impede the function of the WHIPS condition. Use water and a mild detergent for system. If the rear seat is folded down, the cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism function as occupied front seats must be adjusted for- follows: attach the seat belt and pull rapidly on Related information ward so that they do not touch the folded rear Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 63) seat. the strap. • • Door and seat belt reminders (p. 65) Related information • Seat belt pretensioners (p. 63) • General safety information (p. 58) • Rear Collision Warning (RCW) (p. 284) • Manually operated front seats (p. 159) • Power front seats* (p. 160)

62 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. SAFETY

Seat belt pretensioners The electric pretensioner positions the occupant Buckling and unbuckling seat belts The vehicle's seat belts are equipped with stand- in the seat to help reduce the risk of striking the Seat belts should be used by all occupants in ard and electric pretensioners that can help pull interior of the passenger compartment and the vehicle when it is in motion. the seat belts taut in a critical situation or a colli- improves the effect of other safety systems such sion. Some or all of the pretensioners will be as the airbags. Buckling a seat belt triggered in certain types of collisions, depend- Resetting the electric pretensioners 1. Pull the belt out slowly. It should not be twisted or turned. ing on the direction and severity of the impact. When a critical situation has passed, the seat belt Reversible seat belt pretensioners and the electric pretensioner are reset automatically. NOTE Reversible seat belt pretensioners is a system in the front seats that pulls the seat belts slightly If the seat belt should remain taut: Each seat belt is equipped with a seat belt retractor that will lock up in the following sit- taut prior to a collision. This function helps posi- 1. Stop the vehicle safely. tion the front seat occupants to help improve the uations: effects of other safety systems, e.g., the airbag 2. Unbuckle the seat belt and rebuckle it. • if the belt is pulled out rapidly system. > The seat belt and the electric preten- • during braking and acceleration sioner will be reset. Seat belt pretensioners in collisions • if the vehicle is leaning excessively The seat belts are equipped with standard pre- Related information • when driving in turns tensioners that are triggered according to the • Seat belts (p. 62) • if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer- severity of a collision. • Door and seat belt reminders (p. 65) gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is Seat belt pretensioners in critical • Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 63) activated (each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with the situations ALR/ELR function, which is designed to In addition to the standard pretensioners, the help keep the seat belt taut. ALR/ELR seat belts in the front seats are also equipped activates if the seat belt is pulled out as far with electric pretensioners. as possible. If this is done, a sound from The pretensioners interact and can be triggered the seat belt retractor will be audible, along with the City Safety and Rear Collision which is normal, and the seat belt will be Warning systems. In critical situations such as pulled taut and locked in place. This func- sudden braking, evasive maneuvers, etc., the seat tion is automatically disabled when the seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted). belt can be pulled taut by the pretensioner's electric motor.

}}

63 SAFETY

|| 2. Insert the latch plate into the receptacle. The 3. The height of the seat belts in the front seats seat belt retractor is normally "unlocked" and and outboard rear seating positions can be you can move freely, provided that the shoul- adjusted. The height of the shoulder section der belt is not pulled out too far. of the seat belt must be correctly adjusted. > A distinct click will be audible.

WARNING The seat belt latch plate should only be inserted into its intended receptacle. Inserting it into one of the other receptacles may prevent it from functioning properly.

The seat belt should be positioned over the shoulder (not over the arm)

Press the button and move the upper seat belt anchor up or down. Position it as high as possible so that the shoulder section of the belt is across the seat occupant's collarbone and not across the throat.

64 SAFETY

4. Tighten the lap section of the seat belt by Unbuckling the seat belt Door and seat belt reminders pulling the diagonal section upward toward To remove the seat belt, press the red section on The door and seat belt reminders are intended the shoulder. the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the vehi- to alert all occupants of the vehicle that their cle, check that the seat belt retracts fully after seat belts should be buckled before the vehicle being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the belt begins to move or if a door, the hood, tailgate or back into the retractor slot. fuel filler door have not been closed properly. Related information Graphics in the instrument panel • Door and seat belt reminders (p. 65) • Seat belts (p. 62)

The lap section of the belt must be positioned low on the hips (not pressing against the abdomen)

Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled up into its retractor and that the shoulder and lap belts are taut. Warning colors for doors/tailgate vary depending on the vehicle's speed WARNING The instrument panel graphic shows the seats where seat belts are not buckled. Never use a seat belt for more than one occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion of The same graphic also indicates if a door, the the belt under the arm, behind the back or hood, tailgate or fuel filler door is/are open. otherwise out of position. Such use could cause injury in the event of an accident. As This graphic disappears automatically after seat belts lose much of their strength when approx. 30 seconds or if the if the O button on exposed to violent stretching, they should be the steering wheel keypad is pressed. replaced after any collision, even if they appear to be undamaged.

}}

65 SAFETY

|| Seat belt reminder Rear seats Child safety The rear seat belt reminder has two functions. Children should always be seated safely when • It indicates which seat belts are buckled in traveling in the vehicle. the rear seats. This will also be displayed in General information an instrument panel graphic. Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint • It also provides audio and visual reminders if systems for all occupants including children. a rear seat belt is unbuckled while the vehi- Remember that, regardless of age and size, a cle is in motion. The reminders will disappear child should always be properly restrained in a when the seat belt has been buckled again vehicle. or can be erased by pressing the O button on the steering wheel keypad. Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/ LATCH attachments, which make it more conven- Door/hood/tailgate/fuel filler door ient to install child seats. Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console reminder Some restraint systems for children are designed If a door, the hood, tailgate or fuel filler door The seat belt reminder consists of an to be secured in the vehicle by lap belts or the is/are not properly closed, this will be indicated in audible signal, an indicator light near lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. Such child a graphic in the instrument panel. Stop the vehi- the rearview mirror and a symbol in the restraint systems can help protect children in cle safely and close the source of the reminder. instrument panel that alert all occu- vehicles in the event of an accident only if they pants of the vehicle to buckle their seat belts. If the vehicle is moving at a speed are used properly. However, children could be The audible signal is speed-dependent and will under approx.6 mph (10 km/h), the endangered in a crash if the child restraints are sound for several seconds. information symbol will illuminate in the not properly secured in the vehicle. Failure to fol- instrument panel. low the installation instructions for your child If the driver's or a passenger's seat belt is not At speeds above approx. 6 mph restraint can result in your child striking the vehi- buckled, this will be indicated in the instrument cle's interior in a sudden stop. panel. (10 km/h), the warning symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel. Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable Child seats are not included in the seat belt substitute for a child restraint system. In an acci- reminder system. Related information dent, a child held in a person's arms can be Front seats • Seat belts (p. 62) crushed between the vehicle's interior and an unrestrained person. The child could also be An audible signal and an indicator light will • Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 63) remind the driver and front seat passenger to injured by striking the interior, or by being ejected buckle their seat belts. from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or

66 SAFETY impact. The same can also happen if the infant or When a child has outgrown the child safety seat, child rides unrestrained on the seat. Other occu- you should use the rear seat with the standard pants should also be properly restrained to help seat belt fastened. The best way to help protect reduce the chance of injuring or increasing the the child here is to place the child on a cushion injury of a child. so that the seat belt is properly located on the hips. Legislation in your state or province may All states and provinces have legislation govern- mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in ing how and where children should be carried in combination with the seat belt, depending on the a vehicle. Find out the regulations existing in your child's age and/or size. Please check local regu- state or province. Recent accident statistics have lations. shown that children are safer in rear seating positions than front seating positions when prop- A specially designed and tested booster cushion erly restrained. A child restraint system can help and backrest can be obtained from your Volvo protect a child in a vehicle. Here's what to look retailer. for when selecting a child restraint system: USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs. (15 – WARNING It should have a label certifying that it meets 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm) in • Do not use child safety seats or child applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand- height booster cushions/backrests in the front ards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada, CMVSS 213. passenger's seat. We also recommend Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs. (18 – that children under 4 feet 7 inches Make sure the child restraint system is approved 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – 137 cm) in (140 cm) in height who have outgrown for the child's height, weight and development – height these devices sit in the rear seat with the the label required by the standard or regulation, seat belt fastened. or instructions for infant restraints, typically provide this information. • On hot days, the temperature in the vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure In using any child restraint system, we urge you to these high temperatures for even a to carefully look over the instructions that are short period of time can cause heat-rela- provided with the restraint. Be sure you under- ted injury or death. Small children are par- stand them and can use the device properly and ticularly at risk. safely in this vehicle. A misused child restraint system can result in increased injuries for both Child seats should always be registered. the infant or child and other occupants in the vehicle.

}}

67 SAFETY

|| Volvo's recommendations Related information Child restraints Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit in • Integrated booster cushion* (p. 79) Suitable child restraints should always be used the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really. A • Booster cushions (p. 75) when children travel in the vehicle. front airbag is a very powerful device designed, Convertible seats (p. 72) by law, to help protect an adult. • Child restraint systems • Infant seats (p. 70) Because of the size of the airbag and its speed of inflation, a child should never be placed in the • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 76) front seat, even if he or she is properly belted or • Top tether anchors (p. 78) strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo has been an innovator in safety for over seventy-five years, and we'll continue to do our part. But we need your help. Please remember to put your children in the back seat, and buckle them up. Volvo has some very specific recommendations • Always wear your seat belt. • Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety Infant seat device which, when used with a three-point There are three main types of child restraint sys- seat belt can help reduce serious injuries tems: infant seats, convertible seats and booster during certain types of accidents. Volvo rec- cushions. They are classified according to the ommends that you do not disconnect the air- child's age and size. bag system in your vehicle. The child restraint should be secured using a • Volvo strongly recommends that everyone in the vehicle be properly restrained. three-point seat belt, ISOFIX/LATCH anchors or top tether anchors. • Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any vehicle with a front passenger side airbag. • Drive safely!

68 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. SAFETY

WARNING • When not in use, keep the child restraint system secured or remove it from the passenger compartment to help prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or collision. • A small child's head represents a considerable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should Convertible seat Booster cushion ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible. WARNING WARNING A child seat should never be used in the front Always refer to the child restraint manufactur- Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency passenger seat of any vehicle with a front er's instructions for detailed information on Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) passenger airbag – not even if the "Passen- securing the restraint. ger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mir- To make child seat installation easier, each seat ror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an a locking mechanism to help keep the seat belt accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, taut. this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position.

}}

69 SAFETY

|| When attaching the seat belt to a child Child restraint recall information is readily availa- Infant seats seat: ble in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall infor- Suitable child restraints should always be used 1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat accord- mation in the U.S., call the U.S. Government's when children (depending on their age/size) are ing to the child seat manufacturer's instruc- Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393 or go to seated in the vehicle. tions. http://www-odi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/ recalls/register/childseat/index.cfm. In Canada, Securing an infant seat with a seat belt 2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible. visit Transport Canada's Child Safety website at 3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the buckle http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/ (lock) in the usual way. menu.htm. 4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around the child seat. A sound from the seat belt retractor will be audible at this time and is normal. The belt will now be locked in place. This function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is unlocked and the belt is fully retracted.

WARNING Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's seat Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's 1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the seat. We also recommend that children who vehicle. have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly fastened. 2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat according to the manufacturer's instructions. Child restraint registration and recalls Child restraints could be recalled for safety reasons. You must register your child restraint to be reached in a recall. To stay informed about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out and return the registration card that comes with new child restraints.

70 SAFETY

WARNING A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the "Passen- ger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position.

3. Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out WARNING as far as possible to activate the belt's auto- • An infant seat must be in the rear-facing matic locking function. position only. • The infant seat should not be positioned behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe installation.

Fasten the seat belt

Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible.

}}

71 SAFETY

|| NOTE WARNING Convertible seats Suitable child restraints should always be used The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child when children (depending on their age/size) are release when the seat belt is unbuckled and restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) seated in the vehicle. allowed to retract fully. in any direction along the seat belt path. Securing a convertible seat with a seat 5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling belt seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound from the seat belt and letting it retract completely. the seat belt retractor's automatic locking Related information function will be audible at this time and is • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 76) normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. • Top tether anchors (p. 78) • Convertible seats (p. 72) • Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 63) • Child safety (p. 66)

Do not place the convertible seat in the front passenger's seat Convertible seats can be used in either a forward or rearward-facing position, depending on the age and size of the child. Ensure that the seat is securely in place 6. Push and pull the infant seat along the seat belt path to ensure that it is held securely in place by the seat belt.

72 SAFETY

WARNING • A small child's head represents a considerable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible. • Convertible child seats should be installed in the rear seat only.

Route the seat belt through the convertible seat • A rear-facing convertible seat should not Fasten the seat belt be positioned behind the driver's seat 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch WARNING unless there is adequate space for safe installation. plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct Always use a convertible seat that is suitable click is audible. for the child's age and size. See the converti- 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out ble seat manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat according to the manufacturer's instructions. as far as possible to activate the belt's automatic locking function. 1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat of the vehicle.

}}

73 SAFETY

|| NOTE WARNING Related information • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 76) The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child Top tether anchors (p. 78) release when the seat belt is unbuckled and restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) • allowed to retract fully. in any direction along the seat belt path. • Booster cushions (p. 75) • Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 63) 5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, let The convertible seat can be removed by unbuck- • Child safety (p. 66) the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound ling the seat belt and letting it retract completely. from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place.

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

WARNING A child seat should never be used in the front Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the "Passen- 6. Push and pull the convertible seat along the ger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mir- seat belt path to ensure that it is held ror is illuminated. If the severity of an accident securely in place by the seat belt. were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position.

74 SAFETY

Booster cushions 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch Related information plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 76) Securing a booster cushion click is audible. • Top tether anchors (p. 78) • Child safety (p. 66) • Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 63) • Integrated booster cushion* (p. 79)

Position the child correctly on the booster cushion Positioning the seat belt Booster cushions are recommended for children 4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and who have outgrown convertible seats. fits snugly around the child. 1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat of the vehicle. WARNING 2. With the child properly seated on the booster • The hip section of the three-point seat cushion, attach the seat belt to or around the belt must fit snugly across the child's cushion according to the manufacturer's hips, not across the stomach. instructions. • The shoulder section of the three-point seat belt should be positioned across the chest and shoulder. • The shoulder belt must never be placed behind the child's back or under the arm.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75 SAFETY

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped the seat cushion and locate the anchors by child seats are located in the rear, outboard feel. seats, hidden below the backrest cushions. 3. Fasten the attachment on the child restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/ Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child seat LATCH/LATCH lower anchors. anchors 4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps according to the manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING

Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/LATCH FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to lower anchors the child restraint system's manual for weight and size ratings. WARNING • Be sure to fasten the attachment cor- NOTE rectly to the anchor (see the illustration). • The rear seat's center position is not If the attachment is not correctly fas- Location of the ISOFIX/LATCH anchors equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower tened, the child restraint may not be Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the anchors. When installing a child restraint properly secured in the event of a colli- ISOFIX/LATCH anchor positions as shown. To in this position, attach the restraint's top sion. access the anchors, kneel on the seat cushion tether strap (if it is so equipped) to the • The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint and locate the anchors by feel. Always follow your top tether anchorage point and secure anchors are only intended for use with child seat manufacturer's installation instructions, the restraint with the vehicle's center seat child seats positioned in the outboard and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and belt. seating positions. These anchors are not top tethers whenever possible. • Always follow your child seat manufactur- certified for use with any child restraint er's installation instructions, and use both that is positioned in the center seating To access the anchors ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and top position. When securing a child restraint 1. Put the child restraint in position. tethers whenever possible. in the center seating position, use only the vehicle's center seat belt.

76 SAFETY

1 Related information Lower child seat attachment points WARNING • Top tether anchors (p. 78) The vehicle is equipped with lower attachment A child seat should never be used in the front points for child seats in the second row of seats. passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the "Passen- The lower attachment points are intended for use ger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mir- with rear-facing child restraints. ror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, installation instructions when attaching a child this could lead to serious injury or death to a restraint to these attachment points. child seated in this position. Location Related information • Child restraints (p. 68) • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 76) • Occupant weight sensor (p. 82)

Attachment points in the second row of seats The attachment points in the second row of seats are in the rear section of the front seat's floor rails.

1 Not available in all markets

77 SAFETY

Top tether anchors – Firmly tension all straps. WARNING Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top Always refer to the recommendations tether anchorages in the rear seat. They are Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's • made by the child restraint manufacturer. located on the rear side of the backrests. instructions for information on securing the child seat. • Volvo recommends that the top tether Child restraint anchorages anchors be used when installing a for- NOTE ward-facing child restraint. On models equipped with the optional cargo • Never route a top tether strap over the top of the head restraint. The strap area cover, this cover should be removed should be routed beneath the head before a child seat is attached to the child restraint. restraint anchors. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses. The anchorages are not able to withstand excessive forces on them in the event of collision if Top tether anchors and symbols on the rear side of the full harness seat belts or adult seat belts second row backrests are installed to them. An adult who uses a belt anchored in a child restraint anchor- Securing a child seat age runs a great risk of suffering severe 1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat. injuries should a collision occur. 2. Route the top tether strap under the head • Do not install rear speakers that require restraint and attach it to the anchor. the removal of the top tether anchors or 3. Attach lower tether straps to the lower ISO- interfere with the proper use of the top FIX/LATCH anchors. If the child restraint is tether strap. not equipped with lower tether straps, or the restraint is used in the center seating posi- Related information tion, follow instructions for securing a child • Child safety (p. 66) restraint using the Automatic Locking Retractor seat belt.

78 SAFETY

Integrated booster cushion* WARNING Volvo's optional integrated booster cushion is located in the rear seat's center position and is DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can designed to raise the child higher so that the occur shoulder strap crosses over the child's collar- Follow all instructions on the booster bone, not over the neck. cushion and in the vehicle's owner's Integrated booster cushion2 manual. This booster cushion has been specially MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER designed to help safeguard children in the rear CUSHION IS SECURELY LOCKED seat. It should be stowed (folded down into the BEFORE THE CHILD IS SEATED. seat cushion) when not in use. When using an integrated booster cushion, the child must be Correct seating position: child's head is below the head • Use this booster cushion only with chil- secured with the vehicle's three-point seat belt. restraint and the shoulder belt is across the collarbone dren whose height and weight are within the permitted limits. Use this booster cushion only with a • In the event of a collision while the inte- child whose weight is between 33– grated booster cushion was occupied, the 80 lbs (15–36 kg) and whose height is entire booster cushion and seat belt must at least 37 in. (95 cm). be replaced. The booster cushion should also be replaced if it is badly worn or In Canada, Transport Canada's weight damaged in any way. This work should be recommendation is 40 – 80 lbs (18 – performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only. 36 kg). If using a booster cushion does not result in Before driving, check that: proper positioning of the shoulder strap, then the The integrated booster cushion has been child should be placed in a properly secured child • correctly raised and locked in position. restraint. The shoulder belt must never be placed behind the child's back or under the arm.

2 Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79 SAFETY

|| • That the seat belt is properly positioned and Raising the integrated booster is taut. cushion* • The shoulder section of the seat belt is The integrated booster cushion must be cor- across the child's collarbone, not over the rectly raised before use. neck. • The lap section of the seat belt is across the child's hips and not the abdomen. Related information • Seat belts (p. 62) • Child safety (p. 66) • Raising the integrated booster cushion* (p. 80) Press the booster cushion rearward to lock it • Stowing the integrated booster cushion* in position. (p. 81)

Pull the handle forward and upward to release the booster cushion.

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. SAFETY

WARNING Stowing the integrated booster cushion* DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can The integrated booster cushion should be occur stowed (folded down) when not in use. Follow all instructions on the booster cushion and in the vehicle's owner's manual. MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER CUSHION IS SECURELY LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS SEATED. • Use this booster cushion only with children whose height and weight are within Press down on the center of the booster the permitted limits. cushion to return it to the stowed position. • In the event of a collision while the integrated booster cushion was occupied, the NOTE entire booster cushion and seat belt must The booster cushion must be in the stowed be replaced. The booster cushion should Pull the handle forward to release the position before the rear seat backrests are also be replaced if it is badly worn or booster cushion. damaged in any way. This work should be folded down. performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only. CAUTION Be sure there are no loose objects under the Related information booster cushion before it is stowed. • Integrated booster cushion* (p. 79) • Stowing the integrated booster cushion* (p. 81)

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81 SAFETY

|| WARNING Occupant weight sensor seated occupant and determine if the passeng- The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is er's side front airbag should be enabled (may DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can designed to meet the regulatory requirements of inflate) or disabled (will not inflate). occur Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas- Follow all instructions on the booster 208 and is designed to disable (will not inflate) senger's side front airbag when: cushion and in the vehicle's owner's the passenger's side front airbag under certain conditions. • the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, or manual. has small/medium objects in the front seat, MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER • the system determines that an infant is pres- CUSHION IS SECURELY LOCKED ent in a rear-facing infant seat that is instal- BEFORE THE CHILD IS SEATED. led according to the manufacturer's instructions, • Use this booster cushion only with chil- • the system determines that a small child is dren whose height and weight are within present in a forward-facing child restraint the permitted limits. that is installed according to the manufactur- • In the event of a collision while the inte- er's instructions, grated booster cushion was occupied, the • the system determines that a small child is entire booster cushion and seat belt must present in a booster seat, be replaced. The booster cushion should also be replaced if it is badly worn or • a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time, damaged in any way. This work should be Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light performed by a trained and qualified • a child or a small person occupies the front Volvo service technician only. Disabling the passenger's side front passenger's seat. airbag The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF Related information Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on to • Integrated booster cushion* (p. 79) and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches remind you that the passenger's side front airbag (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any vehi- Raising the integrated booster cushion* is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indi- • cle with a front passenger side airbag and be (p. 80) cator lamp is located in the overhead console, properly restrained for their size and weight. near the base of the rearview mirror. The OWS works with sensors that are part of the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. SAFETY

that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled unless the NOTE WARNING PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is any doubt as to the When the ignition is switched on, the OWS Never try to open, remove, or repair any status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child • restraint to the rear seat. indicator light will illuminate for several sec- components in the OWS system. This onds while the system performs a self-diag- could result in system malfunction. Main- The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) the nostic test. tenance or repairs should only be carried passenger's side front airbag in the event of a out by an a trained and qualified Volvo collision anytime the system senses that a per- service technician. However, if a fault is detected in the system: son of adult size is sitting properly in the front • The front passenger's seat should not be passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIRBAG The OWS indicator light will stay on • modified in any way. This could reduce OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain off. • The SRS warning light will come on and stay pressure on the seat cushion, which on and a text message will be displayed. might interfere with the OWS system's If a person of adult size is sitting in the front pas- function. senger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible that the WARNING person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If this If a fault in the system is detected and indi- Passenger's OWS indi- Passenger's happens: cated as described, be aware that the pas- seat occu- cator light side front air- Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to senger's side front airbag will not deploy in pancy status status bag status • the event of a collision. In this case, the SRS place the seatback in an upright position. system and Occupant Weight Sensor should Seat unoccu- OWS indi- Passenger's • Have the person sit upright in the seat, cen- be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo pied cator light side front air- tered on the seat cushion, with the person's service technician as soon as possible. lights up. bag disabled legs comfortably extended. Seat occupied OWS indi- Passenger's • Restart the vehicle and have the person by low weight cator light side front air- remain in this position for about two minutes. occupant/ lights up bag disabled This will allow the system to detect that per- A son and enable the passenger's frontal air- object bag. Seat occupied OWS indi- Passenger's • If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator by heavy cator light is side front air- lamp remains on even after this, the person occupant/ not lit bag enabled should be advised to ride in the rear seat. object This condition reflects limitations of the OWS A Volvo recommends that children always be properly restrained classification capability. It does not indicate OWS in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do not assume malfunction. }}

83 SAFETY

|| Modifications WARNING WARNING If you are considering modifying your vehicle in any way to accommodate a disability, for example • No objects that add to the total weight on • Keep the following points in mind with by altering or adapting the driver's or front pas- the seat should be placed on the front respect to the OWS system. Failure to passenger's seat. If a child is seated in follow these instructions could adversely senger's seat(s) and/or airbag systems, please the front passenger's seat with any addi- affect the system's function and result in contact Volvo at: tional weight, this extra weight could serious injury to the occupant of the front In the USA cause the OWS system to enable the air- passenger's seat: bag, which might cause it to deploy in the Volvo Cars of North America, LLC • The full weight of the front seat passen- event of a collision, thereby injuring the ger should always be on the seat cushion. Customer Care Center child. The passenger should never lift him/ 1 Volvo Drive • The seat belt should never be wrapped herself off the seat cushion using the around an object on the front passeng- armrest in the door or the center console, P.O. Box 914 er's seat. This could interfere with the by pressing the feet on the floor, by sit- Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 OWS system's function. ting on the edge of the seat cushion, or by pressing against the backrest in a way 1-800-458-1552 • The front passenger's seat belt should never be used in a way that exerts more that reduces pressure on the seat cush- In Canada pressure on the passenger than normal. ion. This could cause OWS to disable the front, passenger's side airbag. Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. This could increase the pressure exerted on the weight sensor by a child, and National Customer Service could result in the airbag being enabled, WARNING 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 which might cause it to deploy in the event of a collision, thereby injuring the • Do not place any type of object on the Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 child. front passenger's seat in such a way that jamming, pressing, or squeezing occurs 1-800-663-8255 between the object and the front seat, other than as a direct result of the correct use of the Automatic Locking Retractor/ Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt. • No objects should be placed under the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function.

84 SAFETY

Related information Safety mode WARNING • Airbag system (p. 87) As a safety precaution after a collision, the func- Never attempt to repair the vehicle your- tionality of some of the vehicle's systems may be • self or to reset the electrical system after reduced. the vehicle has displayed Safety mode. If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, the This could result in injury or improper sys- text Safety mode may appear in the information tem function. display. • Restoring the vehicle to normal operating status should only be done by a trained NOTE and qualified Volvo service technician. After Safety mode has been displayed, if This text can only be shown if the display is • you detect the odor of fuel vapor, or see undamaged and the vehicle's electrical sys- any signs of fuel leakage, do not attempt tem is intact. to start the vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately. Safety mode is a feature that is triggered if one or more of the safety systems such as the front/ Related information side airbags inflatable curtain, etc., or one or • Starting or moving a vehicle in safety mode more of the seat belt pretensioners has deployed. (p. 86) The collision may have damaged an important General safety information (p. 58) function in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines, • sensors for one of the safety systems, the brake system, etc.

85 SAFETY

Starting or moving a vehicle in 4. When Vehicle start System check, wait is Related information safety mode no longer displayed, try to start the vehicle • Safety mode (p. 85) If Safety mode has been set, it may be possible again. • Towing recommendations (p. 352) to start and move the vehicle, for example, if it is blocking traffic. WARNING Starting the vehicle in safety mode If the message Safety mode See Owner's manual is still displayed, the vehicle should 1. Check the vehicle for damage, particularly for not be driven and must be towed (lifted onto a fuel leakage or the smell of gasoline fumes. flatbed tow truck. The vehicle may never be If the damage to the vehicle is minor and towed with the wheels on the ground). Con- cealed faults may make the vehicle difficult to there is no fuel leakage/fumes, you may control. attempt to start the engine and move the vehicle. Moving the vehicle after safety mode has WARNING been set If the message Normal mode The vehicle is If you smell gasoline fumes or detect fuel now in normal mode is displayed, the vehicle leakage while Safety mode See Owner's may be moved carefully from its present position manual is displayed in the instrument panel, do not attempt to start the vehicle. Leave if, for example, it is blocking traffic. the vehicle immediately. It should, however, not be moved farther than is absolutely necessary. 2. Turn the start knob to STOP and release it. 3. Try to start the vehicle. WARNING > Vehicle start System check, wait will After Safety mode has been set, the vehicle be displayed in the instrument panel while should not be driven or towed (pulled on the the vehicle's electrical system attempts to ground by another vehicle). It must be transported on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and reset to normal mode. This may take up to qualified Volvo service technician for inspec- a minute. tion/repairs.

86 SAFETY

Airbag system WARNING Driver/passenger side airbags As an enhancement to the three-point seat belts, The front airbags supplement the three-point If your vehicle has become flood-damaged in your vehicle is equipped with an airbag system. any way (e.g., soaked carpeting/standing seat belts. For these airbags to provide the pro- water on the floor of the vehicle), do not tection intended, seat belts must be worn at all WARNING attempt to start the vehicle. This may cause times. airbag deployment which could result in seri- If the airbag warning light stays on after • ous injury. Have the vehicle towed to a trained the engine has started or if it illuminates and qualified Volvo service technician for while you are driving, have the vehicle repairs. inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. Before attempting to tow the vehicle: • Never try to repair any component or part 1. Switch off the ignition for at least of the airbag systems yourself. Any inter- 10 minutes and disconnect the battery. ference in the system could cause mal- 2. Follow the instructions for manually over- function and serious injury. All work on riding the shiftlock system. these systems should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service techni- Deployed airbags cian.

WARNING Driver's and passenger's side airbags If any of the airbags have deployed: The front airbag system • Do not attempt to drive the vehicle. Have The front airbag system includes gas generators it towed to a qualified repair facility. surrounded by the airbags, and deceleration sensors that activate the gas generators, causing the If necessary seek medical attentIon. • airbags to be inflated with nitrogen gas. As the movement of the seats' occupants com- presses the airbags, some of the gas is expelled at a controlled rate to provide better cushioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a second.

}}

87 SAFETY

|| The location of the front airbags is indicated by WARNING certain non-frontal collisions where rapid SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel deceleration occurs. The airbags in the vehicle are designed to pad and above the glove compartment, and by • The airbag system sensors, which trigger the be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replace- • decals on both sun visors and on the front and front airbags, are designed to react to both ment for–the three-point seat belts. For far right side of the dash. the impact of the collision and the inertial maximum protection, wear seat belts at all forces generated by it, and to determine if The driver's side front airbag is folded and times. Be aware that no system can pre- the intensity of the collision is sufficient for located in the steering wheel hub. vent all possible injuries that may occur in the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags to an accident. The knee airbag is folded on the underside of be deployed. Never drive with your hands on the steer- the dashboard on the driver's side. The text • However, not all frontal collisions activate the ing wheel pad/airbag housing. AIRBAG is embossed on the panel. front airbags. • The front airbags are designed to help The passenger's side front airbag is folded • If the collision involves a nonrigid object (e.g., behind a panel located above the glove compart- prevent serious injury. Deployment occurs very quickly and with considerable force. a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed object ment. During normal deployment and depend- at a low speed, the front airbags will not nec- ing on variables such as seating position, essarily deploy. one may experience abrasions, bruises, • Front airbags do not normally deploy in a swellings, or other injuries as a result side impact collision, in a collision from the from deployment of one or both of the rear or in a rollover situation. airbags. • The amount of damage to the bodywork • When installing any accessory equipment, does not reliably indicate if the airbags make sure that the front airbag system is should have deployed or not. not damaged. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction.

Front airbag deployment • The front airbags are designed to deploy during certain frontal or front-angular collisions, impacts, or decelerations, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and object impacted. The airbags may also deploy in

88 SAFETY

NOTE WARNING www.volvocars.com/us • Deployment of front airbags occurs only • Do not use child safety seats or child In Canada one time during an accident. In a collision booster cushions/backrests in the front Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. where deployment occurs, the airbags passenger's seat. We also recommend and seat belt pretensioners activate. that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches National Customer Service Some noise occurs and a small amount (140 cm) in height who have outgrown 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 of powder is released. The release of the these devices sit in the rear seat with the powder may appear as smoke-like matter. seat belt fastened. See also the Occu- Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 This is a normal characteristic and does pant Weight Sensor information,. 1-800-663-8255 not indicate fire. • Never drive with the airbags deployed. www.volvocars.com/ca • Volvo's front airbags use special sensors The fact that they hang out can impair the that are integrated with the front seat steering of your vehicle. Other safety sys- Airbag decals buckles. The point at which the airbag tems can also be damaged. deploys is determined by whether or not • The smoke and dust formed when the the seat belt is being used, as well as the airbags are deployed can cause skin and severity of the collision. eye irritation in the event of prolonged • Collisions can occur where only one of exposure. the airbags deploys. If the impact is less severe, but severe enough to present a Should you have questions about any component clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered in the SRS system, please contact a trained and at partial capacity. If the impact is more qualified Volvo service technician or Volvo cus- severe, the airbags are triggered at full tomer support: capacity. In the USA

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 1-800-458-1552 }}

89 SAFETY

|| WARNING Inflatable curtains The inflatable curtain is designed to help protect No objects or accessory equipment, e.g. • the heads of the occupants of the front seats dashboard covers, may be placed on, and the occupant of the outboard rear seating attached to, or installed near the air bag hatch (the area above the glove compart- positions in certain side impact collisions. ment) or the area affected by airbag deployment. • There should be no loose articles, such as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or dashboard area. • Never try to open the airbag cover on the Passenger's side airbag decal steering wheel or the passenger's side dashboard. This should only be done by a WARNING trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Children must never be allowed in the • Failure to follow these instructions can front passenger's seat. result in injury to the vehicle occupants. • Occupants in the front passenger's seat This system consists of inflatable curtains located must never sit on the edge of the seat, sit Related information leaning toward the instrument panel or along the sides of the roof liners, stretching from Seat belts (p. 62) otherwise sit out of position. • the center of both front side windows to the rear Occupant weight sensor (p. 82) edge of the rear side door windows. • The occupant's back must be as upright • as comfort allows and be against the seat In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Cur- back with the seat belt properly fastened. tain (IC) and the side Impact Airbag System • Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on the (SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC and the SIPS dash, seat or out of the window. airbag deploy simultaneously.

90 SAFETY

WARNING Side impact airbags Components in the SIPS airbag system As an enhancement to the structural side impact This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas gener- Never try to open or repair any compo- • protection built into your vehicle, it is also equip- ator, the side airbag modules built into the out- nents of the IC system. This should be ped with Side Impact Protection System (SIPS) board sides of both front seat backrests, and done only by a trained and qualified Volvo electronic sensors/wiring. service technician. airbags. • Never hang heavy items from the ceiling WARNING handles. This could impede deployment of the Inflatable Curtain. • The SIPS airbag system is a supplement • The cargo area and rear seat should not to the structural Side Impact Protection be loaded to a level higher than 4 in. System and the three-point seat belt sys- (10 cm) below the upper edge of the rear tem. It is not designed to deploy during side windows. Objects placed higher than collisions from the front or rear of the this level could impede the function of vehicle or in rollover situations. the Inflatable Curtain. • The use of seat covers on the front seats • In order for the IC to provide its best pro- may impede SIPS airbag deployment. tection, both front seat occupants and • No objects, accessory equipment or stick- both outboard rear seat occupants should ers may be placed on, attached to or sit in an upright position with the seat belt installed near the SIPS airbag system or properly fastened; adults using the seat The SIPS airbag system is designed to help in the area affected by SIPS airbag belt and children using the proper child increase occupant protection in the event of cer- deployment. tain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are restraint system. Only adults should sit in • Never try to open or repair any compo- the front seats. Children must never be designed to deploy only during certain side- nents of the SIPS airbag system. This allowed in the front passenger seat. impact collisions, depending on the crash should be done only by a trained and severity, angle, speed and point of impact. qualified Volvo service technician. Related information • In order for the SIPS airbag to provide its • Airbag system (p. 87) NOTE best protection, both front seat occupants • Side impact airbags (p. 91) SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. • Child safety (p. 66) only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact. The airbags are not designed to • Failure to follow these instructions can • Seat belts (p. 62) deploy in all side impact situations. result in injury to the occupants of the vehicle in the event of an accident.

}}

91 SAFETY

|| Related information • Airbag system (p. 87) • Seat belts (p. 62)

92 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Trip computer Current fuel consumption Distance using the electric motor The trip computer registers and calculates infor- This gauge shows the current fuel consumption. To get the optimal driving distance using the mation such as distance driven, fuel consump- This reading is updated once a second. electric motor, it is essential to conserve current. tion and average speed. This information is dis- Functions that use a great deal of current (e.g., Distance to empty played in the instrument panel. audio system, electrical heating in the steering This function shows the approximate distance wheel/door mirrors/rear window/seats, very cold To help promote fuel efficient driving, the trip that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the air from the climate system, etc.) reduce the pos- computer provides readings for current and aver- tank. sible driving distance. age fuel consumption. The calculation is based on average fuel consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) of NOTE The trip computer includes the following driving and the amount of fuel remaining in the gauges: In addition to high electrical consumption in tank. the passenger compartment, fast accelera- Trip odometers • When the gauge displays "----", there is very little tion, sudden braking, heavy loads, low ambient • Odometer useable fuel remaining in the tank; refuel as soon temperatures and driving up hills can reduce • Current fuel consumption as possible. the possible driving distance. • Distance to empty The accuracy of this figure may vary if your driv- • Tourist (alternative speedometer) ing style changes. An economical driving style will Tourist (alternative speedometer) generally increase this distance. This is an alternative digital speedometer can be Trip odometer used when driving in areas in which the speed There are two trip odometers: TM and TA. During Distance to discharged battery limit is listed in a different unit of measure. If the a drive, the trip odometer registers: This gauge shows the approximate distance that speedometer is in mph, this gauge will show the can be driven on the charge remaining in the Mileage vehicle's speed in km/h and vice versa. • hybrid battery. When the gauge displays "----" • Driving time there is no guaranteed driving charge remaining Related information • Average speed in the battery. • Displaying trip computer information (p. 95) • Average fuel consumption This calculation is based on the average electrical • Displaying trip statistics (p. 96) The values displayed are those since the last current consumption in a normally loaded vehicle time the trip odometer was reset. during normal driving, and whether the A/C is on or off. Odometer An economical driving style will generally The odometer registers the vehicle's total mile- increase this distance. age and cannot be reset.

94 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Displaying trip computer 3. Scroll to the selection buttons in the lines information below TA and select the trip odometer to be The trip computer registers and calculates infor- displayed. mation such as distance driven, fuel consump- • Current fuel consumption tion and average speed. This information is dis- • Distance to empty played in the instrument panel. • Odometer • Trip odometers TM, TA or none • Tourist (alternative speedometer). • Distance to discharged battery Select or deselect an alternative using the Use the right-side steering wheel keypad to navigate in center button (4). The change will be made the trip computer immediately. Open/close the app menu Resetting a trip odometer Left/right arrow keys

Up/down arrow keys

Confirm 1. Press (1) to open the app menu in the instrument panel. The app menu cannot be opened if there is an a message in the instrument panel that has not been confirmed. Press (4) to confirm. 2. The top four lines show readings from trip odometer TM. The following four lines show readings from trip odometer TA. Scroll up/ Reset trip odometer TM by pressing and holding RESET down in the list using (3). the button the left-side steering wheel lever. Trip odometer TA resets automatically if the ignition is switched off for more than 4 hours. }}

95 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Changing the unit of measure Displaying trip statistics Change the units of measure for driven distance Trip computer statistics can be displayed graphi- and fuel consumption in the center display's Top cally in the center display. view by selecting Settings System Units Driver performance and marking the desired unit. Open the app in the app menu to display trip statistics. NOTE Each bar in the graph repre- Changing these units of measure will also sents a driving distance of change the ones used in the Volvo navigation 1 mile, 10 miles or 100 miles1 system*. depending on the current scale; bars are added from the right and the bar at the far right shows Related information the value for the current trip. The illustration is generic; the layout may vary depending Displaying trip statistics (p. 96) on the model or due to software updates • Average fuel consumption is calculated from the • Trip computer (p. 94) most recent time at which the current trip odom- Changing the unit of measure eter was reset. Change the units of measure for driven distance and fuel consumption in the center display's Top Fuel and electrical current consumption are view. shown in separate graphs. The electrical current graph shows "net" consumption, i.e., consumed 1. Tap Settings in Top view. current minus regenerated current generated by 2. Tap System Units. braking. 3. Under Units, select: Metric, Imperial or US. Trip statistic settings Select Preferences to: Related information • change the graph's scale • Trip computer (p. 94) • Reset data after each trip (this occurs if the • Displaying trip computer information (p. 95) vehicle remains parked for more than 4 hours) • Reset data for the current trip

1 This can also be displayed in kilometers.

96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

HomeLink® Wireless Control tion can be found on the Internet at, for security purposes. See the article "Program- System* www.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/ ming HomeLink." HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1– HomeLink® can be used to open garage doors, 800–355–3515. Related information gates, etc. • Programming the HomeLink® Wireless Con- WARNING trol System* (p. 98) • If you use HomeLink® to open a garage door or gate, be sure no one is near the gate or door while it is in motion. • When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park outside of the garage. • Do not use HomeLink® with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured Button 1 before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the Button 2 door to stop and reverse - does not meet Button 3 current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact HomeLink at: Indicator light www.homelink.com.

The HomeLink®2 Wireless Control System pro- Retain the original transmitter of the RF device vides a convenient way to replace up to three you are programming for use in other vehicles as hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used well as for future HomeLink programming. It is to activate devices such as gate operators, also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, garage door openers, entry door locks, security the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased systems, even home lighting. Additional informa-

2 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Programming the HomeLink® 3. Press and hold the button on the original 4. Press the programmed HomeLink® button Wireless Control System* remote control that is to be programmed on and check the indicator light. HomeLink® and observe the HomeLink® Indicator light glows steadily green: pro- indicator light. Hold the button until the indi- NOTE gramming has been completed. The garage cator light has changed from flashing yellow door, gate, etc., should now be activated Some vehicles may require the ignition to be once a second to either flashing green 10 when the programmed button is pressed. switched on or be in the “accessories” posi- times a second or by glowing steadily green. tion for programming and/or operation of When the HomeLink® indicator light flashes Indicator light flashes 10 times a second: HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new or glows steadily green, the button on the press the HomeLink® button that is being battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter original remote control can be released. programmed. Hold it for 2 seconds and of the device being programmed to Home- Note: for certain remote controls, the release it. Repeat the “press/hold/release” Link for quicker training and accurate trans- instructions listed under "Gate operators/ sequence a second time, and, depending on mission of the radio-frequency signal. The Canadian programming" at the end of this the brand of the garage door opener, repeat HomeLink buttons must be reset first. When article should be used instead of step 3. this sequence a third time to complete the this has been completed, Homelink is in programming process. Programming should learning mode so that you can perform pro- now be completed and the garage door, gramming. gate, etc., should now be activated when the programmed button is pressed. To program HomeLink® If the garage door, etc. still does not react: 1. Press the HomeLink® button to be pro- continue with steps 6-8 to complete programming. grammed. The HomeLink® indicator will begin flashing yellow once a second. You do not need to continue holding the button. 2. Point the hand-held transmitter toward the HomeLink® button to be programmed and hold it approx. 6–12 inches (15–30 cm) away from the HomeLink® button. Do not obstruct the HomeLink® indicator light.

98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming indicator light will glow steadily or flash when the Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmit- button has been pressed. Activation will now ter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several occur for the trained device (i.e., garage door seconds of transmission – which may not be long opener, gate operator, security system, entry door enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal dur- lock, home/office lighting, etc.). ing programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time- NOTE out” in the same manner. If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink will If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties function for 30 minutes after the driver's door 5. Locate the "training" button on the garage programming a gate operator or garage door has been opened. door opener, etc. The designation and color opener by using the “Programming” procedures, replace “Programming HomeLink” step 3 of the button may vary, depending on the For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the with the following: manufacturer. It is usually located near the device may also be used at any time. antenna attachment on the device. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink • In the event that there are still programming diffi- button while you press and release - every 6. Press the device's "training" button. When culties or questions, contact HomeLink at: two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held trans- this has been done, step 8 must be comple- www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ ted within 30 seconds. mitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1– 7. Press and hold the HomeLink® button being light. Now you may release both the Home- 800–355–3515. Link and hand-held transmitter buttons. programmed for 2 seconds and release it. Resetting HomeLink® buttons Repeat the “press/hold/release” sequence a Proceed with “Programming” step 4 to complete. Use the following procedure to reset (erase pro- second time, and, depending on the brand of ® the garage door opener, repeat this Using HomeLink® gramming) from the three HomeLink buttons (individual buttons cannot be reset but can be sequence a third time to complete the pro- When programming has been completed, “reprogrammed” as outlined in the following sec- gramming process. Programming should now ® HomeLink can be used instead of the original tion): be completed and the garage door, gate, etc., remote controls. should now be activated when the pro- 1. Press and hold HomeLink® buttons 1 and 3 grammed button is pressed. To operate, press and hold the programmed ® for approx. 10 seconds until the indicator HomeLink button until the trained device begins light begins to flash green. to operate3 (this may take several seconds). The

3 Do not hold the button for more than 20 seconds as this will clear the programming of the button. }}

99 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| 2. Release both buttons. rules. Changes or modifications not expressly Instruments and controls > HomeLink® is now in the training (or approved by the party are prohibited. This overview shows the location of the primary learning) mode and can be programmed displays, and controls/buttons/switches. at any time beginning with “To program NOTE ® HomeLink " above. The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifica- Reprogramming a single HomeLink® tions not expressly approved by the party button responsible for compliance could void the ® To reprogram an individual HomeLink button: user’s authority to operate the device.4 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT release the button. Related information 2. The yellow indicator light will begin to flash • HomeLink® Wireless Control System* (p. 97) after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with “To program HomeLink®" step 1 above.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink Display/function/control at: www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1– Parking lights, daytime running lights, low 800–355–3515. beams, high beams, turn signals, rear fog lights, trip computer reset FCC (USA) and IC (Canada) This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Transmission manual shifting paddle* Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device Head-up-display* may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This Instrument panel device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause Wipers/washers, rain sensor* undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC

4 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Display/function/control Display/function/control Display/function/control Right-side steering wheel keypad Front reading lights and courtesy lighting Start knob

Steering wheel adjustment Laminated panoramic roof* Drive modes

Horn Ceiling console display Parking brake

Left-side steering wheel keypad Manual rearview mirror auto-dim (certain Auto-hold brakes markets only) Hood open

Display lighting, tailgate unlock, tailgate open*

Display/function/control Display/function/control Memory control for: Center display • power seats* Hazard warning flashers, max. defroster/ • door mirrors heated windshield*, media player, glove • head-up display* compartment open Door open, door/tailgate lock/unlock Gear selector

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Display/function/control Adjusting the power door mirrors Storing the position* The control on the driver's door is used to adjust The mirror positions are stored in the key mem- Power windows, power door mirrors the position of the door mirrors. ory* when the vehicle has been locked with the remote key. When the vehicle is unlocked with Controls for power front seat* the same remote key, the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions when the driver's door is opened. The mirrors' position can also be stored in the power seat's* memory.

Tilting the door mirrors when parking5 The door mirrors can be tilted down to help give the driver a better view along the sides of the vehicle, for example when parallel parking. – To activate this function, select reverse gear and press the L or R mirror control button to tilt the mirror down. Door mirror controls The door mirror will reset to its normal position: Adjusting after 10 seconds when reverse is disen- 1. Press the L button for the left door mirror or • gaged the R button for the right door mirror. The light in the button comes on. • immediately if you press the corresponding L or R button again. 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the center. NOTE 3. Press the L or R button again. The light Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time. should no longer be on.

WARNING Objects seen in the mirrors may appear further away than they actually are.

5 Only on models equipped with a power driver's seat.

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Automatically tilting the door mirrors 1. Tap Settings in Top view. Laminated panoramic roof* when parking5 2. Tap My Car Mirrors. The laminated panoramic roof is divided into two This function can be activated/deactivated in the sections and only the front section can be center display. 3. Select Fold Mirrors When Locking to acti- opened; it can be slid horizontally to the open or vate/deactivate. closed positions or its rear edge can be raised 1. Tap Settings in Top view. and lowered to allow ventilation. Resetting the mirrors' position 2. Tap My Car Mirrors. A mirror that has been moved manually (e.g., The laminated panoramic roof also has a sun 3. Under Tilt Mirror In Reverse, select Off, bumped into in a parking lot, etc.) has to be shade made of perforated fabric that is located Driver, Passenger or Both to activate/ returned to its normal position electrically before below the sections of glass. This shade can be deactivate and select which mirror to tilt. automatic folding will function correctly. opened or closed, for example when driving in bright sunlight. Folding mirrors* 1. Fold in the mirrors with the L and R buttons. When parking in a limited space, the mirrors can 2. Fold out the mirrors with the L and R buttons. be folded in: The mirrors have now been reset to their original 1. Press the L and R buttons at the same time positions. (the ignition must be in at least mode I). Auto-dim* 2. Release the buttons after approx. 1 second. Settings can be made for the auto-dim function The mirrors will stop automatically when they in the rearview mirror. are completely folded in. 1. Tap Settings in Top view. Fold out the mirrors by pressing the L and R at the same time. The mirrors will stop automatically 2. Tap My Car Mirrors. when they return to their original positions. 3. Under Auto Dim Mirrors, select Normal, Automatic folding when the vehicle is Dark or Light. The laminated panoramic roof and the sun shade 5 locked Related information are operated using the controls in the ceiling The mirrors can be folded in/out automatically • Using the power seat memory function* console, near the rear-view mirror. The controls when the vehicle is locked/unlocked. (p. 161) are activated when the vehicle's ignition is in This function can be activated/deactivated in the mode I or II. center display.

5 Only on models equipped with a power driver's seat. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| CAUTION Operating the laminated panoramic roof* • Remove ice and snow before opening the laminated panoramic roof. When opened automatically, the sun shade and roof open completely. • Do not operate the laminated panoramic roof if it is frozen closed. In the ventilation position, the rear edge of the front section of the roof is raised. • Never place heavy objects on the laminated panoramic roof. Operation

Wind blocker WARNING • During manual closing, if the laminated panoramic roof is obstructed, immediately Manual open (arrow points toward the rear of open it again. the vehicle) Never open or close the laminated panor- • Auto open amic roof if it is obstructed in any way. • Never allow a child to operate the lamina- Manual close ted panoramic roof. Auto close • Never leave a child alone in a vehicle. • When leaving the vehicle, ensure that the The laminated panoramic roof and sun shade can ignition is in mode 0. Never leave a be operated when the ignition is in mode I or II. remote key in the vehicle. Automatic operation The laminated panoramic roof is equipped with a • Never extend any object or body part 1. To open the sun shade completely, pull the though the open laminated panoramic wind blocker that folds up when the roof is open. control as far back as possible (to the auto roof, even if the vehicle's ignition is com- open position) and release it. Related information pletely switched off. • Operating the laminated panoramic roof* 2. To fully open the laminated panoramic roof, (p. 104) pull the control as far back as possible a second time (to the auto open position) and release it.

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Perform this procedure in reverse order to close Perform this procedure in reverse order to close laminated panoramic roof has closed com- the laminated panoramic roof and/or sun shade. the laminated panoramic roof and/or sun shade. pletely. Quick open/close If the sun shade is completely closed, it will open The laminated panoramic roof and the sun shade NOTE approximately 2 inches (5 cm) when the laminated panoramic roof is opened to the tilt position. can be opened/closed at the same time: For manual opening, the sun shade must first • Open: pull the control back (to the auto be fully open before it will be possible to open Automatically closing the sun shade6 the laminated panoramic roof. When closing, open position) twice in quick succession and When the vehicle is parked in sunny/warm the laminated panoramic roof must be fully release it. weather, the sun shade can be closed automati- closed before the sun shade can be closed. • Close: push the control forward (to the auto cally 15 minutes after the vehicle has been close position) twice in quick succession and locked to help keep the temperature in the pas- release it. Tilt (ventilation) position senger compartment down and to protect the upholstery from the sun. Manual operation 1. Opening the sun shade: Pull the control This function is deactivated by default and can be back to the first stop (the manual open posi- activated/deactivated: tion) and hold it until the sun shade has 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top opened to the position of your choice. view. Opening the rear edge of the laminated 2. 2. Tap My Car Locking. panoramic roof: Pull the control back to the first stop (the manual open position) a sec- Select Auto Close Sun Curtain to acti- ond time to open the rear edge of the lami- vate/deactivate. nated panoramic roof. Auto-stop 3. Opening the front glass section: Pull the The laminated panoramic roof has an auto-stop Tilt position, raised at the rear edge control back to the first stop (the manual feature that is triggered if the glass section of the open position) a third time and hold it until Open (raise the rear edge of the front glass roof or the sun shade is blocked in any way when the laminated panoramic roof has opened to section) by pressing the rear edge of the being closed. In this case, the laminated panor- the position of your choice. control upward. amic roof or sun shade will stop and reverse Close by pulling the rear edge of the control automatically approximately 2 in. (5 cm) from the downward/forward and holding it until the

6 Not available in all markets }}

105 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

point at which it was blocked (or will open fully to Power windows Operating the power windows the tilt position). All power windows can be operated using the The auto-stop feature also functions when the control panel in the driver's door. The control WARNING panels in the other doors only operate the win- laminated panoramic roof or sun shade is being • Always put the ignition in mode 0 and opened. dow in the respective doors. remove the ignition key from the vehicle The auto-stop feature can be overridden if the when the vehicle is unattended closing procedure has been interrupted (e.g., due • Never leave children unattended in the to ice around the laminated panoramic roof) by vehicle. pressing and holding the control forward/down • Make sure that the windows are com- until the roof is closed. pletely unobstructed before they are operated.

Operating

Driver's door control panel Switch for power child safety locks* and dis- engaging rear power window buttons Rear window controls

Front window controls

Related information • Operating the power windows (p. 106) Operating the power windows • Child safety locks (p. 222) Manual up/down Auto up/down.

106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

For the power windows to function, the ignition Resetting Rearview mirror must be in at least mode I. When the vehicle has If the battery has been disconnected, the auto The interior rearview mirror has an auto-dim been running, the power windows can be oper- open function must be reset so that it will work function that helps reduce glare from following ated for several minutes after the ignition has properly vehicle's headlights. been switched off, or until a door has been 1. Gently raise the front section of the button to opened. close the window and hold it for one second. Auto-dim function The interior rearview mirror’s auto-dim function is NOTE 2. Release the button briefly. controlled by two sensors: one pointing forward • Movement of the windows will stop if they 3. Raise the front section of the button again (located on the forward-facing side of the mirror, are obstructed in any way. If this happens for one second. which monitors the amount of ambient light) and twice in succession, the automatic func- Related information one pointing rearward (located on the side of the tion will not work for several minutes and mirror facing the driver at the upper edge, which Child safety locks (p. 222) the window can be closed by holding the • senses the strength of following vehicles' head- button up. lights), and work together to help eliminate glare. • To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rear windows are opened, also open the front NOTE windows slightly. Obstructing the forward sensor with e.g., parking stickers, transponders, etc., or the rear Manual up/down sensor by loading the cargo area or the rear – Move one of the controls up/down slightly. seat in such a way that light is prevented from > The power windows move up/down as reaching the sensor will reduce the auto-dim long as the control is held in position. function in the interior rearview mirror and Auto up/down optional auto-dim function in the door mirrors. – Move one of the controls up/down as far as possible and release it. Related information > The window will open or close completely. • Adjusting the power door mirrors (p. 102)

107 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Using sun shades Settings view Changing a setting Both rear doors have integrated sun shades. The center display's Settings view is used to make many of the vehicle's function settings and Rear doors to display vehicle-related information. Opening Settings view

A sub-category in Settings view with various possible settings 1. Tap the category/sub-category to navigate to Hook and locking mechanism the desired setting.

1. Pull up the sun shade and hook it to the Top view with the Settings button 2. Change the setting(s). upper section of the door frame. > The changes are saved immediately. 1. Pull down the tab on the upper edge of the 2. Lock the sun shade by moving the locking center display to open Top view. mechanism upward. 2. Tap Settings. The window can be opened/closed when the sun 3. Tap one of the categories displayed and nav- shade is being used. igate to sub-categories and settings by tapping again. 4. Tap Back to go back in Settings view. Tap Close to close Settings view.

108 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Types of settings Related information Categories in Settings view Type of Description • Center display overview (p. 30) Settings view consists of a number of main cate- setting • Navigating in the center display's views gories and sub-categories that contain settings (p. 40) and information for many of the vehicle's fea- Trigger Starts an app or a separate view Using the center display (p. 47) tures and functions. function for more advanced settings. Tap • the text to e.g., connect a • Changing system settings in Settings view The main categories in Settings view are: My Bluetooth device. (p. 111) Car, Sound, Navigation, Media, • Categories in Settings view (p. 109) Communication, Climate and System. Radio Select one of the possible set- button tings by tapping the desired radio Each main category, in turn, contains several sub- button to e.g., change the system categories with possible settings. The table language. shows the first level of sub-categories. The possible settings for a function or area are described Multi- Select a level for a particular set- in greater detail in their respective articles in the selection ting by pressing the desired part owner's manual. For system settings not descri- button of the button e.g., to set the bed in the respective articles, see "Changing sys- desired level for City Safety. tem settings in Settings view." Check Tap to activate/deactivate a func- My Car box tion e.g., to select automatic start Sub-categories for steering wheel heating. Displays Slider Select a level for a function by pressing and dragging the slider IntelliSafe control e.g., to set a volume level. Park Assist Informa- This is not an actual setting but tion dis- displays information such as the Drive Mode/Individual Drive Mode* play vehicle's VIN number. Lights Mirrors Locking and Unlocking Feedback

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Sub-categories Media System Sub-categories Sub-categories Electric Parking Brake AM/FM RadioA Date & Time Seats SiriusXM Language Wipers Gracenote Keyboard Layouts Suspension ® Video Voice Control Exterior SoundA A AM radio is not available in hybrid models. Units A XC90 T8 Plug-in Hybrid, certain markets only. Communication Storage Sound Sub-categories Sub-categories Software Updates Phone Sound Experience* Factory reset Text Messages Tone Services Bluetooth Balance Related information Wi-Fi Settings view (p. 108) System Volumes • Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot • Changing system settings in Settings view Navigation (p. 111) Vehicle Modem Internet Sub-categories Volvo On Call Map Volvo Service Networks Route Traffic Climate The main category Climate has no sub-catego- Guidance ries. System

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Changing system settings in 3. Select one of the following measurement Viewing the VIN (Vehicle Identification Settings view standards: Number) Settings view's main category System contains • Metric: kilometers, liters and degrees Cel- 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and general settings and information, such as lan- sius. tap Settings. guage, units of measure, etc. • Imperial: miles, gallons and degrees Cel- 2. Tap System Vehicle Identification The system settings under Driver Profile, Date sius. Number. & Time, Keyboard Layouts, Voice Control, • US: miles, gallons and degrees Fahren- > The vehicle's VIN will be displayed. Software Updates, Factory reset and heit. Services are described in their respective arti- > This change affects the units of measure cles in the owner's manual. used in the instrument panel, center display and the head-up display* Changing system languages 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and Changing tire inflation pressure units tap Settings. 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and tap Settings. 2. Tap System Language. 2. Tap System Units Tire Pressure. 3. Select a new system language. Languages that can be used for voice commands are 3. Select a unit of measure for tire pressure. indicated by a voice control symbol. > This changes the tire inflation pressure > This change affects the language used in units used in the Car status app in the the instrument panel, center display and center display. the head-up display*. Viewing storage information Changing units of measure 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and tap Settings. Changing length and volume units 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and 2. Tap System Storage. tap Settings. > Storage information for the vehicle's hard drive will be displayed, including total 2. Tap System Units Units. capacity, available capacity and the amount of storage space used by the apps that have been installed.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Changing settings in apps Related information Resetting the settings view App view, which is one of the center display's • Settings view (p. 108) All of the changes made under Settings view basic views, contains all of the apps installed in • Navigating in the center display's views can be reset to their default values at the same the vehicle. From Home view, navigate to App (p. 40) time. view by swiping the screen from right to left. • Categories in Settings view (p. 109) Resetting Apps for integrated (basic) functions 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top Certain apps in your vehicle are factory-installed, view. such as FM, USB and CD and are part of Sen- 2. System Factory reset sus. Settings in these apps can be changed in Tap . the center display's Top view. 3. Tap OK to confirm your choice. Changing settings for a basic app Related information 1. Tap one of the basic apps, for example FM • Settings view (p. 108) radio. • Resetting user data when the vehicle 2. Pull down Top view. changes owners (p. 113) 3. Tap FM Radio Settings. 4. Change the desired settings and confirm. 5. Press the Home button below the center display or tap the screen outside of Top view or pull up Top view to return to your original view. See also the article "Categories in Set- tings view." Third party apps Third party apps have to be downloaded e.g., Volvo ID. Settings for these apps are made in the apps themselves, not in Top view.

112 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Resetting user data when the Ambient temperature sensor Settings vehicle changes owners The ambient temperature sensor displays the Changing measurement standard in the center When the vehicle changes owners, all user set- temperature outside the vehicle in the instrument display: tings should be reset to the factory defaults. panel. 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and Settings When the vehicle changes owners, it is essential tap . to reset all user data and system settings to their 2. Tap System Units. factory defaults, including Volvo On Call. 3. Select measurement standard, Metric, Related information Imperial or US. • Resetting the settings view (p. 112) Related information Volvo ID (p. 29) • • Instrument panel (p. 125) • Climate system sensors (p. 175)

Location of the ambient temperature sensor (temperature shown here in degrees Celsius)

NOTE When the ambient temperature is between 23° and 36 °F (–5° and +2 °C), a snowflake symbol will be displayed next to the temperature. This symbol serves as a warning for possible slippery road surfaces. Please note that this symbol does not indicate a fault with your vehicle. At low speeds or when the vehicle is not moving, the temperature readings may be slightly higher than the actual ambient temperature.

113 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Clock Automatic time Head-up display (HUD)* The clock is displayed in the instrument panel The function Automatic Time is also available, The head-up display provides information such and in the center display. which adjusts the time zone automatically, as speed, cruise control functions, navigation, depending on the vehicle's location. If Automatic traffic sign information, incoming phone calls, Time has not been selected, set the date and etc. at the base of the windshield in the driver's time manually by tapping the up or down arrows field of vision. on the center display. Daylight savings time In certain countries, an automatic change to daylight savings time can be selected by activating Auto. If the automatic change is not available, change to daylight savings time by selecting On or Off. Related information • Instrument panel (p. 125) Location of the clock in the instrument panel • Center display overview (p. 30) Certain messages and other information in the • Using the center display (p. 47) instrument panel may temporarily obscure the clock. Incoming phone call In the center display, the clock is located at the The HUD supplements the instrument panel and upper right of the status bar. projects information on the lower section of the windshield. The projected information can only be Settings for date and time seen from the driver's seat. Select Settings System Date & Time in the center display's Top view to change the for- CAUTION mat for displaying date or time. The HUD's projection unit is located in the Set the date and time by tapping the up or down dashboard. Avoid scratching or placing arrows on the center display. objects on the unit's glass surface.

114 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

NOTE NOTE If the City Safety is activated, the information The driver's ability to see information in the in the HUD will be replaced by a City Safety- HUD may be impeded by: related graphic. This graphic will illuminate • the use of polarizing sunglasses even if the HUD is turned off. • not sitting in the center of the driver's seat • objects on the HUD projector glass on the dashboard • certain ambient lighting conditions • certain types of vision problems, which Example of information in the head-up display. The infor- may also result in headaches or eye mation shown is generic and may vary slightly from mar- strain. ket to market or in terms of units of measure • Activating/deactivating and settings for Speed HUD are only possible when an image is projected on the windshield. The engine Cruise control must be running. Navigation A graphic for the City Safety flashes to attract the driv- Activating/deactivating HUD er's attention Road signs HUD can be activated in two ways in the center Symbols such as the following ones may appear display: temporarily in the HUD. Via Function view If the warning symbol appears, read the Tap the Head-up display but- warning text in the instrument panel. ton.

If the information symbol appears, read the warning text in the instrument panel.

}}

115 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Via settings 2. Use the right-side steering wheel keypad to Power front seat* memory function 1. Tap Settings in Top view. adjust the HUD's brightness and height posi- The position of the HUD can be stored in the tion on the windshield in the driver's field of power seat's memory function. 2. Tap My Car Displays. vision. Replacing the windshield 3. Select/deselect Head-Up Display. Vehicles with a head-up display have a special Selecting display alternatives type of windshield meeting the requirements for 1. Tap Settings in Top view. displaying projected information. 2. Tap My Car Displays Head-Up If the windshield has to be replaced, contact a Display Options. trained and qualified Volvo service technician or authorized workshop. The correct type of replace- Tap Go to the center display's Settings view ment windshield must be used for a head-up dis- and select Driver Display & Head-up play. Display. Calibrating the horizontal position 3. Select : Show Navigation In Head-Up If the windshield has been replaced, it may be Display, Road Sign Information In Head- necessary to calibrate the HUD's horizontal posi- Up Display, Show Driver Support In Reduce brightness tion. This means that the projected image will Head-Up Display or Show Phone In have to be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. Head-Up Display. Increase brightness To do so: Adjusting HUD brightness and height Higher position 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and position tap Settings. Lower position 2. Select My Car Displays Head-Up Confirm Display Calibration. Adapting brightness 3. Use the buttons on the right-side steering The brightness of the graphics displayed in the wheel keypad to calibrate the horizontal posi- HUD are also automatically adjusted according to tion. ambient lighting conditions. HUD brightness is 1. Tap Head-up display adjustments in the also affected by adjustments to the brightness of center display's Function view. the other displays in the vehicle.

116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Voice control The voice control system uses the same micro- Voice commands make it possible for the driver phone as the Bluetooth hands-free system and to voice-control certain functions in the media system responses come via the infotainment sys- player, a Bluetooth-connected cell phone, cli- tem's speakers. mate system and the Volvo navigation system*. In certain cases, text messages are also provided in the instrument panel. Voice control offers convenience and enables the driver to keep his/her hands on the steering The functions are controlled using the right-side wheel and concentrate on driving and the traffic steering wheel keypad and settings are made situation around the vehicle. from the center console. System updates WARNING The voice control system is being constantly Rotate counterclockwise As the driver, you have full responsibility for improved and updates should be downloaded for operating the vehicle safely and adhering to optimal functionality. See the article "System Rotate clockwise all applicable traffic regulations. updates" and the Volvo Cars support site support.volvocars.com. Confirm Related information Cleaning • Using voice commands (p. 118) Wipe the glass covering the HUD projection unit • Voice control settings (p. 122) carefully with a clean and dry (or very slightly damp if necessary) microfiber cloth. • Voice control for radio and media (p. 119) Voice control for cell phones (p. 118) Never use strong stain removers. For difficult • cleaning conditions, a special cleaning agent can • System updates (p. 464) be purchased at a Volvo retailer. • Navigation system voice commands (p. 121) Related information • Climate system voice commands (p. 119) • Center display overview (p. 30) • Navigating in the center display's views (p. 40) Input to the system is in dialog form and compri- ses commands from the driver and a verbal response from the system.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Using voice commands Voice command examples Voice control for cell phones The following is an introduction for using voice Press , say "Call"-"[First-name]"-"[Last- Voice commands can be used to control many commands. name]"-"[number category]" to call a contact of the most common functions in a Bluetooth®- in your phonebook if the person has more than connected cell phone. Press the button on the right- one phone number listed (i.e., home, mobile, work, side steering wheel keypad to etc.). Cell phone voice commands: activate the system and initiate "Phone": initiates a phone dialog and dis- a voice command dialog. For example, press and say • plays possible commands. "Call"-"Robin"-"Smith"-"mobile". • "Call"-"[First-name]"-"[Last-name]": calls Commands/phrases the selected contact from the phonebook. Keep the following points in mind when using The following commands can always be used: • "Call"-"[First-name]"-"[Last- voice commands: • Repeat: the system will repeat the most name]"-"[number category]": calls a con- • When giving a command, speak at your usual recent voice instruction. tact in your phonebook if the person has speed and in a normal tone of voice after more than one phone number listed (i.e., Cancel: cancel the dialog. the tone. • home, mobile, work, etc.). Help: Initiates a help dialog. The system will Avoid speaking while the system is respond- • • "Call"-"[phone number]": calls the phone • provide several alternative commands that ing. Commands cannot be processed during number. can be used in a given situation. a response. • "Call list": displays a list of calls. The commands for specific situations are descri- Avoid background noises in the cabin when • bed in the respective articles such as "Cell phone Command for having a text message read aloud: using the system by closing the vehicle's commands", etc. Read message doors, windows and panoramic roof* when • " ": the message will be read giving voice commands.. Numbers aloud. Voice command dialogs can be cancelled by: Numbers can be spoken individually, in groups or Related information the entire phone number can be given at one Cancel • Using voice commands (p. 118) • Saying " ". time. • By pressing and holding the button on the right-side steering wheel keypad. Related information Voice control (p. 117) To speed up a command dialog or to skip system • responses, press the button on the right- side steering wheel keypad when the system is responding.

118 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Voice control for radio and media • "Bluetooth": starts playback from a Blue- Climate system voice commands The following voice commands can be used for tooth-connected device. Voice commands can be used to control the cli- the radio or an external multimedia device. • Similar music": starts playback from a USB mate system to e.g., change the temperature, flash drive with music similar to the type cur- activate seat heating* or change blower (fan) Media and radio • " ": initiates a dialog for rently playing. speed. media and radio, and displays possible commands. Related information • "Play"-"[artist]": plays music by the selected • Voice control (p. 117) artist. • Using voice commands (p. 118) • "Play"-"[song title]": plays the selected • Voice control settings (p. 122) song. • "Play"-"[song title]"-"from"-"[album]": plays the selected song from the selected album. • "Play"-"[radio station]": starts the selected radio station. • "Tune"-"[frequency]": tunes to the selected frequency on the current waveband. If no waveband has been selected, FM is the default. • "Tune"-"[frequency]"-"[waveband]": tunes to the selected station on the selected waveband. • "Radio": starts FM radio. • "Radio FM": starts FM radio. • "SiriusXM"*: starts satellite radio • "CD": starts playback from a CD. • "USB": starts playback from a USB flash drive. • "iPod": starts playback from an iPod. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| – Tap and say one of the following com- • "Turn on defroster"/"Turn off • "Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat mands: defroster": activates/deactivates window ventilation": raises/lowers the level for and door mirror defrosting. seat ventilation*. "Climate": starts a command dialog and • Turn on max defroster Turn off provides examples of commands that can • " "/" Related information max defroster": activates/deactivates be used. Climate system controls (p. 184) max defroster. • "Set temperature to X degrees": sets • Turn on electric defroster Turn off the desired temperature. • " "/" electric defroster": activates/deacti- • "Raise temperature"/"Lower vates the electrically heated windshield*. temperature": raises/lowers the temperature. • "Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear defroster": activates/deactivates the • "Sync temperature": synchronizes the electrically heated rear window and door temperature in all of the vehicle's climate mirrors. zones with the one set for the driver's side. • "Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn steering wheel heat off": activates/ • "Air on feet"/"Air on body": opens the deactivates the electrically heated steer- desired air vent. ing wheel*. Air on feet off Air on body off • " "/" ": • "Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower closes the desired air vent. steering wheel heat": raises/lowers the • "Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan": heating level for the electrically heated changes the blower speed to Max/Off. steering wheel*. • "Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed": • "Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat raises/lowers the blower speed. heat": activates/deactivates the electri- • "Turn on auto": activates automatic cli- cally heated seats*. mate control. • "Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat": • "Air condition on"/"Air condition off": raises/lowers the heating level for the activates/deactivates the air conditioning. electrically heated seats*. • "Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off": • "Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off activates/deactivates recirculation. seat ventilation": activates/deactivates seat ventilation*.

120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Navigation system voice commands – To use the voice control system, press the and say one of the following commands after Many of the navigation system's functions can on the right-side steering wheel keypad the tone: be activated using voice commands. • "Navigation: Starts a navigation voice command dialog and displays available The procedure for using voice control is descri- commands. bed in greater detail in the articles "Voice control," "Using voice control" and "Voice control • "Take me home: Guidance will be given settings." to the location set as Home. The location for Home is set using the Set home Voice commands address function in Favorites in the Top The following list contains examples of com- view in the center display. mands that are unique to navigation system. • "Go to [City]: Enter a city as a destination, e.g., "Go to New York." • "Go to [Address]: Enter an address as a destination, e.g., Go to 125 43 St, New York." • "Go to [Zip code]: Enter a zip code as a destination, e.g., "Go to 07405." • "Go to [Name]: Enter a name from a list of contacts e.g., "Go to Robyn Smith." • "Search [POI]: Search for a POI7, which is always sorted according to POIs "around the vehicle." To search along the route, say "Along the route" when the list of results is displayed. • "Search [POI] in [a city]: Search for a POI7 in city/location. • "Search [POI category]: Search for a POI7 category, which is always sorted "Around the vehicle."

7 You can opt to call the POI or set it as a destination.

121 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

• "Search [POI category] in [a city]: Related information Voice control settings Search for a POI7 category in a city/loca- • Voice control (p. 117) There are a number of settings that can be made tion. • Using voice commands (p. 118) for the voice control system. • "Enter contact: Enter a contact from a • Voice control settings (p. 122) list of phone contacts as a destination. Open the center display's Top view and tap Settings System Voice Control • "Enter POI: Enter a POI as a destination. and select settings. • "Change country/Change state: Changes the country/state in which a • Repeat Mode search is conducted. • Gender • "Enter address: Enter an address as a • Speech Rate destination. Sound settings "Enter zip code: Enter a zip code as a • Open Top view and tap Settings Sound destination. System Volumes Voice Control. • "Add intersection: Enter an intersection as a destination. Changing languages The voice control system only understands that • "Show favorites: Shows a list of languages that can be selected. Favorites in the center display's Top view. Changing the language for this system also • "Clear itinerary: Deletes all intermediate affects menus, messages and help texts. destinations in an itinerary. Open Top view and tap Settings System • "Repeat voice guidance: Repeats the Language. most recent guidance instruction. • "Pause guidance: Pauses guidance on Related information the map. • Voice control (p. 117) • "Resume guidance: Resumes guidance on the map. • "Turn off voice guidance: Turns voice navigation guidance off. • "Turn on voice guidance: Turns voice navigation guidance on. 7 You can opt to call the POI or set it as a destination.

122 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Indicator symbols in the instrument Symbol Explanation Symbol Explanation panel The indicator symbols alert the driver when cer- ABS brake system Left/right turn signals tain functions are activated, that a system is This symbol indicates a possible Both turn signal indicators will A actively working or that a fault may have occur- fault in the ABS braking function. flash when the hazard warning red in a system or function. The vehicle's normal brakes will flashers are being used. still function but without ABS Symbol Explanation B brake modulation.

Information, see the text mes- Parking brake/Auto-brake Forward lights sage in the instrument panel This function keeps the vehicle at A The information symbol illuminates a standstill after it has stopped. in combination with a text mes- The symbol is on when the func- Active Bending Lights (ABL) sage if one of the vehicle's sys- tion is activated and the brakes or tems requires the driver's atten- B parking brake are being used. This symbol will illuminate if there tion. The information symbol can is a fault in the ABL system. also illuminate in combination with Tire pressure system other symbols. Automatic/active high beams The symbol illuminates to indicate on Brake system low tire pressure or a fault in the The symbol will be blue when the tire pressure system. A automatic high beams are on. Malfunction indicator light Automatic/active high beams (check engine light) offThe symbol will be white when

B This symbol will illuminate if there the automatic high beams are off. is a fault in the emissions control system. If this happens, please High beam indicator have your vehicle checked by a The symbol will illuminate when trained and qualified Volvo service the high beams are on or when technician as soon as possible. high beam flash is being used.

}}

123 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Symbol Explanation Symbol Explanation Symbol Explanation

Automatic/active high beams PreconditioningC Lane keeping aid on The symbol illuminates when the White symbol: lane keeping aid on The symbol will be blue when the engine/cabin heater/air condition- and marker lines detected. automatic high beams are on. The ing are preconditioning the vehi- Gray symbol: lane keeping aid on parking lights will also be on. cle. and no marker lines detected. Automatic/active high beams Stability system Yellow symbol: lane keeping aid off This symbol flashes when the sta- active The symbol will be white when the bility system is actively working to Lane keeping aid and rain sen- automatic high beams are off. The stabilize the vehicle. If the symbol sor parking lights will be on. glows steadily, there is a fault in the system. White symbol: lane keeping aid on High beams on and marker lines detected. Rain The high beams and parking lights Stability system, sport mode sensor on. will be on. This symbol illuminates when Gray symbol: lane keeping aid on Sport mode is on. Sport mode Not in use and no marker lines detected. offers more active driving charac- Rain sensor on. teristics by monitoring movement of the accelerator pedal, steering A US models B Canadian models Rear fog lights wheel and cornering by allowing C XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid only. more lateral movement of the rear The symbol illuminates when the wheels before the stability system Door/hood/tailgate/fuel filler door rear fog lights are on. is activated. reminder Rain sensor If a door or the hood/tailgate/fuel filler door are not closed properly, the information or warning The symbol illuminates when the symbol will illuminate and a graphic will be dis- rain sensor is on. played in instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and close the door, etc.

124 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Related information Instrument panel • Messages (and in certain cases also graph- • Instrument panel (p. 125) The instrument panel displays vehicle- and driv- ics) • Warning symbols in the instrument panel ing-related information. • Distance to empty tank (p. 134) • Distance to discharged hybrid battery (eDTE: • Door and seat belt reminders (p. 65) Gauges, indicators and symbols in the electrical Distance to Empty) instrument panel • Door and seat belt status • Hybrid battery charge information • Compass and altimeter • Media player • Navigation system map • Cell phone • Voice control Right side • Tachometer (depending on current driving mode) • Fuel gauge Left side • Battery gauge • Speedometer • Gear shift indicator • Trip odometer • Current driving mode (Hybrid, Off Road, Save, Pure, Power and AWD) • Odometer ECO gauge • Cruise control/speed limiter information • Current fuel consumption • Road sign information • Hybrid battery's charge level Center • • Indicator and warning symbols • App menu (activated using the right-side steering wheel keypad) • Ambient temperature sensor • Clock

}}

125 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Activating the instrument panel language. This change affects the language Instrument panel App menu The instrument panel is activated as soon as a used in all displays. The App (application) menu in the instrument door is opened (i.e., ignition mode 0). After a Related information panel provides quick access to commonly used short period, the panel will go out if it is not used. functions in certain apps. • Instrument panel App menu (p. 126) To reactivate it, do one of the following: • Warning symbols in the instrument panel • Press the brake pedal (p. 134) • Turn the start knob to START and release it • Indicator symbols in the instrument panel (without pressing the brake pedal). This acti- (p. 123) vates ignition mode I • Open one of the doors Instrument panel settings Some of the settings for the instrument panel can be made in the App menu (see also the article "Instrument panel app menu").

The following settings can be made in the center In some cases, the App menu can be used instead of display's Top view under: Settings My Car the center display Displays: The App menu is displayed in the instrument • Driver Display Center Area: Select what is panel and is controlled using the right-side steer- displayed in the background (center) of the ing wheel keypad. This menu makes it possible to instrument panel. The options are: (Show no toggle between apps or functions in apps without information in the background, Show removing your hands from the steering wheel. information for current playing media or App menu functions Show map even if no route is set). The following apps and their functions can be Themes • . Select a theme (appearance). The controlled from the App menu: options are: (Glass, Minimalistic, Performance or Chrome Rings). The system language can be changed under Settings System Choose system

126 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

App Functions Hybrid-related information in the Indicates the output level when the instrument panel gasoline engine will start. A hollow Trip com- Select a trip odometer, make Different types of information will be displayed in symbol indicates that the gasoline puter instrument panel display set- the instrument panel, depending on the drive engine is not being used. tings, etc. mode selected. These drive modes offer unique Indicates that the hybrid battery is Media Select the active source for the ways of helping the driver achieve the best pos- being charged. player media player. sible driving economy. The vehicle also stores driving statistics that can Phone Call a contact from the call list. be viewed in the form of a bar graph. Indicates the current charge level in Navigation Pause guidance, start guidance the electric motor's battery. This indica- to a recently set destination, etc. Hybrid-unique symbols tor is located by the hybrid battery The various gauges and indicators in the instru- gauge in the lower right corner. Related information ment panel show the relationship between the eDTE (Electrical Distance To Empty) • Instrument panel (p. 125) electric motor's current power consumption and indicator (distance until the hybrid bat- the remaining power available. • Center display overview (p. 30) tery is discharged). Indicates the currently available output Using the instrument panel App menu • from the electric motor. A solid symbol (p. 153) The hybrid gauge indicates that the electric motor is being used. Available electric motor output This hybrid battery indicator is located between Indicates the currently available output the hybrid gauge and the fuel gauge on the lower from the electric motor. A hollow sym- right side of the instrument panel. It indicates the bol means that the electric motor is current (charge level) remaining in the hybrid bat- not being used. tery, which can be used to power the electric Indicates the output level when the motor or to heat/cool the vehicle. gasoline engine starts. A solid symbol indicates that the gasoline engine is being used.

}}

127 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Power utilized by the driver The Save drive mode The indicator shows the amount of power utilized (requested) by the driver through pressure on the accelerator pedal. The higher the reading on the scale, the greater the amount of power utilized in the current gear. The mark between the "lightning" and "drop" symbols is the point at which the electric motor switches off and the gasoline engine starts. Examples

The electric motor alone cannot provide the power requested and the gasoline engine will The Save drive mode is activated. The battery's start. charge level is locked at the level it was at when this drive mode was activated, which is shown by the symbol near the battery indicator. The control system maintains this charge level by using the gasoline engine intermittently (in the same way as in the Hybrid drive mode). If the hybrid battery's charge level was below 33% when Save was activated, the gasoline engine will The vehicle has started but is stationary and no be used to charge the hybrid battery up to this power is being utilized. level. Related information • Drive modes (p. 382) • Displaying trip computer information (p. 95) The vehicle is generating current to recharge the • Displaying trip statistics (p. 96) battery, e.g., during moderate braking or during engine braking on a downslope. • Instrument panel (p. 125)

128 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instrument panel licenses IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY 3. Neither the name of the organisation nor the AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE names of its contributors may be used to BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" License ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE endorse or promote products derive from this Copyright ©) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993 REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE software without specific prior written The Regents of the University of California. All FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, permission. rights reserved. SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, Redistribution and use in source and binary COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR forms, with or without modification, are permitted "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; provided that the following conditions are met: WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF 1. Redistributions of source code must retain CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A the above copyright notice, this list of WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN conditions and the following disclaimer. OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER 2. Redistributions in binary form must OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY reproduce the above copyright notice, this list THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, of conditions and the following disclaimer in ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES the documentation and/or other materials DAMAGE. (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, provided with the distribution. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised" License 3. All advertising materials mentioning features SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; or use of this software must display the Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER following acknowledgment: This product Redistribution and use in source and binary CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, includes software developed by the forms, with or without modification, are permitted WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, University of California, Berkeley and its provided that the following conditions are met: OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR contributors. OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF 1. Redistributions of source code must retain THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF 4. Neither the name of the University nor the the above copyright notice, this list of ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH names of its contributors may be used to conditions and the following disclaimer. endorse or promote products derived from DAMAGE. this software without specific prior written 2. Redistributions in binary form must permission. reproduce the above copyright notice, this list BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license of conditions and the following disclaimer in Copyright ©) , All rights THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE the documentation and/or other materials reserved. REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND provided with the distribution. ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE }}

129 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Redistribution and use in source and binary ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, forms, with or without modification, are permitted DAMAGE. in a program, you must acknowledge provided that the following conditions are met: somewhere in your documentation that The views and conclusions contained in the you've used the FreeType code. (`credits') 1. Redistributions of source code must retain software and documentation are those of the We specifically permit and encourage the the above copyright notice, this list of authors and should not be interpreted as inclusion of this software, with or without conditions and the following disclaimer. representing official policies, either expressed or modifications, in commercial products, 2. Redistributions in binary form must implied, of the FreeBSD Project. provided that all warranty or liability claims reproduce the above copyright notice, this list are assumed by the product vendor. Legal FreeType Project License of conditions and the following disclaimer in Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license, the documentation and/or other materials 1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner, the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and provided with the distribution. Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files Introduction The FreeType Project is originally distributed by the authors (David THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE distributed in several archive packages; some COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner of them may contain, in addition to the Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED FreeType font engine, various tools and WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED named as alpha, beta or final release. `You' contributions which rely on, or relate to, the refers to the licensee, or person using the TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF FreeType Project. This license applies to all project, where ùsing' is a generic term MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A files found in such packages, and which do including compiling the project's source code PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN not fall under their own explicit license. The as well as linking it to form a `program' or NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER license affects thus the FreeType font èxecutable'. This program is referred to as à OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY engine, the test programs, documentation program using the FreeType engine'. This DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, and makefiles, at the very least. This license license applies to all files distributed in the EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG original FreeType archive, including all source (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which code, binaries and documentation, unless PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR all encourage inclusion and use of free otherwise stated in the file in its original, SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; software in commercial and freeware unmodified form as distributed in the original OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER products alike. As a consequence, its main archive. If you are unsure whether or not a CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, points are that: o We don't promise that this particular file is covered by this license, you WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, software works. However, we are be must contact us to verify this. The FreeType OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR interested in any kind of bug reports. (às is' project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF distribution) o You can use this software for Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner whatever you want, in parts or full form, THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF Lemberg. All rights reserved except as without having to pay us. (`royalty-free' specified below. 1. No Warranty THE usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED ÀS IS'

130 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, encourage you to put an URL to the Werner EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, FreeType web page in your documentation, Lemberg INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, though this isn't mandatory. These conditions WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND apply to any software derived from or based Libpng License FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. on the FreeType code, not just the This copy of the libpng notices is provided for IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE unmodified files. If you use our work, you your convenience. In case of any discrepancy AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE must acknowledge us. However, no fee need between this copy and the notices in the file LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY be paid to us. png.h that is included in the libpng distribution, THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF 3. Advertising The names of FreeType's authors the latter shall prevail. THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not and contributors may not be used to endorse signed this license, you are not required to or promote products derived from this accept it. However, as the FreeType project software without specific prior written is copyrighted material, only this license, or permission. We suggest, but do not require, another one contracted with the authors, that you use one or more of the following grants you the right to use, distribute, and phrases to refer to this software in your modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or documentation or advertising materials: modifying the FreeType project, you indicate `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', that you understand and accept all the terms `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'. of this license. 4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related 2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in to FreeType: o [email protected] source and binary forms, with or without Discusses general use and applications of modification, are permitted provided that the FreeType, as well as future and wanted following conditions are met: o Redistribution additions to the library and distribution. If you of source code must retain this license file are looking for support, start in this list if you (`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions, haven't found anything to help you in the deletions or changes to the original files documentation. o [email protected] must be clearly indicated in accompanying Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, documentation. The copyright notices of the design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc. unaltered, original files must be preserved in o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current all copies of source files. o Redistribution in FreeType web page, which will allow you to binary form must provide a disclaimer that download our latest development version and states that the software is based in part of read online documentation. You can also the work of the FreeType Team, in the contact us individually at: David Turner distribution documentation. We also Robert Wilhelm }}

131 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and Tom Lane The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. LICENSE: Glenn Randers-Pehrson If you modify libpng you may insert additional disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, notices immediately following this sentence. Willem van Schaik including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. 1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c) assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the special, exemplary, or consequential damages, distributed according to the same disclaimer and which may result from the use of the PNG license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: Reference Library, even if advised of the individuals added to the list of Contributing possibility of such damage. Authors John Bowler Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, Simon-Pierre Cadieux Kevin Bracey modify, and distribute this source code, or Eric S. Raymond Sam Bushell portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions: Gilles Vollant Magnus Holmgren 1. The origin of this source code must not be and with the following additions to the disclaimer: Greg Roelofs misrepresented. There is no warranty against interference with Tom Tanner 2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as your enjoyment of the library or against libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, such and must not be misrepresented as infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts being the original source. or the library will fulfill any of your particular January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. 3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or purposes or needs. This library is provided with all altered from any source or altered source faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, For the purposes of this copyright and license, distribution. performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user. "Contributing Authors" is defined as the following set of individuals: The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through specifically permit, without fee, and encourage 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, Andreas Dilger the use of this source code as a component to 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are Dave Martindale supporting the PNG file format in commercial distributed according to the same disclaimer and products. If you use this source code in a product, license as libpng-0.96, with the following Guy Eric Schalnat acknowledgment is not required but would be individuals added to the list of Contributing Paul Schmidt appreciated. Authors: Tim Wegner

132 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF misrepresented as being the original convenient use in "about" boxes and the like: MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A software. PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL)); 3. This notice may not be removed or altered NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL from any source distribution. Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR SGI Free Software B License Version 2.0. "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31). OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, Sept. 18, 2008) OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon of the Open Source Initiative. WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Glenn Randers-Pehrson [email protected] hereby granted, free of charge, to any person April 15, 2002 zlib License obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) the Software without restriction, including without MIT License Copyright (c) limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, This software is provided 'as-is', without any publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to express or implied warranty. In no event will the of the Software, and to permit persons to whom any person obtaining a copy of this software and authors be held liable for any damages arising the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the associated documentation files (the "Software"), from the use of this software. following conditions: The above copyright notice to deal in the Software without restriction, Permission is granted to anyone to use this including the dates of first publication and either including without limitation the rights to use, this permission notice or a reference to http:// copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, all copies or substantial portions of the Software. and to permit persons to whom the Software is freely, subject to the following restrictions: furnished to do so, subject to the following 1. The origin of this software must not be THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", conditions: misrepresented; you must not claim that you WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, wrote the original software. If you use this EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT The above copyright notice and this permission software in a product, an acknowledgment in LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF notice shall be included in all copies or the product documentation would be MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A substantial portions of the Software. appreciated but is not required. PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", 2. Altered source versions must be plainly NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, marked as such, and must not be SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, }}

133 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, Warning symbols in the instrument Symbol Meaning TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT panel OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE The warning symbols alert the driver that an Airbags OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE important function is activated or that a serious Stop the vehicle in a safe place SOFTWARE. fault has occurred. and do not continue driving. Except as contained in this notice, the name of If this light comes on while the Symbol Meaning Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in vehicle is being driven, or remains advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use Warning on after the vehicle has been or other dealings in this Software without prior started, the airbag system's diag- The red warning symbol alerts the written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc. nostic functions have detected a driver that an important function is fault. Have the system(s) inspec- Related information activated or that a serious fault ted by a trained and qualified • Instrument panel (p. 125) has occurred that may affect the Volvo service technician as soon vehicle's drivability. The warning as possible. symbol can also illuminate in combination with other symbols. Brake system Seat belt reminder If this symbol illuminates, the A brake fluid level may be too low. This symbol will flash for approxi- Stop the vehicle in a safe place mately 6 seconds if the driver or and check the level in the brake front seat passenger has not fas- B fluid reservoir. See also the warn- tened his or her seat belt or if any- ing following this table. one in the rear seat has unbuckled a seat belt.

134 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning WARNING Parking brake Oil pressure • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the brake fluid reservoir or if a warning This symbol flashes while the If the symbol illuminates during A message is displayed in the text window: parking brake is being applied and driving, stop the vehicle, the DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed then glows steadily when the engine oil level is too low. Stop the to a trained and qualified Volvo service parking brake has been set. engine immediately and check the technician and have the brake system B engine oil level. Add oil if neces- If the symbol flashes in any other inspected. sary. If the oil level is normal and situation, this indicates a fault. See • If the BRAKE and ABS symbols illumi- the symbol remains illuminated, the text message in the instru- nate at the same time, there is a risk of have the vehicle towed to the ment panel. reduced vehicle stability. nearest authorized Volvo workshop or trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Door/hood/tailgate/fuel filler door reminder Generator not charging It a door, tailgate, the hood or the fuel filler door This symbol illuminates during are not closed properly, the information or warn- driving if a fault has occurred in ing symbol will illuminate and a graphic will be the electrical system. Contact an displayed in the instrument panel. authorized Volvo workshop or Related information trained and qualified Volvo service Instrument panel (p. 125) technician. • • Indicator symbols in the instrument panel A US models (p. 123) B Canadian models

135 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Compass Related information Calibrating the compass The rear-view mirror has an integrated compass • Calibrating the compass (p. 136) North America is divided into 15 magnetic zones that shows the direction in which the vehicle is • Ignition modes (p. 362) and the compass will need to be calibrated if the traveling. vehicle is driven from one zone to another.

To calibrate the compass: 1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area, safely out of traffic and away from steel structures and high-tension electrical wires. 2. Start the vehicle.

NOTE • For best calibration results, switch off all electrical equipment in the vehicle (climate system, windshield wipers, audio system, etc.) and make sure that all doors are Rearview mirror with compass closed. Eight different directions are shown with the • Calibration may not succeed or be incor- abbreviations: N (north) NE (northeast) E (east), rect if the vehicle's electrical equipment is SE (southeast) S (south), SW (southwest) W not switched off. (west) NW (northwest) Switching the compass on/off 3. Using a pen, paperclip or similar object, press and hold the button on the underside of mir- The compass is displayed automatically when the ror for approx. 3 seconds until the number of vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. the current magnetic zone is displayed. To switch the compass on/off: – Use a pen, paperclip or similar object and press in the button on the underside of the mirror.

136 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

1 8. Repeat the calibration procedure if neces- Lighting panel and controls sary. The lighting controls on the left-side steering 2 15 Related information wheel lever can be used to activate the vehicle's 14 exterior lighting. Instrument lighting brightness 3 Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 191) • can be adjusted on the lighting panel. 13 • Compass (p. 136) 4 12 Ring on the steering wheel lever 5 8 11 9 10 6 7

Magnetic zones 4. Press the button on the underside of mirror repeatedly until the desired magnetic zone (1–15) is displayed (see the map of magnetic zones). 5. Wait until C is again displayed in the mirror or hold the button on the underside of mirror for approx. 6 seconds until C is displayed in the mirror. 6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 6 mph (10 km/h) until a direction is displayed. This indicates that calibration is complete. Drive around in a circle an additional two times to fine-tune the calibration. 7. Vehicles with an electrically heated windshield:* if C is displayed when the heating function is activated, perform step 6 with the heating function on.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Position Result Position Result WARNING With the ignition in mode II or if With the ignition in mode II or if • Daytime Running Lights are a driving aid the engine is running: the engine is running: designed to help make the vehicle visible to other roads users. In the US: the Daytime Run- The Daytime Running Lights • • The driver is always responsible for ning Lights (DRL) will be off will be onB (the low beam • adapting the use of Daytime Running headlights will automatically • In Canada: the Daytime Run- Lights/headlights according to ambient switch on in dark conditions or ning Lights will be on lighting and weather conditions. if the rear fog lights are on • High beam flash can be used Tunnel detection* will be acti- • Lighting panel With the ignition in mode II or if vated A the engine is running: • Active High Beams (AHB) can Instrument lighting • In the US: the Daytime Run- be activated ning Lights will be off • High beam flash can be used In Canada: the Daytime Run- • Active High Beams On/Off ning Lights will be on • High beam flash can be used A The parking lights will be on in this position, even if the ignition With the ignition in mode II or if is switched off. In dark conditions, the rear parking lights illuminate automatically when the tailgate is open, regardless of the the engine is running: control's position or ignition mode. B US models only: The use of Daytime Running Lights can be • The Daytime Running Lights activated/deactivated in the center display's Settings menu. will be off • The low beam headlights will NOTE be on The use of Daytime Running Lights is recom- Thumb wheel (to the left) for adjusting display bright- • High Beams/High Beam flash mended in the United States and is manda- ness can be used tory in Canada. Illumination of the display and instrument lights will vary, depending on ignition mode. Volvo recommends using the position The display lighting is automatically subdued in whenever possible. darkness and the sensitivity is set with the thumb wheel.

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Related information Low beam headlights Daytime Running Lights (DRL) • Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (p. 139) In dark ambient lighting conditions, the low The car monitors ambient lighting conditions. beams will be activated automatically when the • High and low beam headlights (p. 140) With the ring on the left-side steering wheel engine is started or the ignition is in mode II and the left-side steering wheel lever's ring is turned lever in the position and the ignition in mode II (or the engine running), the lights toggle to the position. automatically between DRL and low beam head- If the ring is turned to , the low beams will lights. be activated automatically when the engine is started or the ignition is in mode II, regardless of the ambient lighting conditions. Low beams

Ring in the AUTO position.

NOTE The use of Daytime Running Lights is recom- Left-side steering wheel lever ring mended in the United States and is manda- With the ring in the position, the low tory in Canada. beams will also be activated if the windshield wipers or rear fog lights are being used. With the headlight ring in the 0 position: Related information • In the US: DRL will be off Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (p. 139) • • In Canada: DRL will be on Ignition modes (p. 362) • }}

139 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

With the headlight ring in the 8 position High and low beam headlights by moving the lever forward. Return to low beams and the ignition in mode II or if the engine is When the engine is started, the low beams are by moving the lever toward the steering wheel. running: activated automatically if the headlight control is The symbol will illuminate in the instrument • In the US: DRL will be off in position . panel when the high beams are on. Canada on • In : DRL will be Active high beams With the headlight ring in the position: The active high beam system uses a camera at the upper edge of the windshield to detect the • DRL will be on (the low beam headlights will headlights of oncoming vehicles or the taillights automatically switch on in dark conditions) of a vehicle directly ahead. When this happens, US models only: DRL can be deactivated in the the headlights will automatically switch from high center display's Settings view. beams to low beams. With selected, a tunnel detection function When the camera no longer detects the head- activates the low beams when the vehicle enters lights/taillights of other vehicles, your headlights a tunnel. will switch back to high beams after several seconds. With the headlight ring in the position: Steering wheel lever and ring • DRL will be off and the low beam headlights High beam flash will be on Toggle between high and low beams

High beam flash Pull the lever slightly toward the steering wheel. The high beams illuminate until the lever is released. Continuous high beams Continuous high beams are available if the ring is turned to 9 or . Toggle to high beams

8 The parking lights will be on in this position, even if the ignition is switched off. 9 When the low beams are on.

140 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Operation CAUTION Activate/deactivate this function by turning the ring on the left-side steering wheel lever to windshield sensors are blocked and the In the following situations, it may be necessary to switch between high and low beams . symbol are displayed. The symbol will go manually: If the ring is not in this position, toggling between out if this happens. • In heavy fog or rain high and low beams must be done manually. Automatic high beams may be temporarily • In blowing snow or slush If the ring is turned to another position while the unavailable (e.g., in heavy fog or rain). When the In bright moonlight high beams are on, the headlights will automati- system becomes active again or if the sensors in • cally switch to low beams. the windshield are no longer obscured, the mes- • In freezing rain sages will disappear and the symbol will • In areas with dim street lighting A white symbol ( ) in the instrument panel illuminate. indicates that the function has been activated. • When oncoming vehicles have dim front lighting When the high beams are on, the symbol will WARNING If there are pedestrians on or near the change to blue. • • Automatic high beams are a driving aid road designed to help provide the best possi- NOTE • If there are reflective objects, such as ble headlight illumination in good driving signs, near the road conditions. • Keep the windshield in front of the cam- • When oncoming vehicles' lights are era free of ice, snow, dirt, etc. • The driver is always responsible for man- obscured by e.g., fences, bushes, etc. ually toggling between high and low Do not mount or in any way attach any- • beams when this is required by traffic or • When there are vehicles on connecting thing on the windshield that could weather conditions. roads obstruct the camera. • At the top of hills or in dips in the road In sharp curves If a message is displayed in the instrument panel • saying that active high beams are temporarily unavailable, switching between high and low Auxiliary lights* beams will have to be done manually. However, If the vehicle is equipped with auxiliary lights, the the light switch can remain in the position. driver can use the center display to activate/ The same applies if a message saying that the deactivate them or decide if they will go on/off along with the high beams10.

10 These lights must be connected to the vehicle's electrical system by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Related information Active Bending Lights* NOTE • City Safety™ troubleshooting (p. 287) Active Bending Lights (ABL) are designed to This function is only active in twilight or dark help light up a curve according to movements of • Lighting panel and controls (p. 137) conditions, and only when the vehicle is in the steering wheel. motion.

Deactivating/activating the function ABL can be deactivated/activated in two ways in the center display: Via Function view Tap the Active Bending Lights button.

Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light function Via settings deactivated (left) and activated (right) 1. Tap Settings in Top view. ABL is activated automatically11 when the engine 2. My Car Lights Exterior Lights is started and can be deactivated in the center Tap . display. 3. Deselect/select Active Bending Lights. If a fault is detected in the system, the Related information symbol in the instrument panel will illuminate. A • Settings view (p. 108) text message will be displayed and an additional symbol will also illuminate.

11 The factory default setting is on.

142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Brake lights Rear fog lights Related information The brake lights illuminate automatically when The rear fog lights are considerably brighter than • Lighting panel and controls (p. 137) the brakes are applied. the normal taillights and should be used only when conditions such as fog, rain, snow, smoke In addition to illuminating when the brake pedal is or dust reduce visibility for other vehicles to less depressed, the brake lights also illuminate when than 500 ft. (150 meters). one of the driver support systems (e.g., adaptive cruise control, City Safety or collision warning) slow the vehicle. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 258) • City Safety™ (p. 279) • Emergency brake lights (p. 342)

Rear fog light button The rear fog lights can only be used when the ignition is in mode II or if the engine is running and the light switch is turned to or . Press the button to turn the fog lights on/off. The rear fog light indicator symbol in the instrument panel illuminates when the rear fog lights are switched on. The rear fog lights turn off automatically when the engine is turned off or when the light switch is turned to the or positions.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Hazard warning flashers Parking lights that the headlight control is in or which mode the The hazard warning flashers should be used to Turn the parking lights on by turning the ring on ignition is in. indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic the left-side steering wheel lever. Related information hazard. • Lighting panel and controls (p. 137) When the function is activated, both turn signal indicators in the instrument panel will flash.

Lighting ring in the parking light position Turn the ring to the position (the license plate lighting comes on at the same time). Hazard warning flasher button Canadian models: If the ignition is in position II Press the button to activate the flashers. Press or the engine is running, the daytime running the button again to turn off the flashers. lights will also be on. Regulations regarding the use of the hazard With the ring in this position, the parking lights warning flashers may vary, depending on where will remain on even when the ignition is switched you live. off, however, the rear parking lights will not be on 0 Related information if the ignition is in model . • Using turn signals (p. 148) In dark ambient lighting conditions, the rear parking lights also illuminate when the tailgate is opened to alert anyone traveling behind your vehicle. This happens regardless of the position

144 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Approach lighting Home safe lighting Passenger compartment lighting Approach lighting activates the parking lights, The home safe lighting function illuminates the The passenger compartment lighting is con- outer door handle lights*, license plate lighting, area in front of the vehicle in dark conditions. trolled using the buttons in the ceiling above the courtesy lighting and footwell lighting when you front and rear seats. approach the vehicle. This function turns on the headlights, parking lights, outer door handle lights*, license plate All passenger compartment lighting can be This function is activated by unlocking the car. lights, front ceiling lighting and footwell lighting turned on and off manually within 30 minutes for a set amount of time. after: The time interval for this lighting can be set on the center display. The length of time that these lights remain illumi- • the vehicle is unlocked but the engine has nated can be set in the center display: not been started The function can be deactivated/activated in the center display: 1. Tap Settings in Top view. • the engine is switched off and the ignition is in mode 0. 1. Tap Settings in Top view. 2. Tap My Car Lights Exterior Lights Home Safety Lights. Front interior lighting 2. Tap My Car Lights Exterior Lights. 3. Select Off, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 sec. 3. Deselect/select Welcome Light. To activate home safe lighting: Related information • Settings view (p. 108) 1. Switch off the ignition (mode 0). • Home safe lighting (p. 145) 2. Push the turn signal lever as far as possible • Remote key (p. 229) towards the dashboard and release it. 3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors. Related information • Using the center display (p. 47) • Settings view (p. 108) Controls in the ceiling console for front reading lights and courtesy lighting Driver's side reading light

Courtesy lighting

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Courtesy lighting (AUTO) switch Rear interior lighting Rear courtesy lighting Passenger's side reading light Rear reading lights Front reading lights Turn the reading lights on or off by pressing the respective buttons briefly. Adjust the brightness by pressing and holding the button. Courtesy lighting Turn the footwell and overhead courtesy lighting on or off by pressing the button briefly. Courtesy lighting switch Activate the automatic function by briefly pressing the AUTO button in the ceiling console. The Rear reading lights: third row of seats* indicator light in the button will illuminate. With Rear reading lights: second row of seats The rear courtesy lighting is turned on or off by AUTO activated, the courtesy lighting will switch briefly pressing the button in the ceiling console. on and off as follows: The rear interior lighting/reading lights are located in the ceiling. Adjust the brightness by pressing and holding The courtesy lighting: the button. Turn them on or off by briefly pressing the button • comes on when the vehicle is unlocked and in the side console. Adjust the brightness by when the ignition is switched off Glove compartment lighting pressing and holding the button. The glove compartment lighting comes on or goes off when the engine is started and • goes off when the glove compartment is opened when the vehicle is locked or closed. • comes on or goes off when one of the side doors is opened or closed Vanity mirror lighting • remains on for 2 minutes if a side door is The vanity mirror lighting comes on or goes off open when the cover over the mirror is opened or closed. The courtesy lighting switches off when: Cargo area lighting The cargo area lighting comes on or goes off when the tailgate is opened or closed.

146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Ground lighting Mood lighting* The ground lighting comes on or goes off when a When the overhead courtesy lighting has gone door is opened or closed. out and the engine is running, several LEDs located near the roof console illuminate to pro- Doorsill lighting vide faint lighting to help e.g., see objects in stor- The doorsill lighting comes on or goes off when a age compartments. This lighting goes out just door is opened or closed. after the overhead courtesy lighting when the Ambience lighting vehicle is locked. 1. In the center display's Top view, select The following settings can be made for the mood Settings My Car Lights Ambient lighting in the center display: Lighting Brightness 2. Choose among the following settings: 1. In the center display's Top view, select The intensity of the mood lighting can also be fine-tuned Settings My Car Lights Interior using the thumb wheel (on the dashboard to the left of Under Ambient Light Intensity, choose: • Mood Lighting the steering wheel) Off, Low or High. . • Ambient Light Level: Reduced or Full. 2. Press Interior Mood Light Intensity and Related information choose Off, Low or High. • Lighting panel and controls (p. 137) Change the color of the light • Ignition modes (p. 362) 1. In the center display's Top view, select Settings My Car Lights Interior Mood Lighting. 2. Choose By Temperature, By Theme or Theme Colors.

The ambience lighting can also be fine-tuned using the thumb wheel (on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Using turn signals lever can be returned to its initial position by Messages in the instrument panel The turn signals are controlled using the left hand. and center display steering wheel lever. The turn signals flash three Information and warning messages are dis- times or continuously, depending on how far up NOTE played in the instrument panel and center dis- or down the lever is moved. • This automatic flashing sequence can be play. interrupted by immediately moving the Instrument panel lever in the opposite direction. • If the turn signal indicator flashes faster than normal, check for a burned-out turn signal bulb.

Related information • Lighting panel and controls (p. 137) • Hazard warning flashers (p. 144) • Settings view (p. 108)

Turn signals Short flashing sequence Message in the instrument panel The driver can automatically flash the turn High-priority messages are displayed in the signals 3 times by moving the left steering instrument panel. wheel lever up or down to the first position Messages may appear in different parts of the and releasing it. This function can be acti- instrument panel depending on their context. The vated/deactivated in the center display. message will time out after a short period of time Continuous flashing sequence or disappear when it has been confirmed or if action has been taken. Messages that need to be Move the lever as far up or down as possible stored will be saved under My car messages in to start the turn signals. the center display's Top view. The turn signals will be cancelled automatically by the movement of the steering wheel, or the

148 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

The message may be displayed along with graph- Message Action Center display ics, symbols or buttons for e.g., confirming the message or accepting a request. Time for Time for the next scheduled mainte- B Service messages service. Contact a workshop nance as soon as possible. The following table lists a selection of important service messages and the action that should be Mainte- Time for the next scheduled taken. nance over- service. Contact a workshopB. due If the service schedule is not Message Action followed, this may void all or part of the vehicle's warranty Stop Stop and switch off the and result in damage to vehi- A safely engine. There is a risk of seri- cle components. ous damage to the vehicleB. Temporarily A function has been temporar- Message in the center display's status bar Turn off Stop and switch off the offA ily deactivated and will be Messages with lower priority for the driver are engineA engine. There is a risk of seri- reactivated automatically while shown in the center display. ous damage to the vehicleB. driving or after the engine is Most of the messages are shown in the center B restarted. Service Contact a workshop to have display's status bar. The message times out after urgent the vehicle inspected immedi- A Part of the message is context-dependent. a short period of time or disappears if it has been Drive to B Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service ately. technician. confirmed or if action has been taken. Messages workshopA that need to be stored are saved under My car messages in Top view. Stop Contact a workshopB to have safelyA the vehicle inspected as soon Some messages in the center display contain as possible. one or more buttons for e.g., confirming the message or accepting a request. Book time Time for the next scheduled for mainte- service. Contact a workshopB. Messages' form can vary and they may be dis- nance played with graphics, symbols or buttons for e.g., confirming a message or accepting a request.

}}

149 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Pop-up messages Handling messages in the 2. Confirm a choice by pressing (2). Messages are sometimes displayed in pop-up instrument panel and center display > The message will disappear from the windows. Messages of this type have higher pri- instrument panel. ority than ones in the status bar and must be Instrument panel For messages without buttons: confirmed or action must be taken before they disappear. Messages that need to be stored are – Close the message by pressing (2) or let the saved under My car messages in Top view. message time-out after a short period. > The message will disappear from the Related information instrument panel. • Instrument panel (p. 125) • Center display overview (p. 30) If a message needs to be saved, it will be stored in the Car status app, which can be opened in the center display's App view. Car message stored in Car status application will be displayed at this time in the center display. Center display Messages in the instrument panel and the right-side steering wheel keypad Left/right arrow keys

Confirm Some messages in the instrument panel contain one or more buttons for e.g., confirming a message or accepting a proposal. Handling new messages For messages with buttons: 1. Navigate among the buttons available by pressing the left/right arrow keys (1). Message in the center display Some buttons in the center display have a button (or several buttons in a pop-up) to make it possi-

150 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS ble to e.g., activate/deactivate a function related Handling messages stored from the Reading saved messages to the message. instrument panel and center display Reading a saved message immediately: Handling new messages Messages saved from the instrument – Tap the button to the right of the message For messages with buttons: Car message stored in Car status panel application – Tap the button to carry out the action or let in the center display. the message time-out after a short period. > The saved message will be displayed in Car status > The message will disappear from the cen- the app. ter display's status bar. Reading a saved message at a later time: For messages without buttons: 1. Open the Car status app in the center dis- – Close the message by tapping it or let the play's App view. message time-out after a short period. > The app will open in Home view's lowest > The message will disappear from the cen- sub-view. ter display's status bar. 2. Select the Messages tab in the app. If a message needs to be saved, it will be stored > A list of saved messages will be displayed. in the center display's Top view. Saved messages and possible selections in the Car 3. Tap the arrow to the right to expand/mini- Related information status app mize the message. • Messages in the instrument panel and center Messages that have been dis- > More information about the message will display (p. 148) played in the instrument panel appear in the list and the image to the left in the app will show information about the • Using the instrument panel App menu and need to be saved are (p. 153) stored in the Car status app, message in graphic form. which can be opened in the center display's App view. Car message stored in Car status application will be displayed at this time in the center display.

}}

151 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Handling a saved message Messages saved from the center display Messages saved in Top view are erased automat- In expanded form, some messages have two but- ically when the engine is switched off. tons for booking service or reading the owner's manual. Related information • Handling messages in the instrument panel Booking service: and center display (p. 150) – With the message in expanded form, tap Request appoint./Call to make Appointment12 to book a service/repair appointment. > Request appoint.: the Appointments tab will open in the app and create a request for a service/repair appointment. Saved messages and possible selections in Top view Call to make Appointment: the phone app will start and initiate a call to your pre- Messages that have been shown in the center ferred retailer to make a service/repair display and need to be saved are stored in the appointment. center display's Top view. Reading the owner's manual: Reading a saved message 1. Open the center display's Top view. – With the message in expanded form, tap Owner's manual to read the section of the > A list of saved messages will be displayed. owner's manual related to the message. The ones with an arrow to the right can be expanded. > The owner's manual will open in the center display and provide information related 2. Tap the arrow to the right to expand/mini- to the message. mize the message. Messages stored in the app will be erased auto- Handling a saved message matically each time the engine is started. Some messages have a button to e.g., activate/ deactivate a function related to the message. – Tap the button to carry out the action.

12 Certain markets only.

152 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Using the instrument panel App Opening/closing the App menu Using the windshield wipers menu – Press the App menu (1). Before using the wipers, ice and snow should The App (application) menu in the instrument The App menu cannot be opened if there are be removed from the windshield. Be sure the panel is controlled using the right-side steering unread/unconfirmed messages in the instru- wiper blades are not frozen in place. wheel keypad. ment panel. The message must be confirmed before the App menu can be opened. > The App menu opens/closes. The App menu closes automatically after a period of inactivity or after certain selections are made. Navigating and making selections in the App menu 1. Navigate between the various apps by pressing left or right (3). > Functions for the preceding/next app will be displayed in the App menu. Right-side steering wheel lever 2. Scroll through the current app's selections App menu and right-side steering wheel keypad using up or down (4). Thumb wheel to set rain sensor* sensitivity/ App menu interval wiper speed 3. Confirm or select a function by pressing (2). Left/right > The function will be activated and in cer- Single sweep tain cases, the App menu will close. Move the lever down and release it for a Up/down single sweep. Confirm Related information Wipers off • Instrument panel App menu (p. 126) Move the lever to position 0 to turn off the windshield wipers. Interval wipers Set the wiper interval speed by moving the thumb wheel upward or downward.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Continuous wipers Activating/deactivating the rain Activate the rain sensor by pressing the Move the lever upward for the wipers to sensor button. The wipers will make one sweep. operate at normal speed. The rain sensor monitors the amount of water on If the lever is pressed down, the wipers will make the windshield and automatically regulates wiper additional sweeps across the windshield. NOTE speed. Move the thumb wheel upward for increased sen- Before using the wipers, be sure that the sitivity or downward for decreased sensitivity. The wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind- wipers will make one extra sweep if the thumb shield and that any ice or snow on the wind- wheel is moved upward. shield has been removed. Deactivating the rain sensor Move the lever upward to the next posi- Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the tion for maximum wiper speed. button or by moving the lever upward to another wiper position. Related information • Tailgate window wiper and washer (p. 156) The rain sensor is automatically deactivated in ignition mode 0. • Activating/deactivating the rain sensor (p. 154) The rain sensor is also automatically deactivated • Windshield and headlight washers (p. 155) Right-side steering wheel lever when the wipers blades are put in the service position and will reactivate when the wipers have Rain sensor button been returned to the normal operating position. Thumb wheel for adjusting sensitivity/interval wiper speed CAUTION When the rain sensor is activated, the Deactivate the rain sensor when washing the symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel. vehicle in an automatic car wash if the engine is running or if the ignition is left in mode I or Activating the rain sensor II. The symbol in the instrument panel will go When activating the rain sensor, the engine must out. If the rain sensor is not deactivated, the be running or the ignition must be in mode I or II. wipers may start inadvertently in the car wash The windshield wiper lever must also be in posi- and could be damaged. tion 0 or in the single sweep position.

154 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Activating/deactivating the memory Windshield and headlight washers CAUTION function Use the windshield/headlight washers to help Use ample washer fluid when washing The rain sensor's memory function can be set to improve visibility. • the windshield. The windshield should be activate the rain sensor each time the engine is thoroughly wet when the wipers are in started: Starting the windshield and headlight washers operation. 1. In the center display, select Settings My • Avoid using the washers if the fluid reser- Car Wipers voir is frozen or empty to help avoid damage to the pump. 2. Activate by selecting the Rain Sensor Memory box. When the washing system is used, the length of Deactivate by deselecting the Rain Sensor time that the windshield washers operate Memory box. depends on the ambient temperature. In cold weather, the amount of washer fluid used will Related information also be increased automatically to help improve • Using the windshield wipers (p. 153) cleaning. • Windshield wipers in the service position (p. 495) Heated washer nozzles* The washer nozzles are heated automatically in • Tailgate window wiper and washer (p. 156) Washing function cold weather to help prevent the washer fluid – Move the right-side steering wheel lever from freezing. toward the wheel to start the windshield and headlight washers. High-pressure headlight washing* > After the lever is released the wipers High-pressure headlight washing consumes a make several extra sweeps. large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the headlights are washed once for every five times the windshield is washed. Reduced washing When approx. 1 US quart (1 liter) of washer fluid remains in the reservoir, the headlights will no longer be washed to conserve fluid.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| A text message and the symbol will be dis- Tailgate window wiper and washer Tailgate wiper and reverse gear played in the instrument panel to remind the Start the tailgate window wiper/washer with con- 1. In the center display, select Settings My driver to fill the washer fluid reservoir. trols on the right-side steering wheel lever. Car Wipers. Related information NOTE 2. Activate/deactivate by selecting/deselecting • Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir the Auto Rear Wiper box. (p. 498) The rear wiper is equipped with a cut-off function, which means that it will not operate If the windshield wipers are on and the transmis- Using the windshield wipers (p. 153) • if its electric motor overheats. The wiper will sion is put into reverse gear, the tailgate wiper • Tailgate window wiper and washer (p. 156) function again after a cool-down period will start. This function is deactivated when a dif- (30 seconds or longer, depending on the heat ferent gear is selected. of the motor and ambient temperature condi- Related information tions). • Using the windshield wipers (p. 153) • Windshield and headlight washers (p. 155) Using the tailgate wiper/washer • Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir (p. 498) • Activating/deactivating the rain sensor (p. 154)

Press for tailgate interval wiper

Press for tailgate continuous wiper – Move the lever forward to wash/wipe the tailgate window.

156 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Steering wheel Horn • Using the instrument panel App menu The steering wheel has controls for the horn, (p. 153) certain optional driver support systems, menus/ • Phone (p. 406) messages and paddles for manually shifting gears*.

The horn is located in the steering wheel hub. Related information • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 158) Steering wheel keypads and paddles* • Turning steering wheel heating* on and off (p. 193) Driver support system controls13 • Cruise Control (CC) (p. 254) Paddles for manually shifting gears* • Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 290) Keypad for voice controls, adjusting the • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 258) head-up display*accessing menus and mes- • Distance Alert* (p. 322) sages, and handling phone calls • Pilot Assist* (p. 265) • Steering wheel paddles* (p. 390) • Voice control (p. 117) • Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 114)

13 Cruise control*, Speed limiter *, Adaptive cruise control*, Distance alert* and Pilot Assist*.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Adjusting the steering wheel WARNING Seats The steering wheel can be adjusted to various The vehicle is equipped with 7 seats. The front Never adjust the steering wheel while driving. positions. seats can be adjusted electroncially or manually. The second and third row seats are adjusted pri- If the vehicle is equipped with the optional marily manually. speed-dependent power steering, the level of steering force can be adjusted. The force level is The adjustment settings for the power front adjusted according to the vehicle's speed. seats*, door mirrors and the head-up display can be stored in memory buttons. Related information • Steering wheel (p. 157) Using the multi-function control*, comfort in the front seats can be further enhance by e.g., adjust- • Adjustable steering force* (p. 316) ing the lumbar support or extending the length of the front seat cushion. The rear seats can be folded down and their head restraints can be adjusted. The second row Adjusting the steering wheel seats can be moved forward/rearward and their backrest tilt can also be changed. Lever for releasing/locking the steering wheel Related information Possible positions • Adjusting power front seats* (p. 160) The steering wheel's height and reach can be • Adjusting function settings in the multifunc- adjusted. To do so: tional front seats* (p. 164) Manually operated front seats (p. 159) 1. Push the lever down to release the steering • wheel. • Using the power seat memory function* (p. 161) 2. Adjust the steering wheel to a suitable posi- Folding the second row backrests (p. 169) tion. • • Getting into and out of the third row of seats 3. Pull back the lever to lock the steering wheel (p. 171) in place. If the lever is difficult to pull into place, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you pull the lever.

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

• Moving the second row seats forward/rear- Manually operated front seats WARNING ward (p. 171) The front seats can be adjusted in a number of Do not adjust the seat while driving. The Adjusting the second row backrest tilt ways to help provide the most comfortable seat- • • seat should be adjusted so that the brake (p. 168) ing position. pedal can be depressed fully. In addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow. • Check that the seat is securely locked into position after adjusting.

Related information • Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 195) • Power front seats* (p. 160) • Multifunctional front seats* (p. 162) • Seat belts (p. 62)

Raise/lower the front edge of seat cushion by pumping up/down Move the seat forward/rearward by pulling the bar upward and moving the seat. Change lumbar support by pressing the button* Raise/lower the seat by moving the control up/down Change backrest tilt by turning the wheel

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Power front seats* Adjusting power front seats* Related information The power front seats offer a number of adjust- The power front seat(s) can be adjusted to many • Power front seats* (p. 160) ment possibilities to help maximize comfort and positions to help improve comfort and ergonom- • Using the power seat memory function* ergonomics. ics. (p. 161) The power seats have an overload protector that • Multifunctional front seats* (p. 162) activates if a seat is blocked by any object. If this • Seat belts (p. 62) occurs, put the ignition in mode I or 0 and wait for a short period before operating the seat again. The power seat(s) can be adjusted for a short period after unlocking the door with the remote key without switching the ignition on. Seat adjustment can always be made when the engine is running. Related information • Multifunctional front seats* (p. 162) Adjust lumbar support by pressing the con- • Adjusting power front seats* (p. 160) trol up/down/forward/rearward • Using the power seat memory function* Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cush- (p. 161) ion by moving the control up/down • Manually operated front seats (p. 159) Raise/lower the seat by moving the control • Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 195) up/down • Turning front seat ventilation* on and off Move the seat forward/rearward by moving (p. 196) the control forward/rearward • Easy access to and from the driver seat Change backrest tilt by moving the control (p. 166) forward/rearward Only one of the power seat's controls can be used at the same time. The front seat backrests can be folded down completely.

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Adjusting the passenger's seat from Using the power seat memory the driver's seat* function* Using the controls on the side of the driver's The memory function can be used to store the seat, the driver can adjust the position of the settings (positions) of the power front seats*, front passenger's seat. door mirrors and the head-up display. Three different settings can be stored using this function. Activating the function in the center Memory controls are found on one or both of the display front doors*. From the center display, the function can be activated in two ways. After activating the function, adjust the passenger's seat within 10 seconds. If no adjustments Power seat controls are made in that time span, the function deactivates automatically. Move the passenger's seat forward/rearward by moving the control forward/rearward. Activating from Function view Change the passenger seat's backrest tilt by moving the control forward/rearward. Related information • Power front seats* (p. 160) • Adjusting power front seats* (p. 160) Button for storing a position • Seat belts (p. 62) 1. Go to the center display's Function view. Button for storing a position 2. Activate the function by tapping Adjust passenger seat. Button for storing a position Activating from Settings M (memory) button – In the center display, select Settings My Storing a position Car Seats Adjust Passenger Seat 1. Adjust the seat, door mirrors and head-up From Driver Position. display to the desired positions.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| 2. Press and release the M button. The indica- The seat, door mirrors and head-up display will Multifunctional front seats* tor light in the button will illuminate. stop automatically if the button is released before In addition to the adjustment settings offered by the they have reached the stored positions. 3. Press button 1, 2 or 3 within 3 seconds to the power seat controls, the multifunction control store the current position of the seat/ provides additional possibilities for convenience mirrors/head-up display in the selected but- WARNING and comfort. ton. • Because the driver's seat can be adjusted > When the position has been stored in the with the ignition off, children should never selected button, an audible signal will be left unattended in the vehicle. sound and the indicator light in the M but- • Movement of the seat can be STOPPED ton will go out. at any time by pressing any button on the If none of the buttons (1, 2 or 3) is pressed power seat control panel. within 3 seconds, the indicator light in the M but- • Do not adjust the seat while driving. The ton will go out and the position will not be stored. seat should be adjusted so that the brake pedal can be depressed fully. In addition, The seat/mirrors/head-up display must be position the seat as far rearward as com- moved before a new position can be stored. fort and control allow. Using a stored position • The seat rails on the floor must not be A stored position can be used when one of the obstructed in any way when the seat is in Multifunction control on the side of the seat motion. front doors is opened or closed: The multifunction control can be used to adjust Front door open lumbar support, the backrest's side bolsters, the Related information – Press one of the bottons (1–3) briefly. The length of the seat cushion and the massage Adjusting power front seats* (p. 160) seat, door mirrors and head-up display will • function*. The adjustment settings made with the move to the positions stored in that button. • Power front seats* (p. 160) control are shown in the center display* and certain settings can be made directly from the cen- Front door closed ter display. – Press and hold one of the buttons (1–3) until the seat, door mirrors and head-up display Center display have moved to the positions stored in that The adjustment settings for the driver and pas- button. senger seats made using the multifunction control are shown in the center display. If only one seat is adjusted, the settings are shown in the

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS center of the display. If both seats are adjusted, Operating multifunctional front Navigating in the seat adjustment settings the settings for the driver seat are shown on the seats* using the center display upper half of the screen and the ones made for Multifunction seat adjustments are made using Tap any of the functions in the center display to the passenger seat are on the lower half. the controls on the side of the seat. The results activate/deactivate the selected function/setting. are shown at the same time in the center dis- Press the Home button on the center console to Related information exit the seat adjustment setting view. play*. • Multifunctional front seats* (p. 162) Related information Navigating in seat adjustment settings • Adjusting function settings in the multifunc- • Power front seats* (p. 160) using the multifunction controls tional front seats* (p. 164) • Operating multifunctional front seats* When control 1 on the side of the seat is used, (p. 163) the seat's position settings are shown in the center display. • Adjusting function settings in the multifunctional front seats* (p. 164) • Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 195)

Multifunction control on the side of the seat Turn the control up or down to move the cur- sor in the center display one step upward or downward.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Adjusting function settings in the The following massage settings are available: multifunctional front seats* • On/Off. The multifunction controls on the side of the seat • Program 1-5: There are 5 preset massage as well as the center display can be used to programs. Select Swell, Tread, Advanced, make seat adjustments. The adjustment settings Lumbar or Shoulder. Select Restart to are shown in the center display*. restart the selected program. • Intensity: Select Low, Normal or High. • Speed: Select Slow, Normal or Fast. The massage function can only be used when the engine is running. Adjusting the side bolsters in the front seats* The side bolsters in the front seat backrests can be inflated/deflated to adjust the amount of support provided.

Multifunction control on the side of the seat Turn the control up or down to activate. Massage view in the center display Front seat massage settings* 1. Activate the multifunction control by turning The front seat backrests have a massage func- it up or down. Seat settings will be displayed tion. Air-filled cushions provide the massaging in the center display. action and a number of settings are available. 2. Select Massage in the seat settings view. 3. Select settings by tapping the center display. Change a setting in one of the seat functions by tapping the arrows on the center display. Select Massage in the seat settings menu.

164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Adjusting lumbar support* 2. Select Lumbar in the seat settings view. Lumbar support can be adjusted up/down/front/ • Tap the button up/down to move lumbar rear. support up/down. • Tap the front button to make lumbar support firmer. • Tap the rear button to make lumbar support softer.

Extending the seat cushion* The seat cushion can be extended/retracted.

Side bolster view in the center display 1. Activate the multifunction control on the side of the seat by moving it up/down. The seat settings view will appear in the center dis- Lumbar support view in the center display play. 1. Activate the multifunction control on the side 2. Select Side bolsters in the seat settings of the seat by moving it up/down. The seat view. settings view will appear in the center dis- • Tap the front button to increase bolster play. support. • Tap the rear button to decrease bolster support. Seat cushion extension view in the center display }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| 1. Activate the multifunction control on the side Rear seats Easy access to and from the driver of the seat by moving it up/down. The seat Your vehicle has three rows of seats. The sec- seat settings view will appear in the center dis- ond row of seats has three individual seating The Easy Ingress & Egress function can be play. positions and the optional third row of seats has used to make getting into and out of the driver's 2. Select Cushion extension in the seat set- two individual seating positions. seat easier. tings view. Easy egress Related information • Tap the front button to extend the cush- To make getting out of the driver's seat easier, ion. • Adjusting the second row backrest tilt the seat is lowered, the side bolsters deflate and (p. 168) • Tap the rear button to retract the cushion. the seat cushion retracts at the same time. • Adjusting the second row head restraints Related information (p. 167) The easy egress function must be activated in the center display. • Multifunctional front seats* (p. 162) • Folding the second row backrests (p. 169) 1. Move the gear selector to the P position. • Operating multifunctional front seats* • Folding the third row backrests (p. 172) (p. 163) • Getting into and out of the third row of seats 2. Switch off the engine. (p. 171) 3. Unbuckle the seat belt. • Moving the second row seats forward/rear- 4. Open the driver's door. ward (p. 171) > The seat, side bolsters and seat cushion • Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 195) all move at the same time to a position that makes it easier to leave the seat. Easy ingress The seat remains in the easy egress position when the driver leaves the vehicle. When the driver returns to the vehicle, the seat is in a position to make sitting down easier. When the driver is seated, has buckled the seat belt and has put the ignition in at least mode 1, the seat will return to the driver's preferred position.

166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Activating/deactivating the function Adjusting the second row head 1. In the center display, select Settings My restraints Car Seats. The center head restraint in the second row of 2. Activate/deactivate the function by select- seats can be adjusted to suit the height of the ing/deselecting the Easy Ingress & Egress seat's occupant. The outboard head restraints box. can be folded down* for a better rear view. Related information Adjusting the center head restraint • Power front seats* (p. 160) • Ignition modes (p. 362)

The center head restraint should be adjusted up or down according to the passenger's height. The restraint should be carefully adjusted to support the occupant's head. To lower the head restraint, press and hold the button (see the illustration) and push the head restraint down carefully.

Center head restraint button WARNING The center rear seat head restraint should only be in its lowest position when this seat is NOT occupied. When the center position is occupied, the head restraint should be correctly adjusted to the passenger’s height. The upper edge of the head restraint should be at least on a level with the upper-most point of the seat occupant's ear.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Electrically folding down the rear seat’s 2. In the center display, select Settings My Adjusting the second row backrest outboard head restraints* Car Seats Fold Headrest On tilt Second Row Seats to fold down the out- Backrest tilt can be adjusted separately for each board head restraints. of the second row seats. Center seat WARNING For safety reasons, no one should be allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat positions if the head restraints are folded down. If these positions are occupied, the head restraints should be in the upright (fixed) position.

The head restraints must be returned to the upright position manually until they click into The outboard head restraints can be folded down position. in two ways from the center display. WARNING From Function view The head restraint must be locked in the 1. Pull the strap on the center seat's right side. upright position after it has been folded up. 2. Adjust backrest tilt forward/rearward by Related information decreasing/increasing pressure on it. • Folding the second row backrests (p. 169) 3. Release the strap to lock the backrest in the • Center display overview (p. 30) new position and press the backrest until its lock engages. 1. Go to the center display's Function view. 2. Tap the Headrest fold button. Via settings 1. The ignition has to be in at least mode II.

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Outboard seats • Seat belts (p. 62) Folding the second row backrests The second row of seats has three individual seating positions whose backrests can be folded down separately.

CAUTION • To help avoid damage to the seat upholstery, before a rear seat backrest is folded down, remove any objects from the seat and ensure that the seat belts are not buckled. • The integrated booster cushion* in the center position must be stowed (folded 1. Pull the handle on the side of the seat down) before the backrest is folded upward. down. 2. Adjust backrest tilt forward/rearward by • The center seating position armrest must decreasing/increasing pressure on it. be folded up before the backrest is folded down. 3. Release the handle to lock the backrest in the new position and press the backrest until its lock engages. NOTE • It may be necessary to adjust the front WARNING seat backrests and/or move these seats forward in order to fold down the rear Check that all backrests are securely locked in place after changing the tilt angle. seat backrests completely. • It may also be necessary to move the Related information second row of seats rearward. • Rear seats (p. 166) • Moving the second row seats forward/rear- WARNING ward (p. 171) Adjust the seat and be sure it is locked in the • Folding the second row backrests (p. 169) new position before driving. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Center seat Outboard seats WARNING After being folded down, be sure the backrests are securely locked in place.

To return the backrest to the upright position: 1. Pull up and hold the handle on the side of the seat while the backrest is being folded up. 2. Be sure that the backrest and head restraint do not come in contact with the front seats while they are being folded up. Fold up the backrest and release the handle. To fold down the backrest: To fold down the backrest: 3. Press the backrest until its lock engages. 1. Fold down the head restraint manually. 1. Pull up and hold the handle on the side of 4. Fold up the head restraint manually. the seat while the backrest is being folded 2. Pull the strap on the center seat's right side. down. 3. Fold the backrest down until it locks in posi- WARNING 2. Be sure that the backrest and head restraint tion. The seat cushion will move downward/ Be sure the backrest and head restraint are do not come in contact with the front seats forward as the backrest is folded down to securely locked in position after they have while they are being folded down. Fold down create a flat surface. been folded up. until the backrest locks in place. To return the backrest to the upright position: > The seat cushion will move downward/ Related information forward as the backrest is folded down to 1. Pull the strap. • Rear seats (p. 166) create a flat surface. The head restraint 2. Fold the backrest and release the strap. folds down automatically when the back- • Adjusting the second row backrest tilt Push it into position until its lock engages. rest is folded down. (p. 168) 3. Adjust the head restraint if necessary. • Folding the third row backrests (p. 172) • Adjusting the second row head restraints (p. 167)

170 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Moving the second row seats Related information Getting into and out of the third row forward/rearward • Rear seats (p. 166) of seats The second row seats can be moved forward/ • Getting into and out of the third row of seats The second row seats can be moved for easier rearward individually to help optimize legroom for (p. 171) access to the third row of seats*. the passengers. Getting into and out of a third row seat

Lift the handle located under the seat. To fold down the backrest:

Move the seat forward/rearward to the 1. Pull the handle on the upper side of one of desired position. the outboard second row seats upward/ forward. 3. Release the handle and move the seat so that it locks in the new position. 2. Fold the backrest forward and move the entire seat forward. WARNING To return the backrest to the upright position: Be careful when moving the seat to avoid – Move the seat back and fold up the backrest injuries to your hands/fingers. until it locks in position. Check that the seat is securely locked in position after being moved.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| WARNING Folding the third row backrests 2. Be sure that the backrest and head restraint The third row of seats has two individual seating do not come in contact with the seat ahead Be sure the backrest and head restraint are positions that can be folded down manually or while they are being folded down. Fold the securely locked in position after they have backrest down. been folded up. electrically*. > The seat cushion will move downward/ NOTE forward as the backrest is folded down to Related information create a flat surface. The head restraint Before folding down the third row seats, it • Moving the second row seats forward/rear- folds down automatically when the backward (p. 171) may be necessary to change the position/tilt rest is folded down. • Adjusting the second row backrest tilt of the seats in the second row. (p. 168) To return the backrest to the upright position, fold the backrest up until it locks in position. The • Folding the second row backrests (p. 169) head restraint has to be folded up manually.

WARNING Be sure the backrest and head restraint are securely locked in position after they have been folded up.

Related information • Rear seats (p. 166) • Adjusting the second row head restraints (p. 167) 1. Pull the handle on the upper side of the • Adjusting the second row backrest tilt backrest upward/forward. (p. 168) • Moving the second row seats forward/rearward (p. 171)

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE CLIMATE

Climate control system • Air quality (p. 182) Perceived temperature The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Climate • Air distribution (p. 197) The climate system regulates passenger com- Control (ECC) that cools, heats, dehumidifies • Air conditioning refrigerant (p. 515) partment temperature based on the perceived and filters the air in the passenger compartment. temperature, not on the actual one. • Parking climate (preconditioning) (p. 175) 4-zone climate system The selected passenger compartment temperature is based on a physical perception relating to the current ambient temperature, air flow, humidity, sunlight in the passenger compartment, etc. The system's sunlight sensor monitors the side of the car where sunlight is entering the passenger compartment. This means that the actual temperature may differ between the right and left sides of the compartment, even if the temperature setting is the same for both sides. Related information • Climate system sensors (p. 175) 4-zone system climate zones • Climate control system (p. 174) The 4-zone climate system makes it possible to set the left- and right-side temperatures separately for the front and rears seats. All climate system settings are made from the center display and the buttons in the center console. Settings for the rear seats can also be made from the climate system panel on the rear side of the tunnel console. Related information • Climate system sensors (p. 175) • Perceived temperature (p. 174) • Climate system controls (p. 184)

174 CLIMATE

Climate system sensors Related information Parking climate (preconditioning) The climate system's sensors help regulate the • Climate control system (p. 174) The climate in the passenger compartment can passenger compartment temperature, humidity • Perceived temperature (p. 174) be preconditioned and maintained, even when level, etc. the vehicle is parked. For full functionality, the vehicle's charging cable must be connected. Location of the sensors

Humidity sensor: in the rearview mirror console. Ambient temperature sensor: in the passenger's side door mirror. Passenger compartment temperature sensor: near the center console buttons. Sunlight sensor: on the upper side of the dashboard. Parking climate/preconditioning and maintaining passenger compartment climate comfort is controlled from NOTE the Parking climate tab in the center display's Climate view. Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.

}}

175 CLIMATE

|| Preconditioning • Heating for the windshield, tailgate window Related information Preconditioning the vehicle before driving can and door mirrors can be activated. • Starting and stopping preconditioning help reduce wear and reduce energy consump- If preconditioning is used in warm weather, a cer- (p. 180) tion during a trip. tain amount of water may condense under the • Activating/deactivating the climate comfort vehicle, which is normal. retaining function* (p. 177) NOTE When preconditioning is used, this system will • Activating/deactivating the parking climate Full preconditioning is only possible when the attempt to establish a comfortable temperature in timer (p. 177) vehicle's charging cable is connected. the passenger compartment but not necessarily • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 375) the temperature currently set in the climate In other cases, the passenger compartment • Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 367) system. can be cooled for 3 minutes in warm weather. This function is started from the Parking Maintaining a comfortable passenger climate tab in the center display's Climate compartment climate view. The climate in the passenger compartment can be maintained even when the vehicle is parked With the charging cable connected, precondition- and the engine is turned off (e.g., if anyone ing can be started immediately or a timer function intends to remain in the vehicle). can start this procedure at a later time. This function can only be direct-started. This feature utilizes several of the vehicle's sys- This function utilizes several of the vehicle's systems: tems: The High Voltage Coolant Heater (HVCH) • Residual heat from the engine is used help warms the hybrid battery and passenger • keep the passenger compartment warm in compartment in cold weather. cool temperatures. In warm weather, the ventilation system will • In warm weather, the ventilation system will attempt to cool the passenger compartment • attempt to cool the passenger compartment to the current ambient temperature. to the current ambient temperature. In warm weather, the air conditioning system • This function will not be activated if the vehicle is will cool the passenger compartment to a locked from the outside in order to avoid using comfortable temperature. residual engine heat unnecessarily. This function • The electrically heated steering wheel and is primarily intended for use when the engine is seats can be activated. not running but someone remains in the vehicle.

176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE

Activating/deactivating the parking Related information Activating/deactivating the climate climate timer • Preconditioning timer (p. 178) comfort retaining function* With the vehicle's charging cable connected, • Setting the parking climate (preconditioning) This function helps keep the passenger com- the parking climate timer can be activated or timer (p. 178) partment comfortable if anyone remains in the deactivated at any time. • Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 367) vehicle after the engine has been switched off.

The timer button in the Parking climate tab in Climate Button for retaining climate comfort in the Parking view climate tab in Climate view 1. Open Climate view in the center display. 1. Open Climate view in the center display. 2. Tap Parking climate . 2. Tap Parking climate . 3. Activate/deactivate the timer by tapping the 3. Tap Keep climate comfort. button to the right of the setting. > The function for retaining climate comfort > The timer setting will be activated/deacti- in the passenger compartment will be vated and the indicator light in the button activated/deactivated and the indicator will be on/off. light in the button will be on/off.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177 CLIMATE

NOTE Preconditioning timer Setting the parking climate The timer can be set to start preconditioning at a (preconditioning) timer If there is not sufficient residual engine • predetermined time. The parking climate (preconditioning) timer can heat available, this function cannot be How- started be activated or deactivated at any time. The timer can store up to 8 preset times for: ever, the vehicle's changing cable must be • This function will be turned off if the vehi- A time on a particular date connected. cle is locked from the outside in order to • avoid using residual engine heat unnec- • A time on one or more days of the week, with Adding a timer essarily. This function is primarily or without the repeat function. intended for use when the engine is not running but someone remains in the vehi- NOTE cle Full preconditioning is only possible when the vehicle's charging cable is connected. In other cases, the passenger compartment can be cooled for 3 minutes in warm weather. This function is started from the Parking climate tab in the center display's Climate view.

Related information Timer button in the center display's Parking climate tab Parking climate (preconditioning) (p. 175) • 1. Open Climate view in the center display. 2. Tap Parking climate .

178 CLIMATE

3. Tap Add timer. Editing a timer setting 5. Tap Delete to confirm. > A pop-up window will open. 1. Open Climate view in the center display. > The timer setting will be deleted from the 2. Tap the Parking climate tab. list. NOTE 3. Tap the timer setting to be changed. A new timer setting cannot be made if there > A pop-up window will open. are already 8 timers set. Delete one of the existing timer settings in order to add a new 4. Change the setting as described in the sec- one. tion "Adding a timer setting" above. Deleting a timer setting 4. Tap Date to set a specific date for the timer setting. Tap Days to set a timer for one or more days of the week. For Days: activate/deactivate the repeat function by selecting/deselecting the Repeat weekly box. 5. For Date: Select a date for preconditioning by scrolling in the date list using the arrow keys. For Days: Select days of the week for pre- The button for editing a list/deleting a timer setting in conditioning by tapping the days' buttons. the Climate setting's Parking climate tab 6. Set the time at which preconditioning should 1. Open Climate view in the center display. be completed by scrolling with the arrows in the clock. 2. Tap the Parking climate tab. 7. Tap Confirm to add the timer setting. 3. Tap Edit list. > The timer settings will be added to the list 4. Tap the delete icon at the right in the list. and activated. > The icon will change to the text Delete.

179 CLIMATE

Starting and stopping The vehicle's doors and windows should be preconditioning closed during preconditioning. Preconditioning heats/cools the passenger com- Starting from a cell phone* partment prior to driving. Please note that the Starting preconditioning and checking the cur- charging cable must be connected. rent settings can be done from a cell phone with the Volvo On Call mobile app. Preconditioning Starting/stopping from the center display heats the passenger compartment to a comfortable temperature or cools the compartment to the current ambient temperature. If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Engine Remote Start (ERS), the air conditioning The window for seat/steering wheel heating in Climate can be used to pre-cool the passenger compart- view's Parking climate tab ment to a comfortable temperature. 3. Tap the boxes to select if seat/steering Related information wheel heating is to be activated/deactivated when preconditioning starts. • Setting the parking climate (preconditioning) timer (p. 178) Preconditioning 4. Tap . • Activating/deactivating the parking climate > Preconditioning starts/stops and the indi- timer (p. 177) The preconditioning button in the Parking climate tab cator lights in the buttons will be on/off. in Climate view. • Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 367) 1. Open Climate view in the center display. NOTE 2. Tap Parking climate . Full preconditioning is only possible when the vehicle's charging cable is connected. In other cases, the passenger compartment can be cooled for 3 minutes in warm weather. This function is started from the Parking climate tab in the center display's Climate view.

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE

Preconditioning symbols and messages A symbol and various texts relating to preconditioning may be displayed in the instrument panel.

Symbol Message Explanation Parking climate Preconditioning cannot be started because the hybrid battery's charge level is too low. Connect the Unavailable Battery level too low charging cable. In certain cases, the parking climate function can be started with limited functionality.

Parking climate Preconditioning cannot be started because the hybrid battery's charge level is too low. Connect the Unavailable, fuel and battery level charging cable. In certain cases, the parking climate function can be started with limited functionality. too lowA

Parking climate Preconditioning is not functioning properly. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo serv- Service required ice technician to have the system checked as soon as possible.

Parking climate Preconditioning is temporarily not functioning and will be reset automatically while the vehicle is being Unavailable Activation limited driven or when it is restarted.

A The reference to fuel level does not apply in North America.

181 CLIMATE

Air quality Clean Zone Interior Package Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* The materials used in the passenger compart- (CZIP)* The Interior Air Quality System uses a multifilter ment have been selected and designed to be The Clean Zone Interior Package includes a and an air quality sensor to remove gases, parti- pleasant and comfortable, even for people with number of features that help further reduce aller- cles and other contaminants from the air enter- asthma or other types of allergies. genic substances in the passenger compart- ing the passenger compartment. ment. Materials in the passenger compartment The IAQS sensor monitors increased levels of The materials used have been developed to help CZIP includes the following: contaminants in the outside air and if contaminants are detected, the air intake closes and the minimize the amount of dust and make the cabin An enhanced blower function that starts the • air inside the passenger compartment is recircu- easier to keep clean. blower when the vehicle is unlocked with the lated, i.e., no outside air enters the vehicle. The fil- All floor mats can be easily removed for cleaning. remote key to fill the passenger compart- ter also cleans recirculated passenger compart- Use car cleaning products recommended by ment with fresh air. This function starts auto- ment air. Volvo. matically when required and shuts off automatically after a short period or if one the Only use cleaning agents and car care products doors is opened. The time for which the NOTE recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and fol- blower operates decreases gradually due to The air quality sensor should always be low the instructions included with the car care reduced need until the vehicle is four years • engaged in order to obtain the best air in product. old. the passenger compartment. The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). Air filtering systems • • Recirculation is limited in cold weather to In addition to the passenger compartment filter, avoid fogging. NOTE the Clean Zone Interior Package* and the Interior • If the insides of the windows start fog- Air Quality System* contribute to a cleaner pas- In order to retain the CZIP standard, the IAQS ging, disengage the air quality sensor. senger compartment environment. filter must be replaced at the specified inter- Use the defroster function to increase vals. Consult your Volvo retailer. airflow to the front, side, and rear win- Related information dows. • Passenger compartment air filter (p. 183) See also the CZIP brochure for additional infor- Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* (p. 182) • mation. Activating/deactivating IAQS • Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* To change the setting for IAQS activation/deacti- (p. 182) vation: • Cleaning the interior (p. 500) 1. In the center display's Settings view, go to Climate.

182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE

2. Activate/deactivate IAQS by selecting/dese- Passenger compartment air filter Automatic climate control lecting the Air Quality Sensor box. All air entering the passenger compartment The Auto feature automatically controls a num- through the climate system air intake is filtered. ber of climate system functions. Related information • Air quality (p. 182) Filter replacement • Passenger compartment air filter (p. 183) The filter must be replaced according to the serv- • Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* ice schedule for your vehicle. When driving in e.g., (p. 182) dusty or industrial areas, the filer may need to be replaced more often. Consult your Volvo retailer. Related information • Air quality (p. 182) • Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* (p. 182) • Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* (p. 182) Volvo's service program (p. 462) • The Auto climate button in Climate view 1. Go to the center display's Climate view. 2. Tap or press and hold AUTO. > Auto mode is activated (button lights up)/ deactivated (button is off). Auto mode automatically controls air recirculation, air conditioning, and air distribution. Blower speed and temperature change depending on how long the button is pressed. • Tap: return to previous settings. • Press and hold: change to default settings (level 3 and 72 °F (22 °C).

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183 CLIMATE

|| Related information Climate system controls • Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 191) • Climate system controls in the center display Climate system functions are controlled using • Climate system voice commands (p. 119) (p. 185) buttons on the center console, the center display and the climate system panel on the rear side of the tunnel console. Overview of climate system controls

Climate system controls in the center display

Defroster buttons on the center console

Climate system panel on the rear side of the tunnel console Related information • Climate system controls in the center display (p. 185) • Climate control system (p. 174) • Rear climate system controls on the tunnel console (p. 186)

184 CLIMATE

Climate system controls in the Climate view center display Tap the center button on the climate bar to All climate system functions can be controlled access Climate view, which is divided into the fol- from the center display's climate bar and Cli- lowing tabs: Main climate, Rear climate and mate view. Parking climate Toggle between the tabs by swiping the screen from left to right and by tap- Climate bar ping the respective headings. The most common climate system functions can Main climate be controlled from the climate bar. In addition to the climate bar's functions, other primary climate system functions can also be controlled from the Main climate tab.

Max, Electric, Rear: controls for defrosting Temperature control for the driver and pas- windows and door mirrors. senger sides. AC: air conditioning controls. Control for heated* and ventilated* driver/ passenger seats and heated steering wheel*. Recirc: recirculation controls. Button for opening Climate view. The graphic Air distribution controls. in the button shows the activated climate system settings. Blower control for the front seats.

AUTO: climate system Auto mode.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185 CLIMATE

|| Rear climate Rear seat temperature control. Rear climate system controls on the All of the climate system functions for the rear tunnel console Rear seat heating control*. seat can be controlled from the Rear climate The rear seat climate system functions are con- tab. Parking climate1 trolled from the rear side of the tunnel console. All of the parking climate functions can be controlled from the Parking climate tab. Related information • Climate system controls (p. 184) • Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 191) • Air conditioning (p. 194) • Adjusting air distribution (p. 198) • Setting the temperature (p. 188) • Setting the blower speed (p. 187) • Automatic climate control (p. 183) • Turning steering wheel heating* on and off Rear seat heating* (p. 193) • Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 195) Rear seat blower speed Rear seat temperature control

Related information • Climate system controls (p. 184) Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 195) Blower control for the second row of seats. • • Setting the blower speed (p. 187) Blower control for the third row of seats. • Setting the temperature (p. 188)

1 XC90 T8 Plug-in Hybrid only.

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE

Setting the blower speed Setting the rear seat blower speed* From the rear seat The blower can be set to seven different speeds. From the front seat In models with the 4-zone climate system*, blower speed can be set separately for the front and rear seats. Setting blower speed for the front seats

Blower controls on the climate panel on the rear side of the tunnel console Blower control buttons in the Rear climate tab in Cli- mate view – Tap the desired blower level: Off or 1–5 on 1. Go to the center display's Climate view. the climate panel. > The blower speed will change and the Rear climate 2. Go to . button for the selected speed will light up. Blower control buttons in Climate view 3. Tap the desired blower speed: 1–5. 1. Go to the center display's Climate view. The blower can be turned off for the second NOTE 2. Tap the desired blower speed: Off, 1–5 or and third row of seats* by tapping 2nd row • Blower speed for the rear seat cannot be Max. climate. set if the front seat blower setting is Off. > The blower speed will change and the The blower speed for the third row of seats * • The climate system will adapt air flow button for the selected speed will light up. is the same as for the second row but can be within each set blower speed, which turned off separately* by tapping 3rd row means that the blower speed may vary NOTE climate. slightly. If the blower is turned off completely, the air > The blower speed will change and the conditioning is disengaged, which may result button for the selected speed will light up. in fogging on the windows.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187 CLIMATE

|| Related information Setting the temperature4 • Climate system controls in the center display The temperature can be set separately for the (p. 185) left and right sides of the passenger compart- • Rear climate system controls on the tunnel ment and for the front and rear seats separately. console (p. 186) Setting the temperature for the front seats

Temperature control 2. Set a temperature by: • dragging the control to the desired temperature or • tapping +/− to raise/lower the temperature. Temperature buttons in the climate bar > The temperature will change and the new 1. Tap the right or left side temperature button temperature will be shown in the button. in the center display's climate bar to open the control.

4 Shown here in Celsius but also applies to Fahrenheit

188 CLIMATE

Synchronizing the temperature Setting the rear seat temperature* From the front seat

Temperature control Synchronization button on the driver's side temperature 4. Set the temperature by: control Temperature buttons in the Rear climate group in Cli- dragging the control to the desired tem- 1. Tap the driver's side temperature button to • mate view perature or open the control. 1. Go the center display's Climate view. • tapping +/− to raise/lower the tempera- 2. Tap Synchronize temperature . 2. Go to Rear climate. ture. > The temperature for all of the vehicle's cli- > The temperature will change and the new 3. Tap the left or right side temperature buttons mate zones will be synchronized with the temperature will be shown in the button. one set for the driver's side and the syn- to open the control. chronization symbol will be displayed in the temperature button. Synchronization can be stopped by tapping Synchronize temperature again or by changing the temperature for the passenger's side or the rear seat.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189 CLIMATE

|| From the rear seat • Rear climate system controls on the tunnel Turning recirculation on and off console (p. 186) Recirculation can be used to shut out exhaust • Perceived temperature (p. 174) fumes, smoke, etc., from the passenger compartment.

Temperature controls on the climate panel on the rear side of the tunnel console – Tap the left or right side's buttons on climate panel to lower/raise the temperature. Recirculation button in Climate view > The temperature will change and the climate panel screen will show the new tem- 1. Go to Climate view in the center display. perature. 2. Press Recirc. > Recirculation is activated (button lights NOTE up)/deactivated (button is off) Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up by selecting a higher/lower temperature than NOTE the actual temperature required. • If recirculation is on for too long, there is a risk of condensation forming on the Related information insides of the windows, especially in win- • Climate system controls (p. 184) ter. • Climate system controls in the center display • Recirculation cannot be deactivated if (p. 185) max. defroster is being used.

190 CLIMATE

Activating/deactivating the recirculation Defrosting windows and mirrors Models without a heated windshield. timer The max. defroster, heated windshield* and – Press button (1). With the timer activated, recirculation will switch heated rear window/door mirror functions are > Max. defroster is activated (button indica- off automatically after 20 minutes. used to remove ice or condensation. tor light on)/deactivated (button indicator 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top Using the buttons in the center console light off). view. The buttons in the center console offer quick Models with a heated windshield*. 2. Tap Climate. access to the defroster functions. – Press button (1) repeatedly to access the 3. Activate/deactivate the timer by selecting/ On models with the optional heated windshield, function's three levels: deselecting the box for Recirculation the max. defroster function can only be activated • Activate windshield heating Timer. separately from the Climate view in the center display. • Activate windshield heating and max. Related information defroster • Climate system controls in the center display • Deactivated (p. 185) > The windshield heating is activated (button indicator light on)/deactivated (button indicator light off).

NOTE Max. defroster starts after a slight delay to avoid a brief increase in blower speed if the heated windshield function has been deactivated by pressing the button twice in quick succession. Center console buttons Button for the heated windshield* and max. Heated rear window and door mirrors defroster. – Press button (2). Button for the heated rear window and door mirrors. > Heating for the rear window/door mirrors is activated (button indicator light on)/ deactivated (button indicator light off).

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191 CLIMATE

|| From the center display's Climate view Activating/deactivating windshield Activating/deactivating rear window and Activate/deactivate max. defroster heating* door mirror heating

Max. defroster button in Climate view Windshield heating button in Climate view Rear window/door mirror heating button in Climate view 1. Go to Climate view in the center display. 1. Go to Climate view in the center display. 1. Go to Climate view in the center display. 2. Tap Max. 2. Tap Electric. 2. Tap Rear. > Max. defroster is activated (button lights > Windshield heating is activated (button > Rear window/door mirror heating is acti- up)/deactivated (button is off). lights up)/deactivated (button is off). vated (button lights up)/deactivated (button is off). Max. defroster overrides automatic climate NOTE control and recirculation, and activates the Automatically activating/deactivating the air conditioning, changes blower speed to • Triangular areas at the far sides of the defrosting function when the engine is 55 and the temperature to HI5. windshield are not heated electrically and started will take slightly longer to defrost/de-ice. When max. defroster is deactivated, the The rear window/door mirror/windshield heating* The heated windshield may affect the climate system returns to the previous • can be set to start automatically when the engine performance/range of e.g., transponders settings. is started. used to automatically pay highway tolls or other communication equipment. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view and select Climate.

5 In models with the 4-zone climate system*, front seats only.

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE

2. Activate/deactivate the respective defroster Turning steering wheel heating* on 2. Tap the steering wheel heating button functions when the engine is started by and off repeatedly to select one of four levels: Off, selecting/deselecting the boxes for Auto The steering wheel can be heated electrically for High, Middle or Low. Electric Front Defroster and Auto Electric added comfort. > The level changes and is displayed in the Rear Defroster. button. Activating/deactivating steering wheel The heating function will switch off automatically Automatic steering wheel heating when the window/mirror is sufficiently warm and heating The automatic function starts heating the steer- the ice/condensation has disappeared. ing wheel when the temperature is sufficiently Related information cold and turns it off automatically when the wheel • Climate system controls (p. 184) is sufficiently warm. • Climate system controls in the center display 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top (p. 185) view. • Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 191) 2. Tap Climate. • Air conditioning (p. 194) 3. Under Auto Steering Wheel Heating • Turning recirculation on and off (p. 190) Level, select Off, Low, Middle or High to • Adjusting air distribution (p. 198) activate/deactivate the automatic function. • Setting the blower speed (p. 187) Buttons for heated steering wheel and seats in the cli- Related information • Automatic climate control (p. 183) mate bar • Climate system controls (p. 184) • Turning front seat ventilation* on and off 1. Tap the driver side steering wheel and seat • Climate system controls in the center display (p. 196) button in the center display's climate bar to (p. 185) • Turning steering wheel heating* on and off open the steering wheel and seat heating • Steering wheel (p. 157) (p. 193) controls. If the vehicle is not equipped with the optional heated or ventilated seats, the button for steering wheel heating will be directly accessible in the climate bar.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193 CLIMATE

Air conditioning NOTE NOTE The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies the For the air conditioning to function opti- Air conditioning for the third row of seats can- air in the passenger compartment. • mally, close the side windows and lamina- not be activated if the main air conditioning Activating/deactivating the main air ted panoramic roof* unit or the air conditioning for the second row conditioning unit • The air conditioning cannot be activated of seats* is/are deactivated. 1. For the air conditioning to function optimally, if the blower is set to Off. close the side windows and laminated panor- Related information amic roof*. Activating/deactivating the rear air • Climate system controls in the center display conditioning unit (p. 185)

Air conditioning button in Climate view Air conditioning button in the Rear climate tab in Cli- 2. Go to Climate view in the center display. mate view 3. Tap AC. 1. Go to Climate view in the center display. > The air conditioning is activated (button 2. Go to Rear climate. lights up)/deactivated (button is off). 3. Tap 3rd row climate. > The air conditioning is activated (button lights up)/deactivated (button is off).

194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE

Turning seat heating* on and off Activating/deactivating rear seat heating From the rear seat The seats can be heated for added comfort in From the front seat* With the 4-zone climate system* cold weather. Activating/deactivating front seat heating

Temperature buttons for Rear climate in Climate view Seat heating indicator and control on the climate panel on the rear side of the tunnel console 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate bar view. – Tap repeatedly on the left or right side seat heating buttons on the climate panel on the 2. Climate 1. Tap the left or right side steering wheel and Tap . rear side of the tunnel console to select one seat button in the center display's climate 3. Under Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and of four levels: Off, High, Middle or Low. bar to open the steering wheel and seat Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level, heating controls. > The level changes and is displayed on the select Off, Low, Middle or High to activate/ screen in the climate panel. If the vehicle is not equipped with the deactivate and to select the desired level. optional heated steering wheel or ventilated NOTE seats, the button for seat heating will be directly accessible in the climate bar. Rear seat heating switches off automatically after 15 minutes. 2. Tap the seat heating button repeatedly to select one of four levels: Off, High, Middle or Low. > The level changes and is displayed in the button. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195 CLIMATE

|| Automatically activating/deactivating the Turning front seat ventilation* on Activating/deactivating front seat seat heating function when the engine is and off ventilation started Seat ventilation can be used e.g., to help remove The seat heating* can be set to start automati- dampness from the seat occupant's clothing. cally when the engine is started. The ventilation system consists of fans in the The automatic function starts heating the seats seats and backrests that draw air through the when the temperature is sufficiently cold and seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases as turns it off automatically when the seats are suffi- the air in the passenger compartment becomes ciently warm. cooler. This feature can be activated when the 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top engine is running and it monitors the seat's tem- view. perature, sunlight in the passenger compartment and the ambient temperature. 2. Tap Climate.

3. Under Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate bar Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level, 1. Tap the left or right side steering wheel and select Off, Low, Middle or High to activate/ seat button in the center display's climate deactivate the automatic function. bar to open the steering wheel and seat con- Related information trols. • Climate system controls (p. 184) If the vehicle is not equipped with the • Climate system controls in the center display optional heated steering wheel/seats, the (p. 185) button for seat ventilation will be directly • Rear climate system controls on the tunnel accessible in the climate bar. console (p. 186) 2. Tap the seat ventilation button repeatedly to select one of four levels: Off, High, Middle or Low. > The level changes and is displayed in the button.

196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE

NOTE Air distribution The incoming air is distributed through a number Seat ventilation cannot be started if the tem- of different vents in the passenger compartment. perature in the passenger compartment is too low. Air distribution overview For use over extended periods, the setting Low is recommended.

Related information • Climate system controls (p. 184) • Climate system controls in the center display (p. 185) Location of the air vents Four vents on the dashboard and one on each of the pillars between the front and rear doors, two vents on the rear side of the tunnel console and one vent on each of the pil- Air distribution with a 4-zone climate system lars behind the rear seats Adjustable air vents Related information There are 6, 8* or 10* adjustable air vents in the • Climate control system (p. 174) passenger compartment. • Adjusting air distribution (p. 198) • Opening/closing/directing air vents (p. 198) • Air distribution table (p. 200) • Automatic climate control (p. 183)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197 CLIMATE

Opening/closing/directing air vents Directing air flow Adjusting air distribution Some of the passenger compartment air vents Air distribution can be adjusted manually. can be open/closed/directed individually.

Direct the dashboard and door pillar outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost. Direct the vents into the passenger compartment to help maintain a comfortable temperature in warm weather. Opening/closing air vents

Air flow control 6

– Move the control from side to side or up/ Air distribution buttons in Climate view down to direct the flow of air from the vent. Defrost the windshield Related information • Air distribution (p. 197) Air vents in the dashboard and center console • Adjusting air distribution (p. 198) Floor air vents • Air distribution table (p. 200) 1. Go to Climate view in the center display. Air vent thumb wheel 6 2. Tap one or more of the air distribution but- – Turn the thumb wheel to open/close the air tons to open/close the corresponding air flow from the vent. flow. > Air distribution changes and the buttons The more of the white line on the thumb light up or go out. wheel that is visible, the greater the air flow.

6 The illustration is generic; its design varies, depending on its location.

198 CLIMATE

Related information • Air distribution (p. 197) • Opening/closing/directing air vents (p. 198) • Air distribution table (p. 200) • Climate system controls in the center display (p. 185)

199 CLIMATE

Air distribution table Air distribution can be adjusted manually.

Air distribution Use If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate system will revert to automatic mode.

Main air flow from the defroster vents, some flow from the other vents. To remove ice and condensation (with moderate blower speed).

Main air flow from the defroster and dashboard vents, some flow from the other For best comfort in hot and dry weather. vents.

Main air flow from the dashboard vents, some flow from the other vents. For best cooling in hot weather.

200 CLIMATE

Air distribution Use Main air flow from the defroster and floor vents, some flow from the other vents. For best comfort and defrosting in humid conditions.

Main air flow from the dashboard and floor vents, some flow from the other vents. For good comfort in sunny, cool weather.

Main air flow from the floor vents, some flow from the other vents. For cooling or heat to the floor.

Main air flow from the defroster, dashboard and floor vents. For cooler air toward the floor in warm weather or warmer air upward in cold weather.

Related information • Climate system controls in the center display • Air distribution (p. 197) (p. 185) • Opening/closing/directing air vents (p. 198) • Adjusting air distribution (p. 198)

201

LOADING AND STORAGE LOADING AND STORAGE

Cargo space Passenger compartment storage The vehicle has flexible cargo capacity that spaces makes it possible to load and secure large The following is an overview of the passenger objects. compartment and its storage spaces. By folding down the backrests in the second and Front seats third rows* of seats, the cargo capacity of the vehicle increases considerably. To make loading easier, the rear section of the vehicle can be raised and lowered using the pneumatic suspension*. Use the load anchoring eyelets or the grocery bag holder to secure objects and the cargo compartment cover helps conceal the load. Storage spaces, cup holders and 12-volt socket in the tunnel console The jack* and tools can be found under the cargo compartment's floor. Second row of seats Related information • Loading (p. 211) • Cargo compartment cover* (p. 217) Storage spaces in the door panel, near the steering wheel, the glove compartment and the sun visors • Cargo net (p. 213) • Grocery bag holder (p. 213) • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 216) • Steel cargo grid* (p. 215)

Storage compartments in the door panels, cupholders in the center seat's backrest, storage pockets on the rear side of the front seat backrest, and 12-volt socket on the rear side of the tunnel console

204 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE

Third row of seats Using the glove compartment Locking the glove compartment The glove compartment provides a lockable stor- 1. This can be done from the center display's age compartment for small items. Function or Settings view: • Go to Function view and tap Private locking unlocked. • Go to Settings view and select My Car Locking and Unlocking Feedback. Tap the Private Locking box. > A pop-up window will appear.

NOTE

Storage space and cup holder in the side panel and the A security code has to be selected the first storage space between the seats time this function is used. This code is used to reset the function if an attempt has been WARNING The glove compartment and opening button on the cen- made to deactivate private locking using an ter console incorrect code. Always stow loose items such as cell phones, cameras, remote controls, etc. in the glove The owner's manual and maps can be kept here. Keep this code in a safe place. compartment or other storage spaces to help There are also holders for pens on the inside of keep them from becoming projectiles in the the glove compartment door. event of sudden braking, etc. 2. Enter the code to be used to unlock the Opening the glove compartment glove compartment and tap Confirm. Related information – Press the glove compartment button on the > The glove compartment will be locked. center console. • Tunnel console (p. 206) > The glove compartment door will open. • Using the glove compartment (p. 205) • Electrical sockets (p. 208) Locking/unlocking the glove • Sun visors (p. 207) compartment The glove compartment can be locked when e.g., the vehicle is in a workshop for service, etc. When the private locking function is activated, the tailgate is also locked. }}

205 LOADING AND STORAGE

|| Unlocking the glove compartment Tunnel console 1. This function can be deactivated from the The tunnel console, located between the front center display's Function or Settings view: seats, contains a 12-volt electrical socket, cup holders and storage spaces, etc. • Go to Function view and tap Private locking locked. • Go to settings and select My Car Locking and Unlocking Feedback. Deselect the Private Locking box. > A pop-up window will appear. 2. Specify the code to be used to lock the glove compartment and tap Confirm. Cooling activated > The glove compartment will be unlocked. Cooling deactivated Using the glove compartment as a cooler* The glove compartment can be used to cool – Activate/deactivate cooling by moving the drinks or food and the cooling feature functions control as far as possible toward the passen- Storage space when the climate system is active (i.e., when the ger compartment/glove compartment. ignition is in mode II or when the engine is run- Related information Storage space with cup holders for the driver ning). and passenger and a 12-volt socket • Passenger compartment storage spaces (p. 204) Storage space and USB/AUX sockets under • Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 238) the armrest Climate control panel for the rear seats*

NOTE One of the alarm sensors, which is sensitive to metallic objects, is located under the tunnel console cup holders. Avoid leaving coins, keys, etc., in the cup holders because they may inadvertently trigger the alarm.

206 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE

Related information Sun visors • Passenger compartment storage spaces There are vanity mirrors with card holders on the (p. 204) upper sides of the sun visors. • Electrical sockets (p. 208) • Alarm (p. 220) • Rear climate system controls on the tunnel console (p. 186)

Lighted vanity mirror and card holder The vanity mirror lighting comes on when the mirror is opened. The vanity mirror's frame has a holder for e.g., a card or ticket. Related information • Passenger compartment storage spaces (p. 204)

207 LOADING AND STORAGE

Electrical sockets 2. Disconnect the device by pulling its plug, not WARNING There are two 12-volt sockets in the tunnel con- its cord. Be sure to place any devices connected sole, a 120-volt socket on the rear side of the • Pull up the cover over the socket when it is not in to the socket safely so that they do not tunnel console, and one 12-volt socket in the use. become projectiles in the event of a sud- cargo area*. den stop and injure the occupants of the 120-volt socket in the tunnel console CAUTION vehicle. • Do not connect devices with large or • Be aware that connected devices may heavy plugs that could come loose while generate heat and become very hot. driving. • Only connect devices that function cor- • Do not use devices that can cause inter- rectly and are free from defects. These ference with the vehicle's radio receiver devices should be intended for use in a or electrical system. 120-volt, 60Hz socket with a plug intended for the socket in the vehicle and be UL-approved (or the equivalent thereof). • Never let the device, its plug or the socket itself come in contact with fluids of any kind. Never touch or use the 120-volt socket in the tunnel console for the second socket if it appears to be damaged or row of seats wet. This socket is intended for 120-volt devices such • Never connect multiple plugs, adapters or as laptops, chargers, etc. extension cords to the socket. This could override the socket's safety functions. The max. current provided is 150W. • Never let children play or tamper with the Using the socket socket, or attempt to insert any objects 1. Pull down the cover over the socket and plug into it. Never leave children unattended in in the device. the vehicle when the socket is active. > The socket's indicator light will indicate its • Never try to modify or repair the 120-volt status. The socket can only provide elec- socket. This should only be done by a trical current when the light is green.

208 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE

trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Status indication Failure to follow the points above could result An LED (Light Emitting Diode) on the socket in electrical shock and/or serious injury. indicates its status:

Status indicator light Socket status Action Steady green light The socket is providing current to a connected device. None. Flashing orange light The socket's voltage converter is too hot (the connected device draws too much Unplug the device, let the converter cool down current, etc. or the temperature in the passenger compartment is very high). and plug in the device again. The connected device draws too much current (constantly or currently) or is not None. The device should not be plugged into the functioning properly. socket. Indicator light off The socket has not detected a plugged in device. Be sure the device is correctly plugged into the socket. The socket is not active. Put the vehicle's ignition in at least mode I. The socket has been active but has been deactivated. Start the engine and/or charge the start battery.

If a problem persists, have the socket checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

}}

209 LOADING AND STORAGE

|| 12-volt socket in the tunnel console phones. For the sockets to provide electrical cur- 12-volt socket in the cargo area rent, the ignition must be in at least mode I.

WARNING Always keep the sockets covered when not in use.

NOTE Options and accessories such as monitors, MP3 players and cell phones that are connected to the 12-volt sockets may be activated by the climate system even if the igni- 12-volt socket in the tunnel console for the front seats tion is completely switched off or when the 12-volt socket in the cargo area vehicle is locked if preconditioning is started Fold down the cover to access the socket. Max. by a timer. current provided is 10 A (120 W). For this reason, disconnect these devices from the sockets when they are not in use to NOTE help avoid battery drain. The 12-volt socket in the cargo area provides electrical current even when the ignition is CAUTION switched off. Using the socket while the engine is not running will drain the battery. Max. current provided is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is used at a time. If both of the sock- Related information ets in the tunnel console are used at the same time, the max. current provided per • Passenger compartment storage spaces 12-volt socket in the tunnel console for the second row socket is 7.5 A (90 W) (p. 204) of seats Ignition modes (p. 362) If a tire sealing system's compressor is being • The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt used, no other device should be connected to devices such as monitors, MP3 players and cell any of the other sockets while the compressor is operating.

210 LOADING AND STORAGE

Loading impede the function of the Whiplash WARNING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is Protection System (WHIPS). Cover sharp edges on long loads to help determined by factors such as the number of Unstable loads can be secured to the load • • prevent injury to occupants. Secure the passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight of anchoring eyelets with straps or web lash- load to help prevent shifting during sud- ings to help keep them from shifting. any accessories that may be installed, etc. den stops. Stop the engine and apply the parking brake • Always secure large and heavy objects when loading or unloading long objects. The • with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps. gear selector can be knocked out of position by long loads, which could set the vehicle in • Always secure the load to help prevent it motion. from moving in the event of sudden stops. • Switch off the engine, apply the parking WARNING brake and put the gear selector in P when loading and unloading the vehicle. • Stop the engine, put the gear selector in P, and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects. Raising/lowering the rear-end of the • The vehicle's driving characteristics may vehicle* change depending on the weight and dis- Using the buttons on the read edge of the cargo Tailgate opening button on the lighting panel tribution of the load. compartment, the rear-end of the vehicle (the level of the cargo compartment floor) can be Open the tailgate by pressing the button on the • A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a raised or lowered for easier loading or to make lighting panel, pressing the button on the 1 head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h). attaching a trailer simpler. remote key or by using the optional foot movement sensor under the rear bumper. • The cargo area and rear seat should not be loaded to a level higher than 2 in. Loading recommendations (5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear • Load objects in the cargo compartment side windows. Objects placed higher than against the backrest whenever possible. this level could impede the function of the Inflatable Curtain. • If the backrests of the second row seats are folded down, they should not be in contact with the front seat backrests. This could

1 An accessory trailer hitch can be purchased from a Volvo retailer. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211 LOADING AND STORAGE

|| Extra loading space • The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel con- The rear seat backrests can be folded down to sumption will increase with the size of the added cargo space or for transporting long load. objects. • Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast cornering and hard braking. Roof loads See the article "Weights" for information about Load carriers are available as Volvo accessories. the maximum permissible load that can be trans- Observe the following points when in use: ported on the roof. • To avoid damaging your vehicle and to achieve maximum safety when driving, we Related information recommend using the load carriers that Volvo • Folding the second row backrests (p. 169) has developed especially for your vehicle. • Folding the third row backrests (p. 172) Level control buttons on the rear edge of the cargo • Volvo-approved removable roof racks are • Weights (p. 513) compartment designed to carry the maximum allowable Cargo net (p. 213) The level control consists of two buttons: one to roof load for this vehicle (see the article • raise and one to lower the rear-end of the vehi- "Weights" for specific information). • Cargo compartment cover* (p. 217) cle. • Never exceed the rack manufacturer's weigh • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 216) Press and hold the respective buttons until the limits. • Whiplash protection system (p. 61) desired level has been reached. • Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads evenly. NOTE • Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the load. The level cannot be adjusted if a door or the hood are open (this does not apply to the tail- • Secure the cargo correctly with appropriate gate). tie-down equipment. • Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. WARNING • Remember that the vehicle's center of gravity Be sure that the entire area under the vehicle and handling change when you carry a load is completely unobstructed before lowering on the roof. the level.

212 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE

Grocery bag holder On the sides of the cargo compartment Cargo net The grocery bag holders (hooks) and elastic The cargo net helps protect passengers from strap help keep shopping bags in place. objects in the cargo compartment in the event of a sudden stop or hard braking. Under the cargo compartment floor2 The cargo net is attached at four points.

There are also two fold-out holders in the side panels, one on each side.

CAUTION There are two grocery bag holders and an elastic The grocery bag holders (hooks) are only strap3 in the hatch that is part of the cargo area Cargo net intended to hold weights less than approx. floor. The strap can be attached in four positions. The cargo net can be mounted in two positions: 11 lbs (5 kg). Open the hatch to access the grocery bag hold- • Rear mounting: behind the second row seats' backrests. ers and attach the elastic strap. Grocery bags Related information with handles can also be hung on the hooks. • Cargo net (p. 213) • Front mounting: behind the front seats' backrests. • Steel cargo grid* (p. 215) • Cargo compartment cover* (p. 217)

2 5-seat models only. 3 Can be replaced by ordering a new one from a Volvo retailer. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213 LOADING AND STORAGE

|| WARNING 3. Insert the other upper hook into the ceiling 4. Rear mounting: with the upper hooks mounting point on the opposite side. It is inserted into the rear ceiling mounting points, • Objects in the cargo compartment should spring-loaded to make mounting easier. hook the lower straps through the load always be securely anchored. anchoring eyelets on the floor of the cargo Press each of the hooks as far forward into The nets upper hooks must be securely compartment as show in the illustration. • the respective mounting points as possible. inserted into the ceiling mounting points and the lower spring hooks must be securely hooked onto the cargo anchoring eyelets. • A damaged net must never be used.

Attaching 1. Fold out the cargo net and fold out the upper rod. Be sure it locks in position. 2. Insert one of the net's upper hooks into the front or rear ceiling mounting point with the net's lower straps' locks facing you. Front mounting Rear mounting Front mounting: with the upper hooks inserted into the front ceiling mounting points, hook the lower straps through the eyelets on the front seat rails as shown in the illustration. Attaching the net is easier if the front seat backrests are upright and the seats are moved slightly forward. Adjust the front seats so that they only touch the net but do not apply pressure to it.

214 LOADING AND STORAGE

CAUTION Steel cargo grid* Mounting Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel grid 1. Fold down the rear seats (second row of Pressure from the front seats against the that helps prevent objects in the cargo area from seats in 7-seat models) and lift in the steel cargo net could damage the net and/or its moving forward into the passenger compart- grid through one of the rear doors or the tail- brackets. ment. gate. The curved (convex) side of the grid should face toward the cargo compartment 5. Pull the lower straps taut. The steel grid is made up of the grid itself and and the hooks on each side of the grid two separate mounting brackets. Each of the should face upward. The mounting brackets Removing and storing brackets has a screw cover and there are two and plastic sleeves are not needed in this 1. Reduce tension on the net by pressing the plastic sleeves for the grid. step. button on the lower straps' respective locks and allow some slack on both sides. WARNING 2. Press in the catches and release both of the • No one should ever be allowed to remain straps' hooks. in the cargo compartment when the vehicle is moving. 3. Remove the upper hooks from the ceiling The steel grid may only be used in the mounting points. • rear position described in this article. The 4. Press the red button on the upper rod to ceiling attachment points above the front allow it to fold. seats are not intended to anchor the steel grid. 5. Fold and roll up the net. 2. Press one of the grid's hooks into the larger • The third row of seats (7-seat models* part of the opening in the ceiling attachment Store the net under the cargo compartment floor. only): these seats must be folded down point (1) as shown in the illustration. Related information when the steel grid is mounted in the vehicle. 3. Grasp the grid near the hook and move it • Cargo compartment cover* (p. 217) • After being mounted, be sure that the toward the smaller opening (2). • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 216) steel grid is securely anchored in place. > This secures the hook in the attachment • Steel cargo grid* (p. 215) point. • Loading (p. 211) 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the hook on the opposite side of the grid.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215 LOADING AND STORAGE

|| Related information Load anchoring eyelets • Cargo net (p. 213) The eyelets in the cargo compartment can be • Cargo compartment cover* (p. 217) folded out to secure objects with straps, a net, • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 216) etc. • Loading (p. 211) Load anchoring eyelets

5. Attach the mounting bracket's hook through the cargo anchoring eyelet near the floor of the cargo compartment and insert the threaded section of the bracket through the grid's lower attachment hole (1). 6. Slide the plastic sleeve onto the threaded section of the of the mounting bracket with the sleeve's flange turned upward and press it down through the hole. Screw the screw cover into place until its underside is WARNING approx. 0.2 in. (5 mm) from the grid (2). • Cover sharp edges on long loads to help 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for the opposite side. prevent injury to occupants. Secure the 8. Center the grid and tighten both mounting load to help prevent shifting during sud- brackets alternately until the grid is held den stops. securely in place. • Always secure large and heavy objects with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps. Removing • Always secure the load to help prevent it Perform the steps above in reverse order. The from moving in the event of sudden stops. hooks can be removed before the plastic sleeves are removed from the holes in the grid. • Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in P when loading and unloading the vehicle.

216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE

Related information Cargo compartment cover* or partially retracted to make it easier to reach • Loading (p. 211) The cover can be used to conceal objects in the farther into the cargo compartment. cargo area. Fully open Installing the cover

Third row seats, 7-seat models*: hang the seat belt latches in the hooks provided in the side panels. For 5-seat models, see the following step. With the cover retracted, press the end piece With the cover retracted, grasp its handle on one side of the cargo area cover into the and pull it out completely. retaining bracket in the side panel of the Press the attaching pins on the rear corners cargo area. of the cover into the grooves in the side pan- Do the same on the opposite side. els and release the cover. > The cover is now fixed in the fully open Press both sides of the cover, one at a time, position. until they click into place. > The red mark will no longer be visible. Check that both ends of the cover are securely locked in place. Use The cover can be used in two positions: fully open to completely cover the cargo compartment }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 217 LOADING AND STORAGE

|| Partially retracted If you are holding something in one of your From the partially retracted position: hands: – Grasp the handle and lift it slightly to release From the fully open position, push the cover's the attaching pins from their grooves. Pull handle slightly upward with e.g., your elbow. the cover to the fully open position. > The cover will close until it reaches the > Allow the cover to retract completely. partially retracted position. Removing the cover To fully open the cover from the partially open 1. With the cover retracted, press the button on position: one of the cover's ends and lift out that end. 1. Grasp the handle and pull out the cover to 2. For 7-seat models: Release the seat belt With the cover retracted, grasp its handle the fully open position. latches from the hooks in the side panels. and pull it so that it is above the cargo com- 2. Let the cover retract slightly and press the For 5-seat models, see the following step. partment's side panels until it is fully open. handle slightly downward. 3. Carefully lift the cover up/out. Press the attaching pins on the rear corners > The cover will be secured n the fully open of the cover into the grooves in the side pan- > The other end will release automatically. position. els. If the cover is already fully open see the Lift the cover out of the cargo compart- next step. Avoid placing any objects on the cover when it is ment. open. With the cover completely pulled out, press it Related information upward lightly and allow it to retract slowly. • Cargo net (p. 213) WARNING > Allow the cover to retract until it stops in • Steel cargo grid* (p. 215) the partially retracted position. 7-seat models: remove the cargo compart- Loading (p. 211) ment cover completely from the vehicle if one • or both of the third row seats will be occupied. • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 216)

Retracting the cover From the fully open position: – Lift the cover's handle and pull it rearward slightly to release the attaching pins from their grooves. Allow the cover to retract.

218 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM LOCKS AND ALARM

Locks and remote keys Models with Passive Entry* also have an extra, Alarm The vehicle can be locked and unlocked in vari- smaller key without buttons called a Key Tag. The alarm system provides a warning if an ous ways and there are several types of remote A special restricted Red Key makes it possible to attempt is made to break into the vehicle. keys that can be used. limit some of the vehicle's functionality, such as The following conditions will trigger the alarm: Locking/unlocking/opening/closing by setting a maximum speed or limiting the maximum volume from the infotainment system's • a door/hood/tailgate are opened The vehicle can be locked/unlocked from the speakers. passenger compartment, using the buttons on • the battery is disconnected the remote key or by using the optional Passive Additional keys can be ordered from a Volvo • the alarm siren is disconnected Entry system where it is only necessary to have a retailer. If a problem is detected in the alarm system, a key in your possession to lock or unlock the Related information message will be displayed in the instrument doors. panel. • Immobilizer (p. 225) On models equipped with a power tailgate*, the • Alarm (p. 220) Do not attempt to repair any of the components tailgate can be opened/closed by moving your in the alarm system yourself; this could affect the foot under a sensor* beneath the rear bumper. • Child safety locks (p. 222) insurance policy on the vehicle. Contact a trained Remote key (p. 229) If for any reason a remote key does not function • and qualified Volvo service technician. properly, it may be necessary to replace its bat- • Restricted key* (p. 231) teries but the vehicle can always be locked or • Foot movement tailgate operation* (p. 233) NOTE unlocked manually using the remote key's • Locking/unlocking from inside the vehicle One of the alarm sensors, which is sensitive detachable key blade. (p. 236) to metallic objects, is located under the tunnel Remote key • Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle console cup holders. Avoid leaving coins, keys, etc., in the cup holders because they The remote key does not have to be physically (p. 237) may inadvertently trigger the alarm. handled in order to start the engine because the • Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 238) vehicle is equipped with the standard Passive • Starting the engine (p. 364) Start system (the key only needs to be in the front part of the passenger compartment). If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Passive Entry system that enables keyless entry and start, the key can be anywhere in the vehicle when the engine is started.

220 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

Arming the alarm If the door that triggered the alarm is left open, Related information – Lock the vehicle by pressing the remote the alarm cycle will be repeated 10 times. • Automatically arming/disarming the alarm key's lock button, pressing the outer indenta- (p. 222) Alarm indicator tion for locking on one of the door handles1 Deactivating the alarm without a functioning A red indicator light on the upper side of the • or by pressing the tailgate's rubberized pres- remote key (p. 222) dashboard shows the alarm's status: sure plate1. If the vehicle is equipped with a power tailgate*, the button on the lower edge of the tailgate can also be used to lock the vehicle and arm the alarm. Disarming the alarm – Unlock the vehicle by pressing the remote key's unlock button, pressing the pressure- sensitive area on the inside of one of the door handles1 or by pressing the tailgate's rubberized pressure plate1. Turning off a triggered (sounding) alarm Indicator off: the alarm is disarmed – Press the remote key's unlock button or put • the ignition in mode I by turning the start • Indicator flashes once every two seconds: knob to START and releasing it. the alarm is armed • Indicator flashes quickly after the alarm has Alarm signals been disarmed until the ignition has been put The following occurs if the alarm has been trig- in mode I (turn the start knob to START and gered: release it): the alarm has been triggered • A siren will sound for 30 seconds or until the alarm is turned off • All turn signals flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is turned off

1 Models withe the optional Passive Entry only.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 221 LOCKS AND ALARM

Automatically arming/disarming the Deactivating the alarm without a Child safety locks alarm functioning remote key Child safety locks help prevent children from Automatically arming the alarm helps prevent If the remote key is not functioning properly, the inadvertently opening one of the rear doors from inadvertently leaving the vehicle without alarm alarm can be turned off and the vehicle can be inside the vehicle. protection. started as follows: Electronic* activation/deactivation If the vehicle has been unlocked with the remote 1. Unlock and open the driver's door with the The electronic child safety locks can be acti- key (and the alarm has been disarmed) but no detachable key blade. vated/deactivated as long as the ignition is not door or the tailgate has been opened within > This will trigger the alarm. completely switched off and this can be done for 2 minutes, the vehicle will automatically relock up to two minutes after the engine has been and the alarm will re-arm. switched off if no door has been opened. In certain markets, the alarm will be re-armed To activate: automatically after a slight delay after the driver's door has been opened and closed without being locked. Related information • Alarm (p. 220) Deactivating the alarm without a functioning • Location of the back-up key reader in the cup holder remote key (p. 222) 2. Place the remote key on the back-up key reader in the tunnel console's cup holder. 3. Turn the start knob to START and release it. > The alarm will turn off. Related information Child safety lock button on the driver door control panel • Alarm (p. 220) 1. Switch on the ignition or start the engine. • Detachable key blade (p. 232) • Starting the engine (p. 364) • Automatically arming/disarming the alarm (p. 222)

222 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

2. Press the button on the driver's door control Manual activation/deactivation Related information panel. • Detachable key blade (p. 232) > Rear child lock Activated will be dis- • Ignition modes (p. 362) played in the instrument panel and the indicator light in the button will illuminate to show that the child safety locking function is activated. While the child safety locks are activated: • the rear door windows can only be opened from the driver door control panel • the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside To deactivate: Manual child safety locks in the rear doors – Press the button in the driver door control – Use the detachable key blade in the remote panel. key to adjust these controls. > Rear child lock Deactivated will be dis- The rear doors can only be opened from the played in the instrument panel and the outside. indicator light in the button will go out to The rear doors can be opened from the show that the child safety locking function inside or the outside. is deactivated. When the ignition is switched off, the current set- NOTE ting for the child safety locks will be stored. If the • Each control on the respective doors locks were activated at that time, they will con- control that door only, not both doors. tinue to be activated when the ignition is There are no manual child safety locks on switched on again. • models equipped with the electronic option.

223 LOCKS AND ALARM

Antenna locations for the start and WARNING Start and lock system type lock system designations People with implanted pacemakers should not 2 The vehicle is equipped with a keyless start and allow the pacemaker to come closer than The following information contains type designa- lock system that requires a number of antennas 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the Passive Entry tions for the start and lock system. located at various points in the vehicle. system's antennas. This is to help prevent interference between the pacemaker and the Alarm system Passive Entry system. USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Related information rules. Operation is subject to the following condi- • Remote key (p. 229) tions: (1) This device may not cause harmful • Remote key's range (p. 229) interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3) This device is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, Location of the antennas including interference that may cause undesired Under the cup holders in the front section of operation of the device. the tunnel console Remote keys (Passive entry/Passive In the upper front section of the driver side start*) rear door2 USA In the upper front section of the passenger Volvo Standard Key FCC ID: YGOHUF8423 side rear door2 Volvo Tag ID FCC ID: YGOHUF8432 In the center of the rear seat backrest2,3 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

2 Vehicles with the optional Passive Entry system only. 3 In a seven-seat model, the antenna is located between the seats where the backrest and seat cushion meet.

224 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- (2) this device must accept any interference Immobilizer ence, and received, including interference that may cause The immobilizer is a start inhibitor that helps pre- undesired operation. (2) this device must accept any interference vent unauthorized persons from starting the received, including interference that may cause Any changes or modification not expressly engine. undesired operation. approved by the party responsible for compliance Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle con- could void the user’s authority to operate this Any changes or modification not expressly tains a unique coded transponder. The vehicle equipment. approved by the party responsible for compliance code in the key is transmitted to the vehicle's could void the user’s authority to operate this Canada–IC:3659A-VO3134 ignition system where it is compared to the code equipment. This device complies with Industry Canada stored in the start inhibitor module. Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is The following message (which may appear in the subject to the following two conditions: Volvo Standard Key IC: 4008C-HUF8423 instrument panel) is related to the immobilizer: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- Volvo Tag ID IC: 4008C-HUF8432 ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter- Message Explanation This device complies with Industry Canada ference received, including interference that may Car key Remote key not recognized dur- licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is cause undesired operation. not found ing start. Place the remote key subject to the following two conditions: Related information on the key symbol in the tunnel (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- • Alarm (p. 220) console cup holder and try to ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter- start the vehicle again. ference received, including interference that may • Remote key (p. 229) cause undesired operation. Related information Remote key's range (p. 229) Immobilizer and Passive entry/Passive • start* systems • Remote key (p. 229) USA–FCC ID: LTQVO3134 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 225 LOCKS AND ALARM

Changing the remote key's battery Replacing the battery The remote key can be opened if the battery needs to be replaced.

The battery should be replaced if: • The information symbol illuminates and Unavailable Battery level too low is shown in the display and/or • if the locks do not react after several Move the button to the side and slide attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle Hold the remote key with the front side rear cover slightly upward. (with the Volvo symbol) toward you and move The cover will loosen and can be the button on lower edge of the key near the removed from the key. key ring to the right. Slide the front cover slightly upward. The cover will loosen and can be removed from the key.

226 LOCKS AND ALARM

Use e.g., a screwdriver to turn the battery The battery's positive (+) side is up. Pry Insert a new battery4 with the positive (+) cover counterclockwise so that the markers out the battery as shown in the illustration. side up. Put the battery cover back in place align toward OPEN. by: Remove the cover carefully by pressing CAUTION Placing the battery's edge downward in e.g., a finger nail into the indentation. When handling batteries, avoid touching their the holder. Slide the battery forward so that it contact surfaces as this could result in poor is held in place by the two plastic catches. Pry the cover up. battery function in the remote key. Pressing the battery downward so that it is also held in place by the two upper catches under the upper black holder. and turn until the marker points to CLOSE.

4 Use a CR2032, 3 V battery. }}

227 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| NOTE Volvo recommends that the batteries used in the remote control meet the UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 38.3. Batteries installed in the key from the factory and batteries exchanged by an authorized Volvo workshop fulfill the above criteria. Old batteries should be disposed of properly at a recycling center or at your Volvo retailer. Put the rear cover in position and press down until it clicks into place.

Slide the cover into place as indicated by Turn the key over and press the front arrow 2 in the illustration. cover (with the Volvo logo) until it clicks into > Another click indicates that it is correctly place. in position and closed. Slide the cover into position as indicated by arrow 2 in the illustration. > Another click indicates that it is correctly in position and closed. Dispose of old batteries properly, preferably at Put the battery cover in place and turn it recycling station. clockwise until the marker points to CLOSE. Related information • Remote key (p. 229)

228 LOCKS AND ALARM

Remote key's range For keyless entry into the vehicle, the remote key Remote key In order to function correctly, the remote key must be within approximately 5 feet (1.5 meters) The remote key is used to lock/unlock the vehi- must be within a certain distance of the vehicle. of the sides of the vehicle or approximately 3 feet cle and must be in the passenger compartment (1 meter) of the tailgate as shown in the illustra- in order to start the engine. Manual use tion. The remote key's functions, such as locking and The remote key may not function properly due to unlocking the vehicle, which are activated by ambient radio waves, buildings or topographical pressing the or buttons, have a range obstructions, etc. The vehicle can always be of approx. 65 feet (20 meters) from the vehicle. locked/unlocked with the detachable key blade. Buildings or other obstacles may interfere with If the remote key is removed from the the function of the remote key. The vehicle can vehicle also be locked or unlocked with the key blade. If all of the remote keys are removed from the If the vehicle's locks do not react, move closer vehicle while the engine is running, Vehicle key and try again. not found Removed from vehicle will be displayed in the instrument panel and an audible Keyless use5 signal will sound when all of the doors have been closed. The message will be erased when a The standard remote key (left) and the Key Tag (right) remote key has been returned to the vehicle and In models with the standard Passive Start system, the O button on the right-side steering wheel the remote key only needs to be in the front sec- keypad has been pressed or when all of the tion of the passenger compartment or in the tun- doors have been closed again. nel console cup holders in order to start the engine. Related information • Remote key (p. 229) The keyless Passive Entry system for locking/ unlocking the vehicle is available as an option. • Antenna locations for the start and lock system (p. 224) This system has a range of approximately 5 feet (1.5 meters) from the sides of the vehicle or approximately 3 feet (1 meter) from the tailgate. The shaded areas illustrate the range of the Passive With this system, a remote key can be anywhere Entry system's antennas in the vehicle.

5 Models equipped with the optional Passive Entry only. }}

229 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Avoid keeping the remote key closer than approx. NOTE The remote key's buttons 4-6 in. (10-15 cm) from a cell phone or metallic object. Additional or duplicate remote control keys can be obtained from any authorized Volvo If interference persists, unlock the vehicle with retailer. the detachable key blade and place the remote key in the backup key reader in the tunnel con- You can also obtain additional or duplicate sole cup holder to disarm the alarm. remote control keys from certain independent repair facilities and locksmiths that are quali- WARNING fied to make remote control keys. Each key must be programmed to work with your vehi- Always remove the remote key from the pas- cle. senger compartment when leaving the vehicle and ensure that the ignition in mode 0, espe- A list of independent repair facilities and/or cially if there are children in the vehicle. locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and code replacement keys can be found: The remote key has four buttons: one on the left side and three on the right side Ordering new keys • on the Volvo website, Lock: Press to lock the doors/tailgate and Two remote keys are provided with the vehicle (a www.volvocars.com/us arm the alarm. Key Tag is also included for vehicles equipped • by calling Volvo Customer Care at Unlock: Press to unlock the driver's door with the optional Passive Entry system). Addi- 1-800-458-1552. tional keys (a total of 12) can be ordered and and disarm the alarm. Press again to unlock used with the vehicle. the other doors and the tailgate. This setting Key Tag can be changed in the center display's Set- Loss of a remote key In addition to the two remote keys provided, a tings menu. If a remote key is lost, the others should be taken smaller third key, called a Key Tag, is also provi- Tailgate: Press to unlock the tailgate only with the vehicle to a Volvo retailer. As an anti- ded for vehicles equipped with the optional (and disarm the alarm for the tailgate). On theft measure, the code of the lost remote key Passive Entry system. vehicles equipped with the power tailgate*, must be erased from the system. The number of This key functions in the same way as a standard press and hold to open the tailgate. Press registered keys for the vehicle can be found in remote key but does not have a detachable key and hold to close an open tailgate (an audi- the center display's Top view. blade and its battery cannot be replaced; a new ble warning signal will sound). Key Tag has to be ordered. Panic alarm: Press to attract attention during emergency situations. To activate, press and hold this button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate

230 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

the turn signals and horn. To deactivate, NOTE Restricted key* wait approximately 5 seconds and press the The Red Key makes it possible to limit several of Additional or duplicate remote control keys button again (the panic alarm will also deac- the vehicle's functions to help ensure that it is can be obtained from any authorized Volvo tivate automatically after several minutes). operated safely, for instance if the vehicle is retailer. Interference used by a young driver. You can also obtain additional or duplicate Metallic objects or electromagnetic fields may remote control keys from certain independent interfere with the remote key's function. Avoid repair facilities and locksmiths that are quali- placing the remote key within 4-6 in. (10-15 cm) fied to make remote control keys. Each key of a cell phone or a metallic object. must be programmed to work with your vehi- If interference persists, use the remote key's cle. detachable key blade to unlock the vehicle and A list of independent repair facilities and/or place the remote key in the backup key reader in locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and the tunnel console cup holder. code replacement keys can be found: Loss of a remote key • on the Volvo website, If a remote keys is lost, a new one can be www.volvocars.com/us ordered. The other keys should be taken with the • by calling Volvo Customer Care at vehicle to a Volvo retailer or authorized independ- 1-800-458-1552. ent locksmith. As an anti-theft measure, the code A Red Key makes it possible to limit the vehicle's of the lost remote key must be erased from the maximum speed, add speed reminders and limit system. The number of registered keys for the Related information the audio system's volume. Several of the vehi- vehicle can be found in the center display's Top • Remote key's range (p. 229) cle's safety systems will also always be active. view. • Restricted key* (p. 231) Otherwise, this key functions in the same way as a standard remote key. • Detachable key blade (p. 232) • Changing the remote key's battery (p. 226) One or more Red Keys can be ordered from a Volvo retailer after the vehicle has been purchased. A total of 11 keys can be programmed and used for the same vehicle, one of which has to be a standard remote key. Settings for the Red Key can be made by a standard remote key user from the center dis- }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| play's Top view: Settings System Driver Adaptive cruise control * (On/Off) Detachable key blade Profile Red key. • Initial setting: On at the longest interval Your vehicle's remote key contains a detachable See the article "Adaptive cruise control" for key blade that can be used to unlock the driver's Several of the vehicle's safety function cannot be • additional information door, etc. turned off the by a Red Key user. Safety functions A Volvo retailer can provide you with the key The restrictions are designed to help reduce the blade's unique code. risk of an accident and they cannot be changed The following safety functions will always be by a Red Key user. These settings cannot be active for a Red Key user: Using the detachable key blade changed by the Red Key's user. • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* The remote key's detachable key blade can be used to: Possible settings • Lane Departure Warning/Lane Keeping Aid The following settings can be made for a Red (LDW/LKA)* • Unlock the driver's door if the central locking Key: • Distance Alert* system cannot be activated using the remote key Speed Limiter* (On/Off) • City Safety* • Lock all doors • Setting interval: 30-160 mph (50-250 km/h) • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* • Activate/deactivate the mechanical child • Default setting: 75 mph (120 km/h) • Road Sign Information* safety locks in the rear doors Increments: 5 mph (10 km/h) • Related information The Key Tag6 does not have a detachable key • See the article "Speed limiter" for additional • Remote key (p. 229) blade. information. • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 258) Speed reminder (On/Off): • Setting interval: 0-160 mph (0-250 km/h • Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 290) • Default settings: 30, 45 and 55 mph (50, 70 • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 324) and 90 km/h.) • Driving lane assistance (p. 331) • Increments: 1 mph (1 km/h) • Distance Alert* (p. 322) • Max. number of reminders: 6 • City Safety™ (p. 279) Reduced max. volume (on/off) • Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 320) • Default settings: On • Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 297)

6 Models with the optional Passive Entry system only.

232 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

Detaching the key blade Foot movement tailgate operation* The foot movement sensor* makes it easy and convenient to open or close the tailgate without using your hands.7

After use, press the key blade back into Hold the remote key with the front side its position in the key, put the cover back on (with the Volvo symbol) toward you and move the key and slide it into position. the button on lower edge of the key near the > A click indicates that the cover is correctly key ring to the right. Slide the front cover in place. slightly upward. Related information The cover will loosen and can be • Locking/unlocking with the detachable key Foot movement sensor under the rear bumper8 removed from the key. blade (p. 242) • Child safety locks (p. 222) NOTE One of the remote keys must be in your possession when you are behind the vehicle in order to activate the foot movement sensor, even if the tailgate is already unlocked. This is done to help prevent the sensor from inadvertently opening the tailgate, for example, in a car wash.

Remove the key blade.

7 Models equipped with the optional power tailgate only. 8 If the vehicle is equipped with a skid plate*, the sensor is located farther to the left under the bumper. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 233 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Operation Locking and unlocking confirmation Interior confirmation – Move your foot back and forth under sensor The turn signals can be used to indicate that the on the underside of the rear bumper. It is not vehicle has been locked/unlocked with the necessary to touch the bumper. remote key. These settings can also be > A brief audible signal will sound when the changed. tailgate begins to open/close. Exterior confirmation If several attempts have been made to open/ • Locking: the turn signals flash once and the close the tailgate without a remote key in your door mirrors will fold in (retract)10 possession, the function will time out and will not Unlocking: the turn signals flash twice and be available for a short period. • the door mirrors will fold out10 The tailgate can be closed (or closed and locked) When the vehicle is locked, confirmation will only by pressing the or buttons on the lower be given if all doors/tailgate and the hood are edge of the tailgate9. It can also be operated closed. Lock and alarm indicator light on the dashboard manually or by pressing the button on the lighting A long flash indicates the vehicle is locked. While If the vehicle is locked while only the driver's door panel in the passenger compartment or on the the vehicle is locked, the indicator will flash is closed, all doors/tailgate will lock but confirma- remote key. briefly. tion will only be given when all doors/tailgate/ hood are closed. LEDs in the lock buttons on the doors illuminate NOTE when the doors are locked. Foot operation may not be possible if the sensor is obstructed by snow, ice, etc.

Related information • Power tailgate* (p. 240) • Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 238) • Remote key's range (p. 229)

9 Vehicles equipped with the optional Passive Entry system only. 10 Models with retractable door mirrors only.

234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

Indicators in the interior lock buttons In all doors Related information Lock buttons in the front doors • Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle (p. 237) • Home safe lighting (p. 145) • Adjusting the power door mirrors (p. 102)

Rear door lock buttons and indicator lights Front door lock buttons and indicator lights Indicator light in the respective door on: that door Indicator lights on: all doors are locked. is locked. If either of the rear doors is opened, the light in that door will out but the other indicator If a door is opened, the lights in both buttons will lights will remain on. go out. Confirmation alternatives Various alternatives for locking/unlocking confirmation can be selected in the center display. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car Locking. 3. Change the settings under Locking and Unlocking Feedback.

235 LOCKS AND ALARM

Locking/unlocking from inside the Lock buttons on the rear doors* A rear door must be closed before it can be vehicle locked. The lock buttons on either of the front doors can Alternative locking when parking12 be used to lock or unlock all doors and the tail- The central locking button on the front doors can gate at the same time. The rear doors can be also be used to lock the vehicle when you leave locked using their respective lock buttons*. it. To do so: The central locking system 1. Open the door. 2. Press the lock section of the button. 3. Close the door. This will lock the vehicle completely and arm the alarm.

Lock button in a rear door NOTE The lock buttons in the rear doors lock/unlock Please be aware that locking the vehicle in each door respectively. this way makes it possible to lock the remote key in the passenger compartment. To help To unlock a rear door: avoid this, lock the vehicle from the outside by – To open one of the rear doors individually, pressing the lock button on the remote key. pull its handle once and release it to unlock If the vehicle is locked using the central lock- Central locking/unlocking buttons and indicator lights the door. Pull the handle again to open the on the front doors 11 ing button, be sure that the remote key is in door . your possession before closing the door. – Press the button on the driver's door to Locking lock all doors/tailgate and press to – Automatic locking unlock. Press the button on either of the front doors (both front doors must be closed). All All of the doors/tailgate can be locked automati- Unlocking doors/tailgate are locked. cally when the vehicle begins to move. To activate/deactivate this setting: Press the button on either of the front doors The rear doors can also be locked individually by to unlock all doors and the tailgate. pressing the lock button on the respective door.

11 Assuming that the child safety locks are not activated. 12 This does not apply to models equipped with the optional Passive Entry system.

236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

Related information Locking/unlocking from outside the driver's door can be unlocked with the detacha- • Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle vehicle ble key blade. (p. 237) The buttons on the remote key can be used to Keyless Passive Entry* Child safety locks (p. 222) lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at the • If the vehicle is equipped with this system, it is same time. This can also be done without press- only necessary to have a remote key in your pos- ing the remote key buttons on models equipped session to operate the central locking system. with the optional keyless Passive Entry system. The power tailgate* can also be opened/closed Models with Passive Entry have an indentation on by moving your foot under a sensor beneath the the outside of the handle for locking the vehicle rear bumper*. and a pressure-sensitive area on the inside of the handle for unlocking. The tailgate has a rubber- The lock/unlock settings can be changed in the ized button used only for locking/unlocking. center display's Top view. Go to: Settings My Car Remote Unlock and select Unlock All Doors or Driver Door Only. In order to lock the vehicle, the driver's door must be closed. If the tailgate or any of the other doors are open, they will be locked and the alarm will be armed when they are closed.

NOTE Be sure the remote key is outside of the vehicle before the other doors/tailgate are closed Outer indentation for locking, the pressure sensitive area to help avoid locking the remote inside the on the inside of the handle is for unlocking vehicle.

If the locks repeatedly do not react when the unlock button is pressed, it may be necessary to replace the battery in the remote. In this case, the

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| The lock/unlock settings can be changed in the Locking/unlocking the tailgate center display's Top view: The tailgate can be locked/unlocked in different Go to: Settings My Car Keyless Unlock ways, depending on whether the vehicle is equipped with the optional keyless Passive Entry and select All Doors or Single Door. system. Automatic relocking Unlocking with the remote key If no door or the tailgate is opened within two minutes after being unlocked, the vehicle will automatically relock. Remote door unlock The vehicle can be unlocked using the Volvo On Rubberized button on the tailgate used only for locking/ Call app. unlocking Related information Locking Remote key (p. 229) All of the doors have to be closed before the • vehicle can be locked but the tailgate can be • Remote key's range (p. 229) open. • Detachable key blade (p. 232) Alarm (p. 220) Lock the doors and tailgate by pressing the pres- • Remote key tailgate button sure sensitive area on any of the door handles or by pressing the rubberized button on the tailgate. 1. Press the button on the remote key. The lock indicator light on the dashboard will > The tailgate will be unlocked but remain begin to flash to show that the vehicle is locked closed. The alarm indicator on the dash- and the alarm has been armed. board will go out to indicate that the tail- Unlocking gate alarm is no longer armed. The other Pull a door handle to unlock and open the door doors will remain locked and the alarm will or press the rubberized button under the tailgate remain armed for them. opening control. The lock indicator light on the 2. Open the tailgate. dashboard will go out to show that the vehicle is > If the tailgate is not opened in within two unlocked and the alarm has been disarmed. minutes, it will relock and the alarm will rearm.

238 LOCKS AND ALARM

Keyless unlocking* CAUTION To unlock the tailgate: • When pressing the rubberized pressure – Press the button on the lighting panel. plate, only light pressure is necessary to > The tailgate will unlock and can be release the tailgate's electronic locking opened within two minutes (if the vehicle mechanism. has been locked from the inside). • When opening the tailgate, pull it up using the handle. Too much pressure on Locking with the remote key the rubberized pressure plate can dam- – Press the button on the remote key. age its electrical connections. > The alarm indicator on the dashboard will begin to flash to show that the alarm has WARNING been armed. Avoid driving with the tailgate open if at all Related information Rubberized pressure plate possible. Doing so could allow exhaust gases • Remote key (p. 229) Opening the tailgate: to enter the passenger compartment. • Power tailgate* (p. 240) 1. With the remote key in your possession, • Foot movement tailgate operation* (p. 233) unlock the tailgate by pressing lightly on the Unlocking the tailgate from inside the rubberized pressure plate under the outer vehicle • Remote key's range (p. 229) tailgate handle. If the remote key is not detected, the tailgate cannot be unlocked/ opened. Three audible signals will sound. 2. Lift the handle to open the tailgate fully.

Tailgate unlock button

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239 LOCKS AND ALARM

Power tailgate* Closing the tailgate The optional power tailgate can be opened/ The tailgate can be closed by moving your foot closed in several ways. under a sensor beneath the rear bumper*, by pressing the button on the lighting panel, with The power tailgate can be opened/closed using the remote key or by pressing the button on the the button on the lighting panel in the pas- lower edge of the tailgate*13 senger compartment, the on the remote key, To close the tailgate14: by moving your foot under a sensor under the rear bumper* or manually. – Press the button on the lighting panel or on the button on the remote key. WARNING > The tailgate will close automatically and This will not When operating the tailgate manually, do not Button on the lighting panel in the passenger compart- audible signal will sound. use force to open or close it. This could result ment lock the tailgate. in injury. Opening the tailgate The power tailgate can be opened electrically by: • Pressing and holding the button on the lighting panel until the tailgate begins to open. • Pressing and holding the button on the remote key until the tailgate begins to open. • Pressing lightly on the rubber-covered button under the tailgate's outside handle. • Moving your foot under a sensor under the rear bumper*. Buttons on the lower edge of the tailgate

Buttons in the lower edge of the tailgate

13 Models equipped with the optional Passive Entry system have a button to close the tailgate and a button to close and lock the tailgate. 14 See also the article "Foot movement tailgate opening/closing."

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

– Press the button13 on the lower edge of Programming the tailgate's maximum NOTE the tailgate. opening angle The tailgate's maximum opening angle can be If the tailgate has been opened and closed > The tailgate will close automatically but continuously too long, the automatic function will not be locked. programmed, for example, if the tailgate has to be opened in a garage with a low ceiling. will be deactivated to avoid overloading the – Press the button13 on the lower edge of electrical system. The automatic function can Programming the opening angle: the tailgate. be used again after approximately 2 minutes. > The tailgate will close automatically. The – Open the tailgate manually to the desired If the vehicle's battery has been discharged or tailgate and doors will also be locked and angle and press and hold the closing button disconnected, or if the tailgate has been open the alarm will be armed. on the tailgate's lower edge for at least 3 for more than 24 hours, the tailgate must be seconds. Release the tailgate. opened and closed once manually to reset If the remote key is not close enough to the tail- > Two audible signals will sound to indicate the system. gate, automatic locking/unlocking/opening/clos- that the selected opening angle has been ing will not be possible. Three short audible sig- stored. nals will sound. Pinch protection Erasing tailgate programming If the tailgate is obstructed when being opened/ Interrupting opening/closing closed, a pinch protection mechanism is acti- – Open the tailgate manually to its highest – This can be done in five ways: vated. position and press and hold the closing but- • Press the button on the lighting panel ton on the tailgate's lower edge for at least 3 • While opening: the tailgate will stop moving • Press the button on the remote key seconds. Release the tailgate. and an audible signal will sound. • Press either of the buttons on the lower > Two audible signals will sound to indicate • While closing: the tailgate will stop and edge of the tailgate that the programmed opening angle has return to the maximum programmable opening position. An audible signal will sound. • Press lightly on the rubber-covered button been erased. under the tailgate's outside handle WARNING • Move your foot under a sensor beneath the rear bumper* Be sure that no one is near the tailgate when it is opened or closed automatically. The tail- > The tailgate will stop moving gate should never be obstructed in any way when it is operated.

13 Models equipped with the optional Passive Entry system have a button to close the tailgate and a button to close and lock the tailgate. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Related information Locking/unlocking with the Lock the door in the same way, but turn the key • Remote key's range (p. 229) detachable key blade in step 3 counterclockwise. • Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle The detachable key blade can be used to e.g., Turning off the alarm (p. 237) unlock the driver's door from the outside if, for • Foot movement tailgate operation* (p. 233) example, the remote key's battery is weak. Unlocking

Backup key reader under the tunnel console cup holders To turn off the alarm:

Pull out the driver's door handle as far as 1. Place the remote key in the cup holder (on the key symbol) in the tunnel console (see possible to access the lock cylinder. the illustration). Remove the key blade from the remote key START and insert it into the lock cylinder. 2. Turn the start knob to and release it. > The start knob will return to its original Turn it clockwise 45 degrees so that the key position and the alarm will be turned off. blade points straight rearward. Turn the key blade back 45 degrees to its Locking original position. Remove the key blade from If necessary, the vehicle can be locked by insert- the lock cylinder and release the door han- ing the detachable key blade into the lock cylin- dle. der in the driver's door. 5. Pull the door handle again to open the door. Each of the other doors has a lock mechanism that must be pressed in using the key blade so > This will trigger the alarm. that the door cannot be opened from the outside. The doors can still be opened from the inside.

242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

NOTE If the child safety locks are activated for the rear doors and the mechanical locking mechanism has also been activated with the key blade, it will not be possible to open these doors from the inside or the outside. To unlock, use the central unlocking button on either of the front doors or the unlock button on the remote key.

Related information Manually locking a door (this is not the child safety lock) • Detachable key blade (p. 232) – Remove the detachable key blade from the remote key. Insert it into the opening for the lock mechanism and press it in as far as possible. The door can be opened from inside and the outside. The door cannot be opened from the outside. To override the locking function, open the door from the inside. The doors can also be unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the remote key or by pressing the unlock button on the driver's door panel.

243

DRIVER SUPPORT DRIVER SUPPORT

Driver support systems • Park Assist Camera (PAC)* (p. 304) Driver support system camera The vehicle is equipped with a number of driver The camera is used by a number of driver sup- support systems that help provide the driver with port systems to e.g., detect a driving lane's side active/passive support. marker lines or traffic signs.

Some of these systems are standard while others The camera is used by the following driver sup- are optional and they are designed to e.g., help port systems: the driver maintain a set speed or a set distance • Lane Departure Warning/Lane Keeping Aid* to a vehicle ahead, or warn the driver of a potential collision situation and in certain cases apply • Driver Alert Control* the brakes if necessary. Certain optional systems • Pilot Assist* can also assist in various parking situations. • City Safety Related information • Road sign information* • Adjustable steering force* (p. 316) • Active high beams* Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 316) • Related information • Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 290) • High and low beam headlights (p. 140) • Cruise Control (CC) (p. 254) • Driving lane assistance (p. 331) • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 258) • Pilot Assist* (p. 265) • Pilot Assist* (p. 265) • Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 297) • Distance Alert* (p. 322) • City Safety™ (p. 279) • City Safety™ (p. 279) • Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 320) • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 324) • Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 326) • Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 320) • Driving lane assistance (p. 331) • Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 297) • Park Assist* (p. 299) • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 309)

246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Camera limitations WARNING The camera used by several of the driver support Obstructions Never place any objects, decals, etc., on the systems has certain limitations, which also affect windshield in front of the camera/radar unit. the systems using it. This could reduce or block these components' functions, and could cause one or more of the Reduced visibility systems that utilize the them to stop functioning. WARNING • The camera has the same limitations as the human eye. In other words, its “vision If this symbol and Windscreen is impaired” by adverse weather condi- sensor Sensor blocked, see tions such as heavy snowfall, dense fog, Owner's manual appear in the instru- etc. These conditions may reduce the ment panel, this indicates that the function of systems that depend on the camera and/or radar sensor cannot detect other camera or cause these systems to tem- The marked area must not be obstructed in any way. vehicles ahead. porarily stop functioning. This area of the windshield should always be kept clean The following table shows some of the situations The camera is located at the upper, center sec- • Strong sunlight, reflections from the road that can cause the message to be displayed and tion of the windshield along with the radar unit. surface, ice or snow covering the road, a suggested actions. dirty road surface, or unclear lane marker lines may drastically reduce the camera’s capacity to detect the side of a lane, a pedestrian, a cyclist or another vehicle.

Cause Action The area of the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor is dirty or covered by ice or Clean the windshield or remove the ice/ snow. snow. Thick fog or heavy rain/snow blocks reduces the camera/radar sensor's range of visibility. No action. The driver should be extra alert in conditions of this type.

}}

247 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Cause Action Water or snow on the surface of the road swirl up and block radar signals or the camera's No action. The driver should be extra alert in conditions of this view. type. There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the camera/radar sensor. Have the area of the windshield cleaned by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

High temperatures Damaged windshield used, this may cause City Safety to func- If the temperature in the passenger compartment tion improperly or not at all. is very high, the camera and radar sensor may be CAUTION • Volvo recommends the use of only Genu- temporarily turned off for approx. 15 minutes ine Volvo Replacement Windshields. • Service and maintenance on City Safety after the engine has been started to protect their • When replacing windshield wipers, use electronic components. When the temperature may only be carried out by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. the same type or ones approved by Volvo. has cooled sufficiently, the camera and radar sensor will restart automatically. • If a crack, scratch or stone chip should After the windshield has been replaced, the occur in the section of the windshield in camera/radar sensor will have to be recalibra- front the camera/radar sensor, contact a ted by a trained and qualified Volvo service trained and qualified Volvo service techni- technician to help ensure proper function of cian to repair or replace the windshield. all of the vehicle's camera-/radar-based sys- Failing to do so may result in reduced tems. City Safety functionality. To help prevent limited or reduced functional- Maintenance ity, please also observe the following: In order for camera and radar sensor to function • Volvo recommends that cracks, scratches properly, the area of the windshield must be kept or stone chips on the windshield in front free of dirt, ice, snow, etc. and should be washed of the camera/radar sensor should not regularly with a suitable car washing detergent. be repaired; in such cases, the entire windshield should be replaced. Related information • Before the windshield is replaced, con- • City Safety™ (p. 279) tact a Volvo retailer to ensure that the • Radar sensor limitations (p. 251) correct windshield is ordered and instal- • Driver support systems (p. 246) led. If the wrong type of windshield is

248 DRIVER SUPPORT

• Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* limitations (p. 299) • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 313) • City Safety limitations (p. 285) • Driving lane assistance (p. 331) • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 258)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249 DRIVER SUPPORT

Driver support system radar unit The radar unit is used by a number of driver support systems to e.g., help detect other vehicles.

The radar unit is used by the following functions: • Distance Alert* • Adaptive Cruise Control* • Pilot Assist* • City Safety Any modifications to the radar unit may make its use illegal. Related information • Radar sensor (p. 275) • Distance Alert* (p. 322) • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 258) • Pilot Assist* (p. 265) • City Safety™ (p. 279)

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Radar sensor limitations The radar sensor is located at the upper, center The following table shows some of the situations The radar sensor used by several of the driver section of the windshield along with the camera. that can cause the message to be displayed and support systems has certain limitations, which suggested actions. also affect the systems using it. WARNING Obstructions Never place any objects, decals, etc., on the windshield in front of the camera/radar unit. This could reduce or block these components' functions, and could cause one or more of the systems that utilize the them to stop functioning.

If this symbol and Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual appear in the instrument panel, this indicates that the camera and/or radar sensor cannot detect other vehicles ahead. The marked area must not be obstructed in any way. This area of the windshield should always be kept clean

}}

251 DRIVER SUPPORT

The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles a vehicle that suddenly enters the lane ahead is impeded: between your vehicle and the target vehicle. • if the speed of the vehicle ahead differs Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehi- greatly from your vehicle's speed. cles not driving in the center of the lane may remain undetected. Limited field of vision In curves, the radar sensor may detect the The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target vehi- some situations it may detect a vehicle later than cle. expected or not detect other vehicles at all.

Low trailer in the radar shadow Low trailers may also be difficult to detect or may not be detected at all. The driver should be extra Radar sensor's field of vision alert in situations of this type. In certain situations, the radar sensor cannot detect vehicles at close quarters, for example

252 DRIVER SUPPORT

High temperatures Damaged windshield After the windshield has been replaced, the If the temperature in the passenger compartment camera/radar sensor will have to be recalibra- is very high, the camera and radar sensor may be CAUTION ted by a trained and qualified Volvo service temporarily turned off for approx. 15 minutes technician to help ensure proper function of • Service and maintenance on City Safety after the engine has been started to protect their all of the vehicle's camera-/radar-based sys- electronic components. When the temperature may only be carried out by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. tems. has cooled sufficiently, the camera and radar sensor will restart automatically. • If a crack, scratch or stone chip should occur in the section of the windshield in Maintenance front the camera/radar sensor, contact a In order for camera and radar sensor to function trained and qualified Volvo service techni- properly, the area of the windshield must be kept cian to repair or replace the windshield. free of dirt, ice, snow, etc. and should be washed Failing to do so may result in reduced regularly with a suitable car washing detergent. City Safety functionality. Related information To help prevent limited or reduced functionality, please also observe the following: • City Safety™ (p. 279) • Driver support systems (p. 246) • Volvo recommends that cracks, scratches or stone chips on the windshield in front • Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* limitations of the camera/radar sensor should not (p. 299) be repaired; in such cases, the entire • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 313) windshield should be replaced. • City Safety limitations (p. 285) Before the windshield is replaced, con- • Driving lane assistance (p. 331) tact a Volvo retailer to ensure that the • correct windshield is ordered and instal- • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 258) led. If the wrong type of windshield is used, this may cause City Safety to function improperly or not at all. • Volvo recommends the use of only Genu- ine Volvo Replacement Windshields. • When replacing windshield wipers, use the same type or ones approved by Volvo.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253 DRIVER SUPPORT

Cruise Control (CC) Set speed indicator Starting and activating Cruise Cruise Control (CC) is designed to assist the Control The vehicle's current speed driver by maintaining a set speed. It is primarily Starting CC (putting it in standby mode) intended for use on long straight roads in steady The set speed traffic, such as on highways and other main roads. WARNING Overview • The vehicle must always be driven according to current traffic/road conditions. The driver must take action if CC does not maintain a suitable speed and/or distance to other vehicles. • The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.

Related information Function buttons and symbols • Starting and activating Cruise Control (p. 254) – Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the CC • Changing Cruise Control speed (p. 255) ( ) function. The symbol (4) will be Function buttons and symbols • Deactivating/resuming Cruise Control (CC) displayed in the instrument panel. : CC switches from standby mode to (p. 256) > This indicates that CC has been started active mode and the set speed will be • Turning Cruise Control off (p. 257) and is in standby mode. In standby mode, the vehicle will not maintain a set resumed • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 258) speed. : Increases the set speed

: From standby mode, press to put CC NOTE in active mode and set the current speed or Before CC can be activated, the vehicle's from active mode, press to put CC in speed must be at least 20 mph (30 km/h). standby mode This is also the lowest speed that can be set. —: Reduces the set speed

254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Activating CC (putting it in active mode Changing Cruise Control speed erator pedal is still depressed when the button is and setting a speed) pressed. – Changing a set speed With the symbol displayed (CC is in A temporary increase in speed, such as when passing another vehicle, does not affect the CC standby mode), press the button (2) on set speed. The vehicle will return to the set speed the left-side steering wheel keypad. The when the accelerator pedal is released. symbol will change colors from GRAY to WHITE. Engine braking instead of applying the > This puts CC in active mode and sets the brakes vehicle's current speed. CC regulates speed by applying the brakes lightly. To avoid a loss of speed when driving Related information down hills, use the engine braking function • Cruise Control (CC) (p. 254) instead of letting the CC apply the brakes. In this situation, the driver can temporarily deactivate the CC braking function. Function buttons and symbols To do so: – Change a set speed by pressing the (1) – Press the accelerator pedal approx. halfway — or (2) buttons briefly or by pressing and down and release it. holding them: > CC will automatically deactivate the auto- • Press briefly: changes speed in matic brake function and will then only +/– 1 mph (+/– 1 km/h) increments. use the engine braking function. Each press changes the vehicle's speed by +/– 1 mph (+/– 1 km/h). Related information • Press and hold: Release the button • Cruise Control (CC) (p. 254) when the set speed indicator (4) has moved to the desired speed. If speed is increased by pressing the accelerator pedal before the button is pressed, the vehicle's speed when the button is pressed will become the set speed assuming that the accel-

255 DRIVER SUPPORT

Deactivating/resuming Cruise Standby mode due to action by the driver Reactivating CC from standby mode Control (CC) CC is temporarily deactivated and put in standby To reactivate CC after it has temporarily been put Cruise Control (CC) can be temporarily deacti- mode if: in standby mode: vated and put in standby mode. • the brakes are applied Deactivating and putting CC in standby • The gear selector is moved to N mode • the vehicle is driven faster than the set To temporarily deactivate and put Cruise Control speed for more than 1 minute. in standby mode: In these cases, the driver will have to regulate the vehicle's speed. A temporary increase in speed, such as when passing another vehicle, does not affect the CC set speed. The vehicle will return to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is released. Automatic standby mode CC switches automatically to standby mode if: – Press the button (1). • the wheels lose traction > The set speed marker (4) will change • engine speed (rpm) is too high/low color from GRAY to WHITE. The vehicle most recently set • brake temperature is too high will then return to the speed. the vehicle's speed goes below approx. Function buttons and symbols • 20 mph (30 km/h) – WARNING Press the button (2). In these cases, the driver will have to regulate the > The set speed marker (4) and symbols will vehicle's speed. There may be a significant increase in speed change colors from WHITE to GRAY. after the button has been pressed. This indicates that CC is temporarily in standby mode and will not maintain a set or speed.

256 DRIVER SUPPORT

– Press the button (2). Turning Cruise Control off Related information > The set speed marker (4) and symbols will Cruise Control (CC) can be deactivated (turned • Cruise Control (CC) (p. 254) change colors from GRAY to WHITE. CC off). • Starting and activating Cruise Control will then set and maintain the vehicle's (p. 254) current speed. Related information • Cruise Control (CC) (p. 254) • Starting and activating Cruise Control (p. 254)

Function buttons and symbols 1. Press the button (2) on the left-side steering wheel keypad. > This puts CC in standby mode. 2. Press the ◀ or ▶ button to switch to another function. > The Cruise Control symbol in the instrument panel ( ) will go out. 3. Press the button (2) again. > Another function will be activated and the set speed in the CC system's memory will be erased.

257 DRIVER SUPPORT

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* WARNING WARNING ACC is an optional system designed to assist It is advisable to read through all of the Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision the driver by maintaining a set speed or a set • • related articles pertaining to ACC (see avoidance system. The driver is always time interval to the vehicle ahead. the list at the end of this article). responsible for applying the brakes if the The driver sets that desired speed and time inter- • Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover all system does not detect another vehicle. val to the vehicle ahead. When the camera and driving situations and traffic, weather and • Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to radar sensor detects a slower moving vehicle road conditions. people or animals, or small vehicles such ahead, your vehicle's speed is automatically • This system is designed to be a supple- as bicycles and motorcycles. It also does adapted. When there are no longer slower mov- mentary driving aid. It is not, however, not react to slow moving, parked or ing vehicles ahead, your vehicle will accelerate to intended to replace the driver's attention approaching vehicles, or stationary resume the set speed. and judgement. The driver is responsible objects. for maintaining a safe distance and speed Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in ACC is designed to follow a vehicle ahead in the • and must intervene if Adaptive Cruise demanding driving conditions such as city same lane and maintain a time interval to that Control does not maintain a suitable driving or other heavy traffic situations, in vehicle set by the driver. If the radar sensor does speed or suitable distance to the vehicle slippery conditions, when there is a great not detect a vehicle ahead, ACC will instead ahead. deal of water or slush on the road, during maintain the speed set by the driver. • Maintenance of ACC components may heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on ACC is designed to smoothly regulate speed. only be performed by a trained and quali- winding roads or on highway on- or off- However, the driver must apply the brakes in sit- fied Volvo technician. ramps. uations that require immediate braking. This applies when there are great differences in Overview WARNING speed between vehicles, or if the vehicle ahead The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the same brakes suddenly. Due to limitations in the radar The brake pedal moves when the adaptive lane) is monitored by a radar sensor. Your vehi- sensor, braking may occur unexpectedly or not at cruise control system modulates the brakes. cle's speed is regulated by accelerating and all. Do not rest your foot under the brake pedal. braking. The brakes may emit a sound when they Adaptive Cruise Control can follow another vehi- are being modulated by the adaptive cruise con- cle from a standstill up to 125 mph (200 km/h). trol system. This is normal. Always observe posted speed limits.

258 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Controls Instrument panel Collision warning

Function buttons and symbols Speed indicators Warning light Increases the set speed or puts ACC back Set speed Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force into active mode (previous settings will be that is equivalent to approximately 40% of the resumed) Speed of the vehicle ahead vehicle's total braking capacity. Puts ACC in active mode and stores the cur- The current speed of your vehicle In situations requiring more brake force than rent speed or puts ACC standby mode ACC can provide and if the driver does not apply Reduces the set speed the brakes, an audible signal from the City Safety system will sound and warning light will illuminate Target vehicle indicator: ACC has detected in the windshield to alert the driver to react. and is following a target vehicle using the set time interval NOTE Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see.

}}

259 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Head-up-display* • Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control time Starting and activating Adaptive interval (p. 264) Cruise Control (ACC) • Changing Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ACC must first be put in active mode before it speed (p. 263) can be started in order to regulate speed or a • Deactivating/resuming Adaptive Cruise set time interval to the vehicle ahead. Control (ACC) (p. 261) Starting ACC (putting it in standby mode) • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) symbols and messages (p. 278)

A flashing light alerts the driver A flashing icon will appear in the head-up display* to alert the driver of a collision risk.

WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of vehicles Function buttons and symbols detected by the radar sensor. In some cases – Press ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the ACC there may be no warning or the warning may be delayed. The driver should always apply the ( ) function. The symbol (4) will be dis- brakes when necessary. played in the instrument panel. > The symbol indicates that ACC has been Related information started and is in standby mode. In • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) - fault tracing standby mode, the vehicle will not main- (p. 277) tain a set speed or a time interval to the • Starting and activating Adaptive Cruise vehicle ahead. Control (ACC) (p. 260) Activating ACC (putting it in active mode • Adaptive cruise control passing assistance and setting a speed) (p. 276) Before ACC can be put in active mode:

260 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

• The driver's seat belt must be buckled and A speed interval will also be Deactivating/resuming Adaptive the driver's door must be closed. indicated: Cruise Control (ACC) • There must be a vehicle ahead (a target vehi- ACC can be put temporarily in standby mode cle) or your vehicle's current speed must be and then reactivated. at least 10 mph (15 km/h). Deactivating and putting ACC in standby mode The higher speed is the one set in ACC • If ACC is in standby mode and your vehicle • The lower one is the speed of the vehicle comes too close to the vehicle ahead, the driver ahead (the target vehicle). will be warned by the Distance Alert system Related information instead. • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 258) • Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control time interval (p. 264) • Changing Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) speed (p. 263) • Deactivating/resuming Adaptive Cruise – With the symbol displayed (ACC is in Control (ACC) (p. 261) standby mode), press the button (1) on the left-side steering wheel keypad. > This puts ACC in active mode and sets the vehicle's current speed, which is indicated by digits in the center of the speedometer. The time interval to the vehicle ahead will only be shown when two vehicles are displayed.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 261 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| To temporarily deactivate and put Adaptive Cruise In these cases, the driver will have to regulate the • engine speed (rpm) is too high/low Control in standby mode: vehicle's speed. • the wheels lose traction A temporary increase in speed, such as when • the parking brake is applied passing another vehicle, does not affect the ACC • the stability system's ESC Sport Mode is set speed. The vehicle will return to the set speed activated when the accelerator pedal is released. • the Off Road drive mode is selected Automatic standby mode The radar sensor is covered by e.g., wet snow ACC interacts with other systems, such as • or if heavy rain interferes with radar waves Electronic Stability Control. If any of these other systems are not functioning properly, ACC will Reactivating ACC from standby mode turn off automatically. To reactivate ACC after it has temporarily been put in standby mode: WARNING – Press the button (1). If this happens, the driver will be alerted by an Function buttons and symbols > most audible signal and a message in the instru- The vehicle will then return to the – Press the button (2). ment panel. The driver will have to adapt the recently set speed. > vehicle's speed, apply the brakes when nec- The symbol in the instrument panel essary and keep a safe distance to the vehicle WARNING will change colors from WHITE to GRAY ahead. and the set speed in the center of the There may be a significant increase in speed speedometer will change from BEIGE to after the button has been pressed. ACC switches automatically to standby mode if: GRAY. the vehicle's speed goes below approx. Standby mode due to action by the driver • Related information 3 mph (5 km/h) and ACC cannot determine Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 258) ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in if the vehicle ahead is stationary or is an • standby mode if: object such as a speed bump, etc • Starting and activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (p. 260) • the brakes are applied • the vehicle's speed goes below approx. • The gear selector is moved to N 3 mph (5 km/h) and the vehicle ahead • Changing Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) changes lanes or turns so that ACC no speed (p. 263) the vehicle is driven faster than the set • longer has a target vehicle to follow speed for more than 1 minute. • Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control time • the driver opens the door interval (p. 264) • the driver unbuckles the seat belt

262 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

• Adaptive cruise control passing assistance Changing Adaptive Cruise Control If speed is increased by pressing the accelerator (p. 276) (ACC) speed pedal before the button is pressed, the vehi- • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) symbols and ACC makes it possible to set various speeds. cle's speed when the button is pressed will messages (p. 278) become the set speed assuming that the accel- Changing a set speed erator pedal is still depressed when the button is pressed. A temporary increase in speed, such as when passing another vehicle, does not affect the ACC set speed. The vehicle will return to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is released. The lowest speed that can be set for ACC is 20 mph (30 km/h). However, ACC can monitor and react to the speed of the vehicle ahead down to a standstill. ACC not installed at the factory Function buttons and symbols This function can be installed in the vehicle after delivery if it is equipped with the normal cruise – Change a set speed by pressing the (1) control. If ACC was installed after the vehicle was or — (3) buttons briefly or by pressing and purchased, it will differ from the factory-installed holding them: version as follows: • Press briefly: changes speed in • If the speed of the vehicle ahead goes below +/– 5 mph (+/– 5 km/h) increments. 18 mph (30 km/h), ACC disengages (goes Each press changes the vehicle's speed into standby mode) and will no longer modu- by +/– 5 mph (+/– 5 km/h). late the brakes. The driver will then have to • Press and hold: changes the speed maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead +/– 1 mph (+/– 1 km/h) at a time. • The lowest speed at which ACC can be Release the button when the set speed started is 20 mph (30 km/h) indicator (4) has moved to the desired speed.

}}

263 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Related information Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control Changing a time interval • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 258) time interval • Starting and activating Pilot Assist (p. 268) ACC makes it possible to set various time inter- • Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control time vals to the vehicle ahead. interval (p. 264) Different time intervals to the vehicle ahead can be selected and are shown in the instrument panel as 1–5 horizontal bars. The greater the number of bars, the longer the time interval. One bar between the vehicles represents a time interval of approximately 1 second; 5 bars is approximately 3 seconds. Controls for setting a time interval The same symbol appears if Distance Alert is Reduce the time interval activated. Increase the time interval • If the symbol shows two vehicle's, ACC is actively following the vehicle ahead. Distance/time indicator If only one vehicle is displayed, ACC is not • – Press buttons (1) or (2) to reduce or actively following another vehicle. increase the time interval. > The distance/time indicator (3) shows the current time interval. In order to follow the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible, ACC allows the time interval to vary considerably in certain situations. At low speeds, when the distance to the vehicle ahead is short, ACC increases the time interval slightly. • If ACC does not seem to react when it is put in active mode, this may be because the set

264 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

time interval to the vehicle ahead does not Pilot Assist* The driver sets the desired time interval to the allow an increase in speed. The Pilot Assist feature helps keep the vehicle in vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist monitors that vehicle • The higher the speed, the greater the dis- its current traffic lane, at a set speed and a set and the traffic lane's side market lines using the tance to the vehicle ahead for a given time time interval to the vehicle ahead. camera and radar sensor mounted in the upper, interval. center section of the windshield. It helps maintain Function • Only use time intervals permitted by local the set time interval by automatically adjusting traffic regulations. The vehicle's camera monitors the traffic lane's speed and by providing steering assistance to side marker lines and a distance monitor helps help keep your vehicle in the lane. WARNING maintain the set time interval to the vehicle Pilot Assist's steering assistance is based on ahead. monitoring the direction of the vehicle ahead and Only use a time interval that is suitable in • Pilot Assist helps provide more relaxed driving in the traffic lane's side marker lines. The driver can current traffic conditions. heavy, slow-moving traffic at speeds up to always override Pilot Assist and steer the vehicle • A short time interval gives the driver lim- 30 mph (50 km/h) on highways and major roads. to e.g., change lanes, etc. ited reaction time if an unexpected situation occurs in traffic. If the camera and radar sensor cannot detect the lane's side marker lines or a vehicle ahead, Pilot Assist goes into standby mode. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 258) When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and your vehicle comes too close to the vehicle ahead, the Starting and activating Adaptive Cruise • driver will be alerted by the Distance Alert func- Control (ACC) (p. 260) tion. • Deactivating/resuming Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (p. 261) • Adaptive cruise control passing assistance (p. 276) • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) symbols and messages (p. 278) Function overview Windshield module containing the camera/ radar sensor Monitoring distance

Monitoring side marker lines

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 265 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| WARNING The default speed for Pilot Assist is preset to Pilot Assist overview approx. 30 mph (50 km/h) and cannot be Controls • Pilot Assist is designed to be a supple- changed. If the vehicle ahead increases speed to mentary driving aid and cannot cover all over 30 mph (50 km/h) and pulls away from your driving situations, traffic, weather and/or vehicle, Pilot Assist will go into standby mode. road conditions. • The driver should be familiar with all of NOTE the information in this article regarding Pilot Assist, including its limitations. • Pilot Assist maintenance should only be carried out by a trained and qualified Pilot Assist is not intended to replace the • Volvo service technician. driver's attention and judgement. Pilot Assist regulates your vehicle's Pilot Assist must only be used where • • speed using the accelerator pedal and there are clearly visible traffic lane side the brakes. Please be aware that there marker lines on both sides of the current may be a faint sound from the brakes traffic lane. In other circumstances there when the system is using them. Function buttons and symbols is an increased risk of collision with surrounding obstacles that are not detected [ ]: Press to activate Pilot Assist or put it by the system. WARNING in standby mode • The driver is always responsible for steer- • Pilot Assist does not react to people or Arrow key [ < ]: change from Pilot Assist to ing the vehicle and maintaining a suitable animals, or small vehicles such as bicy- Adaptive Cruise Control (symbol (6) will also speed and distance to the vehicle ahead cles and motorcycles. It also does not change) and must intervene if necessary, even if react to low trailers, slow moving, parked Pilot Assist is being used. Reduce the distance (time interval) to the or approaching vehicles, or stationary vehicle ahead objects. Arrow key [ > ]: change from Adaptive Cruise Pilot Assist is designed to regulate speed • Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding smoothly but in situations calling for fast braking, Control to Pilot Assist (symbol (6) will also driving conditions such as city driving or change) the driver must apply the brakes. This applies to other heavy traffic situations, in slippery situations where there are considerable differen- conditions, when there is a great deal of Increase the distance (time interval) to the ces in speed or if the vehicle ahead brakes sud- water or slush on the road, during heavy vehicle ahead denly. Due to the limitations of the camera and rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding Function symbols radar sensor, the system may apply the brakes in roads or on highway on- or off-ramps. your vehicle suddenly or not at all.

266 DRIVER SUPPORT

Instrument panel Collision warning Head-up-display*

Speed indication Warning light A flashing symbol alerts the driver Set speed Pilot Assist can exert brake force that is equiva- If the vehicle is equipped with a head-up display*, lent to approximately 40% of the vehicle's total a flashing symbol in the windshield will alert the Speed of the vehicle ahead braking capacity. driver. Your vehicle's current speed. In situations requiring more brake force than Pilot Assist can provide and if the driver does not NOTE apply the brakes, an audible signal from the City Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con- Safety system will sound and warning light will trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is illuminate in the windshield to alert the driver to not looking straight ahead may make the vis- react. ual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 267 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| WARNING Starting and activating Pilot Assist A YELLOW symbol with a flashing WHITE arrow indicates that the system is about to shift into Pilot Assist only provides warnings for vehi- standby mode. cles that its radar sensor and camera have detected. For this reason, a warning may be With ACC in standby mode: given later than expected or not at all. The driver should never wait for a warning before 1. Tap ▶ (4). applying the brakes. > The symbol will be displayed and Pilot Assist will go into standby mode. Related information 2. Press the button (1) on the left-side • Pilot Assist limitations (p. 272) steering wheel keypad. • Pilot Assist auto-hold brake function > Pilot Assist will go into active mode. (p. 272) • Distance Alert* (p. 322) WARNING Function buttons and symbols • Other Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) func- • Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance tions (p. 274) Prerequisites system. The driver is always responsible • Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control time The prerequisites for activating Pilot Assist are: for applying the brakes if the system does interval (p. 264) not detect another vehicle. • The vehicle ahead must be within a reasonable (detectable) distance • Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding driving conditions such as city driving or The camera must be able to clearly detect • other heavy traffic situations, in slippery the traffic lane's side marker lines conditions, when there is a great deal of • The vehicle's speed must be under approx. water or slush on the road, during heavy 30 mph (50 km/h). rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding A WHITE symbol indicates that roads or on highway on- or off-ramps. Pilot Assist has been selected. • Pilot Assist uses the vehicle's camera In other cases, the WHITE and radar sensor, which have limitations. arrow pointing to the right indi- Pilot Assist may deactivate or not function cates that the system is availa- optimally if: ble.

268 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

• the lane's side market lines are missing, Hands on the steering wheel Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist badly faded or cross each other. Pilot Assist only functions when the driver's • the division of lanes is not clear, e.g., hands are on the steering wheel, which is con- Putting Pilot Assist in standby mode when a line divides or merges with tinuously monitored by the system. If this is not another, at exits or if there are many road the case, the driver will be alerted by a text mes- signs/markers. sage in the instrument panel. If the driver's hands • if there are edges or other lines on or are not returned to the steering wheel, an audible near the lane, e.g., curbs, cracks, repaired signal will sound. areas, sharp shadows, etc. If the driver does not return his/her hands to the • the lane is narrow or winding. steering wheel after the audible signal, Pilot • the weather conditions (rain, snow, fog, Assist will go into standby mode and must be slush, poor visibility, backlighting, etc). reactivated by pressing . The driver should also be aware that Pilot Related information Assist has the following limitations: • Pilot Assist* (p. 265) • High curbs, barriers and temporary obsta- Function buttons and symbols cles (cones, barriers etc) may not be 1. detected or could be detected incorrectly Press the button (1). as side marker lines, which may create a > Pilot Assist will go into standby mode. risk of collision. The driver must ensure a 2. Press the ◀ button (2). safe distance to these obstacles. > Pilot Assist will be turned off and shift to • The camera or radar sensor may not be ACC in standby mode. able to detect objects if there are potholes or if there are stationary objects or partially or completely blocking the road. – Press the ◀ button (2). • Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians, > Pilot Assist will be turned off and switch animals, etc. to ACC in active mode. • Pilot Assist's steering capacity is limited and may not always be able to help the driver keep the vehicle in the lane.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 269 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Standby mode due to driver action WARNING Reactivating Pilot Assist from standby If a turn signal is used or if the accelerator pedal mode is pressed, Pilot Assist will temporarily go into If this happens, the driver will be alerted by an audible signal and a message in the instru- – Press the button (1). standby mode. When the turn signal is switched ment panel. The driver will have to adapt the > The most recently set speed will be used. off or the accelerator pedal is released, Pilot vehicle's speed, apply the brakes when nec- Assist will reactivate automatically. essary and keep a safe distance to the vehicle Related information Automatic reactivation from standby mode can be ahead. • Pilot Assist* (p. 265) done within 1 minute. After 1 minute has elapsed, Pilot Assist must be reactivated man- Pilot Assist switches automatically to standby ually by pressing the button. mode if: Pilot Assist will temporarily go into standby mode • the camera cannot detect the traffic lane's if: side marker lines • the vehicle ahead is not within a reasonable • the brakes are applied (detectable) distance N • the gear selector is moved to the position. • the driver's hands are not on the steering The driver will then have to regulate speed and wheel distance to the vehicle ahead, or reactivate Pilot • the driver unbuckles the seat belt Assist manually by pressing the button on • engine speed (rpm) is too high/low the left-side steering wheel keypad. • the wheels lose traction Automatic standby mode brake temperature is too high Pilot Assist interacts with other systems, such as • Electronic Stability Control. If any of these other • the stability system's ESC Sport Mode is systems are not functioning properly, Pilot Assist activated will automatically be deactivated. • drive mode Off Road is selected • The camera/radar sensor is covered by e.g., wet snow or if heavy rain interferes with radar waves

270 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Setting a Pilot Assist time interval WARNING Different time intervals to the vehicle ahead can Only use a time interval that is suitable in be selected and are shown in the instrument • current traffic conditions. panel as 1–5 horizontal bars. • A short time interval gives the driver lim- Changing the time interval ited reaction time if an unexpected situa- The greater the number of bars, tion occurs in traffic. the longer the time interval. One bar between the vehicles Related information represents a time interval of • Pilot Assist* (p. 265) approximately 1 second; 5 bars is approximately 3 seconds. The same symbol appears if Distance Alert is Time interval controls activated. Press to reduce the time interval to the vehicle ahead Press to increase the time interval to the vehicle ahead Distance indicator In order to follow the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible, Pilot Assist allows the time interval to vary considerably in certain situations. At low speeds, when the distance to the vehicle ahead is short, Pilot Assist increases the time interval slightly. • If Pilot Assist does not seem to react when it is put in active mode, this may be because the set time interval to the vehicle ahead does not allow an increase in speed. • The higher the speed, the greater the distance to the vehicle ahead for a given time interval.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 271 DRIVER SUPPORT

Pilot Assist auto-hold brake Deactivating the auto-hold brake function Pilot Assist limitations function In certain situations, auto-hold will be deactivated Pilot Assist functionality may be limited in certain At certain speeds, Pilot Assist provides braking when the vehicle is at a standstill and Pilot Assist situations. effect. will go into standby mode. This means that the brakes will be released Stop-and-go driving and the vehicle can begin to roll. During brief stops in slow-moving traffic or att traffic lights where the vehicle is not stopped for The driver must actively apply the brakes to keep more than 3 seconds, driving will resume auto- the vehicle at a standstill. matically. If it takes more than 3 seconds for the This can occur in the following situations: vehicle ahead to begin moving again, Pilot Assist will go into standby mode and the auto-hold • the driver presses the brake pedal brake function will activate. • the parking brake is set The driver will then have to reactivate Pilot Assist • the gear selector is moved to the P, N or R as follows: positions the driver puts Pilot Assist in standby mode – • Press the button • • Press the accelerator pedal Automatically setting the parking brake > Pilot Assist will resume following the vehi- In certain situations, the parking brake is set cle ahead if it begins to move within automatically to help keep the vehicle at a stand- approx. 6 seconds. still. This occurs if: NOTE • the driver unbuckles the seat belt or opens • Pilot Assist can keep the vehicle station- the door ary for max. 5 minutes, after which the • Pilot Assist has kept the vehicle at a stand- parking brake will be set and Pilot Assist still for more than approx. 5 minutes will go into standby mode. • the engine is turned off • The parking brake must be released before Pilot Assist can be reactivated. • the brakes overheat Related information • Pilot Assist* (p. 265)

272 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING • High curbs, barriers and temporary obsta- • Setting a Pilot Assist time interval (p. 271) cles (cones, barriers etc) may not be • Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist (p. 269) • Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance detected or could be detected incorrectly system. The driver is always responsible as side marker lines, which may create a • Pilot Assist auto-hold brake function (p. 272) for applying the brakes if the system does risk of collision. The driver must ensure a • Camera limitations (p. 247) not detect another vehicle. safe distance to these obstacles. • Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding • The camera or radar sensor may not be driving conditions such as city driving or able to detect objects if there are pot- other heavy traffic situations, in slippery holes or if there are stationary objects conditions, when there is a great deal of partially or completely blocking the road. water or slush on the road, during heavy Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians, rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding • animals, etc. roads or on highway on- or off-ramps. Pilot Assist's steering capacity is limited Pilot Assist uses the vehicle's camera • • and may not always be able to help the and radar sensor, which have limitations. driver keep the vehicle in the lane. Pilot Assist may deactivate or not function optimally if: The driver can always take action to override Pilot • the lane's side market lines are missing, Assist. badly faded or cross each other. • the division of lanes is not clear, e.g., Steep roads and/or heavy loads when a line divides or merges with Pilot Assist is primarily intended for use on rela- another, at exits or if there are many road tively level roads. The function may not be able to signs/markers. maintain the correct time interval to the vehicle • if there are edges or other lines on or ahead on when driving down steep hills, when the near the lane, e.g., curbs, cracks, repaired vehicle is transporting a heavy load or if it is tow- areas, sharp shadows, etc. ing a trailer. The driver should be attentive and prepared to apply the brakes in these situations. • the lane is narrow or winding. • the weather conditions (rain, snow, fog, Related information slush, poor visibility, backlighting, etc). • Radar sensor limitations (p. 251) The driver should also be aware that Pilot • Pilot Assist* (p. 265) Assist has the following limitations: • Starting and activating Pilot Assist (p. 268)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 273 DRIVER SUPPORT

Other Adaptive Cruise Control WARNING – The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in (ACC) functions one of the following ways: If ACC changes targets from a moving vehicle to a stationary one at speeds above 20 mph • Press the button on the left-side ACC has several supplementary functions: (30 km/h), the system will not react to the steering wheel keypad stationary vehicle and will accelerate to the Changing target vehicles • previously set speed. • Press the accelerator pedal Automatic standby mode when changing tar- > ACC will resume following the vehicle • The driver must actively apply the brakes to gets ahead (target vehicle) if it begins to move slow/stop the vehicle. • Auto-hold brake function within approx. 6 seconds. • Deactivation of the auto-hold brake function Automatic standby mode when changing NOTE • Automatically setting the parking brake targets ACC disengages and goes into standby mode if: ACC can keep the vehicle at a standstill for Changing target vehicles up to 5 minutes, after which the parking brake • your vehicle's speed goes below approx. 3 will be set and ACC will go into standby mph (5 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if mode. the target object is a stationary vehicle or some other type of object such as a speed The parking brake has to be released before bump, etc ACC can be reactivated. • the vehicle's speed goes below approx. 3 mph (5 km/h) and the vehicle ahead changes lanes or turns so that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to follow If the target vehicle turns suddenly, there may be a sta- Auto-hold brake function tionary vehicle ahead In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when stop- When ACC is actively following another vehicle at ped at a traffic light, driving will resume automati- speeds under 20 mph (30 km/h) and changes cally if the vehicle is not stopped for more than targets from a moving vehicle to a stationary one, approx. 3 seconds. If it takes more than the system will brake for the stationary vehicle. 3 seconds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving again, ACC will go into standby mode and the auto-hold brake function will activate.

274 DRIVER SUPPORT

Deactivation of the auto-hold brake Related information Radar sensor function • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 258) The radar sensor is used by several driver sup- In certain situations, auto-hold will be deactivated • Auto-hold brake function (p. 341) port functions to help detect other vehicles. when the vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will go Parking brake (p. 344) into standby mode. • The radar sensor is used by the following functions: This means that the brakes will be released and the vehicle can begin to roll. • Distance Alert* The driver must actively apply the brakes to keep • Adaptive Cruise Control* the vehicle at a standstill. • Pilot Assist* This can occur in the following situations: • City Safety* • the driver presses the brake pedal Modification of the radar sensor could make its use illegal. • the parking brake is set • the gear selector is moved to the P, N or R Related information positions • Radar sensor - type approval (p. 276) • the driver puts ACC in standby mode • Radar sensor limitations (p. 251) Automatically setting the parking brake In certain situations, the parking brake is set automatically to help keep the vehicle at a standstill. This occurs if: • the driver unbuckles the seat belt or opens the door • ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill for more than approx. 5 minutes • the engine is turned off • the brakes overheat

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 275 DRIVER SUPPORT

Radar sensor - type approval Adaptive cruise control passing • The speed set for ACC must be high enough assistance to safely pass the vehicle ahead. USA & Canada: ACC can assist the driver when passing other Starting passing assistance FCC ID: L2C0054TR IC: 3432A-0054TR FCC vehicles. To start a passing assistance sequence: ID: L2C0055TR IC: 3432A-0055TR How passing assistance works • Activate the left turn signal. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC When ACC is following another vehicle and the Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt driver indicates that he/she is about to pass that Passing assistance limitations RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol- vehicle by using the left turn signal, ACC will lowing two conditions: begin accelerating toward the vehicle ahead WARNING (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- before your vehicle has moved into the passing The driver should be prepared for sudden ence, and lane. changes when passing assistance is used. In certain cases, there may be undesired accel- (2) This device must accept any interference The function will then delay a speed reduction to eration. received, including interference that may cause avoid early braking as your vehicle approaches undesired operation. the slower-moving vehicle. Certain situations should be avoided, such as: The function is active until your vehicle has • If the vehicle is approaching an exit to the WARNING passed the other vehicle. left or a left turn. Changes or modifications not expressively • If the vehicle ahead slows down before approved by the party responsible for compli- WARNING your vehicle has moved into the passing ance could void the user's authority to oper- lane. ate the equipment. Be aware that this function may be activated in situations other than when passing a vehi- • Traffic in the passing lane slows down. cle, such as if the turn signal is used to indi- The term “IC:” before the radio certification num- cate a lane change or to indicate a turn. The Passing assistance in these situations can be vehicle will accelerate briefly. ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical deactivated by putting ACC in standby mode. specifications were met. Using passing assistance Related information Related information To activate passing assistance: • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 258) • Radar sensor (p. 275) • Your vehicle (ACC) must be following another vehicle (the target vehicle). • Current speed must be at least approx. 45 mph (70 km/h ).

276 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) - This message also indicates that the following • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) fault tracing systems may have reduced functionality: • Traffic Sign Information (TSI) Distance Alert The following table lists possible causes for this If this symbol is displayed in the instru- • message being displayed and suitable actions: ment panel and the message • City Safety Windscreen sensor Sensor • Driver Alert Control blocked, see Owner's manual • Pilot Assist appears, the ACC radar sensor is blocked and Lane Departure Warning (LDW) cannot detect vehicles ahead. •

Cause Action The windshield in front of the radar is dirty or covered with snow/ice. Clean/clear the windshield in front of the radar. Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar. Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere with the No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the radar signals. function of the radar. The windshield in front of the radar is clean but the message remains in the Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is display. no longer obstructed.

A text message can be erased by briefly pressing the O button on the right-side steering wheel keypad. If the message recurs, contact a trained and authorized Volvo service technician or retailer. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 258)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 277 DRIVER SUPPORT

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) The following table lists several ACC-related symbols and messages symbols and messages. In certain cases, ACC will display symbols (in different colors) and text messages.

Symbol Message Explanation WHITE symbol ACC is in active mode and maintaining the set speed.

GRAY symbol and Unavailable ACC is in standby mode.

Adaptive cruise The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo Service Service required technician.

Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Clean the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor. Owner's manual

Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 258)

278 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

City Safety™ WARNING Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not be City Safety™ is a support system designed to aware of City Safety except when the system City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to the help alert the driver to pedestrians, cyclists and • intervenes when a collision is imminent. driver. It can never replace the driver’s vehicles that may appear suddenly in front of attention to traffic conditions or his/her City Safety parameters your vehicle. Visual and audible alerts are provi- responsibility for operating the vehicle in City Safety can help avoid a collision with a vehi- ded. The vehicle will brake automatically if the a safe manner. cle or cyclist ahead by reducing your vehicle's driver is unable to react quickly enough. • City Safety™ does not function in all driv- speed by up to 30 mph (50 km/h). In the case of City Safety introduction ing situations or in all traffic, weather or pedestrians, City Safety can reduce speed by up road conditions. to 28 mph (45 km/h). If the difference in speed between your vehicle The City Safety function can help the driver avoid and the vehicle ahead is greater than 30 mph a collision when e.g., there is a sudden change in (50 km/h), City Safety's auto-brake function can- the traffic ahead if the driver's does not take not prevent a collision but it can help mitigate action. effects of the collision. The function assists the driver by applying the brakes automatically if there is an imminent risk of a collision and the driver does not react in time. City Safety triggers brief, forceful braking in an Location of the camera and radar sensor attempt to stop your vehicle immediately behind the vehicle or object ahead. This braking may be City Safety can help prevent a collision or lower perceived as being very sudden. the vehicle's speed at the point of impact. City Safety activates in situations where the driver has not applied the brakes in time, which means that the system cannot help the driver in all situations. City Safety is designed to intervene as late as possible to help avoid unnecessary activation.

}}

279 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| WARNING an audible signal and pulsations in the brake pedal. Warnings will only be provided if there is an imminent risk of a collision taking place. The 2: Brake assistance driver should be aware of the system's limita- If the risk of a collision increases, brake support tions before operating the vehicle. will be activated. Warnings and automatic braking for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at speeds This function increases pressure on the brake above 50 mph (80 km/h). pedal if the driver does not apply enough pressure to the pedal. City Safety's auto-brake function can help prevent a collision or reduce the speed at 3: Auto-brake which a collision occurs. However, the driver The brakes will be applied automatically. should always apply the brakes, even if auto- brake is operating. Function overview If the driver has not taken action at this stage and The driver is always responsible for maintain- Audio-visual collision warning a collision is imminent, auto-braking will be trig- ing the correct speed and distance in relation gered. Full braking effect will be used to avoid to the vehicle ahead. Never wait for a collision Distance monitoring by a camera and radar the collision if possible or to make the speed at warning or for City Safety to intervene. sensor the point of impact as low as possible. When triggered, City Safety carries out three City Safety does not activate the auto-brake In certain situations, auto-braking may begin with steps in the following order: function during fast acceleration. limited effect before full braking is used. City Safety maintenance may only be carried 1. Collision warning If City Safety has prevented a collision, the vehi- out by a trained and qualified Volvo service 2. Brake assistance technician. cle will be kept at a standstill until the driver 3. Auto-brake takes action. If the vehicle has slowed to avoid colliding with the vehicle ahead, your speed will 1: Collision warning be reduced to that vehicle's speed. The driver is first alerted to the risk of an imminent collision. When auto-break is triggered, the seat belt pretensioners may also be activated, see the article City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or "Seat belts" for additional information. vehicles that are stationary, are moving in the same direction as your vehicle or are described in Auto-braking can be cancelled if the driver the article "City Safety in crossing traffic." The presses hard on the accelerator pedal. driver is alerted by a flashing red warning signal,

280 DRIVER SUPPORT

When City Safety applies the brakes, the brake City Safety warning level settings WARNING lights will illuminate. City Safety is always activated but the function's No automatic system can be guaranteed warning distance can be adjusted. • When City Safety is triggered and applies the to function 100% correctly in all situa- brakes, a text message will be displayed in the tions. For that reason, never test City instrument panel. NOTE Safety by driving toward a person or object. This could result in serious injury Related information City Safety cannot be turned off and activates automatically each time the engine is started. or death. • City Safety™ troubleshooting (p. 287) • Even if the setting Earlier has been City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 283) • Setting a warning level (distance) selected, warnings may be perceived as • City Safety limitations (p. 285) The distance set for warnings determines the being given late, e.g., if the difference in speed is great or if the vehicle ahead • City Safety symbols and messages (p. 289) system's responsiveness and sets the distance at brakes suddenly. • Detecting cyclists and pedestrians with City which visual, audible and tangible (haptic) warn- Safety (p. 282) ings will be triggered. • City Safety can provide a warning for a potential collision but it can never shorten • Rear Collision Warning (RCW) (p. 284) If the driver feels that warnings are given too the driver's reaction time. often, the warning level can be lowered. This • City Safety warning level settings (p. 281) To help make City Safety as effective as means that warnings will be provided later, result- • City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 283) possible, always using the setting Earlier • ing in fewer warnings being given. • Seat belts (p. 62) is recommended. To do so: 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top NOTE view. • Due to local traffic regulations in certain 2. Tap My Car IntelliSafe City Safety. markets, RCW will not activate the rear turn signals. That part of the function will Earlier Normal Later 3. Choose among , or . be deactivated. Begin by choosing Earlier. If too many warnings • The use of the rear turn signals will also are given, change to Normal. be deactivated if the City Safety warning Later The setting Later should only used in exceptional level is set at . See also the section circumstances, e.g., for a more dynamic driving style.

}}}}

281 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| "Setting a warning level (distance)" in the Detecting cyclists and pedestrians shoulders, legs, the upper and lower parts of the article "City Safety settings." with City Safety body and a cyclist's normal pattern of movement. • If RCW detects a vehicle approaching City Safety can detect vehicles, cyclists and • If major parts of the cyclist's body are not from behind, the seat belt pretensioners pedestrians. visible to the camera, the system cannot and Whiplash Protection System will be detect the cyclist. activated. Vehicles The cyclist must be an adult riding an "adult- City Safety detects most types of vehicles that • size" bike. Related information are either stationary, moving in the same direction as your vehicle or approaching when you are • City Safety limitations (p. 285) about to turn left. WARNING • City Safety™ (p. 279) In order for City Safety to detect a vehicle in City Safety is designed to be a supplementary Rear Collision Warning (RCW) (p. 284) driving aid. • darkness, its headlights and taillights must be on and clearly visible. It cannot detect: Cyclists • all cyclists in all situations, e.g., a partially obscured cyclist will not be detected. • a cyclist whose clothing prevents a clear view of the person's body contours. • a cyclist transporting a large object. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.

Optimal example of what the system considers to be a cyclist: clear body/bike contours To help function optimally, City Safety's function for cyclist detection needs clear information about the bike itself and the rider's head, arms,

282 DRIVER SUPPORT

Pedestrians • If major parts of the pedestrian's body are City Safety in crossing traffic not visible to the camera, he/she may not be City Safety can help the driver when making a detected. left turn in an intersection. • In order to detect a pedestrian, the system must have a full view of the person's entire Turning at an intersection body and the person must be at least 32 in. (80 cm) tall.

WARNING City Safety is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It cannot detect pedestrians: Optimal example of what the system considers to be a • who are partially obscured, wearing cloth- pedestrian: clear body contours ing that prevents a clear view of the per- To help function optimally, City Safety's function son's body contours or who are not at least 32 in. (80 cm) tall. for pedestrian detection needs clear information about the person's head, arms, shoulders, legs, • who have limited contrast to their immedi- 1. The area in which City Safety can detect an oncoming vehicle the upper and lower parts of the body and a per- ate background. A warning or braking son's normal pattern of movement. may be delayed or not come at all. In order for City Safety to detect an approaching vehicle in situations where there is a risk of a col- In order to detect a pedestrian, there must be a • carrying a large object. lision, that vehicle must be within City Safety's contrast to the background. If there is little con- The driver is always responsible for operating range (the red area in the illustration). trast, the person may be detected late or not at the vehicle in a safe manner. all, which may result in a late or no reaction from The following criteria must also be met: the system. Related information • your vehicle's speed must be at least 3 mph City Safety can also detect pedestrians in dark- • City Safety™ (p. 279) (4 km/h) ness with the help of the vehicle's headlights. • City Safety limitations (p. 285) • the approaching vehicle's headlights must be • City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 283) on

}}

283 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| WARNING Rear Collision Warning (RCW) NOTE The Rear Collision Warning with braking at City Safety is a supplementary driving aid Due to local traffic regulations in certain • standstill (RCW) function can help the driver • and does not function in all driving situa- markets, RCW will not activate the rear tions or in all traffic, weather or road con- avoid rear-end collisions. turn signals. That part of the function will ditions. RCW is activated automatically each time the be deactivated. • Warnings and braking for an approaching engine is started and cannot be turned off. • The use of the rear turn signals will also vehicle will usually come at a very late be deactivated if the City Safety warning RCW can warn the driver of a vehicle approach- stage. level is set at Later. See also the section ing yours from behind by rapidly flashing your "Setting a warning level (distance)" in the • The driver is responsible for maintaining a rear turn signals. safe distance and speed. Never wait for a article "City Safety settings." warning or for City Safety to take action. RCW is only activated when a vehicle is rapidly • If RCW detects a vehicle approaching approaching your vehicle from behind. from behind, the seat belt pretensioners Limitations At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), if RCW and Whiplash Protection System will be activated. In certain situations, it may be very difficult for determines that your vehicle is at risk of a rear- City Safety to help the driver avoid a collision with end collision, the front seat belt pretensioners an approaching vehicle in crossing traffic, for and the Whiplash Protection System are acti- Limitations example: vated. In some circumstances, it may be difficult for RCW to help the driver if there is a risk of a colli- on slippery roads when Electronic Stability Just prior to the collision, the brakes are also • sion, such as: Control is active applied to help reduce your vehicle's forward • if the approaching vehicle is detected at a movement if and when the collision occurs. How- • In slippery conditions when Electronic late stage ever, this can only happen if your vehicle is sta- Stability Control is active tionary. • If the approaching vehicle is partially • If the vehicle approaching from the rear is obscured by another vehicle The brakes will be released immediately if the detected at a late stage • if the approaching vehicle moves erratically accelerator pedal is pressed. • If the vehicle approaching from the rear (e.g., sudden lane changes at a late stage) changes lanes at a late stage • If the vehicle approaching from the rear is Related information moving at a speed above approx. 50 mph • City Safety™ (p. 279) (80 km/h) detected at a late stage • City Safety limitations (p. 285)

284 DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information City Safety limitations The visual warning signal may also be temporarily • City Safety™ (p. 279) City Safety™ may have limited or reduced func- disabled due to high passenger compartment • Whiplash protection system (p. 61) tionality in certain situations. temperatures caused by strong sunlight. Warnings may not be given if the distance to the • Seat belts (p. 62) The function has several limitations that the driver vehicle ahead is short and the driver is actively City Safety warning level settings (p. 281) should be familiar with: • operating the vehicle (clearly depressing a pedal Low objects or turning the steering wheel). Hanging objects, such as flags for overhanging Reduced visibility loads or accessories such as auxiliary lights or City Safety's functions may be greatly impeded or front protective grids that extend beyond the deactivated by e.g., intense snowfall or rain, in height of the hood may limit City Safety's func- dense fog, in very dusty conditions or if there is tion. blowing snow in front of the vehicle. Condensa- Slippery driving conditions tion, ice, snow or dirt on the windshield may also The extended braking distance on slippery roads reduce the system's functionality. may reduce City Safety's capacity to help avoid a collision. In situations of this type, the ABS NOTE brakes and Electronic Stability Control will help provide braking power and stability. • Keep the windshield in front of the radar sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, etc. Backlighting • Snow or ice on the hood deeper than Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con- 2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sensor. trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not Keep the hood free of ice and snow. looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see. • Do not mount or in any way attach anything on the windshield that could Heat obstruct the radar sensor. If the temperature in the passenger compartment is very high, the camera and radar sensor may be temporarily turned off for approx. 15 minutes after the engine has been started to protect their electronic components. When the temperature has cooled sufficiently, the camera and radar sensor will restart automatically. }}

285 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Camera and radar sensor's field of vision WARNING Low speed The camera and radar sensor have limited fields City Safety is not activated at very low speeds of vision. In some situations they may detect a • Warnings and braking may be delayed or (under approx. 3 mph (4 km/h). This means that vehicle, pedestrian or cyclist later than expected not occur at all if traffic, weather or other the system will not be triggered if your vehicle conditions prevent the camera and/or or not detect them at all. approaches a vehicle ahead, such as when park- radar sensor from detecting pedestrians, ing. Other vehicles that are dirty may be detected cyclists or other vehicles correctly. Active driver later than others and in dark conditions, motorcy- • Other vehicles can only be detected in cles may be detected late or not at all. darkness if their headlights and taillights Action by the driver always has priority. For this reason, City Safety may not react or react later If a text message is displayed in the instrument are clearly visible. than expected in situations in which the driver is panel indicates that the camera or radar sensor The sensors have a limited range for • actively operating the vehicle, even if a collision is are blocked, it may be difficult for City Safety to pedestrians and cyclists. The system imminent. This is also done to help eliminate detect a vehicle, pedestrian or cyclist and the functions best at speeds up to 30 mph excessive warnings. system's functionality may be reduced. (50 km/h). For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, the system functions best at Related information speeds up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h). WARNING • City Safety™ (p. 279) Warnings for stationary or slow-moving Text messages may not be displayed in all sit- • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) - fault tracing vehicles may be impeded by darkness or • uations in which the camera and/or radar (p. 277) sensor are blocked. It is therefore essential to poor visibility. • City Safety™ troubleshooting (p. 287) keep the windshield in front the camera/radar • Warnings and braking for pedestrians and sensor clean and free from snow, ice, etc. cyclists will not be provided at speeds • Camera limitations (p. 247) above approx. 50 mph (80 km/h). • Radar sensor limitations (p. 251) Camera and radar sensor components should • Do not place, attach or mount any objects only be serviced or replaced by a trained and on the inside or outside of the windshield qualified Volvo service technician. near or over the sensor. This could affect Other limitations the camera-based functions. City Safety uses the vehicle's camera and radar sensor, which have certain general limitations. Action by the driver See the articles "Camera limitations" and Radar Backing up sensor limitations" for additional information. City Safety is temporarily deactivated while the vehicle is backing up.

286 DRIVER SUPPORT

City Safety™ troubleshooting The following table shows some of the situations CAUTION Messages pertaining to any possible problems that can cause the message to be displayed and Service and maintenance on City Safety with City Safety will be displayed in the instru- suggested actions. • may only be carried out by a trained and ment panel. qualified Volvo service technician. Cause Action Troubleshooting and remedial action • If a crack, scratch or stone chip should The area of the wind- Clean the wind- occur in the section of the windshield in shield in front of the shield or remove front the camera/radar sensor, contact a camera/radar sensor is the ice/ snow. trained and qualified Volvo service techni- dirty or covered by ice or cian to repair or replace the windshield. snow. Failing to do so may result in reduced City Safety functionality. Thick fog or heavy rain/ No action. The To help prevent limited or reduced functional- snow blocks reduces the driver should be ity, please also observe the following: camera/radar sensor's extra alert in condi- range of visibility. tions of this type. • Volvo recommends that cracks, scratches or stone chips on the windshield in front There is dirt between Have the area of of the camera/radar sensor should not the inside of the wind- the windshield be repaired; in such cases, the entire Location of the camera and the radar sensor shield and the camera/ cleaned by a windshield should be replaced. radar sensor. trained and quali- If a message is displayed in the instrument panel • Before the windshield is replaced, con- fied Volvo service saying that the camera/radar sensor is blocked, tact a Volvo retailer to ensure that the technician. City Safety cannot detect vehicles, cyclists or correct windshield is ordered and instal- pedestrians ahead of you, which means that the led. If the wrong type of windshield is system is not functioning properly. used, this may cause City Safety to function improperly or not at all. However, this message will not be displayed in all Volvo recommends the use of only Genu- situations in which the camera/radar sensor is • ine Volvo Replacement Windshields. obstructed. For this reason, the driver must ensure that the area of the windshield in front of • When replacing windshield wipers, use the camera/radar sensor is always kept clean. the same type or ones approved by Volvo.

}}}}

287 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| After the windshield has been replaced, the WARNING camera/radar sensor will have to be recalibra- • The camera has the same type of limita- ted by a trained and qualified Volvo service tions as the human eye, i.e., it cannot see technician to help ensure proper function of as well in heavy snowfall or rain, thick fog all of the vehicle's camera-/radar-based sys- or in heavy blowing dust or snow. In such tems. conditions, systems depending on the camera may experience greatly reduced Maintenance functionality or may be temporarily deacti- In order for City Safety to function properly, the vated. area of the windshield must be kept free of dirt, • Never place any objects, decals, etc., on ice, snow, etc. the windshield in front of the camera. This could reduce or block the camera’s func- Other vehicle functions tion, and could cause one or more of the If a message is displayed in the instrument panel, systems that utilize the camera to stop this means that the other systems using the cam- functioning. era/radar sensor (see the list below) will not have • Strong sunlight, reflections from the road full functionality or may not function at all. surface, ice or snow covering the road, a The radar sensor is used by the following func- dirty road surface, or unclear lane marker tions: lines may drastically reduce the camera’s capacity to detect the side of a lane, a • Distance Alert* pedestrian, a cyclist or another vehicle. • Driver Alert Control* • Adaptive Cruise Control* Radar sensor for other functions • Pilot Assist* City Safetyuses the same radar sensor as Adap- tive Cruise Control. See the article "Radar sensor • Road Sign Information* limitations" for detailed information. • Active High Beams* Related information • Lane Keeping Aid* • Radar sensor limitations (p. 251) Do not mount or in any way attach anything on Radar sensor (p. 275) the windshield that could obstruct the camera/ • radar sensor. • City Safety limitations (p. 285)

288 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

City Safety symbols and messages A number of City Safety-related messages may be displayed in the instrument panel.

Message Explanation City Safety When City Safety is braking or has applied the brakes, one of more symbols may illuminate in the instrument City Safety was activated panel and a text message will be displayed.

City Safety The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and authorized Volvo service technician. Reduced functionality Service required

Related information • City Safety™ (p. 279)

289 DRIVER SUPPORT

Speed limiter (SL)* Set maximum speed indicator • Changing tolerance for the Automatic Speed The Speed Limiter (SL) is a feature that helps Limiter (p. 294) The vehicle's current speed prevent the driver from exceeding a preset maxi- • Turning the Speed Limiter* off (p. 296) mum speed. The set maximum speed Overview WARNING • The Speed Limiter cannot cover all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions. • The vehicle must always be driven according to current traffic/road conditions. • The driver must take action if SL does not maintain the set maximum speed. • The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner and Function buttons and symbols observing posted speed limits. SL switches from standby mode to active mode and the set maximum speed will Related information be used • Starting and activating the Speed Limiter (SL)* (p. 291) Increases the set maximum speed • Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter* From standby mode, press to put SL (p. 295) in active mode and set the current speed as • Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)* maximum the maximum or from active mode, press to speed (p. 291) put SL in standby mode (the set maximum • Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 292) speed can be exceeded) • Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed — Decreases the set maximum speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 293)

290 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Starting and activating the Speed Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)* Limiter (SL)* maximum speed

Starting SL (putting it in standby mode)

– With SL in standby mode (the will be displayed), press the button (2). Function buttons and symbols > This puts SL in active mode and sets the Function buttons and symbols vehicle's current speed as the maximum – Change a set maximum speed by pressing – Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the Speed speed. the (1) or — (3) buttons briefly or by pressing and holding them: Limiter ( ) function. Related information Press briefly > The symbol (4) will be displayed in the • Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 290) • : changes the maximum instrument panel. This indicates that SL speed in +/– 5 mph (+/– 5 km/h) incre- • Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter* ments. Each press changes the maximum has been started and is in standby (p. 295) speed by +/– 5 mph (+/– 5 km/h). mode. • Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)* maximum • Press and hold: changes the maximum Activating SL (putting it in active mode speed (p. 291) speed +/– 1 mph (+/– 1 km/h) at a time. and setting a maximum speed) • Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 292) Release the button when the indicator (4) has moved to the desired maximum The engine must be running before SL can be Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed • speed. put in active mode. The lowest maximum speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 293) that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h). • Changing tolerance for the Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 294) • Turning the Speed Limiter* off (p. 296) }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 291 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Limitations Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* Road sign sym- Explanation When driving down steep hills, the Speed The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) reads road bol's color Limiter's braking effect may not be adequate and signs and adapts the vehicle's maximum speed the set maximum speed may be exceeded. The to the posted speed limits. Green/yellow ASL is active message Speed limit exceeded will appear in Gray ASL is in standby mode the instrument panel to alert the driver. The Speed Limiter function can be switched to Automatic Speed Limiter. Amber/orange ASL is temporarily in NOTE Is SL or ASL active? standby mode (e.g., because a speed limit sign could not This message will appear if the maximum Symbols in the instrument panel indicate which be read) speed is exceeded by more than 2 mph function is active: (3 km/h). Limitations Symbol SL ASL Adjusting a set speed is done first when the vehi- Related information cle passes a speed limit sign. If a speed limit sign • Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 290) ✓ ✓ cannot be read (e.g., because it is twisted, dam- A aged, faded, dirty, covered by snow, etc.) ASL will go into standby mode because the system will ✓ not have "seen" the speed posted on the sign (SL will activate). The driver will have to react and adapt the vehicle's speed. ASL will reactivate Sign symbolB after "70": ASL is acti- when the vehicle passes a speed limit sign that vated. the system can read. A WHITE symbol: the function is active, GRAY symbol: the func- Related information tion is in standby mode. B See the section "ASL symbol" below for an explanation of the • Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 290) symbol's different colors. • Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed ASL symbol Limiter (ASL)* (p. 293) A road sign symbol (next to the stored • Changing tolerance for the Automatic Speed speed in the center of the speedome- Limiter (p. 294) ter) can be displayed in three different • Starting and activating the Speed Limiter colors as explained in the following (SL)* (p. 291) table:

292 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

• Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter* Activating/deactivating the 2. Press the button on the left-side steer- (p. 295) Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* ing wheel keypad. • Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 297) > SL will go into standby mode. ASL is activated/deactivated in the center display's Function view. WARNING After switching from ASL to SL, the vehicle will no longer adapt speed to posted speed limits. It will only limit the vehicle's maximum speed. Activating 1. If SL is not activated, tap the Speed Sign Related information Assist button1 in the center display's Func- • Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 290) tion view. • Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 292) > ASL will go into standby mode and a green indicator light in the button will illuminate. A road sign symbol will be displayed in center of the speedometer. 2. Press the button on the left-side steering wheel keypad. > ASL will be activated with the vehicle's current speed. Deactivating 1. Tap the Speed Sign Assist button in the center display's Function view. > ASL will be deactivated and the Speed limiter (SL) will be activated.

1 If this button is tapped while SL is activated, ASL will immediately begin reading road signs.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 293 DRIVER SUPPORT

Changing tolerance for the Related information Automatic Speed Limiter • Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 292) • Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed Posted speed limit tolerance Limiter (ASL)* (p. 293) ASL can be set to allow the vehicle to drive a maximum of 5 mph (10 km/h) above or below • Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 297) the posted speed limit. For example, if the current • Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)* maximum posted speed limit is 50 mph (70 km/h), the speed (p. 291) driver can opt to allow the vehicle to drive at a speed of 55 mph (80 km/h).

Function buttons and symbols – Press the button (1) briefly to change 50 mph (70 km/h) to 55 mph (75 km/h) in the center of the speedometer (6). > The vehicle will then use the selected tolerance if the speed limit sign detected is 50 mph (70 km/h). This will continue until the vehicle passes a sign with a lower or higher speed limit. The vehicle will then adjust to the new maximum speed and the set tolerance will be deleted from the system's memory. The set tolerance can be adjusted in the same way as the set Speed Limiter's set maximum speed. If the Road Sign Information system* is activated, the posted speed limit will be indicated by a RED marker (4) on the speedometer's speed scale.

294 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Deactivating and putting SL in standby Using the accelerator pedal Limiter* mode This can be useful in situations where quick The Speed Limiter (SL) can be temporarily deac- Using the left-side steering wheel keypad acceleration is desirable. tivated and put in standby mode. To temporarily put the Speed Limiter in standby 1. Press the accelerator pedal as far down as mode: possible and release it when the vehicle has reached the desired speed. > This makes it possible to temporarily exceed the set maximum speed. 2. Release the accelerator pedal when the temporary acceleration is completed. > After the accelerator pedal has been released, SL is automatically reactivated, the vehicle will slow down to the set maximum speed and the vehicle's speed will then be limited to the set maximum speed.

Function buttons and symbols – Press the button (2). > The maximum speed marker (4) and symbols will change colors from WHITE to GRAY. This indicates that SL is temporarily in standby mode and will not limit the vehicle's maximum speed.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 295 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Reactivating SL from standby mode2 Related information Turning the Speed Limiter* off To reactivate SL after it has temporarily been put • Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 290) The Speed Limiter (SL) can be turned off. in standby mode: • Starting and activating the Speed Limiter (SL)* (p. 291)

Function buttons and symbols – Press the button (1). 1. Press the button (2). > The maximum speed marker (4) and sym- > SL will go into standby mode. bols will change colors from GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle's maximum speed 2. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) buttons to change to will be limited to the previously set maxi- another function. mum speed3. > The SL symbol (4) in the instrument panel will go out. or 3. Press the button (2) again. – Press the button (2). > Another function will be activated. The set > The maximum speed marker (4) and sym- maximum speed will be erased from the bols will change colors from GRAY to system's memory. WHITE and the vehicle's current speed will be set as the maximum speed.

2 This also applies to the Automatic Speed limiter (ASL). 3 When reactivating ASL, the vehicle's maximum speed will be limited to the previously set maximum speed unless the vehicle passed a sign with a higher or lower speed limit while ASL was in standby mode.

296 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information Road Sign Information (RSI)* Related information • Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 290) RSI is a feature that helps the driver see road • Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* operation • Starting and activating the Speed Limiter signs showing the posted speed limit. (p. 298) (SL)* (p. 291) • Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* limitations (p. 299) • Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 290)

Examples of readable road signs If the vehicle passes a sign showing the speed limit, this will be displayed in the instrument panel and the head-up display*.

WARNING RSI does not function in all situations and is only intended to provide supplementary information. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle safely.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 297 DRIVER SUPPORT

Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* Activating/deactivating RSI 4. Select the limit at which the speed warning is operation RSI can be activated/deacti- to be given by pressing the up/down arrows. vated in the center display's Please be aware that the set warning limit Speed limit information function view. will not be used when a speed camera symbol is displayed in the instrument panel. Activating/deactivating the audible alert The audible alert can be activated/deactivated – Tap the Road Sign Information button in and the limit for a warning can be set. Function view. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top > When RSI is activated, the indicator light view. in the button will be green. The indicator light will be gray when the function is 2. Tap My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign deactivated. Information. Activating/deactivating the speed warning 3. Tap Audio Warning to activate/deactivate function this function. Speed limit information The driver can be alerted if the current speed When RSI registers a road sign showing the limit is being exceeded (the symbol for the cur- speed limit, this sign is displayed as a symbol on rent speed limit will begin to flash). This function the instrument panel. can be activated or deactivated and the limit for a warning can be set. Settings 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top RSI settings can be made in the center display's view. Top view. 2. Tap My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Go to: Settings My Car IntelliSafe Information. Road Sign Information. 3. Tap Speed Limit Warning to activate/deactivate this function. > If the function is activated, a speed selector will be displayed.

298 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Speed camera alert Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* Park Assist* limitations The Park Assist system is designed to assist you when driving into parking spaces, garages, etc. RSI may have difficulty reading signs that are: An audible signal and symbols in the instrument • Faded panel and center display indicate the distance to the object. • Located in a curve • Twisted or damaged • Positioned high above the road • Obstructed (by bushes, etc.) • Partially covered by snow, ice, etc. The camera used by RSI (and other driver sup- Speed camera warning in the instrument panel (generic port systems such as Adaptive Cruise Control*) illustration) has certain limitations. See the article "City If the Sensus navigation system Safety limitations" for additional information. in your vehicle is being used, the driver can be alerted if the NOTE vehicle is exceeding a detected RSI may perceive certain types of bicycle Display view showing object zones and sensor sectors speed limit and is approaching holders (with wiring attached to the trailer a speed camera. electrical socket) as a trailer, which may result The center display shows an overview of the vehi- in faulty speed limit information to the driver. cle in relation to objects that have been detected. Related information The highlighted sector shows which of the sen- • Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 297) Related information sors has detected the object. The closer the • City Safety limitations (p. 285) highlighted sector is to the vehicle symbol, the closer the actual object is to your vehicle. • Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 297) The Park Assist system uses an intermittent tone that pulses faster as you come closer to an object. Sound from the infotainment system will be temporarily turned down.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 299 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| The tone becomes constant when you are within The system's rear sensors are activated automat- The distance monitored along the sides of the approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object and the ically when the engine is started and are active if vehicle is approximately 1 ft (0.3 m). The audible innermost sensor field will be red. If there are the vehicle rolls rearward with the gear selector signal comes from the side speakers. objects within this distance both behind and in in N or if R has been selected. front of the vehicle, the tone alternates between The distance monitored behind the vehicle is Front park assist front and rear speakers. approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal While an audible signal is being given, its volume comes from the rear speakers. level can be raised/lowered using the >II control The rear sensors will be deactivated automatically in the center console or can be adjusted in the when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wir- Setting menu. ing is used. If a non-Volvo trailer hitch is being used, it may be necessary to switch off the sys- WARNING tem manually. Park Assist is an information system, NOT a safety system. This system is designed to be Side park assist a supplementary aid when parking the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The system's front sensors are activated auto- Rear park assist matically when the engine is started and are active at speeds below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

The distance monitored in front of the vehicle is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible signal comes from the front speakers. Front Park Assist is deactivated if the parking The system's side sensors are activated automat- brake is applied or if the gear selector is put in P. ically when the engine is started and are active at When installing auxiliary headlights, be sure that speeds below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). they do not obstruct the front sensors. Otherwise, these lights could trigger a Park Assist warning.

300 DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information Activating/deactivating Park Assist Park Assist limitations • Activating/deactivating Park Assist (p. 301) The Park Assist system can be turned on or off. The Park Assist system has certain limitations. • Park Assist limitations (p. 301) On/Off NOTE • Park assist symbols and messages (p. 303) Park Assist's front and side sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started. The A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated with rear sensors activate if the vehicle rolls rearward the vehicle's electrical system will be taken in N or if R is selected. into account when measuring the available space behind the vehicle. This function can be activated/ deactivated in the center display's Function view.

– Tap the Park Assist button. > Green indicator: the function is active. Gray indicator: the function is deactivated. Related information • Park Assist* (p. 299) • Park Assist limitations (p. 301) • Park assist symbols and messages (p. 303)

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 301 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| NOTE Cleaning the sensors • The system will not detect high objects, such as a loading dock, etc. • Certain materials or fabrics may not be detected by the sensors. Objects made of these materials or people wearing clothing made of these fabrics may not be detected. • Children or animals near the vehicle may not always be detected. • Objects such as chains, thin shiny poles or low objects may temporarily not be detected by the system. This may result Location of the Park Assist sensors in the pulsing tone unexpectedly stopping The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure instead of changing to a constant tone as that they work properly. Clean them with water the vehicle approaches the object. In such cases, use caution when backing up and a suitable car washing detergent. or stop the vehicle to help avoid damage. NOTE • In certain circumstances, the park assist system may give unexpected warning sig- If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt, nals that can be caused by external snow, or ice, this could result in false warning sound sources that use the same ultra- signals from the park assist system. sound frequencies as the system. This may include such things as the horns of other vehicles, wet tires on asphalt, pneu- Related information matic brakes, motorcycle exhaust pipes, • Park Assist* (p. 299) other vehicles with similar ultrasound sys- • Activating/deactivating Park Assist (p. 301) tems, etc. This does not indicate a fault in Park assist symbols and messages (p. 303) the system. •

302 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Park assist symbols and messages The following table provides some examples. A number of messages relating to Park Assist will appear in the instrument panel.

Message Explanation Park Assist System The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Unavailable Service required

Park Assist System One or more of the system's sensors are blocked. Check and clean the sensors as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed

Related information • Park Assist limitations (p. 301)

303 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Camera (PAC)* Cross Traffic Alert* On/Off Camera views The Park Assist Camera system is designed to Panorama (360°) view Zoom5 provide the driver with a view of the area around the vehicle in the form of a camera image and graphics in the center display. NOTE PAC is a supplementary parking aid that can be A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated with activated automatically when the gear selector is the vehicle's electrical system will be taken in R or by tapping a button in the center display, into account when measuring the available depending on the selected settings. See also the space behind the vehicle. article "Starting the Park Assist Camera." WARNING • PAC is designed to be a supplementary aid when parking the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver’s Location of the cameras and their fields of vision attention and judgment. All four sides of the vehicle are shown in the cen- • The camera has blind spots where it can- ter display to help the driver monitor objects not detect objects or people around or close-by when maneuvering at low speeds. near the vehicle. Each camera view can be displayed separately: • Pay particular attention to people or animals that are close to the vehicle. • Tap the center display in the desired "field of vision," e.g., behind the rear camera, etc. • Objects seen on the screen may be closer than they appear to be. The camera view selected (front/left/right/rear) Guiding lines On/Off will be indicated at the top of the graphic. Guiding lines for a trailer hitch*4 On/Off The cameras can be activated automatically or manually, see the article "Park Assist Camera Park Assist On/Off settings."

4 Not available in all markets. 5 Only available on vehicles with a trailer hitch.

304 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Backing up detected. See also the article "Park Assist Side camera Camera guiding lines and fields." The camera is turned off when the gear selector is moved from R or if the vehicle's forward speed exceeds approx. 10 mph (15 km/h). Front camera

Location of the rear Park Assist Camera The side cameras are located in the respective The rear camera shows a wide area, part of the door mirrors. bumper and the trailer hitch (if installed). Related information Some objects on the screen may appear to “lean” Park Assist Camera (PAC)* trajectory lines slightly, which is normal. • and fields (p. 306) When the gear selector is moved to R, a graphic The front camera is located behind the grill and • Park Assist Camera (PAC)* limitations with solid lines will appear in the center display to can be useful when driving off in areas with lim- (p. 308) indicate the direction that the vehicle will take as ited visibility (hedges, bushes, etc). it moves rearward, which helps simplify parallel • Starting the Park Assist Camera (PAC)* (p. 308) parking, backing into a tight space or when attaching a trailer to the vehicle. These lines can be turned off, see the article "Park Assist Camera settings." If the vehicle is also equipped with the optional Park Assist system, this information will be displayed on the screen as colored fields showing the distance to obstacles that have been

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 305 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Camera (PAC)* NOTE trajectory lines and fields When backing up with a trailer, the trajectory The Park Assist Camera system uses trajectory lines show the path that the vehicle will take, and lines and fields to indicate the vehicle's not the trailer. position in relation to its immediate surround- ings. WARNING trajectory lines Keep in mind that when the rear camera has been selected, the image on the screen only shows the area behind the vehicle. The driver must always watch for people, animals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides or the front of the vehicle when turning while backing up. Location of the cameras and their fields of vision The opposite is true when the front camera is With 360° view selected, the center display will selected. show views from all of the parking cameras. Please note that the trajectory lines show the To select a specific camera, tap its "field of shortest path. Be sure that the vehicle’s sides vision." do not come into contact with or scrape against any obstacle/obstruction when the steering wheel is turned while driving forward Sample guidelines or that the front of the vehicle does not come into contact with or scrape against any obsta- The lines on the screen are projected as if they cle/obstruction when backing up. were a path on the ground around the vehicle and are directly affected by the way in which the steering wheel is turned. This enables the driver Models with the 360° panorama camera to see path the vehicle will take, even if he/she system and Park Assist sensors* turns the steering wheel. On models with the 360° panorama camera system, trajectory lines will be shown in front of or to These lines also indicate the outermost limits that the sides of the vehicle, depending on its direc- any object (door mirrors, corners of the body, a tion. trailer hitch, etc.) extends out from the vehicle, even when it turns. • When driving forward: front lines • When backing up: side/rear lines

306 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT trajectory lines for a trailer hitch (towbar) Front and rear sensor fields Side sensors Front and rear sensors The side fields will only be shown in 360° view and the color will only be orange.

Side field color Distance to the object Orange 0–1 ft (0–0.3 m)

Related information • Park Assist Camera (PAC)* (p. 304) • Starting the Park Assist Camera (PAC)* (p. 308)

Towbar: activate trajectory lines for a trailer hitch The screen can display colored sensor fields on the car symbol at the right Zoom: zoom in/out6 If the vehicle is also equipped with the optional The camera can help make hitching a trailer eas- Park Assist system, distance will also be indi- ier by showing the "line" that the trailer hitch will cated by colored fields for each sensor that has take toward the trailer. detected an object. 1. Tap Towbar (2). The front and rear fields change colors (yellow- > The trajectory lines will be displayed and orange-red) as the vehicle moves closer to an the trajectory lines for the vehicle will dis- object. appear. 2. Tap Zoom (5) for a close-up view. Front/rear field colors Distance to the object > The camera will zoom in. Yellow 2–4.9 ft (06.–1.5 m ) trajectory lines for the trailer hitch and the vehicle Orange 1.3–2 ft (0.4–0.6 m) cannot be shown at the same time. Red 0–1.3 ft (0–0.4 m)

6 Only models with a trailer hitch.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 307 DRIVER SUPPORT

Starting the Park Assist Camera 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top Park Assist Camera (PAC)* (PAC)* view. limitations PAC starts automatically when the gear selector 2. Tap My Car Park Assist. The Park Assist Camera system has certain limi- is moved to R or can be started manually from tations that the driver should be aware of. the center display. 3. Select Rear View Instead of 360° to set the rear view as default. NOTE Starting the camera PAC can be started manually in Bicycle carriers or other accessories mounted the center display's Function on the tailgate may obstruct the camera's view if it is turned off. field of vision.

Blind sectors Even if a fairly small section of the screen image appears to be obstructed, this may mean that a – Tap the Camera button in Function view. relatively large area is hidden and objects there > The camera will start. may not be detected until they are very near the vehicle. Activating/deactivating automatic start of PAC PAC can be started automatically when reverse gear is selected. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car Park Assist. 3. Select Auto Camera Reverse Activation to activate/deactivate automatic start.

Selecting the camera's basic view* Rear camera view can be set as the default The "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of vision instead of the 360° view* when the camera is started.

308 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

• With 360° view selected, objects/obstacles Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* Types of parking may not be detected at the edges of the indi- Park Assist Pilot (PAP) helps the driver drive into Parallel parking vidual cameras' fields of vision. and leave parallel parking spaces. • A crossed-out camera icon means that the camera is not functioning properly. Park Assist Pilot (PAP) provides assistance when parking by measuring the parking space and Ambient lighting turning the steering wheel to guide the vehicle The camera images are adjusted automatically to into the space. the ambient light, which means the image may Information about the actions required by the vary slightly in terms of light and quality. Poor driver is provided in the center display in the form ambient lighting may reduce the quality of the of symbols, images and text. image. Maintenance NOTE • Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice and The driver's task is to follow the instructions, snow. This is particularly important in poor select a gear (D or R), regulate the vehicle's Procedure for parallel parking ambient lighting conditions. speed, apply the brakes when necessary and PAP helps park the vehicle as follows: • Remove dirt, ice and snow carefully to avoid stop. scratching the lenses. 1. The system searches for and measures a possible parking space. While this is being • Clean the lens regularly with warm water and done, the vehicle's speed may not exceed a suitable car washing detergent. approx. 20 mph ( 30 km/h). When backing Related information into a space, the speed may not exceed approx. 4 mph ( 7 km/h). • Park Assist Camera (PAC)* (p. 304) 2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing into the parking space. The driver controls the vehicle's speed. 3. The vehicle's position in the parking space is adjusted by prompting the driver to move forward and rearward while the system steers.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 309 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Perpendicular parking WARNING Using Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* Park Assist Pilot (PAP) gives the driver instruc- PAP does not function in all situations • tions during the parking procedure. and is only intended to assist the driver during parallel or perpendicular parking. Symbols, images and text in the center display • As the driver, you have full responsibility indicate when the various steps in the parking for parking the vehicle in a safe manner. procedure will be carried out. PAP can be activated if the following conditions Related information are met after the engine has started: • Using Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 310) • The vehicle may not be towing a trailer. • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 313) • The vehicle's speed must be below approx. • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols and mes- 30 mph (50 km/h). sages (p. 315) Procedure for perpendicular parking PAP helps park the vehicle as follows: NOTE 1. The system searches for and measures a If a trailer hitch is configured in the vehicle's possible parking space. While this is being electrical system, PAP will take the trailer done, the vehicle's speed may not exceed hitch into consideration when determining the approx. 4 mph ( 7 km/h). necessary size of a parking space. 2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing into the parking space and its position in the Parking space is adjusted by prompting the driver to Procedure for parking: move forward and rearward while the system 1. The system searches for and measures a steers. The driver controls the vehicle's possible parking space. speed. 2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing into the parking space. 3. The vehicle's position is adjusted in the parking space by moving forward and rearward.

310 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

1: Searching and measuring 1. Tap the Park Assist button 2: Backing into the parking space in the center display's Function view. If necessary, slow down to a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h) for parallel parking or approx. 12 mph ( 20 km/h) for perpendicular parking. 2. Keep an eye on the display and be prepared to stop the vehicle when you are instructed by PAP to do so. 3. Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular parking and put the transmission in reverse. Parallel parking 4. Keep an eye on the display and be prepared Parallel parking to stop the vehicle when you are instructed by PAP to do so. 5. Stop the vehicle when instructed to do so.

NOTE PAP normally searches for available parking spaces along the curb on the right (passenger's) side of the vehicle. However, it can also assist in finding and parking in spaces on the driver's side. To do so: • Activate the left turn signal. PAP will then Perpendicular parking search for a parking space on the left Perpendicular parking side of the vehicle. PAP searches for a potential parking space and measures it to see if there is sufficient space for your vehicle. To start this procedure:

}}

311 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| When the vehicle is backing up, PAP will steer it 3: Adjusting the vehicle's position adjusted by driving slightly forward and backing into the parking space. Do as follows: up. 1. Check that the area behind the vehicle is 1. Put the gear selector in D, wait until the clear and put the gear selector in R. steering wheel has turned and drive forward 2. Back up slowly without moving the steering slowly. wheel. The vehicle's speed must be below 2. Stop the vehicle when you are instructed by approximately 4 mph 7 km/h. PAP to do so. 3. Keep an eye on the instrument panel and be 3. Put the gear selector in R, back up slowly prepared to stop the vehicle when you are and stop when you are instructed by PAP to instructed by PAP to do so. do so. When the parking procedure is finished (this will NOTE be indicated by a text message and a graphic • Release the wheel while PAP is steering Parallel image), PAP switches off automatically. If neces- the vehicle. sary, the driver may need to make minor adjustments to ensure that the vehicle is parked cor- The steering wheel must be able to turn • rectly. freely. • For PAP to function optimally, wait until CAUTION the steering wheel is no longer turning before beginning the next phase of the The warning distance is shorter when PAP is parking procedure. using the sensors than when Park Assist is using them.

Leaving a parking space This function can only be used for a vehicle that has been par- Perpendicular allel parked and is activated in After the vehicle has backed into the parking the center display's Function space, its position in the space has to be view. 1. Tap the Park out button in the center display's Function view.

312 DRIVER SUPPORT

2. Follow the instructions provided. The proce- Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations Points to keep in mind dure is the same as when parking the vehicle. The PAP function may be limited in certain situa- PAP is a parking aid only and the driver should The steering wheel may turn back slightly when tions. always be prepared to take control and cancel a the function is completed and the driver may parking sequence. This can be due to one or The PAP parking sequence is cancelled have to turn the back before leaving the parking more of the following factors: A parking sequence will be cancelled: space. • PAP's function is based on the way that the If PAP determines that the driver can leave the • if the vehicle is driven too fast (above approx. vehicles are parked behind and in front of 4 mph (7 km/h) your parking space. If they are, for example, parking space without assistance, the function parked too close to the curb, there is a risk will deactivate before the vehicle is completely • if the driver taps Cancel in the center display that your vehicle's tires or wheel rims could out of the space. • if the driver moves the steering wheel with be damaged by the curb during the parking sufficient force. Related information procedure. if the anti-lock brakes or Electronic Stability • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 309) • • PAP is intended to provide parking assis- Control are activated (e.g., if a wheel begins tance on straight streets, not sections of Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 313) • to spin or lose traction) street with curved or irregular curbs. Be sure • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols and mes- In such cases, a text message will explain why that your vehicle is parallel to the curb when sages (p. 315) the parking sequence was cancelled. PAP measures the parking space. • PAP may not be able to provide parking NOTE assistance on narrow streets due to lack of space to maneuver the vehicle. In situations PAP will not function correctly if its sen- • like this, it may help to drive between 1.5-5 ft sors are obstructed by dirt, snow, etc. (0.5-1.5 m) from the side of the road where • In certain situations, PAP may not be able the parking space is located. to measure a parking space. This could Use only approved tires with the correct infla- be due to external sources of sound (e.g., • tion pressure because this affects PAP's a vehicle's horn, tires on wet asphalt, capacity to provide parking assistance. pneumatic brakes, noise from a motorcy- Changing to a different approved tire size cle's exhaust, etc.) emitting ultrasound may affect PAP's parameters. Consult a using approximately the same frequen- trained and qualified Volvo service technician. cies as PAP. • Heavy rain or snow may inhibit PAP's capacity to correctly measure a parking space. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 313 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| • Do not use PAP when using snow chains Maintenance and/or a temporary spare tire. • Do not use PAP if there are any objects pro- truding from the vehicle.

WARNING • The front end of your vehicle may turn out toward oncoming traffic during the parking procedure. • Objects located above the parking sensors' field of vision are not included when PAP measures a parking space. For this reason, PAP may turn into the parking Location of the PAP sensors space too soon. Avoid parking spaces of this type. PAP uses the same sensors as the Park Assist • The driver is always responsible for deter- system. To function correctly, these sensors must mining if PAP has selected a suitable be cleaned regularly with water and a suitable car parking space. washing detergent. Related information • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 309) • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 313) • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols and messages (p. 315)

314 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols Various PAP-related combinations of graphics The following table provides some examples. and messages and text messages are displayed in the instru- Park Assist Pilot uses graphics and text mes- ment panel and sometimes also include suitable sages to indicate if there is a problem with the actions. system.

Message Explanation Park Assist System The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Unavailable Service required

Park Assist System One or more of the system's sensors are blocked. Check and clean the sensors as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed

A text message can be erased by briefly pressing the O button in the center of the right-side steering wheel keypad. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service technician If a message indicating that PAP is not functioning properly remains displayed or recurs. Related information • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 309) • Using Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 310) • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 313)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 315 DRIVER SUPPORT

Adjustable steering force* Electronic Stability Control (ESC) begins to lose traction to the wheel on the oppo- Electronic Stability Control (ESC) helps reduce site side of the vehicle (on the same axle). Steering force increases with the speed of the wheel spin, counteract skidding and to generally Spin control vehicle to give the driver an enhanced sense of help improve directional stability. control and stability. At low speed the vehicle is This function is designed to help prevent the easier to steer in order to facilitate parking, etc. A pulsating sound will be audi- drive wheels from spinning while the vehicle is ble when the system is actively accelerating. Changing the steering force level operating and is normal. Accel- Active Yaw Control To change the level of steering force, see the eration may also be slightly information under the heading "individual" in arti- slower than normal. At low speeds, this function helps maintain direc- cle "Drive modes" for additional information. tional stability by braking one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows a tendency to skid or slide laterally. NOTE WARNING Engine Drag Control EDC • This steering force level menu function ESC is a supplementary aid and cannot deal cannot be accessed when the vehicle is with all situations or road conditions. EDC helps keep the engine running if the wheels in motion. show a tendency to lock, e.g., when shifting down The driver is always responsible for operating in the manual shifting mode or while using the • In certain situations, the power steering the vehicle in a safe manner in accordance engine's braking function on a slippery surface. If function may become too hot and must with current traffic regulations. be temporarily cooled. During cooling, the wheels were to lock, the vehicle would power steering effect will be reduced and become more difficult to steer. more force may be necessary to turn the ESC consists of the following functions: 7 steering wheel and a message will be • Traction control Trailer Stability Assist* TSA helps stabilize a vehicle that is towing a displayed in the instrument panel. Spin control • trailer when the vehicle and trailer have begun to • Active Yaw Control Related information sway. Engine Drag Control • Driver support systems (p. 246) • This system is automatically deactivated if the Trailer Stability Assist • Drive modes (p. 382) • driver selects Sport mode. Traction control Related information This function is designed to help reduce wheel • Detachable trailer hitch (p. 360) spin by transferring power from a drive wheel that • Driving with a trailer (p. 359)

7 This function is included if the vehicle is equipped with a Volvo original trailer hitch.

316 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

• Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 361) Electronic Stability Control (ESC) When Sport mode is activated, this • Electronic Stability Control (ESC) sport mode sport mode symbol will illuminate in the instrument (p. 317) ESC is always activated and cannot be switched panel. It will remain on until the driver deactivates the function. ETC will also Electronic Stability Control (ESC) symbols off. • return to normal mode when the engine is restar- and messages (p. 318) However, the driver can select Sport mode, ted. which offers more active driving characteristics. Related information In Sport mode, the engine management system • Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 316) monitors movement of the accelerator pedal and steering wheel for sportier driving and allows more lateral movement of the rear wheels before ESC is triggered. Under certain circumstances, such as when driving with snow chains, or driving in deep snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to temporarily use Sport mode for maximum tractive force. If the driver releases pressure on the accelerator pedal, ETC will also activate to help stabilize the vehicle. Activating/deactivating Sport mode In the center display's Function view, tap ESC Sport Mode. The green indicator light in the button will illuminate to show that the function has been activated or gray when the function is deactivated.

317 DRIVER SUPPORT

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) symbols and messages

Symbol Message Description Steady glow for 2 seconds The system is performing a self-diagnostic test. when the engine is started.

Flashing symbol. ESC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.

Steady glow. Sport mode has been activated. Please note that ESC is not deactivated at this time but its functionality is reduced.

ESC See the message in the instrument panel. Temporarily off

ESC Temporarily off The ESC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. The function reac- tivates automatically when the brakes have cooled.

ESC Service required The ESC system is not functioning properly. • Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it. • If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the system inspected.

318 DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING The stability system is intended to help improve driving safety. It supplements, but can never replace, the driver's judgment and responsibility when operating the vehicle. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to traffic and road conditions.

Related information • Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 316)

319 DRIVER SUPPORT

Roll stability control (RSC) Driver Alert Control (DAC) Volvo's Roll Stability Control (RSC) is a stability DAC is intended to alert the driver if his/her driv- system designed to help minimize the risk of a ing becomes erratic due to e.g., distraction or rollover in emergency maneuvers or if a skid fatigue. should occur. DAC is designed to help detect a slowly chang- RSC uses a gyroscopic sensor that registers the ing driving pattern. It is primarily intended to be amount of change in the lateral angle at which used on main roads and is not meant for use in the vehicle is leaning. Using this information, RSC city traffic. calculates the likelihood of a rollover. If there is The function activates initially when the vehicle's an imminent risk of a rollover, the stability system speed first exceeds 40 mph (65 km/h) and is activated, power to the engine is cut and the remains active as long the speed remains above brakes are applied to one or more of the wheels approx. 38 mph (60 km/h) until the vehicle regains stability. If the driving pattern becomes noticeably erratic, the driver will WARNING be alerted by an audible signal and Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle’s stability systems, including RSC, break will appear in the instru- do not replace the driver’s responsibility for ment panel along with a sym- operating the vehicle in a safe manner. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to bol. the current road, traffic and weather condi- The warning will be repeated if the driving pattern tions. Posted speed limits should always be does not change. respected.

Related information • Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 316) • General safety information (p. 58) A camera monitors the traffic lane's side marker lines and compares the direction of the road with the driver’s movements of the steering wheel.

320 DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING Driver Alert Control limitations Using Driver Alert Control (DAC) The camera used by DAC (and other driver sup- DAC settings are made in the center display's DAC is not intended to extend the dura- • port systems such as Adaptive Cruise Control*) menu system. tion of driving. Always plan breaks at reg- has certain limitations. ular intervals to help remain alert. Activating/deactivating Driver Alert • A warning from DAC should not be In certain situations, DAC may provide warnings Control ignored. A driver may not be aware of even if the driver’s driving pattern has not 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top how fatigued he/she has become. become erratic: view. In certain cases, fatigue may not affect • • in strong crosswinds 2. the driver’s behavior. In situations of this Tap My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert type, no warning will be provided. There- • on grooved road surfaces Control. fore, it is important to take breaks at reg- Related information 3. Select Alertness Warning to activate/deac- ular intervals, regardless of whether or Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 320) tivate DAC. not DAC has given a warning. • • Using Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 321) Activating/deactivating guidance to a rest Related information • Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 321) area • Using Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 321) • Camera limitations (p. 247) With this feature activated, DAC will propose a nearby rest area if a warning has been given. • Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 321) 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert Control. 3. Select Rest Stop Guidance to activate/ deactivate guidance to a rest area. Activating/deactivating extra stimuli With this feature activated, DAC will use the passenger compartment lighting as an enhanced DAC warning. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 321 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| 2. Tap My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert Distance Alert* NOTE Control. Distance Alert is a function that alerts the driver Distance Alert only monitors distance to the if the time interval to the vehicle ahead is too 3. Select Driving Stimuli to activate/deacti- vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise Control is short. vate this feature. in standby mode or off. Related information Distance Alert is active at speeds above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h) and only reacts to a Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 320) WARNING • vehicle ahead that is driving in the same direction. No information is provided for vehicles driv- Distance Alert only indicates the distance to ing toward you, moving very slowly, or at a stand- the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the still. speed of your vehicle.

Related information • Distance Alert* limitations (p. 323) • Using Distance Alert* (p. 323)

Warning light An warning light in the windshield glows steadily if your vehicle is closer to the one ahead than the set time interval. If your vehicle is equipped with the optional head- up display, a symbol showing a vehicle will appear.

322 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Using Distance Alert* Different time intervals to the Distance Alert* limitations Distance Alert is used as follows: vehicle ahead can be selected Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor as and are shown in the instru- Adaptive Cruise Control* and has several limita- Operation ment panel as 1–5 horizontal tions. Pull down the center display's bars. The greater the number of Top view and select Settings bars, the longer the time inter- WARNING followed by Distance alert. val. • The radar sensor has a limited field of Tap to turn the function On or One bar between the vehicles represents a time Off. vision. In some situations it may detect a interval of approximately 1 second; 5 bars is vehicle later than expected or not detect approximately 3 seconds. other vehicles at all. Setting a time interval The same symbol appears if Adaptive Cruise • The radar sensor cannot cover all driving Control is activated. situations and traffic, weather and road conditions. NOTE • The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed and must inter- The greater the vehicles' speed, the • vene if the various driver support systems greater the distance between them for a do not maintain a suitable speed or suita- set time interval. ble distance to the vehicle ahead. The set time interval is also used by • Maintenance of radar sensor components Adaptive Cruise Control*. • may only be performed by a trained and • Only use time intervals permitted by local qualified Volvo technician. traffic regulations. • Strong sunlight, reflections from the road surface, strong lighting contrasts or using Controls for setting a time interval Related information sunglasses may make the warning light in Reduce the time interval • Distance Alert* (p. 322) the windshield difficult to see.

Increase the time interval For additional information, see also the article Distance/time indicator "Radar sensor limitations." Related information • Radar sensor limitations (p. 251) • Distance Alert* (p. 322)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 323 DRIVER SUPPORT

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* Overview Blind Spot Information is a system designed to alert the driver to the presence of other vehicles moving in the same direction as your vehicle on roads with several lanes.

Blind Spot Information is a driving aid intended to: • detect other vehicles in your door mirrors' "blind area" • detect vehicles that are about to pass your vehicle or are approaching your vehicle quickly from behind in the left and/or right Principle for Blind Spot Information: Zone 1. Blind area, Zone 2. Area for approaching/passing vehicles lanes Blind Spot Information indicators Indicator light Blind Spot Information functions when your vehi- WARNING cle is moving at speeds above approx. 6 mph Blind Spot Information symbol (10 km/h). • Blind Spot Information is an information system, NOT a warning or safety system The indicator light illuminates on the side of the Blind Spot Information is designed to react to: and does not function in all situations. vehicle where the system has detected another • vehicles that are passing your vehicle • Blind Spot Information does not eliminate vehicle. If your vehicle is passed on both sides at the same time, both lights will illuminate. • other vehicles that are rapidly approaching the need for you to visually confirm the your vehicle conditions around you, and the need for you to turn your head and shoulders to When Blind Spot Information detects a vehicle in make sure that you can safely change zone 1 or a fast-approaching vehicle in zone 2, lanes or back up. the indicator light in the respective door mirror will glow steadily. • As the driver, you have full responsibility for changing lanes/backing up in a safe If the driver then uses the turn signal on the side manner. on which the warning is given, the indicator light will begin flashing and become brighter.

324 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* If BLIS is deactivated when the engine is On/Off switched off, it will remain off the next time the • Blind Spot Information does not function engine is started and the indicator lights in the in sharp curves. The Blind Spot Information function can be activated/deactivated. door mirrors will not illuminate. • Blind Spot Information does not function when your vehicle is backing up. Related information • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 324) Related information • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* On/Off (p. 325) • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* limitations (p. 326) • Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 326)

Blind Spot Information indicators Indicator light

Blind Spot Information symbol Blind Spot Information can be activated/deactivated in the center display's Function view. – In Function view, tap BLIS. > When Blind Spot Information is activated/ deactivated, the indicator light in the button will be green/gray. If BLIS is activated when the engine is started, the indicator lights in the door mirrors will flash once.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 325 DRIVER SUPPORT

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* For the system to function optimally, the area Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* limitations over and around the sensors must be kept clean. Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a supplementary part Blind Spot Information functionality may be If one or both of the sensors are blocked and of Blind Spot Information and is intended to reduced in certain situations. "Rear sensors blocked, cleaning needed" is detect vehicles crossing behind your vehicle displayed in the instrument panel, clean the area while you are backing up. Dirt, ice and snow on the sensors may • over and around the sensors as soon as possible. reduce functionality and prevent the system from providing warnings. A text message can be erased by briefly pressing When does Cross Traffic Alert function • Do not attach any objects, tape, decals, etc., the O button on the right-side steering wheel on the surface of the sensors. keypad. • BLIS is deactivated if a trailer is attached to the vehicle's electrical system. CAUTION Maintenance Repairs to the BLIS/CTA systems and/or 8 repainting the rear bumper should only be The BLIS/CTA sensors are located on the done by a trained and qualified Volvo service inside of the rear fenders/bumper. technician.

Related information • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* On/Off (p. 325) Principle for CTA • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 324) CTA supplements BLIS by warning the driver of • Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 326) crossing traffic behind your vehicle, for example, when backing out of a parking space. It is primarily designed to detect another vehicle but in certain cases may also detect pedestrians or smaller objects such as bicycles. CTA is only activated when the vehicle is rolling Keep the highlighted area clean (on both sides of the rearward or backing up and is activated automati- vehicle) cally when the gear selector is put in reverse.

8 Cross Traffic Alert*

326 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

• An audible signal indicates that CTA has Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic Related information detected something that is approaching from Alert (CTA)* • Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 326) the side. The signal will come from either the Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) can be activated/deac- Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* On/Off left or right infotainment system speakers, • tivated separately from Blind Spot Information (p. 325) depending on which the side of your vehicle (BLIS). the approaching vehicle/ object has been detected. CTA is activated/deactivated in • A warning is indicated using the Park Assist* the center display's Function system's graphic in the instrument panel. view. • An icon is also shown in the Park Assist Camera's* Top view. Related information • Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic Alert – Tap Cross Traffic Alert in Function view. (CTA)* (p. 327) > CTA activates/deactivates (the indicator • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* with Cross light in the button will be green/gray). Traffic Alert (CTA)* symbols and messages CTA is activated when the engine is started. (p. 330) • Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* limitations (p. 328) WARNING • BLIS and CTA are information systems, NOT warning or safety systems and do not function in all situations. • BLIS and CTA do not eliminate the need for you to visually confirm the conditions around you, and the need for you to turn your head and shoulders to make sure that you can safely change lanes or back up. • As the driver, you have full responsibility for changing lanes/backing up in a safe manner.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 327 DRIVER SUPPORT

Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* limitations CTA functionality may be reduced in certain situations. Limitations CTA has limitations in certain situations, for example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or obstructions. The following are several examples where CTA's "field of vision" may initially be limited and approaching vehicles cannot be detected until they are too close: In angled parking spaces, CTA may be "blind" on one Keep the highlighted area clean (on both sides of the side vehicle) CTA's blind area For the system to function optimally, the area over and around the sensors must be kept clean. CTA's "field of vision" Do not attach any objects, tape, decals, etc., on However, as you back your vehicle out of a park- the surface of the sensors. ing space, CTA's "field of vision" expands. Examples of other limitations include: CAUTION • Dirt, ice or snow obstructing the sensors may Repairs to the BLIS/CTA systems and/or reduce the system's function or make it repainting the rear bumper should only be impossible to detect other vehicles or done by a trained and qualified Volvo service objects. technician. The vehicle is pulled far into a parking space • CTA is deactivated if a trailer's wiring is connected to the vehicle's electrical system. Related information Maintenance • Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 326) The CTA sensors are located on the inside of the • Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic Alert rear fenders/bumper. (CTA)* (p. 327)

328 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

• Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* with Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* symbols and messages (p. 330) • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* limitations (p. 326)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 329 DRIVER SUPPORT

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* with properly or if the function is interrupted, a sym- Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* symbols bol and a text message may be displayed in the and messages instrument panel. Follow the instructions provi- In situations where Blind Spot Information ded. and/or Cross Traffic Alert are not functioning

Symbol Message Explanation Blind spot sensor The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician Service required

Blind spot sensor One or more of the system's sensors are blocked. Check and clean the sensors as soon as possi- Rear sensors blocked, cleaning needed ble.

Blind spot system off BLIS and CTA have been deactivated because a trailer has been connected to teh vehicle's electri- Trailer attached cal system.

Related information • Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 326) • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 324)

330 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Driving lane assistance The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* functions are designed to help reduce the risk of accidents in situations where the vehicle unintentionally leaves its lane on highways or other major roads. Driving lane assistance systems: LDW or LKA There are two versions of the driving lane assistance system: • LDW (Lane Departure Warning): provides an audible signal or vibrations in the steering A camera monitors the road/traffic lane's marker lines LKA attempts to steer the vehicle back into its lane wheel. Depending on the version and settings used, • LKA (Lane Keeping Aid): actively steers the driving lane assistance functions in different vehicle to help keep it in its traffic lane ways: and/or alerts the driver using an audible sig- • If the system is activated (either LDW or nal or through vibrations in the steering LKA): if the driver does not react and the wheel. vehicle is moving out of its traffic lane, an audible signal and/or vibrations in the steer- The driving lane assistance systems are active at ing wheel will be provided. speeds from approx. 40 mph (65 km/h) up to the vehicle's permitted top speed on roads with • If the system is activated (LKA only): when clearly visible traffic lane marker lines. the vehicle approaches a traffic lane marker line, LKA will provide active steering assis- On narrow roads, the systems may not function tance to help steer it back into the lane. and will go into standby mode. They will return to Both LDW and LKA provide vibrations in the steering active mode if the road becomes sufficiently wheel9 wide.

9 The level of vibrations varies; the longer the vehicle is over a lane marker line, the greater the number of vibrations: }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 331 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| NOTE Dynamic cornering • winter driving conditions bad weather with reduced visibility If the turn signal is used, neither of the driving • lane assistance systems (LDW or LKA) will The driving lane assistance function use the vehi- provide an alert or steering assistance. cle's camera, which has general limitations. See the article "Camera limitations."

WARNING Related information • Activating/deactivating Lane Departure This feature is only intended to assist the Warning (LDW) (p. 333) driver and does not function in all driving, weather, traffic or road conditions. • Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 333) As the driver, you have full responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. • Camera limitations (p. 247) The traffic lane assistance systems do not intervene in Steering assistance (LKA only) sharp curves In order for LKA's steering assistance to function, In certain cases, such as during active driving or if the driver's hands must be on the steering wheel, the turn signal is used, neither of the traffic lane which the system monitors continuously. systems will react if the vehicle crosses a lane If this is not the case, this sym- marker line. bol will illuminate in the instru- Limitations ment panel and Lane Assistance Apply steering In certain demanding driving situations, the driv- will appear to alert the driver to ing lane assistance functions may not be able to actively steer the vehicle. assist the driver. In these situations, it may be advisable to turn the function off. If the driver does not take action, an audible sig- Examples of these situations: nal will sound and LKA will go into standby mode. The function will not become available again until • road construction the driver actively steers the vehicle. • poor road surfaces • edges or lines other than the lane's marker lines • a very active driving style

332 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Activating/deactivating Lane 3. Under Lane Departure Warning feedback, Activating/deactivating Lane Departure Warning (LDW) select: Keeping Aid (LKA)* LDW can be activated/deactivated. • Sound: an audible warning signal will be LKA can be activated/deactivated. provided Activating/deactivating Activating/deactivating • Vibrations: the driver will be warned by vibrations in the steering wheel Related information • Driving lane assistance (p. 331)

The function can be activated/deactivated in the The function can be activated/deactivated in the center display's Function view. center display's Function view. – Tap the Lane Departure Warning button. – Tap Lane Keeping Aid. > LDW is activated (GREEN indicator light > LKA is activated (GREEN indicator light in in the button), or is deactivated (GRAY the button), or is deactivated (GRAY indi- indicator light in the button). cator light in the button). Type of warning Type of warning Choose the type of warning that the driver will Choose the type of warning that the driver will receive if the vehicle starts to leave its driving receive if the vehicle starts to leave its driving lane. lane. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. view. 2. Tap My Car IntelliSafe Lane 2. Tap My Car IntelliSafe Lane Keeping Departure Warning. Aid.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 333 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| 3. Under Lane Keeping Aid Warning Feedback, select: • Sound: an audible warning signal will be provided • Vibrations: the driver will be warned by vibrations in the steering wheel Type of assistance Select the type of assistance LKA should provide: 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car IntelliSafe Lane Keeping Aid. 3. Under Lane Keeping Aid Assistance Mode, select: • Steering: the system will provide steering assistance but no warning. • Both: the system will provide steering assistance and warning • Warning: the system will provide warning but no steering assistance Related information • Driving lane assistance (p. 331)

334 DRIVER SUPPORT

Driving lane assistance symbols LDW/LKA are monitoring the driving lane's Steering/warning indicator and messages marker line(s). A number of symbols and messages relating to Not available Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) and Lane Departure Warning (LDW) may appear in the instrument panel. Symbols in the instrument panel The driving lane assistance systems use a symbol in the instrument panel in different Steering/warning: the side marker lines in the symbol situations. will be colored

When the driving lane assistance systems are not avail- LDW/LKA alerts the driver that the vehicle is able, the marker lines in the symbol will be gray leaving its lane. LKA attempts to steer the vehicle Several examples of the symbol's appearance will This is because LDW/LKA cannot monitor back into the lane. LKA also indicates if the sys- be given here: (detect) the driving lane's marker line(s) or the tem is attempting to steer the vehicle back into its lane. Available vehicle's speed is too low or the road is too narrow.

When the driving lane assistance systems are available, the marker lines in the symbol will be white

}}

335 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Symbols and messages Symbol Message Explanation Driver support system The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service techni- Reduced functionality Service required cian.

Windscreen sensor The camera's functionality is limited. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

Lane Assistance LKA's steering assistance does not function if the driver's hands are not on the steering Apply steering wheel. Steer the vehicle actively.

Related information • Driving lane assistance (p. 331) • Activating/deactivating Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (p. 333) • Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 333)

336 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING STARTING AND DRIVING

Starting and driving Brakes mode can also be used to increase the engine The brake system is a hydraulic system consist- braking effect at low speeds. The vehicle is equipped with an automatic trans- ing of two separate brake circuits. If a problem Anti-lock Braking System ABS mission that also makes it possible to shift gears should occur in one of these circuits, it is still manually. The ABS system helps to improve vehicle control possible to stop the vehicle with the other brake (stopping and steering) during severe braking Certain functions can also be used when the circuit. conditions by limiting brake lockup. engine is not running, depending on the ignition Brake system mode being used. When ABS is operating, there may be some If one of the brake circuits is not functioning, vibration in the brake pedal, which is normal. Related information more pressure will be needed on the brake pedal The system performs a brief self-diagnostic test • Starting the engine (p. 364) (and the pedal will go down farther) for normal when the engine has been started and driver • Ignition modes (p. 362) braking effect. releases the brake pedal. Another automatic test • Automatic transmission (p. 387) If the brake pedal must be depressed farther may be performed when the vehicle first reaches than normal and requires greater foot pressure, a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). The Opening/closing the fuel filler door (p. 355) • the stopping distance will be longer. brake pedal will pulsate several times and a • Parking brake (p. 344) sound may be audible from the ABS control Pressure on the brake pedal is enhanced by the module, which is normal. power braking function. Function check when the engine is WARNING started If vehicle does not have electrical current and A Plug-in Hybrid is equipped with a "brake by both the electric motor and gasoline engine wire" brake system. A function check is per- are switched off, the brakes cannot be used formed each time the engine is started and the to stop the vehicle. driver depresses the brake pedal to move the gear selector from P. When the Hill Start Assist function is being used, In certain cases, a message may appear in the it will take slightly longer for the brake pedal to instrument panel saying that pressure on the return to its normal position if the vehicle is brake pedal is too low. Press harder on the pedal. parked on an incline or uneven surface. Light braking charges the hybrid battery When driving in very hilly areas or if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, using brake mode B to When the brakes are applied lightly, the electric augment the brakes or the Off Road* drive motor's braking function is used, which converts

338 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING kinetic energy into electricity that is used to Driving on wet or salted roads WARNING charge the hybrid battery. This is indicated in the Prolonged driving on wet or salted roads can instrument panel, see also the article "General affect brake function and increase stopping dis- • Use the jack intended for the vehicle information about the XC90 T8 Twin Engine tance. Be sure to keep a safe distance to the when changing a tire. For any other job, use stands to support the vehicle. Plug-in Hybrid". vehicle ahead when driving under these conditions. • The jack should be kept well-greased and clean, and should not be damaged. Brake pad inspection • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non- On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condition slippery surface. of the brake pads can be checked by raising the No objects should be placed between the vehicle and performing a visual inspection of the • base of jack and the ground, or between brake pads. the jack and the attachment bar on the vehicle. WARNING • The jack must correctly engage the jack • If the vehicle has been driven immediately attachment. prior to a brake pad inspection, the wheel • Never allow any part of your body to be hub, brake components, etc., will be very extended under a vehicle supported by a Battery charging gauge in the instrument panel hot. Allow time for these components to jack. cool before carrying out the inspection. This function is active at speeds from approx. 90 mph (150 km/h) down to 3 mph (5 km/h). • Apply the parking brake and put the gear P When braking at speeds outside of this range or selector in the Park ( ) position. during harder braking, the hydraulic brake system • Block the wheels standing on the ground, is used. use rigid wooden blocks or large stones. Cleaning the brake discs Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs may result in delayed brake function. This delay is minimized by cleaning the brake linings. Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet weather, prior to long-term parking, and after the vehicle has been washed. Do this by braking gently for a short period while the vehicle is moving. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 339 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Instrument panel symbols WARNING Brake functions The vehicle's standard braking features are aug- Symbol Explanation If both symbols illuminate at the same time and the brake level is below the MIN mark in mented by a number of auxiliary help functions. Red symbol: Check the brake fluid the reservoir or if a brake system-related mes- In addition to the wheel brakes and the parking level. If the level is low, top up and sage is shown in the instrument panel: DO A have the system inspected to NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a brake, the vehicle is equipped with several auto- determine the cause of the loss of trained and qualified Volvo service technician matic brake assist functions. These systems help fluid. and have the brake system inspected. the driver by e.g., keeping the vehicle stationary when the brake pedal is not depressed (at a traf- B Yellow If both symbols illuminate at the same time symbol: there is a fault in fic light or intersection), when starting up a hill or the brake pedal sensor. and the brake level is normal (not below the MIN mark in the reservoir) or if a brake sys- when driving down a hill. Steady glow for more tem-related message is shown in the instru- These systems include: than 2 seconds: there is a fault in ment panel: drive the vehicle carefully to an A the ABS system. The normal brake authorized Volvo workshop and have the • Auto-hold brakes brake system inspected by a trained and system will still function but with- Hill Start Assist qualified Volvo service technician. • out ABS brake modulation. • Braking assist after a collision B • Hill Descent Control* Related information A US models • Brake functions (p. 340) Related information B Canadian models • Brake assist system (p. 341) • Brakes (p. 338) • Emergency brake lights (p. 342) • Parking brake (p. 344) • General information about the XC90 T8 Twin • Hill Descent Control (HDC) (p. 342) Engine Plug-in Hybrid (p. 14) • Auto-hold brake function (p. 341)

340 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING

Auto-hold brake function When Auto-hold is off, Hill Start Assist (HSA) will Brake assist system With the Auto-hold brake function, the driver can be activated to help prevent the vehicle from roll- release the brake pedal and the brakes will ing backwards when starting up a hill. The Brake Assist System (BAS) increases braking force, thereby helping reduce braking dis- remain applied, for example, when the vehicle Instrument panel symbol has stopped at a traffic light or intersection. tance. Symbol Explanation When the vehicle is no longer moving forward, The system monitors the driver's braking habits Auto-hold applies the brakes automatically, either The symbol in the instrument and increases braking force when necessary. using the normal brakes or the parking brake. panel illuminates when this func- Brake force can be increased up to the point at The brakes will be released when the accelerator tion is using the normal brakes to which the ABS system is activated. The function pedal is depressed. keep the vehicle stationary. is deactivated when pressure on the brake pedal decreases. If the driver's door is opened or the engine is This symbol in the instrument turned off, the parking brake will be applied auto- panel illuminates when Auto-hold Related information matically. A is using the parking brake to keep • Brakes (p. 338) the vehicle stationary Auto-hold control

A US models B Canadian models Related information • Hill Start Assist (p. 343) • Brake functions (p. 340)

Auto-hold control and indicator light Turn Auto-hold on or off by pressing the control in the tunnel console. The indicator light illuminates when the function is on.

341 STARTING AND DRIVING

Braking effect after a collision Emergency brake lights Hill Descent Control (HDC) In certain types of collisions, the vehicle's brakes The emergency brake lights activate in the event HDC is a type of low-speed automatic engine are applied to help prevent or mitigate a secon- of hard braking/rapid deceleration at most nor- brake and makes it possible to increase or dary collision. mal driving speeds or if the ABS system is acti- decrease the vehicle's speed on steep downhill vated. This function causes an additional taillight gradients using only the accelerator pedal, with- Maintaining control of the vehicle after a collision on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to help out applying the brakes. HDC is integrated into may be difficult. To help avoid or mitigate the alert vehicles traveling behind. the Off Road drive mode. effect of a secondary collision, the brakes are applied automatically to help bring the vehicle to Once the emergency brake lights have been acti- HDC is particularly useful when driving down a stop. vated, if the driver releases the brake pedal, the steep hills with rough surfaces, and where the brake lights will return to their normal function. road may have slippery patches. The brake lights and hazard warning flashers will be activated and the flashers will remain on after Related information WARNING the vehicle has come to a standstill. The parking • Brakes (p. 338) brake will then be applied automatically. HDC does not function in all situations, and is • Hazard warning flashers (p. 144) a supplementary braking aid. The driver has In a situation where stopping the vehicle may not • Brake lights (p. 143) full responsibility for driving in a safe manner. be desirable, the driver can override this system by pressing the accelerator pedal. Function This feature can only function if the brake system HDC allows the vehicle to roll forward or in is intact after the collision. reverse at very low speed with enhanced engine braking. However, speed can be adjusted with Related information the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator • Brake functions (p. 340) pedal is released, the vehicle will return to very • Airbag system (p. 87) low speed. • Rear Collision Warning (RCW) (p. 284) The driver can use the brakes to slow or stop the vehicle at any time. HDC is activated along with Low Speed Control (LSC), which together make driving on slippery surfaces at low speeds easier. When HDC and LSC are activated, this changes the response from the accelerator pedal and engine.

342 STARTING AND DRIVING

Activating HDC Related information Hill Start Assist HDC only functions at low speeds. • Brake functions (p. 340) Hill Start Assist (HSA) helps prevent the vehicle Using the driving mode control* • Low Speed Control (LSC) (p. 391) from rolling backwards when starting up a hill. If • Drive modes (p. 382) you are backing up a hill, HSA helps prevent the vehicle from rolling forward.

HSA makes it easier to start or back up on a hill by retaining pressure on the brake pedal for several seconds after the pedal has been released in order to keep the vehicle at a standstill. The brakes will be released after several seconds or when the driver presses the accelerator pedal. HSA is available even if the Auto-hold braking function is turned off. Related information Select the Off Road driving mode to activate • Brake functions (p. 340) HDC. • Auto-hold brake function (p. 341) Select a different drive mode to turn HDC off. If this is done while the vehicle is on a steep down- grade, engine braking will decrease gradually.

NOTE When LSC with HDC is activated by the Off Road drive mode, the feel of the accelerator pedal and engine response will change. The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at lower speeds if so desired.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 343 STARTING AND DRIVING

Parking brake ted. If it is applied while the vehicle is moving, the Using the parking brake The electric parking brake helps to keep the normal brakes are used on all four wheels. The The electric parking brake helps to keep the vehicle stationary when it is parked. brakes will only be applied on the rear wheels vehicle stationary when it is parked. once the vehicle has stopped. Applying the parking brake Related information • Brake functions (p. 340) • Using the parking brake (p. 344) • Parking brake malfunctions (p. 346)

Parking brake control in the tunnel console between the front seats 1. Put the gear selector in P. NOTE 2. Press firmly on the brake pedal. • A faint sound from the parking brake's 3. Pull up the control. electric motor can be heard when the > The symbol in the instrument panel parking brake is being applied. This flashes while the parking brake is being sound can also be heard during the auto- applied and glows steadily when the park- matic function check of the parking ing brake has been fully applied. brake. • The brake pedal will move slightly when 4. Release the brake pedal and ensure that the the electric parking brake is applied or vehicle is stationary. released.

If the vehicle is not moving when the parking brake is applied, only the rear wheels are affec-

344 STARTING AND DRIVING

Symbol in the instrument panel Releasing the parking brake NOTE Symbol Explanation • For safety reasons, the parking brake is The symbol flashes while the park- only released automatically if the engine ing brake is being applied. is running and the driver is wearing a seat A belt. If the symbol flashes at any other • The electric parking brake will be time, this indicates a fault. See the released immediately when the accelera- message in the instrument panel. tor pedal is pressed and the gear selector B is in position D or R.

A US models B Canadian models Parking on a hill Automatic function Put the gear selector in P. The parking brake is applied automatically: Releasing manually • If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front • If the Auto Hold function is activated and the 1. Press firmly on the brake pedal. wheels so that they point away from the curb. vehicle has been stationary for approx. If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the 2. Press the control. • 5 minutes. front wheels so that they point toward the • If the gear selector is moved to P on a steep > This releases the parking brake and the curb. symbol in the instrument panel will go out. hill. The parking brake should also be applied. • When the engine is turned off (this function Releasing automatically can be selected, see "Parking brake set- 1. The driver must fasten his/her seat belt. WARNING tings" below). 2. Start the engine. Always apply the parking brake when parking Emergency braking 3. Press firmly on the brake pedal. on hills or uneven surfaces. In an emergency, the parking brake can be applied when the vehicle is moving by pressing 4. Move the gear selector to D or R and press and holding up the control. Braking will be inter- the accelerator pedal. rupted when the control is released. > This releases the parking brake and the An audible signal will sound during this proce- symbol in the instrument panel will go out. dure if the vehicle is moving at higher speeds.

}}

345 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Heavy load uphill Parking brake malfunctions Symbols in the instrument panel A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the If it has not been possible to apply or release the Symbol Explanation vehicle to roll backward when the parking brake parking brake after several attempts, consult a is released automatically on a steep incline. To trained and authorized Volvo service technician If the symbol flashes, a parking help avoid this: or retailer. brake fault has been detected. A See the message in the instru- 1. Keep the electric parking brake control An audible signal will sound if the parking brake ment panel. pushed in. is applied when the vehicle is being driven. If the 2. While pressing the accelerator pedal to pull vehicle must be parked while the parking brake is B away, release the parking brake control only not functioning properly: after the vehicle begins to move. • Put the gear selector in P. Fault in the brake system. Parking brake settings • If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front A Automatically setting the parking brake can be wheels so that they point away from the curb. turned on or off in the center display's Top view. • If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the 1. Tap Settings in Top view. front wheels so that they point toward the curb. B 2. Tap My Car Electric Parking Brake and • Put the gear selector in P. deselect Auto Activate Parking Brake. A US models Low battery charge level B Canadian models Related information If the battery is discharged, the parking brake Related information • Parking brake (p. 344) cannot be operated. Connect an auxiliary battery • Using the parking brake (p. 344) to the vehicle. • Parking brake malfunctions (p. 346) • Using the parking brake (p. 344) • Auto-hold brake function (p. 341) Replacing brake pads • Brake functions (p. 340) The rear brake pads have to be replaced by a • Jump starting (p. 357) trained and authorized Volvo service technician due to the design of the electric parking brake.

346 STARTING AND DRIVING

Before a long distance trip in countries where it may be difficult to Driving economically It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle obtain the correct fuel. Better driving economy can be obtained by checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service • Consider your destination. If you will be driv- thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops technician before driving long distances. Your ing through an area where snow or ice are and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to imme- retailer will also be able to supply you with bulbs, likely to occur, consider using snow tires. diate traffic conditions. fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for your use in the event that problems occur. Driving economically with the XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid As a minimum, the following items should be Plan your driving in order to utilize the electric checked before any long trip: motor as much as possible. • Check that engine runs smoothly and that An energy-conserving driving style lowers current fuel consumption and the oil level are normal. consumption from the hybrid battery and helps • Before leaving on a trip, fill the fuel tank and increase electric driving range. make sure the hybrid battery is fully charged. Charging During the trip, make a habit of refueling regularly. • Charge the hybrid battery regularly using the charging cable. Whenever possible, begin a • Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage. drive with a fully charged battery. • Check condition of drive belts. • Check the location of charging points. • Check state of the battery's charge. • Where possible, choose parking spaces with • Examine tires carefully and replace those charging points. that are worn. Also, check tire inflation pressure. • The brakes, front wheel alignment, and steering gear should be checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only. • Check all lights, including high beams. • Reflective warning triangles are legally required in some states/provinces. • Have a word with a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if you intend to drive

}}

347 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Preconditioning • In hilly terrain, put the gear selector in mode than might seem appropriate for the curva- • If possible, precondition the vehicle with the B to utilize the electric motor's braking func- ture of a bend. This ensures good stability charging cable before driving. tion when the accelerator pedal is released. and reduces the risk of rear wheel skid. This helps charge the hybrid battery. Remember that these properties can alter Avoid parking the vehicle so that the passen- • with the vehicle load. The heavier the load in ger compartment becomes too hot or cold. • Higher speeds increase energy consumption the cargo compartment, the less the ten- Park, if possible, in a climate controlled park- and the vehicle's wind resistance increases dency to understeer. ing garage. along with speed. Do not exceed posted speed limits. • For short drives after using the precondition- Related information ing function, turn off the climate system • Select the Save drive mode for higher • Hybrid-related information in the instrument blower if possible. speeds when driving farther than is possible panel (p. 127) using the electric motor only. • If preconditioning is not possible in cold • Parking climate (preconditioning) (p. 175) weather, use the seat and steering wheel • Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra load) heating primarily. Avoid heating the entire in the vehicle. passenger compartment, which reduces the • Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire hybrid battery's charge level. pressure regularly (when the tires are cold). Driving • Remove snow tires when threat of snow or • Choose the Pure drive mode to help mini- ice has ended. mize electric power consumption. • Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc, increase • Maintain a constant speed and an adequate air resistance and also energy consumption. distance to the vehicle ahead to minimize • Avoid driving with open windows. use of the brakes. • Brake as gently as possible; doing so Handling and roadholding charges the hybrid battery using the inte- • Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pres- grated regenerative braking function. sure all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, • Balance energy requirements using the check that the tires are inflated to the rec- accelerator pedal and utilize the gauge on ommended pressure according to the vehicle the instrument panel to see the amount of load. Loads should be distributed so that power available from the electric motor. This capacity weight or maximum permissible axle helps avoid starting the gasoline engine loads are not exceeded. unnecessarily. The electric motor is more • At the specified curb weight your vehicle has energy-efficient than the gasoline engine, a tendency to understeer, which means that especially at lower speeds. the steering wheel has to be turned more

348 STARTING AND DRIVING

Driving through standing water CAUTION Overheating the engine and The vehicle should be driven with extreme cau- transmission Damage may occur to the engine, trans- tion if it is necessary to drive through standing • In demanding driving conditions, such as when mission, electrical components, etc. if the water. vehicle is driven through water higher transporting heavy loads, driving in mountainous than its floor level. Be aware that waves areas or in very hot weather there is a risk of The vehicle can be driven through water up to a overheating the engine or transmission. depth approximately level with the floor at walk- created by other vehicles could cause the ing speed to help prevent water from entering level to temporarily be above the vehicle's The engine's output may be slightly limited if floor level. • the differential and/or the transmission or dam- there is a risk of overheating. aging electrical components. • Damage to any components due to water • Remove e.g., auxiliary lights mounted in front above the floor level, vapor lock or insuffi- of the grille in hot weather. • If possible, check the depth of the water cient oil is not covered under warranty. before driving through it. Take particular care • If the temperature of the engine coolant when driving through flowing water. • If the engine has been stopped while the becomes too high, the warning symbol will vehicle is in water, do not attempt to illuminate and the message Engine • Before driving through water, always select restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of temperature/Stop safely will be displayed. the Off Road drive mode to ensure that the the water and inspected by a trained and Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a gasoline engine is running and to maximize qualified Volvo service technician. ground clearance. safe place and let the engine idle for several minutes. • After driving through water, apply the brakes and check that they are functioning correctly. WARNING • If the message Engine temperature/High temperature Turn off engine or Engine Clean the electrical connections for trailer Avoid driving through standing or rushing • • coolant/Stop safely is displayed, stop wiring after driving in mud or water. water. Doing so can be dangerous and it safely and turn off the engine. When driving through water, maintain low may also be difficult to determine the • If the transmission begins to overheat, an speed and do not stop in the water. actual depth of the water. • • If water cannot be avoided, after driving alternative gear shifting program will be through the water, press lightly on the selected. An integrated protective function brake pedal to ensure that the brakes are will also by activated, the warning symbol will Transmission functioning normally. Water or mud can illuminate and the message make the brake linings slippery, resulting warmHigh temperature Reduce speed in delayed braking effect. or Transmission warmStop safely, wait for cooling will be displayed in the instrument panel. Related information • Towing recommendations (p. 352) }}

349 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| • The air conditioning may be switched off Winter driving the state of charge more frequently and temporarily. Check your vehicle before the approach of cold spray an anti-rust oil on the battery posts. • After a prolonged period of driving, do not weather. • Volvo recommends the use of snow tires on turn off the engine immediately after stop- all four wheels for winter driving. The following advice is worth noting: ping. • To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from • The engine cooling fan commonly continues • Make sure that the engine coolant contains freezing, add washer solvents containing to run for several minutes after the engine 50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture will antifreeze. This is important since dirt is often has been turned off. reduce freeze protection. This gives protec- splashed on the windshield during winter tion against freezing down to –31 °F driving, requiring the frequent use of the WARNING (–35 °C). The use of "recycled" antifreeze is washers and wipers. Volvo Washer Solvent not approved by Volvo. Different types of should be diluted as follows: Down to 14 °F The cooling fan (located at the front of the antifreeze must not be mixed. (–10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 4 parts engine compartment, behind the radiator) may • Volvo recommends using only genuine Volvo water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part washer start or continue to operate (for up to solvent and 3 parts water Down to 0 °F 6 minutes) after the engine has been antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator. switched off. (–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 2 parts • Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part helps prevent the formation of condensation washer solvent and 1 part water. Related information in the tank. In addition, in extremely cold • Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks. • Driving with a trailer (p. 359) weather conditions it is worthwhile to add fuel line de-icer before refueling. • Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can • Before a long distance trip (p. 347) • The viscosity of the engine oil is important. cause damage to the locks. Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves Related information cold-weather starting as well as decreasing fuel consumption while the engine is warm- • Snow tires and chains (p. 441) ing up. Full synthetic 0W-30 oil is recommended for driving in areas with sustained low temperatures. • The load placed on the battery is greater during the winter since the windshield wipers, lighting, etc., are used more often. Moreover, the capacity of the battery decreases as the temperature drops. In very cold weather, a poorly charged battery can freeze and be damaged. It is therefore advisable to check

350 STARTING AND DRIVING

Towing eyelet CAUTION When used, the towing eyelet should always be In certain conditions, the towing eyelet securely attached in the openings on the right may be used to pull the vehicle onto a side of the front and rear bumpers. There are flatbed tow truck. covers over these attachment points. • The vehicle's position and ground clearance determine if it can be pulled up onto a flatbed tow truck using the towing eyelet. If the angle of the tow truck’s ramp is too Remove the cover by pressing the mark with • steep or the ground clearance under the a finger and folding out the opposite side/ vehicle is insufficient, damage could corner with a coin, small screwdriver, etc. occur by attempting to pull the vehicle > The cover turns along its center line and using the towing eyelet. then be removed. • If necessary, lift the vehicle using the tow Take out the towing eyelet, which is stored 3. Screw the towing eyelet into place, first by truck’s lifting device. under the floor in the cargo compartment. hand and then using the tire iron, etc. until it has been screwed in as far as possible. WARNING After use, the eyelet should be removed and No person or object should be behind the tow returned to its storage location. truck while the vehicle is being pulled up onto Reinsert the cover into the bumper. the flatbed.

Related information • Towing recommendations (p. 352)

351 STARTING AND DRIVING

Towing recommendations Tow trucks To do so: Always check with state and local authorities 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top before attempting to tow another vehicle CAUTION view. because this type of towing is subject to regula- In certain conditions, the towing eyelet tions regarding maximum towing speed, length 2. Tap My Car Suspension . may be used to pull the vehicle onto a and type of towing device, lighting, etc. flatbed tow truck. 3. Select Deactivate Suspension & Leveling Control. Towing your vehicle behind another • The vehicle's position and ground clearance determine if it can be pulled up onto vehicle Jump starting a flatbed tow truck using the towing eye- Do not attempt to start the engine by towing the The XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid may let. vehicle. This could result in damage to the three- not be towed behind another vehicle. Doing so If the angle of the tow truck’s ramp is too way catalytic converter and the electric motor. would damage the electric motor and the three- • steep or the ground clearance under the Use a 12-volt auxiliary battery or one in another way catalytic converter. If the vehicle cannot be vehicle is insufficient, damage could vehicle. driven and must be moved, it must be lifted onto occur by attempting to pull the vehicle a flat-bed tow truck. using the towing eyelet. WARNING If the XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid is to If necessary, lift the vehicle using the tow • PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! tow (pull) another vehicle, select the AWD drive truck’s lifting device. mode. This helps charge the hybrid battery and Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso- improves the vehicle's road holding characteris- ries contain lead and lead compounds, chemi- tics. WARNING cals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands No person or object should be behind the tow after handling. truck while the vehicle is being pulled up onto the flatbed. CAUTION Vehicle with pneumatic suspension* Connect the jumper cables carefully to avoid If the vehicle is equipped with the optional pneu- short circuits with other components in the matic suspension, this feature must be deacti- engine compartment. vated before the vehicle is lifted onto a tow truck.

352 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING Fuel inspection programs will make detection of mis- Volvo recommends the use of detergent gaso- fueling easier, possibly resulting in emission test Do not connect the jumper cable to any • line to control engine deposits. failure for misfueled vehicles. part of the fuel system or to any moving parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds. Deposit control gasoline (detergent NOTE • Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which additives) Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain an is flammable and explosive. Detergent gasoline is effective in keeping injec- octane enhancing additive called methyl- Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not tors and intake valves clean. Consistent use of • cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, deposit control gasolines will help ensure good (MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact drivability and fuel economy. If you are not sure Control System performance may be affected, occurs, flush the affected area immedi- whether the gasoline contains deposit control and the Check Engine Light (malfunction ately with water. Obtain medical help additives, check with the service station operator. immediately if eyes are affected. indicator light) located on your instrument panel may light. If this occurs, please return Never expose the battery to open flame • NOTE your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo or electric spark. Volvo does not recommend the use of exter- service technician for service. • Do not smoke near the battery. nal fuel injector cleaning systems. • Failure to follow the instructions for jump Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers, starting can lead to injury. Unleaded fuel "Oxygenated fuels" Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing Related information and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or • Towing eyelet (p. 351) Canadian regulations require that pumps deliver- ethers. In some areas, state or local laws require • Jump starting (p. 357) ing unleaded gasoline be labeled "UNLEADED". that the service pump be marked indicating use • Parking brake (p. 344) Only these pumps have nozzles which fit your of alcohols or ethers. However, there are areas in vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dispense lea- which the pumps are unmarked. If you are not • Ignition modes (p. 362) ded fuel into a vehicle labeled "unleaded gaso- sure whether there is alcohol or ethers in the line only". Leaded gasoline damages the three- gasoline you buy, check with the service station way catalytic converter and the heated oxygen operator. To meet seasonal air quality standards, sensor system. Repeated use of leaded gasoline some areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel. will lessen the effectiveness of the emission con- Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygen- trol system and could result in loss of emission ated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listed warranty coverage. State and local vehicle must still be met. }}

353 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Alcohol – Ethanol Octane rating performance and reliability. TOP TIER Detergent Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume Volvo recommends premium fuel for best per- Gasoline meets a new standard jointly estab- may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to as formance, but using 87 octane1 or above will lished by leading automotive manufactures to Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol". not affect engine reliability. meet the needs of today’s advanced engines. Qualifying gasoline retailers (stations) will, in Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to Minimum octane most cases, identify their gasoline as having met 15% MTBE may be used. the “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards. Methanol Do not use gasolines containing methanol NOTE (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice can Information about TOP TIER Detergent Gaso- result in vehicle performance deterioration and line is available at www.toptiergas.com. can damage critical parts in the fuel system. Such damage may not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Demanding driving In demanding driving conditions, such as operat- Related information ing the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer, or • Octane rating (p. 354) driving for extended periods at higher altitudes • Opening/closing the fuel filler door (p. 355) than normal, it may be advisable to switch to Typical pump octane label higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to change gasoline brands to fully utilize your engine's NOTE capacity, and for the smoothest possible operation. Vehicles equipped with the high performance 4-cylinder engines (B4204T9 and NOTE B4204T10) require premium fuel2. When switching to higher octane fuel or changing gasoline brands, it may be neces- TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline sary to fill the tank more than once before a Volvo endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent difference in engine operation is noticeable. Gasoline” where available to help maintain engine

1 AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2. 2 Refer to your Warranty and Maintenance Records booklet for additional information.

354 STARTING AND DRIVING

Fuel Formulations WARNING Opening/closing the fuel filler door Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a switched on The fuel tank has a filling system that does not knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives. Never carry a cell phone that is while refueling your vehicle. If the phone rings, have a cover. Besides damaging the exhaust emission control this may cause a spark that could ignite gaso- Opening/closing the fuel filler door systems on your vehicle, lead has been strongly line fumes, resulting in fire and injury. linked to certain forms of cancer. An arrow next to the fuel pump symbol in the instrument panel Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent. WARNING indicates the side of the vehicle Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to where the fuel filler door is certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless, located. where you must fill your own gas tank, take pre- and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust cautions. These may include: gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger com- • standing upwind away from the filler nozzle partment is ventilated, and immediately return while refueling the vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for correction. • refueling only at gas stations with vapor recovery systems that fully seal the mouth of the filler neck during refueling Related information • wearing neoprene gloves while handling a • Fuel (p. 353) fuel filler nozzle. Use of Additives With the exception of gas line antifreeze during winter months, do not add solvents, thickeners, or other store-bought additives to your vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. Overuse may 1. Press the button on the lighting panel. damage your engine, and some of these additives > Pressure equalization in the fuel tank cau- contain organically volatile chemicals. Do not ses a slight delay before the fuel filler needlessly expose yourself to these chemicals. door opens. Fuel tank Fuel lid is opening will be displayed in the instrument panel, followed by Fuel tank Ready for refueling.

}}

355 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| 2. After refueling, close the fuel filler door by CAUTION Emission controls pressing lightly. Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In Three-way catalytic converter Refueling from a service station pump addition to causing damage to the environ- • Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain ment, gasolines containing alcohol can cause engine malfunctions, particularly involving the damage to painted surfaces, which may not electrical, fuel or distributor ignition systems, be covered under the New Vehicle Limited may cause unusually high three-way catalytic Warranty. converter temperatures. Do not continue to operate your vehicle if you detect engine Related information misfire, noticeable loss of power or other unusual operating conditions, such as engine Fuel (p. 353) • overheating or backfiring. A properly tuned • Octane rating (p. 354) engine will help avoid malfunctions that could damage the three-way catalytic converter. • Do not park your vehicle over combustible materials, such as grass or leaves, which can To refuel: come into contact with the hot exhaust sys- 1. Open the fuel filler door. Do not refuel with tem and cause such materials to ignite under the engine running3 certain wind and weather conditions. • Excessive starter cranking (in excess of one 2. Insert the pump's nozzle into the fuel filler minute), or an intermittently firing or flooded pipe's opening as far as possible (see the engine can cause three-way catalytic con- illustration). verter or exhaust system overheating. 3. Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not press • Remember that tampering or unauthorized the handle on the filler nozzle after it has modifications to the engine, the Engine Con- stopped pumping. Too much fuel in the tank trol Module, or the vehicle may be illegal and in hot weather conditions can cause the fuel can cause three-way catalytic converter or to overflow. Overfilling could also cause dam- exhaust system overheating. This includes: age to the emission control systems. altering fuel injection settings or components, altering emission system components

3 If the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's performance will not be affected.

356 STARTING AND DRIVING

or location or removing components, and/or Jump starting If a fuse blows, Battery failure Battery fuse repeated use of leaded fuel. Follow the instructions provided here to jump Service required will be displayed in the instru- start your vehicle or to jump start another vehi- ment panel. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo NOTE cle. service technician. Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with Use the following steps when jump starting your three-way catalytic converters. vehicle to help prevent short circuits or other damage. Heated oxygen sensors The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxygen content of the exhaust gases. Readings are fed into a control module that continuously monitors engine functions and controls fuel injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine is continuously adjusted for efficient combustion to help reduce harmful emissions. Related information Jumper cable connecting terminals • Octane rating (p. 354) NOTE The vehicle cannot be started if the hybrid battery is discharged.

CAUTION The vehicle's jumper cable connecting terminals may only be used to start your vehicle. They are not intended to be used to help start another vehicle. If they are used to start another vehicle, a fuse may blow and the terminal will not function.

}}

357 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| 1. Switch the ignition off completely (mode 0). 9. Check that the jumper cables are securely 12. After the vehicle has started, carefully attached to help avoid sparks when the vehi- remove the jumper cables in reverse order, 2. Ensure that the auxiliary battery to be used is cle is started. beginning with the black one. 12-volt. 10. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle and Ensure that the black jumper cable's clamps 3. If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in run it for a short time at approx. 1,500 rpm. do not come in contact with the vehicle's or another vehicle, switch off that vehicle's igni- the auxiliary battery's positive terminals or tion and be sure that the vehicles are not 11. Start the engine in your vehicle. If the vehicle the red jumper cable's clamps while it is con- touching each other. does not start, allow an additional nected. 10 minutes of charging time and then try to 4. Connect one of the red jumper cable's start the engine again. clamps to the auxiliary battery's positive (+) WARNING terminal (1). NOTE PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! CAUTION During normal starts, the electric motor is pri- Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso- oritized and the gasoline engine will not start. ries contain lead and lead compounds, chemi- Connect the jumper cables carefully to avoid This means that when the start knob has cals known to the state of California to cause short circuits with other components in the cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands been turned toward START and released, the engine compartment. after handling. electric motor is activated ("started") and the vehicle is ready to be driven. The warning and 5. Open the cover over the positive (+) jump information symbols in the instrument panel WARNING start terminal (2). will go out and the chosen theme will be dis- • Do not connect the jumper cable to any 6. Connect the red jumper cable's other clamp played to indicate that the electric motor has part of the fuel system or to any moving to your vehicle's positive (+) jump start termi- been activated. parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds. nal (2). • Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which 7. Connect one of the black jumper cable's CAUTION is flammable and explosive. clamps to the auxiliary battery's negative (–) Do not touch the jumper cable connections • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not terminal (3). while the vehicle is being started. This could allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, 8. Connect the black jumper cable's other generate sparks. fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area immedi- clamp to your vehicle's negative (–) jump ately with water. Obtain medical help start terminal (4). immediately if eyes are affected. • Never expose the battery to open flame or electric spark.

358 STARTING AND DRIVING

• Do not smoke near the battery. Driving with a trailer stop (check and observe state/local regula- • Failure to follow the instructions for jump When towing a trailer, always observe the legal tions). starting can lead to injury. requirements of the state/province. • Do not connect the trailer's brake system directly to the vehicle's brake system. All Volvo models are equipped with energy- • More frequent vehicle maintenance is Related information absorbing shock-mounted bumpers. Trailer • required. • Ignition modes (p. 362) hitch installation should not interfere with the • Starting the engine (p. 364) proper operation of this bumper system. • Remove the ball holder when the hitch is not being used. • Turning the engine off (p. 366) Trailer towing does not normally present any particular problems, but take into consideration: • Start battery (p. 469) NOTE • Opening and closing the hood (p. 491) • Increase tire pressure to recommended full pressure. • When parking the vehicle with a trailer on • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 375) a hill, apply the parking brake before put- When your vehicle is new, avoid towing heavy • ting the gear selector in P. Always follow trailers during the first 620 miles (1,000 km). the trailer manufacturer's recommenda- • Maximum speed when towing a trailer: tions for wheel chocking. 50 mph (80 km/h). • When starting on a hill, put the gear • Engine and transmission are subject to selector in D before releasing the parking increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant brake. temperature should be closely watched when If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift driving in hot climates or hilly terrain. Use a • positions while towing a trailer, make sure lower gear and turn off the air conditioner if the gear you select does not put too the temperature gauge needle enters the red much strain on the engine (using too range. high a gear). If the automatic transmission begins to over- • The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may heat, a message will be displayed in the text • be rated for trailers heavier than the vehi- window. cle is designed to tow. Please adhere to • Avoid overload and other abusive operation. Volvo's recommended trailer weights. • Hauling a trailer affects handling, durability, • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of and economy. more than 15%. • It is necessary to balance trailer brakes with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a safe }}

359 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| CAUTION WARNING Detachable trailer hitch Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer The maximum trailer weights listed are only Bumper-attached trailer hitches must not • hitches that are specially designed for the vehi- applicable for altitudes up to 3,280 ft be used on Volvos, nor should safety cle. (1000 m) above sea level. With increasing chains be attached to the bumper. altitude the engine power and therefore the • Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle car's climbing ability are impaired because of rear axle must not be used. the reduced air density, so the maximum • Never connect a trailer's hydraulic brake trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. system directly to the vehicle brake sys- The weight of the vehicle and trailer must be tem, nor a trailer's lighting system directly reduced by 10% for every further 3,280 ft to the vehicle lighting system. Consult (1,000 m) (or part thereof). When towing your nearest authorized Volvo retailer for 5,000 lbs (2,250 kg) hill inclination is restric- correct installation. ted to 14%. • When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety chains or wire must be correctly fastened to the attachment points provided in the trailer hitch on the vehicle. The safety chain or wire must never be fastened to Ball holder or wound around the towing ball. Cotter pin Trailer cable Hitch assembly An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer has 7 pins. Locking bolt Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground. Safety wire attachment

Related information Installing the ball holder • Detachable trailer hitch (p. 360) 1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from the • Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 361) locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of • Weights (p. 513) the hitch assembly. 2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assembly.

360 STARTING AND DRIVING

3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one Stowing the ball holder Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) in the hitch assembly. Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to 4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer assembly/ball holder. when the vehicle and trailer have begun to sway and is part of the Electronic Stability Control sys- 5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end of tem. the locking bolt. Function Removing the ball holder A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway for 1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt various reasons. Normally this only occurs at high and slide the locking bolt out of the ball speeds but, for example, if the trailer is overloa- holder/hitch assembly. ded or if the load is unevenly distributed in the 2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assembly. trailer, there is risk of swaying. Compartment for the detachable trailer hitch Swaying may be caused by factors such as: NOTE • The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden, A cover for the hitch assembly is also WARNING strong crosswind included in the kit. When not in use, the detachable trailer hitch • The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an should always be kept in its compartment in uneven road surface or drive over a bump the foam block under the cargo compartment floor (see the illustration). • Sudden movements of the steering wheel Facts about TSA Related information • The stability system symbol in the instrument • Driving with a trailer (p. 359) panel will flash when TSA is working • Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 361) • If the driver switches off the stability system's Spin Control function, TSA will also be switched off (but will be on again the next time the engine is started) • TSA may not intervene when the vehicle and trailer begin to sway if the driver tries to compensate for the swaying motion by moving the steering wheel rapidly

}}

361 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| How TSA works Related information Ignition modes Once swaying has begun, it can be very difficult • Detachable trailer hitch (p. 360) The vehicle's ignition can be put in various to stop, which makes it difficult to control the • Driving with a trailer (p. 359) modes (levels) to make different functions availa- vehicle and trailer. • Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 316) ble. The TSA system continuously monitors the vehi- The vehicle's ignition has 3 modes: 0, I, and II cle's movements, particularly lateral movement. If that can be used to operate various functions the system detects a tendency to sway, the without starting the engine. The following table brakes are applied individually on the front shows examples of which functions are available wheels, which has a stabilizing effect on the vehi- in the respective modes. cle and trailer. This is often enough to enable the driver to regain control of the vehicle. If this is not adequate to stop the swaying motion, the brakes are applied to all of the wheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it is equipped with brakes, and engine power is temporarily reduced. As the swaying motion begins to decrease and the vehicle-trailer have once again become sta- ble, TSA will now stop regulating the brakes/ engine power and the driver regains control of the vehicle. TSA is deactivated if the driver deactivates ESC in the center display's menu system. When the ESC symbol in the instrument panel flashes, TSA is active.

362 STARTING AND DRIVING

Mode Functions available Mode Functions available NOTE 0 • The odometer, clock and tem- II • The headlights illuminate To access ignition modes I or II without starting the engine, the brake pedal must not be perature gauge are illuminated Warning/indicator lights illumi- • depressed when these modes are selected. • Power seats* can be adjusted nate for 5 seconds • The power windows can be oper- • A number of other functions will ated also be activated. However, the • Ignition mode I: Turn the start knob to heated seats* and heated rear START and release it. The knob will return • The 12-volt socket in the cargo automatically to its original position. compartment can be used window functions can only be activated when the engine is run- • Ignition mode II: Turn the start knob to • The center display is activated ning. START and hold it there for approx. and can be used This mode should only be used for 4 seconds. Release the knob. • The infotainment system can be very short periods to help avoid • Returning to ignition mode 0: To return to used for a limited time draining the battery. mode 0 from mode II or I, turn the start knob In this mode, certain functions can to STOP and release it. only be used for a limited time to help Selecting an ignition mode minimize battery drain Related information • Starting the engine (p. 364) I • The laminated panoramic roof*, • Turning the engine off (p. 366) power seats*/windows,12-volt sockets in the passenger compartment, Bluetooth, navigation system*, climate system blower, windshield wipers can be operated • The infotainment system will start (if it was started when the ignition was switched off) Using electrical current will drain Start knob in the tunnel console the start battery in this mode. • Ignition mode 0: unlock the vehicle and keep the remote key in the passenger's compartment.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 363 STARTING AND DRIVING

Battery drain Starting the engine To start the engine. Your vehicle's electrical functions drain the bat- The engine can be started using the start knob 1. A remote key must be in the passenger com- tery to varying extents. on the tunnel console if there is a remote key in partment. On models with the standard the passenger compartment. Passive Start, the key has to be in the front Avoid using ignition mode II as much as posssi- section of the passenger compartment. If the ble, or electrical functions that require a great vehicle is equipped the optional Passive deal of electrical current when the engine is not Entry system (keyless locking/unlocking) the running. key can be anywhere in the vehicle. Using ignition mode I whenever possible con- 2. 4 sumes less electrical current. Press firmly on the brake pedal . START Functions that require a great deal of electrical 3. Turn the start knob toward and current include: release it to start the engine. > The starter motor will crank until the • the climate system blower engine starts or its overheating protection • headlights is triggered. • wipers • infotainment system (especially at high vol- Start knob in the tunnel console between the front seats ume). If the battery's charge level is low, a text message WARNING will appear in the instrument panel. The vehicle's Before starting the engine: energy-saving function will then turn off or reduce certain functions that are currently con- • Fasten the seat belt. suming electrical current. • Check that the seat, steering wheel and mirrors are adjusted properly. If the battery needs to be recharged, start the engine and let it idle for at least 15 minutes or • Make sure the brake pedal can be drive the vehicle (driving charges the battery depressed completely. Adjust the seat if faster than letting the engine idle). necessary. Related information • Ignition modes (p. 362)

4 If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to turn the start knob toward START to start the engine.

364 STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING NOTE WARNING • Never use more than one floor mat at a The vehicle cannot be started if the hybrid • Always remove the remote key from the time on the driver's floor. Before driving, battery is discharged. passenger compartment when leaving the remove the original mat from the driver's vehicle and ensure that the ignition in seat floor before using any other type of mode 0. floor mat. Any mat used in this position • On vehicles with the optional Passive should be securely and properly anchored Entry, never remove the remote key from in the attaching pins. An extra mat on the the vehicle while it is being driven or driver's floor can cause the accelerator towed. and/or brake pedal to catch. Check that the movement of these pedals is not • Always place the gear selector in Park impeded. and apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle. Never leave the vehicle • Volvo's floor mats are specially manufac- unattended with the engine running. tured for your car. They must be firmly secured in the clips on the floor so that Back-up reader in the tunnel console • Always open garage doors fully before starting the engine inside a garage to they cannot slide and become trapped If Vehicle key not found is displayed in the under the pedals on the driver's side. ensure adequate ventilation. The exhaust instrument panel, place the remote key in the gases contain carbon monoxide, which is back-up reader in the tunnel console (see the invisible and odorless but very poisonous. During normal starts, the electric motor is priori- illustration) and try again to start the engine. tized and the gasoline engine will not start. This means that when the start knob has been turned CAUTION NOTE START toward and released, the electric motor is After a cold start, idle speed may be noticea- activated ("started") and the vehicle is ready to If the engine does not start after the third try, wait for approximately 3 minutes before trying bly higher than normal for a short period. This be driven. The warning and information symbols is done to help bring components in the in the instrument panel will go out and the to start it again to give the battery time to recover its starting capacity. emission control system to their normal oper- chosen theme will be displayed to indicate that ating temperature as quickly as possible, the electric motor has been activated. which enables them to control emissions and However, in certain situations, such as in cold help reduce the vehicle's impact on the envi- weather or if the hybrid battery is not sufficiently ronment. charged, the gasoline engine will start instead.

}}

365 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| CAUTION Turning the engine off Driving systems The engine can be turned off using the start The XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid is a When starting in cold weather, the auto- • knob on the tunnel console. parallel hybrid, which means that it has two sep- matic transmission may shift up at slightly arate drive systems: an electric motor and a gas- higher engine speeds than normal until the automatic transmission fluid reaches oline engine. Depending on the drive mode normal operating temperature. selected and the amount of electric power available in the hybrid battery, the two systems can • Do not race a cold engine immediately be used in tandem or separately. after starting. Oil flow may not reach some lubrication points fast enough to Two drive systems prevent engine damage. A control system coordinates both of the drive • The engine should be idling when you systems to help optimize driving economy. move the gear selector. Never accelerate until after you feel the transmission engage. Accelerating immediately after selecting a gear will cause harsh engage- ment and premature transmission wear. Start knob in the tunnel console between the front seats Selecting P or N when idling at a stand- • To turn off the engine: still for prolonged periods of time will help prevent overheating of the automatic – Turn the start knob toward STOP and transmission fluid. release it to switch the engine off. If the gear selector is in P or if the vehicle is mov- Related information ing: Ignition modes (p. 362) • – Hold the knob in the STOP position until the • Turning the engine off (p. 366) engine stops. Hybrid battery • Changing the remote key's battery (p. 226) Related information Gasoline engine Jump starting (p. 357) • • Starting the engine (p. 364) 5 • Ignition modes (p. 362) High voltage generator Electric motor

5 Combined generator and starter motor (Crank Integrated Starter Generator).

366 STARTING AND DRIVING

The gasoline engine and electric motor both gen- Hybrid battery charging cable Charging cable specifications erate power directly to the wheels. The gasoline The charging cable is used to recharge your engine can also charge the hybrid battery using a vehicle's hybrid battery. Only use the cable provi- Compliance SAE J1772 special high-voltage generator. ded with your vehicle or one purchased from a Permitted ambient tem- –25 ºF to Related information Volvo retailer. peratures for use +122 ºF • Drive modes (p. 382) (–32 ºC to • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 375) +50 ºC) • General information about the XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid (p. 14) • Parking climate (preconditioning) (p. 175)

The charging cable is stowed in a storage compartment under the cargo area floor

WARNING Only use the charging cable provided with your vehicle or a replacement cable purchased from a Volvo retailer.

}}

367 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| WARNING • If the hybrid battery needs to be replaced, Charging cable components this may only be done by Volvo retailer or • The charging cable must be grounded authorized Volvo workshop when in use. It is equipped with a cord Also, refer to the manufacturer's instructions with a grounding conductor and a for using the charging cable and its compo- grounding plug. The plug must be nents. inserted into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordi- CAUTION nances and is not damaged in any way • Never unplug the charging cable from a • Children should be supervised when in 120-/240-volt socket while the hybrid the vicinity of the charging cable when it battery is being recharged. This could is plugged in result in damage to the socket. Always • High voltage is present in your electric stop the charging process before unplug- meter housing and power distribution ging the charging cable Charge module service panel. Contact with high voltage • To clean the charging cable, wipe it with can cause death or serious personal a clean cloth dampened with water or a 240-volt adapter clip injury mild detergent solution suitable for use 240-volt adapter • Do not use the charging cable if it is on automobile paint. Do not use chemi- damaged in any way cals or solvents. Do not submerge the Charge coupler charging cable Always position the charging cable so • Release button that it will not be driven over, stepped on, tripped over or otherwise damaged, or cause personal injury • Disconnect the charger from the wall outlet before cleaning it • Never connect the charging cable to an extension cord or a multiple plug socket

368 STARTING AND DRIVING

Hybrid charging cable circuit WARNING breaker Charging the hybrid battery may only be The charging cable has a circuit breaker that • done from approved, grounded 120-/ helps protect against current overloads and 240-volt sockets. If the electrical circuit electrical shocks. or electrical socket's capacity is not If the charging cable's residual current breaker is known, let a licensed electrician inspect the electrical circuit's capacity. Using a triggered, the blue indicator light in the charge charge level that exceeds the electrical coupler will not illuminate when the cable is plug- circuit's or electrical outlet's capacity may ged into a 120-/240-volt socket or the red indi- start a fire or damage the electrical cir- cator light will glow steadily. Have the socket cuit. checked by a licensed electrician or try using another 120-/240-volt wall socket. • The charging cable's residual current breaker helps protect the vehicle's charging system but cannot ensure that an current overload will never occur. • Never use visibly worn or damaged electrical sockets. Doing so could lead to fires or serious injury. • Never connect the charging cable to an extension cord. • Maintenance or replacement of the hybrid battery may only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

369 STARTING AND DRIVING

Hybrid-related symbols and appear in the instrument panel. They may also messages be displayed in combination with general indica- A number of symbols and messages relating to tor and warning symbols and will go out when the XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid may the necessary action has been taken.

Symbol Message Explanation Battery charging fault Battery fault. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as Service urgent Drive to workshop possible.

Battery charging fault Battery fault. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and quali- Stop safely fied Volvo service technician.

Low battery charge The hybrid battery's charge level is too low for optimal driving. Charge the battery as soon as possible. Temporarily reduced functionality

Battery charging fault The hybrid battery is not sufficiently charged. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and charge the Low battery Stop safely battery.

Battery failure Battery failure. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as Battery fuse Service required possible to have the system checked.

Battery overheated Battery temperature too high/too low. Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine. If the message Stop safely remains after the engine has been restarted, contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Reduced performance The hybrid battery is not sufficiently charged for higher speeds. Charge the battery as soon as possi- Max vehicle speed limited ble.

370 STARTING AND DRIVING

Symbol Message Explanation Hybrid system The hybrid system is not functioning completely properly. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and Harsh behavior at low speed, vehi- qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible to have the system checked. cle ok to use

Hybrid system failure The hybrid system is out of order. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service Service required technician as soon as possible to have the system checked.

Charge cable The charging cable has not been disconnected and the driver has attempted to start the engine. Dis- Remove before start connect the cable from the vehicle, put the cover back in place and close the charger door.

Charge cable The driver has already attempted to start the engine with the charging cable still connected. Be sure Removed? Hold start knob 7s at the cable is completely disconnected, the cover is in place and the charger door is closed. START

Related information • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 375) • Charger status indicators (p. 379) • Hybrid battery charge status (p. 377)

371 STARTING AND DRIVING

Preparations for charging the hybrid WARNING • If the hybrid battery needs to be replaced, battery this may only be done by Volvo retailer or The charging cable must be grounded Several preparatory steps should be taken • authorized Volvo workshop when in use. It is equipped with a cord before starting to charge the hybrid battery. Also, refer to the manufacturer's instructions with a grounding conductor and a for using the charging cable and its compo- grounding plug. The plug must be nents. inserted into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordi- Prior to charging nances and is not damaged in any way The charging cable and any of its components should not be wet or submerged in any liquid. • Children should be supervised when in the vicinity of the charging cable when it The charge module or its plug should not be is plugged in exposed to direct sunlight. This could cause the • High voltage is present in your electric unit's overheating protector to reduce or stop the meter housing and power distribution hybrid battery charging process. service panel. Contact with high voltage Be sure the 120-/240-volt socket used has ade- can cause death or serious personal quate current for charging electrically powered injury vehicles. Have the socket checked by an licensed • Do not use the charging cable if it is electrician if you are uncertain. damaged in any way Opening/closing the charger door • Always position the charging cable so that it will not be driven over, stepped on, tripped over or otherwise damaged, or cause personal injury • Disconnect the charger from the wall outlet before cleaning it • Never connect the charging cable to an extension cord or a multiple plug socket

372 STARTING AND DRIVING

Press in the rear section of the door and Stopping hybrid battery charging release it. Stop hybrid battery charging by unlocking the Open the door. vehicle, disconnecting the charging cable from the vehicle's charging socket and then unplug- Pull off the charging socket's protective ging the cable from the 120-/240-volt socket. cover and place it in the holder on the inside of the door. Be sure that the protective cov- NOTE er's rubber plug faces down to help keep the cover from falling out of the holder. Always unlock the vehicle to stop the charging process before disconnecting the charg- Put the cover back in position and close the door ing cable from the vehicle's charging socket Press the release button on the charge cou- in reverse order. and then unplugging it from the pler to release it and disconnect the coupler 120-/240-volt socket. from the vehicle's charging socket. Remove the cable from the vehicle. Put the socket's The cable must be disconnected from the cover back in place and close the charger vehicle's charging socket before it is door. unplugged from the 120-/240-volt socket to help prevent damage to the charging system.

Disconnect the cable from the 120-/240-volt socket. Stow the cable in the storage compartment Unlock the vehicle with the remote key. under the cargo area floor.

}}

373 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Related information Initiating hybrid battery charging • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 375) The hybrid battery is charged using a charging • Hybrid battery charge status (p. 377) cable connected to a 120-/240-volt socket. • Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 367) Only use the cable provided with your vehicle or one purchased from a Volvo retailer.

CAUTION Never connect the charging cable if there is a risk of thunderstorms/lightning. Open the charging door, remove the charging socket's protective cover and connect the Take out the charging cable, which is stored in charging cable's charge coupler. the compartment under the floor of the cargo area.

Connect the charging cable to a 120-/240-volt socket. Never use an exten- Place the charging socket's protective cover sion cord. on the holder provided on the charging socket door.

374 STARTING AND DRIVING

4. The charging cable's coupler will lock onto CAUTION Charging the hybrid battery the charging socket and charging will begin In addition to the conventional fuel tank, the Never disconnect the charging cable from the within approx. 10 seconds. The approximate XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid is also 120-/240-volt socket while charging is in remaining charging time and charging status equipped with a rechargeable lithium-ion hybrid progress. This could damage the socket. will be displayed in the instrument panel. See battery. also the article "Hybrid battery charge sta- Always stop the charging process (by unlock- tus." ing the vehicle) and disconnect the charging The hybrid battery is recharged using a charging cable located in a storage compartment under Charging will be temporarily interrupted if the cable from the vehicle's charging socket the floor of the cargo area. See also the article vehicle is unlocked: before disconnecting the other end from the 120-/240-volt socket being used. "Charging cable." • If a door is opened, charging will restart within 2 minutes. WARNING if no door is opened, the vehicle will auto- During the charging process, condensation may • The hybrid electrical system in your vehicle matically relock and charging will restart form under the vehicle, which is normal and is uses high voltage electrical current. Any dam- after 1 minute. caused by cooling the hybrid battery. age to this system or to the hybrid battery may result in the danger of overheating, fire, Related information NOTE or serious injury. If the vehicle is involved in a • Hybrid battery charge status (p. 377) collision or is subjected to flooding, fires, etc., Charging status is shown in the instrument • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 375) have it inspected by a trained and qualified panel, which goes dark after a period of time. Volvo service technician. Prior to this inspec- Reactivate the instrument panel by: • Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 367) tion, the vehicle should be parked outdoors at • Stopping hybrid battery charging (p. 373) a safe distance from any building or poten- • pressing the brake pedal tially flammable materials. • opening one of the doors • putting the ignition in mode I (without The hybrid battery's charging time depends on pressing the brake pedal, turn the start the charging current used. knob to START and release it).

}}

375 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| NOTE be available at all (e.g., drive mode may not be Charging using the gasoline engine available). The capacity of the hybrid battery diminishes somewhat with age and use, which could The electric motor cannot be used if the hybrid result in increased use of the gasoline engine battery's temperature is too low or too high. If the and consequently, slightly higher fuel con- PURE drive mode is selected, the gasoline sumption. engine will be used. Temperature control Charging is indicated in three ways: During charging, if the temperature in the charg- • Charge module (the unit that is plugged into ing cable becomes too high and reaches a critical the wall socket): The blue indicator light on limit, charging will be interrupted. the cable's charge module will flash red several times when the unit is plugged into a CAUTION wall socket while a safety check is being per- Current is generated to charge the hybrid battery, such If charging is interrupted repeatedly, have the formed and will then glow steadily blue to as light braking and when engine braking on down- charging cable and the vehicle's charging indicate that the charger is ready to use. slopes system inspected by a trained and qualified Using the B gear mode when driving on down- • A green indicator light in the vehicle's charg- Volvo service technician. ing socket will flash green while the battery slopes will also recharge the hybrid battery. is charging and will glow steadily green when The hybrid battery can also be charged by the the hybrid battery is fully charged. The blue gasoline engine. During light braking, the battery indicator light in the charge module will also is recharged. flash while charging is underway and will glow steadily blue when charging is comple- Related information ted. • Drive modes (p. 382) • A gauge in the instrument panel will also • General information about the XC90 T8 Twin indicate the battery's charge level. Engine Plug-in Hybrid (p. 14) The hybrid battery charging process also charges • Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 367) the vehicle's start battery. • Gear selector positions (p. 387) If the hybrid battery's temperature is below – 13 ºF (–10 ºC) or above +104 ºF (+40 ºC), some of the vehicle's functions may be reduced or not

376 STARTING AND DRIVING

Hybrid battery charge status LEDindica- Explanation • Turning the start knob to ignition mode I The hybrid battery's charge status (level) is indi- tor light's cated by an LED light in the vehicle's charging color socket and in the instrument panel. White Courtesy light Indicator LED in the vehicle's charging socket Yellow Standby mode (e.g., after a door has been opened or if the charger coupling is not locked in position in the charging socket): waiting for charging to begin Flashing Charging is in progress (the green slower the light flashes, the closer the battery is to being fully charged) Green Charging completed (the light will go out after a short time) LED indicator light in the charging socket Red A fault has occurred The LED indicator light shows the current charge status while charging is underway. White, red, yel- Charge status in the instrument panel low or yellow lights are activated when the pas- Charging status is indicated in the instrument senger compartment lighting illuminates and panel using graphics and text. This information is remain on for a short time after the passenger displayed for as long as the instrument panel is compartment lighting has gone out. active. If the instrument panel is not used for a short period, it will switch off to help save electrical current and can be reactivated by: • Pressing the brake pedal • Opening one of the doors }}

377 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Graphic Message Explanation Graphic Message Explanation Related information • Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 367) Fully Charg- Charging is in pro- The battery is fully • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 375) charged gress and the approx- ing com- charged. Preparations for charging the hybrid battery at: imate time when the plete is • (p. 372) [Time] is battery will be fully displayed. displayed charged will be dis- An image • Stopping hybrid battery charging (p. 373) with an played. will be animated superim- blue puls- posed ing light over the through graphic of the the vehi- charging cle with a cable. greenLED indicator light in the charging socket. Charg- A fault has occurred. ing error Check that the charg- will be ing cable is correctly displayed connected to the and the vehicle's charging LED indi- socket and the cator light 120-/240-volt socket. in the charging socket will be red.

378 STARTING AND DRIVING

Charger status indicators Blue status indicator Hybrid battery charging current The red and blue lights in the charging cable's • When the charge module is plugged into a Charging current is used to charge the hybrid charge module give an indication of the charge wall socket, the blue status indicator illumi- battery and to precondition the vehicle. Charging status. nates and glows steadily to show that the is done through a cable connected between the charger is ready to use. vehicle's charging socket and a • When the charge coupler (the plug on the 120-/240-volt socket. other end of the charging cable) has been plugged into the vehicle's charging socket, When charging is in progress, an indicator light in the blue status indicator will flash once. the charging socket illuminates to indicate the charging status. Charging current is primarily • The blue status indicator will then flash approximately every two seconds to indicate used to recharge the hybrid battery and to pre- that charging is taking place. condition the vehicle but is also used to recharge the vehicle's start battery. • When the indicator light glows steadily, this indicates that charging has been completed. This will also be indicated by the charging CAUTION gauge on the instrument panel. Never disconnect the charging cable from the When charging is completed, press the release 120-/240-volt socket while charging is in Charge module: 1. red warning light, 2. blue status indicator button on the charge coupler and disconnect it progress. This could damage the socket. from the vehicle. Red warning light Always stop the charging process (by unlock- • When the charge module is initially plugged Unplug the charge module from the wall socket. ing the vehicle) and disconnect the charging into a wall socket, the red warning light will cable from the vehicle's charging socket Related information flash once to indicate that a startup safety before disconnecting the other end from the check has been performed. When the safety • Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 367) 120-/240-volt socket being used. check has been completed, the blue status • Hybrid battery charge status (p. 377) indicator will glow steadily and the red warn- • Hybrid charging cable circuit breaker ing light will be off. (p. 369) • If the red warning light continues to flash or • Hybrid-related symbols and messages glows steadily, a fault has been detected and (p. 370) the charger will not deliver power to the vehicle. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

}}

379 STARTING AND DRIVING

NOTE Long-term storage of a vehicle with See the article "Jump starting" for information a hybrid battery about charging the start battery. At very low or high temperatures, some of • To help keep the hybrid battery from degrading if the charging current is used to heat or NOTE cool the hybrid battery and the passenger the vehicle is not driven for a prolonged period compartment, which means that charging (longer than 1 month), the hybrid battery charge • If the vehicle will not be driven for an may take longer. level should be kept at approx. 25% according extended period, park it in as cool a loca- to the gauge in the instrument panel. • Charging time is longer if preconditioning tion as possible to help minimize hybrid battery aging. Park the vehicle indoors or has been selected. This time is primarily Do as follows: affected by the ambient temperature. in a shady location in the summer, which- ever is coolest.

Related information • Jump starting (p. 357) • Initiating hybrid battery charging (p. 374) • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 375)

1. If the hybrid battery charge level is high, drive Charging coupler and charging socket the vehicle until approx. 25% of the charge remains. If the charge level is low, charge the There are normally several 120-/240-volt power battery until the level is approx. 25%. consumers in a fuse circuit, which means that more than one power consumer (lighting, vacuum 2. If the vehicle has not been driven for at least cleaner, electric drill, etc.) may use the same fuse. 6 months and the charge level is noticeably below the 25% level, charge the battery up to 25% again to help compensate for natural battery discharge. Check the charge level in the instrument panel gauge regularly.

380 STARTING AND DRIVING

Using the electric motor in city 32°F (0°C) 80% 37 mph (60 km/h) 110% driving A number of factors affect the electric motor's 23°F (-5°C) 75% 30 mph(50 km/h) 120% driving range. 14°F (-10°C) 70% NOTE The driver can affect some of these factors while Factors in the driver's control others depend on outside conditions such as The driver should be aware of the following fac- • The figures in the preceding tables per- tain to a new vehicle. temperature, road surface, etc. tors in order to utilize the vehicle's electric motor most efficiently: • None of the figures are absolute and are Factors that determine the electric affected by e.g., driving style, weather, motor's driving range • Charge the hybrid battery regularly traffic conditions, etc. Factors outside of the driver's control • Preconditioning The following are examples of factors that the • The Pure drive mode Driving with the electric motor driver cannot control: • Climate system settings Use the Pure drive mode for the most energy- • The current traffic situation • Speed and acceleration efficient driving to help maximize driving range using the electric motor only. • Driving short distances • The Save drive mode Use the Save drive mode for higher speeds • Topography • Tires and inflation pressure when driving farther than is possible using the Ambient temperature and headwinds • The following table shows the approximate rela- electric motor only. • Road conditions/road surface tionship between constant speed and driving The following table shows the approximate rela- range where driving at a lower constant speed Related information tionship between ambient temperature and driv- helps increase the electric motor's driving range. • Driving economically (p. 347) ing range using the electric motor (with reduced • Drive modes (p. 382) climate system functionality). Warmer tempera- 62 mph (100 km/h) 70% tures increase driving range. 55 mph (90 km/h) 80%

77°F (25°C) 105% 50 mph(80 km/h) 90% 68°F (20°C) 100% 43 mph (70 km/h) 100% 50°F (10°C) 90% 40°F (5 °C) 85%

381 STARTING AND DRIVING

Drive modes Selecting a drive mode • Not possible to select due to low Selecting a drive mode affects the vehicle's driv- temperature ing characteristics to help make driving more • Not possible to select due to limitations enjoyable or easier in certain types of situations. • Not possible to select due to high speed The following systems are adapted to help pro- . vide the best vehicle performance in the respective drive modes: • Steering • Engine/transmission/All Wheel Drive • Brakes • Suspension control • Instrument panel 1. Press theDRIVE MODE control in the tunnel • Climate system settings console. Select the drive mode best suited to the current > A pop-up menu will open in the center driving conditions. display. Please be aware that not all modes can be 2. Roll the control upward or downward to scroll selected in all driving situations. The selected to the desired drive mode. mode will be displayed in the instrument panel. A drive mode can also be selected by tapping its button on the center display. 3. Press the control again to select it. When a driving mode cannot be selected, one of the following messages may be displayed: • Not possible to select due to gear in manual • Not possible to select due to low battery

382 STARTING AND DRIVING

Available drive modes When the hybrid battery's charge level is low, the HYBRID gasoline engine will start more often to help conserve electrical energy. Charge the battery with This is the default mode. the charging cable as soon as possible or switch The vehicle normally starts in Hybrid mode 6. The to the Save drive mode. engine management system uses both the elec- PURE tric motor and gasoline engine (separately or in This mode activates the electric motor only with tandem) and calculates the optimal levels of per- as low energy consumption as possible and the formance, fuel consumption and comfort. At lowest possible carbon dioxide emissions. higher speeds, ground clearance is reduced automatically to help reduce wind resistance. Ground clearance will be lowered to help reduce wind resistance and certain climate system func- The amount of driving done using only the elec- tions will be reduced. tric motor in Hybrid mode is determined by the The instrument panel gauge when both the electric motor and gasoline engine are being used hybrid battery's charge level and the need for Pure mode is available when the hybrid battery is heating/cooling in the passenger compartment. The long needle in the gauge indicates the sufficiently charged. If the level gets too low, the amount of energy that the vehicle is currently gasoline engine will start. If sufficient electrical energy is available, only the using. The short white line between the "light- electric motor will be activated when the driver The gasoline engine will also start: ning" and "oil drop" symbols indicates the presses the accelerator pedal up to a certain amount of energy available. See also the article • If the vehicle's speed goes above approx. level. Above this level, the gasoline engine will "General information about the XC90 T8 Twin 75 mph (125 km/h) start. Engine Plug-in Hybrid" for additional information. • If the driver wants more response than the electric motor alone can provide The gasoline engine starts when the response required when the driver presses the accelerator • If factors such as cold weather, etc., affect pedal cannot be provided by the electric motor the system or components alone. To restart the climate system functions that have AUTO The gauge also indicates when the battery is been reduced in the mode, press the, or being recharged (regenerated) during light brak- defroster buttons. ing. See the article "Brakes" for additional information.

6 Unless the vehicle was switched off in Off Road mode. If so, it will restart in Off Road mode. }}

383 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| SAVE This drive mode can only be activated at low This mode maximizes the combined effects of This mode makes it possible to save electrical speeds (the permissible speed range will be the electric motor and the gasoline engine and energy (hybrid battery charge) for times when shown on the speedometer). At higher speeds, provides power to all four wheels. Response to using the electric motor is more suitable (e.g., city OFF ROAD mode will be cancelled and AWD will pressure on the accelerator pedal is more imme- driving). be activated. diate and the transmission shifts up at higher speeds. Steering response is also more immedi- Using the electric motor only saves more fuel at This mode is not intended for normal street driv- ate, the suspension is stiffer and lower ground low speeds than at high ones. Therefore, use the ing. clearance reduces body roll when cornering. SAVE mode primarily when the hybrid battery's charge level is high and driving will initially be at CAUTION In this mode, both the electric motor and the gas- highway speeds but will end with city driving oline engine are used continuously, which results OFF ROAD drive mode may not be used if when electric driving is preferable. in higher fuel consumption. the vehicle is towing a trailer without an elec- If the hybrid battery's charge level is low when trical connection. This could result in damage this mode is selected, the gasoline engine will to the pneumatic suspension system's bel- start and charge the hybrid battery up to approx. lows. 40%. If the battery's charge level is already above 40%, this level will be maintained by the engine Due to the increased ground clearance, if the management system, which will start/stop the OFF ROAD mode was selected when the engine gasoline engine in the same way as in Hybrid was switched off, it will also restart in this mode. drive mode. AWD This mode increases fuel consumption because This mode offers improved traction using four- the gasoline engine is used to conserve battery wheel drive and is intended primarily for low- charge for later use. speed driving on slippery surfaces. However, it OFF ROAD also helps increase directional stability at higher This mode helps maximize the vehicle's capacity speeds. to traverse difficult terrain or poor roads. In this mode, both the electric motor and the gas- In OFF ROAD, ground clearance is maximized, oline engine are used continuously, which results the steering is light, All Wheel Drive and Hill in higher fuel consumption. Descent Control are activated and a compass POWER and altimeter will be displayed in the instrument Power mode is intended for sportier, more active panel. driving.

384 STARTING AND DRIVING

INDIVIDUAL 3. Select: Eco, Comfort or Dynamic. This setting allows you to adapt a driving mode to The following settings can be modified: your personal preferences. • Driver Display Select one of the other driving modes as a basis and change the settings to provide the driving • Steering force characteristics that you prefer. This driving mode • Powertrain Characteristics is only available if it has been activated in the • Brake Characteristics center display. • Pneumatic suspension and shock INDIVIDUAL is only available if it has been acti- absorbers vated in the center display. Related information • Adjustable steering force* (p. 316) • Loading (p. 211) • General information about the XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid (p. 14) • ECO drive mode (p. 386) • All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 392) • Hill Descent Control (HDC) (p. 342) • Brakes (p. 338) Settings view7 for INDIVIDUAL driving mode 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car Individual Drive Mode and tap Individual Drive Mode.

7 Generic illustration.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 385 STARTING AND DRIVING

ECO drive mode Selecting ECO mode 3. Press the control again to select it. A drive The Eco drive mode is a function designed to When the engine is switched off, ECO mode is mode can also be selected by tapping its give the driver the opportunity to drive more eco- deactivated and must be reactivated each time button on the center display. the engine is started. ECO will appear in the nomically and to help reduce fuel consumption. ECO gauge in the instrument panel instrument panel when the function is activated. When this mode is activated, the following cha- The ECO gauge in the instrument panel helps racteristics are modified: Via Function view improve driving economy. Select Driving mode ECO in A low reading in the green area indicates • The automatic transmission's shifting points the center display's Function • economical driving. • The engine management system and accel- view. A green indicator light in erator pedal response the button shows that the func- • A higher reading indicates higher fuel consumption. • Climate system settings: certain functions tion is activated. will be temporarily reduced or deactivated The ECO gauge also has an indicator showing how a "reference" driver would drive in the same • The suspension's self-leveling function* low- With the drive mode control* ers ground clearance to help reduce wind situation. This is indicated by a diamond in the resistance gauge. • Information is shown in an ECO gauge in the Related information instrument panel to help promote more eco- • Driving economically (p. 347) nomical driving • Drive modes (p. 382) NOTE When Eco is activated, several climate system parameters are changed and the function of certain current-consuming systems will be reduced. Some of these functions can be restarted manually but full functionality will not be 1. Press the DRIVE MODE control. restored until Eco is deactivated. > A pop-up menu will open in the center display. 2. Roll the control upward or downward to scroll to the desired drive mode and

386 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING

Automatic transmission Related information Gear selector positions The automatic transmission has 8 forward gears • Gear selector positions (p. 387) and an electric motor that powers the rear • Gear shift indicator (p. 390) The shift-by-wire gear transmission shifts gears electronically instead of mechanically for faster wheels. Steering wheel paddles* make it possi- • Shiftlock (p. 389) ble to shift manually. The gear indicator in the and more distinct gear shifting. • Steering wheel paddles* (p. 390) instrument panel shows the gear currently being Selecting gears used or gear shift mode. All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 392) • Select gears by moving the spring-loaded, non- locking gear selector forward or rearward. CAUTION The transmission’s temperature is monitored to help prevent damage to the transmission or other drivetrain components. If there is a risk of overheating, the warning symbol on the instrument panel will illuminate and a text message will be displayed. Follow the instructions provided there.

Symbols in the instrument panel If a problem should occur with the transmission, a symbol and a message will be displayed in the instrument panel.

Symbol Explanation Transmission-related information. Follow the instructions provided.

Hot or overheated transmission. Follow the instructions provided.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 387 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Gear selector positions Park – P In position P, the transmission is mechanically locked. Always apply the parking brake when the vehicle is parked.

WARNING Always apply the parking brake when the vehicle is parked, particularly when parking on a hill. The transmission's P mode may not be able to keep the vehicle stationary if it is parked on an incline.

Reverse – R The vehicle must be stationary before R can be The following gear selector positions are shown Park is activated using a switch located next to selected. in the instrument panel: the gear selector. Neutral – N P, R, N, D or B (brake). Select P when the vehicle is parked or when the No gear is selected and the engine can be starting the engine. The vehicle must be station- started. Always apply the parking brake if the For manual shifting, the gear indicator in the ary when P is selected. vehicle is not moving and the gear selector is in instrument panel shows the gear currently being the N position. used (1–8). To select another gear, the ignition must be in II mode II and the brake pedal must be depressed. The ignition must be in mode and the brake pedal must be depressed before the gear selec- Help functions: tor can be moved from N. The system will automatically shift to P: Drive – D • If the ignition is switched off while D or R is D is the normal driving position and gear shifting selected. is fully automatic. The vehicle must be stationary when the gear selector is moved from R to D. • If the driver unbuckles the seat belt and opens the door while the engine is running if P has not already been selected.

388 STARTING AND DRIVING

Brake – B For smooth shifting and engine performance, the Shiftlock B can be selected at any time during a drive. In transmission will shift down automatically if the The automatic transmission's shiftlock feature this mode, the engine braking function is acti- vehicle's speed becomes too low for the selected helps prevent inadvertently moving the gear vated when the accelerator pedal is released, gear. selector between different positions. which helps charge the hybrid battery. This means that the hybrid battery is charged even if Safety function Automatic shiftlock the brake pedal is not depressed. To help avoid excessive rpm that might cause engine damage, the transmission control module From Park – P has a down-shift protection feature that in some In order to move the gear selector from the P situations may prevent a down-shift or kickdown. position, the brake pedal must be depressed and During kickdown, the transmission may shift the ignition must be in mode II. down one or more gears, depending on the From neutral – N engine's rpm and will shift up again when max. If the gear selector is in N and the vehicle has rpm is reached for a specific gear. been stationary for more than 3 seconds (regard- Related information less of whether or not the engine is running), the shiftlock feature will lock the gear selector in this Steering wheel paddles* (p. 390) • position. • Shiftlock (p. 389) In order to move the gear selector from the N • Gear shift indicator (p. 390) position, the brake pedal must be depressed and B mode in the instrument panel the ignition must be in mode II. With B selected, manual shifting to lower gears Messages in the instrument panel is possible. The gear indicator in the instrument panel shows the gear currently being used (1–8). If the gear selector is locked in position, a message such as: Gear lever Press brake pedal Each time the gear selector is pulled rearward, to activate gear lever will be displayed. the transmission will shift down one gear. There is no mechanical shiftlock function. In order to manually shift to higher gears, the vehicle must be equipped with steering wheel Related information paddles*. • Gear selector positions (p. 387) • Press the gear selector forward to return to • Automatic transmission (p. 387) D mode.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 389 STARTING AND DRIVING

Gear shift indicator Steering wheel paddles* – Pull either paddle toward the steering wheel The gear shift indicator in the instrument panel In addition to the manual gearshift function using and release it. shows the current gear (in manual shifting the gear selector, the paddles make it possible mode) and will prompt the driver to shift up or to manually shift gears from the steering wheel. down to help get the best possible fuel economy. Activating the paddles In order to shift gears with the paddles, they have The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in to first be activated. To do so: the instrument panel and uses an upward arrow – Pull either paddle toward the steering wheel to recommend shifting to a higher gear or a and release it; the D in the instrument panel downward arrow to recommend shifting to a will change to M and the number of the gear lower gear. The indicator is also shown in mode currently being used will be displayed. B or if the steering wheel paddles* are being used in while the transmission is in mode D.

"–": Shift down one gear.

"+": Shift up one gear. A gear shift will take place each time a paddle is pulled if the engine speed (rpm) is within the permissible range for the selected gear. The gear number shown in the instrument panel will change after each gear shift. Deactivating the paddles Manually shifting gears Manually Gear shift indicator (generic illustration) In shift mode M, the paddles are automatically – Pull both paddles toward the steering wheel Related information activated. and hold them until the number of the current gear is no longer displayed in the instru- • Gear selector positions (p. 387) Shifting ment panel. • Steering wheel paddles* (p. 390) To shift one gear:

390 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING

Automatically Low Speed Control (LSC) Select the Off Road drive mode to activate LSC. If the paddles are not used for a period of time, Low Speed Control (LSC) helps make off-road Select any other drive mode to turn it off. they will deactivate automatically. The number of driving easier on slippery surfaces when towing the current gear in the instrument panel changes a trailer on grass, etc. This feature is part of the NOTE to "D". Off Road drive mode. Off The paddles will remain active if engine braking is When LSC with HDC is activated by the When driving at low speeds, LSC prioritizes low Road currently being used. drive mode, the feel of the accelerator gears and all wheel drive to help avoid wheel spin pedal and engine response will change. and to improve the vehicle's tractive force. The Related information The function is deactivated when driving at • Gear selector positions (p. 387) accelerator pedal and engine react differently to make low-speed driving easier. higher speeds and must be reactivated at • Gear shift indicator (p. 390) lower speeds if so desired. It is activated along with Hill Descent Control (HDC), which increases engine braking to help Related information keep vehicle speed low and smooth, even driving down steep hills. • Brake functions (p. 340) • Hill Descent Control (HDC) (p. 342) Activating LSC • Drive modes (p. 382) This function can be activated in different ways, depending on how the vehicle is equipped. Using the driving mode control*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 391 STARTING AND DRIVING

All Wheel Drive (AWD)10 Suspension and leveling control* Select Settings Vehicle Easy Entry/Exit Your Volvo can be equipped with All Wheel The leveling control system adjusts the suspen- Control via the center display's Top view to lower Drive, which means that power is distributed sion and shock absorbers automatically to help the vehicle when getting in or out. automatically between the front and rear wheels. provide good comfort and control while driving. When the vehicle is parked and the engine is Leveling can also be controlled manually to Under normal driving conditions, most of the turned off, the level is lowered (if a side door is make loading or getting in and out of the vehicle opened, the level adjustment will stop). When the engine's power is directed to the front wheels. easier. However, if there is any tendency for the front engine is started and the vehicle begins to move, wheels to spin, an electronically controlled cou- Pneumatic suspension and shock the level will be raised to the height set by the pling distributes power to the wheels that have absorbers selected drive mode. the best traction. This system is linked to the selected drive mode Turning off suspension and leveling control AWD reacts differently, depending on the drive and is adapted to the vehicle's speed. The pneu- mode* selected. matic suspension reduces the vehicle's ground In certain situations, this function has to be clearance at higher speeds to reduce wind resis- turned off, for example when lifting the vehicle on Related information tance and increase stability. The shock absorbers a jack or garage hoist. are normally set to provide the best possible • Drive modes (p. 382) 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top comfort and are adjusted continuously according • Low Speed Control (LSC) (p. 391) view. to the road surface, acceleration, braking and cornering. 2. Tap My Car Suspension . A message will be displayed in the instrument 3. Select Deactivate Suspension & Leveling panel when the suspension level is being Control. adjusted. Changing suspension control The level cannot be adjusted if one of the side Three different levels of suspension control can doors or the hood is open. be selected from the center display: Suspension leveling settings 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. Easy entry The vehicle can be lowered to entering and exit- 2. Tap My Car Drive Mode. ing easier. 3. Under Suspension Control, select Eco, Comfort or Dynamic.

10 Standard equipment on certain models.

392 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING

Loading mode Use the buttons in the cargo compartment to raise or lower the vehicle to make loading or unloading easier or when attaching a trailer. Parking the vehicle When parking, be sure that there is adequate space above and below the vehicle since its ground clearance may vary, e.g., depending on the ambient temperature, how the vehicle is loaded, if loading mode is being used or the drive mode selected after the engine is started. The level may also be adjusted for a certain time after the vehicle has been parked to compensate for possible height adjustments due to temperature changes in the pneumatic suspension when the vehicle has cooled. Transport When transporting the vehicle on a ferry, train or a tow truck, it may only be secured (lashed) around the tires, not using any other chassis components. Changes in the pneumatic suspension may occur during transport that could nega- tively affect the lashing and result in damage. Related information • Drive modes (p. 382) • Driving with a trailer (p. 359) • Loading (p. 211)

393

INFOTAINMENT INFOTAINMENT

The infotainment system Related information Sound settings The infotainment system consists of a radio, • Media player (p. 413) The infotainment system is precalibrated for opti- media player and has the capacity to communi- • Radio (p. 397) mal sound reproduction but these settings can cate with a Bluetooth-connected cell phone. It is • Phone (p. 406) be changed to suit your personal preferences. also possible to connect to the Internet to e.g., stream audio content via apps. • Internet connected vehicle (p. 420) The system's volume is normally adjusted using • Apps (applications) (p. 422) the right-side steering wheel keypad or the vol- The system's functions can be controlled from ume control below the center display. the right-side steering wheel keypad, the center • Ignition modes (p. 362) display or by using voice commands. • Symbols in the center display status bar Optimal sound reproduction settings (p. 45) The audio system is precalibrated for optimal Infotainment overview • Voice control (p. 117) sound reproduction using digital signal process- ing. This calibration takes into account the speak- Infotainment system license information • ers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, listener position, (p. 427) etc., for each combination of vehicle and infotain- • System updates (p. 464) ment system. Dynamic calibration is also available, which monitors the setting of the volume control, radio reception and the vehicle's speed. Specific sound settings are described in the respective articles/sections of this owner's information. To change a setting, pull down the center dis- System updates play's Top view and tap Settings Sound. The infotainment system is constantly being 1 developed and improved. For optimal functional- Active noise suppression ity, updates can be downloaded. See the article The vehicle can be equipped with an active noise "System updates" and the support site suppression function that reduces engine noise support.volvocars.com. in the passenger compartment by utilizing the infotainment system. The microphone(s) in the

1 Certain models only.

396 INFOTAINMENT ceiling liner react to engine noise and the info- Radio Radio settings tainment system produces signals (white noise) Your vehicle's radio offers FM with HD Radio ™ The following information lists the settings that to counteract this. Technology and SiriusXM® Satellite radio*. can be made for the various wavebands.

The radio can be controlled Pull down the center display's Top view and using the right-side steering select Settings Media for the desired wave- wheel keypad, the center dis- band. Tap to activate/deactivate. play or by using voice commands. FM • Show Radio Text: displays information about program content, artists, etc. Related information • Freeze Program Service Name: select to • Changing and searching for radio stations stop excessive scrolling to freeze after (p. 398) 20 seconds. • Radio settings (p. 397) • FM HD Radio: - Enables HD Radio ™ Microphone in the ceiling liner. The number and position • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 403) Technology for audio comparable to CD vary, depending on the vehicle quality. See the article "HD Radio" for • HD Radio™reception (p. 399) detailed information. NOTE • Changing and searching for radio stations (p. 398) SiriusXM® Satellite radio Avoid covering or obstructing the noise sup- With SiriusXM® Satellite radio activated, pull pression speakers because doing so could down the center display's Top view and tap result in a rumbling noise. SiriusXM Settings to display a list of available alternatives. See the article "SiriusXM Satellite Related information radio settings" for detailed information. • Media sound settings (p. 417) Related information • Voice control settings (p. 122) • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* settings (p. 405) • Phone settings (p. 411) • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 403) • Radio (p. 397) • HD Radio™reception (p. 399)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 397 INFOTAINMENT

RBDS radio Changing and searching for radio Favorites RBDS radio stations If a favorite station from a list is currently availa- The radio automatically compiles a list of the ble, the radio will automatically tune to that sta- RBDS (Radio Data Broadcast System) enables strongest stations that it is currently receiving. tion. certain functionality2, such as: Turning the radio on See "Changing a list in a waveband" above for • Searches for program types or new broad- information about selecting favorites on a wave- 1. Open the app (e.g., FM, radio favorites) from casts band. See "Radio favorites" below for information the center display's App view. • Text information about currently broadcast about selecting a station among all of your favor- programs 2. Select a station. ites. For example, if news is broadcast, the currently Changing a list in a waveband – Tap to add or remove a station for the playing sound source will be interrupted so that 1. Tap Library. waveband's list of favorites or Radio favorites. the news can be heard. The infotainment system will return to the previous sound source when the 2. Sect from Stations, Favorites or Genres. Radio favorites Radio favorites shows all of the news broadcast has been completed. 3. Tap the desired station in the list. favorite stations that have been To cancel the announcement, press the but- Favorites: only plays stations from the list of saved for e.g., FM. ton on the right-side steering wheel keypad or favorites (see "Favorites" below). tap Cancel on the center display. This function Genres: only plays stations broadcasting the can be activated/deactivated in the center dis- selected genre or program type, e.g., pop, classi- play's Settings menu. cal, etc. 1. Open the Radio favorites app in App view. Related information Changing stations in a selected list 2. Tap the desired station to listen. Radio (p. 397) • – Tap < > under the center display or on the • Radio settings (p. 397) When a station is removed, it will also be right-side steering wheel keypad. removed from the respective waveband's list of > Move step-by-step through the selected favorites. list. The center display can also be used to change stations.

2 Certain stations only.

398 INFOTAINMENT

Changing wavebands3 2. Tap . HD Radio™reception > The search view with a keyboard will open. HD Radio is a brand name registered by the iBiquity digital corporation4. They are the devel- 3. Enter a search word(s). oper of a broadcasting technology called IBOC > The search will start and change as char- or In Band On Channel, which refers to the acters are entered and the search results method of transmitting a digital radio broadcast will be categorized. signal centered on the same frequency as the Searching for a station manually FM station's present frequency. Searching manually makes it possible to find and Introduction tune to stations that are not on the automatically compiled list of the strongest stations in the area. – Tap Manual tuning, drag the control or tap < > to go to the desired frequency. Related information • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 403) • HD Radio™reception (p. 399)

– Tap an app, e.g., FM in App view or open the app menu from the right-side steering wheel keypad to select. Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio broadcast (generic illustration) Searching for a radio station Searching is done differently, depending on the NOTE waveband selected. HD Radio volume may fade in and out at • FM: stations, genres and frequencies. times due to coverage limitations. • SiriusXM®: program types, genres, stations. 1. Tap Library.

3 The AM waveband is not available in hybrid models. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 399 INFOTAINMENT

|| The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid" be displayed immediately. Album art is synched How HD Radio ™ Technology since it is both analogue and digital. During with the artist that you are currently listening to. broadcasting works hybrid operation, receivers still continue to HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio iTunes tagging receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD and broadcasts of this type are available in many This feature is common to both HD Radio and Radio receivers incorporate both modes of areas of the United States. However, there are a ® reception, where the receiver will automatically SiriusXM Satellite radio*. See the section few key differences: switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal "iTunes tagging" in the article "SiriusXM satellite cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver. radio settings" for more detailed information. • Instead of transmitting one analogue signal, stations send out a bundled signal – both When you have tuned to an HD Radio station, the Ball game mode analogue and digital. symbol will appear in the infotainment sys- This feature means that a main FM station (HD1) • An HD Radio receiver can receive both digi- tem display. The symbol will be displayed in dif- will broadcast live events, where the content of tal and analogue broadcasts. Depending on ferent colors: the programming is more important than sound the terrain and location of the vehicle (which quality, in analog mode only to help prevent the • Grayed-out symbol: NoHD Radio broadcast will influence the signal strength), the reception delay between analog and digital broadcasting. receiver will determine which signal to The HD Radio symbol will be white during live receive. • White symbol: the radio is actively receiving broadcasts and "Live" will be displayed next to an HD broadcast the symbol. Related information • Orange symbol: the radio is receiving an • Switching HD Radio on and off (p. 401) HD broadcast with digital sound Benefits of digital broadcasting • HD Radio sub-channels (p. 401) Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality). More information about HD Radio and IBOC can • • HD Radio limitations (p. 402) Some FM frequencies offer a greater num- be found on Ibiquity's website, www.hdradio.com • • Radio (p. 397) and www.ibiquity.com. ber of listening choices through “multicast- ing” (consisting of a frequency's main chan- • Changing and searching for radio stations Artist Experience™ nel and any sub-channels that may also be (p. 398) A radio station's logo and album art can be dis- available on that particular frequency.) played. If a station opts to provide this informa- • When receiving a digital signal there is no tion, it is broadcast once every 12 minutes, which multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/crack- means that there may be a delay before the ling due to outside influences. logo/album art appear on the screen. The radio can store 100 station logos so the next time the radio is tuned to the same station, the logo will

4 HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

400 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INFOTAINMENT

Switching HD Radio on and off Related information HD Radio sub-channels The factory setting for HD Radio is off. • HD Radio™reception (p. 399) In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM • HD Radio sub-channels (p. 401) wavebands only) will also have sub-channels Switching HD on or off offering additional types of programming or • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* settings (p. 405) When listening to an HD Radio station and driv- music. ing through areas with weak HD signals (fringe areas), you may experience that the radio repeat- Sub-channels edly switches between analogue/digital and digital/analogue reception. If this happens, it may be desirable to switch HD off. To do so: 1. Be sure the infotainment system is switched on and in FM mode. 2. To access the settings menu from the center display's Home view, pull down Top view and tap FM radio. Go to Adjust settings for media. 3. Tap the or FM HD Radio box to select/ Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels deselect this function. If any sub-channels are available, they will listed This will disable the radio's capability to receive below the main channel on the screen. In this digital broadcasts but it will continue to function example, "WRIF-FM HD2" is a sub-channel. as a conventional (analogue) FM receiver. Please note that when HD is switched off, it will not be possible to tune to sub-channels (see the article "HD Radio subchannels" for a more detailed explanation of sub-channels). Please note that this will only switch HD Radio on or off (selecting or deselecting the function) only affects the selected waveband.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 401 INFOTAINMENT

|| Selecting sub-channels HD Radio limitations NOTE To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), tap the station on the screen or press the forward/back Limitations There may be a noticeable difference in arrow keys on the right-side steering wheel key- • Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM only): sound quality when a change from analogue pad or below the screen. The main channel is the only channel that to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such can receive in hybrid mode (both digital and as: Sub-channels can also be stored as favorites, see analogue). If a frequency has sub-channels, • Volume increase or decrease the article "Changing and searching for radio sta- they are broadcast in digital mode only. The tions". main FM channel will be displayed as, for • Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/ Treble cut or boost If you tap a sub-channel favorite, it may take up example, "WRIF-FM HD1". The sub-FM to 6 seconds before the channel becomes audi- channels will be displayed as"WRIF-FM • Time alignment (Digital program material ble. If you tap a station while you are out of digital HD2", "WRIF-FM HD3", etc. in extreme cases can be as much as 8 range of the transmitter, No reception will be • Reception coverage area: Due to current seconds behind the analogue). This will noticeable as a "stuttering" effect. displayed. IBOC transmitter power limitations, the reception coverage area in digital mode is The above items are dependant on the Related information somewhat more limited than the station's broadcaster's equipment settings and do • HD Radio™reception (p. 399) analogue coverage area. Please be aware not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio • Switching HD Radio on and off (p. 401) that as with any radio broadcast technology, receiver or antenna systems. terrain, time of day, foliage level and building • Changing and searching for radio stations location can have positive or negative effects (p. 398) on radio reception. Related information • HD Radio sub-channels (p. 401) • Analogue to digital/digital to analogue blending: Analogue to digital blending will • HD Radio™reception (p. 399) occur as the signal strength reaches a preset threshold in the receiver. This will be noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak reception) and is normal.

402 INFOTAINMENT

SiriusXM® Satellite radio* function and display the channel list included in your subscription. The SiriusXM® Satellite system broadcasts from of a number of high elevation satellites in geo- Related information synchronous orbit. • Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio radio* Listening to satellite radio (p. 404) The digital signals from the satellites are line-of- sight, which means that physical obstructions such as bridges, tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere with signal reception. Avoid any obstructions, such as metallic objects transported on roof racks or in a ski box, or other ® antennas that may impede signals from the Home view with SiriusXM Satellite radio activated SiriusXM® satellites. If there is no subscription activated, tap channel 1, where you will be prompted on the screen to Selecting SiriusXM® Satellite radio mode phone SiriusXM®. 1. From the center display's Home view, swipe If a cell phone is paired and connected to the from right to left to come to App view. vehicle, you can also subscribe by: 1. From Home view, pull down the Settings menu. 2. Open the settings menu for SiriusXM® Satel- lite radio. 3. Tap Unsubscribed Services 2. Tap the SiriusXM® Satellite radio icon. 4. Tap the phone number to call SiriusXM®, who will activate the subscription of your choice. This may take several minutes. When the subscription has been activated, tap the SiriusXM® Satellite radio icon to start the

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 403 INFOTAINMENT

Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio Search EPG (Electronic Program Guide) radio* Tap the magnifying glass to display a screen On the center display's Home screen, tap EPG where you can enter text using the center dis- SiriusXM® Satellite radio offers several features for information about e.g., when a program is play's keyboard or by writing in the free-text field for finding and listening to music, news, sporting being broadcast and its name, description, artist, to search for e.g., a station number, an artist, No events, etc. being broadcast on satellite radio etc. If no information is currently available, song title, etc. information stations. will be displayed. Channels Alerts SiriusXM® Satellite radio functions Tap to display a complete list of the channels If this feature has been selected under SiriusXM included in your subscription. Tap a channel Settings, the Alerts button will be displayed on name to listen. If a subscription to a channel has the Home screen. expired, its name will be grayed-out on the screen. To add e.g., an artist's name, song title or a sports team to the list of alerts: For quick access to a channel that you often listen to, tap the star to the right of the channel's 1. Tune to any channel that is broadcasting a name to add it to the list of favorites. song, game, etc., of your choice. Favorites 2. Press the Alerts button. Tap to display the channels that you have added 3. A pop-up window will be displayed showing a to this list. Tap a channel name to listen. list of alerts (nothing will be displayed if the Categories/Genres selected channel does not support the alert Tap to display the categories available. Tap a cat- function). With SiriusXM® Satellite radio activated, tap egory or genre name to display the channels that Library to display a screen offering the following 4. Select one of the alternatives in list (only one it contains and then tap a channel to listen. functions: can be selected at a time). If an alert has been set (see the section "Alerts" Search (the magnifying glass icon) 5. The song/artist/team will now be added to • below) and an alert is active for an artist, song or the list of alerts. Favorite sports teams can • Channels team, virtual categories will also be temporary also be added to the list using the "Game Favorites created and displayed. The channels currently • Alert" setting as described in the article "Sir- broadcasting the song, artist or broadcasting a • Categories iusXM satellite radio settings." program with the selected team will be listed in a If you have used this view previously, you will be virtual category. > When your choice is being broadcast on a returned to the most recently used one. channel, you will be informed by a pop-up.

404 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INFOTAINMENT iTunes tagging SiriusXM® Satellite radio* settings From the Home screen, tap JUMP to activate the From the center display's Top view, tapSiriusXM There are numerous settings that can be made function. When traffic/weather information is available from the selected city, the radio will Settings. Tap theiTunes Tagging menu. Tap to enhance your SiriusXM® Satellite radio listen- automatically tune to the channel providing the the iTunes Tagging box to activate/deactivate ing experience. this function and tap Close to return to Home information. When the information/announce- view. Tap List Of Tags to display a list of all tag- Settings ment is finished, the radio will automatically ged songs. To access the settings menu from the center dis- return to the channel that you were previously lis- play's Home view, pull down Top view and tap tening to. If the function is activated, the iTunes tag button SiriusXM Settings will be displayed in Home view. If a song is played . The following alternatives During an announcement, tap JUMP to interrupt that you would like to buy in the iTunes store, tap will be displayed: the message and return to the station that you this button while the song is playing to tag it. If a were currently listening to. song with iTunes Tagging information is availa- Alert notifications ble, the button will be selectable. Tap the button Tap the box to activate/deactivate. When acti- to tag the song. If you would like to buy a tagged vated, you will be notified if a song, artist, etc. that song via iTunes, Tap the iTunes tag button. you have selected is playing. You will be asked if To buy a song in iTunes, begin by connecting an you want to listen. iPhone/iPod/iPad to the USB socket in the tun- Alert notifications sound nel console. The iTunes tagging list will automati- Opt to receive an audible alert when one of your cally be transferred to the device and removed selected choices is being played. from the list in the vehicle. If the device is con- iTunes tagging nected when a song is tagged, the data will auto- Tap to display a menu with the options: iTunes matically be saved in the device. To purchase the Tagging and List Of Tags. With this feature song, consult the iTunes support page. Traffic Jump activated, songs can be tagged for later purchase Related information Tap to display a list of cities from which you can from the iTunes store. choose to get traffic/weather information (or • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 403) Traffic jump off to deactivate the feature). Tap • Using the center display keyboard (p. 33) to select a city (JUMP will be displayed on the • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* settings (p. 405) Home screen next to Library). Tap Back to • Connecting a device via the AUX/USB return to the list of settings or Close to return to socket (p. 412) the Home screen.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 405 INFOTAINMENT

|| Game Alerts Skipped categories Phone Tap to display a list of sports. Tap to display a list of categories. Tap a category A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone can be paired to skip (hide) it. It will not be displayed in the list Tap a sport to display a list of teams and tap a and connected to the vehicle's integrated hands- of categories. box on the right side of the screen to select a free system. team as a favorite. An alert will then be provided Related information The infotainment system offers hands-free func- when information about the team is being broad- • Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio radio* tionality for remote-controlling a number of a cell cast. (p. 404) phone's features. The phone's integrated controls Tap Confirm below the list to return to the list of • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 403) can also be used, even when it is connected to sports. the vehicle. Tap Back to return to the list of settings or When the phone has been paired and connected Close to return to the main screen. to the infotainment system, it can be used to Unsubscribed services make or receive calls, send or receive text mes- ® sages, to stream music, etc., or as an Internet If you have a SiriusXM Satellite radio subscrip- connection. tion, any channels not included in the subscription will be listed here. Call SiriusXM™ to sub- The phone is controlled from scribe. The phone number will be shown on the the center display but the App screen. If a cell phone is paired and connected to menu (accessed using the the vehicle, tap the phone number to make the right-side steering wheel key- call. pad) and voice commands can also be used to control certain Skipped stations functions. Tap to display a list of channels that you would like to skip (hide). Hide channels from the channel list by tapping the boxes to the right of the screen. Skipped (hidden) channels will not be shown in the channel list. However, a channel previously selected as a favorite will still be displayed in the list of favorites, even it has been added to the skip list.

406 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INFOTAINMENT

Overview Pairing a cell phone There are two ways of pairing a Bluetooth device A Bluetooth®-enabled cell phone or other device to the infotainment system: can be paired and wirelessly connected to the • Searching for the phone (or other device) infotainment system. from the vehicle When a cell phone or other device is connected, • Searching for the vehicle from the phone (or audio can be streamed to the infotainment sys- other device) tem. Toggle between the devices by pressing the The following instructions assume that a cell TEL and MEDIA buttons to access the respective phone is to be paired to the infotainment system sources' functions. but the procedure is the same for any Bluetooth device. Before a Bluetooth device can be used with the infotainment system, it has to be paired Alternative 1: searching for the phone ("registered"). from the vehicle Microphone This procedure only needs to be done once for 1. Make the phone discoverable/visible using its Bluetooth function. Refer to the phone's Cell phone each device (a maximum of 20 Bluetooth devices can be paired to the system). Once a device has user guide if necessary. Center display been paired and its Bluetooth function is acti- 2. Open the Phone view on the center display. vated, it can then be selected for use (wirelessly Keypad for controlling phone functions > • If no phones have been paired to the connected) to the vehicle's infotainment system. Add phone shown in the center display and voice com- vehicle, tap . mands Two Bluetooth devices can be connected at the • If a list of phones is displayed, tap same time. However, if two cell phones are con- Change and tap Add phone in Instrument panel nected, only the most recently connected one the pop-up window. can be used as a phone. The other one can be Related information used to e.g., to stream audio or video. To change 3. Tap the name of the phone to be connected. • Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone what the phone will be used for, see the article 4. Check that the code displayed in the vehicle (p. 408) "Bluetooth settings." is the same as the one in the phone. Confirm • Handling phone calls (p. 409) in both places. A paired and connected cell phone can also be Handling text messages (p. 410) • used to connect the vehicle to the Internet. To do 5. For the phone selected, accept or cancel the • Pairing a cell phone (p. 407) so, its tethering/personal hotspot function must alternatives for the phone book (list of con- • Phone settings (p. 411) be activated. tacts), text messages, etc. Full functionality may not be available in all cell phones. • Text message settings (p. 412) }}

407 INFOTAINMENT

|| 6. To connect the vehicle to the Internet via the 7. To connect the vehicle to the Internet via the Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone's Bluetooth function, activate the phone's Bluetooth function, activate the phone phone's function for tethering/personal hot- phone's function for tethering/personal hot- Once a cell phone or other Bluetooth device has spot, etc. spot, etc. been paired to the infotainment system, it can be Alternative 2: searching for the vehicle connected, disconnected or removed from the NOTE list of available devices. from the phone 1. Open the center display's Phone view. If your cell phone's operating system is upda- Connecting automatically ted, this may break the connection between 1. Before switching on the vehicle's ignition, be • If no phones have been paired to the vehi- the phone and the vehicle. If this happens, cle, tap Add phone Make vehicle sure that the phone's Bluetooth and personal delete the phone from the list of paired hotspot (tethering) functions are activated. discoverable. phones and repeat the pairing procedure • If a phone has previously been paired to described in this article. 2. Switch on the ignition. the vehicle, tap Change and tap Add > The phone (or other device) will be con- phone Make vehicle discoverable in Compatible cell phones nected to the system and can be used the pop-up window. Many of the cell phones available today have wirelessly. 2. Activate the phone's Bluetooth function. Bluetooth functionality but not all of them are Connecting manually fully compatible with the vehicle. Go to 3. Search in the phone for Bluetooth devices. 1. Be sure that the phone's Bluetooth and per- www.volvocars.com for a list of compatible sonal hotspot (tethering) functions are acti- > A list of Bluetooth devices will be dis- phones or contact your Volvo retailer. vated. played. Related information 2. In the center display, open Phone view and 4. Select the vehicle's name in the list. • Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone tap Change phone. 5. Check that the code displayed in the phone (p. 408) > A list of available Bluetooth devices (ones is the same as the one in the vehicle. Con- • Handling phone calls (p. 409) that have already been paired to the info- firm in both places. • Handling text messages (p. 410) tainment system) will be displayed. 6. For the phone selected, accept or cancel the • Phone settings (p. 411) 3. Tap the name of the phone or other device alternatives for the phone book (list of con- Bluetooth settings (p. 423) to be connected. tacts), text messages, etc. Full functionality • > The phone (or other device) will be con- may not be available in all cell phones. nected.

408 INFOTAINMENT

Disconnecting a phone 4. Tap Remove device and confirm. Handling phone calls – Deactivate the phone's Bluetooth function. > The phone or other device is no longer Calls can be made to one or more parties. If a phone is carried out of range of the vehicle, it paired to the vehicle. Before this device will automatically be disconnected. can be used again, the pairing procedure will have to be repeated. If a call in progress when this is done, the call will be transferred from the vehicle's speakers/micro- Related information phone to the cell phone. • Pairing a cell phone (p. 407) Changing phones 1. In the center display, open Phone view. 2. Tap Change . > A list of available Bluetooth devices (ones that have already been paired to the infotainment system) will be displayed. 3. Tap the name of the phone (or other device) to be connected. Removing a phone (or other device) from the list 1. In the center display, open Phone view. 2. Tap Settings Communication Bluetooth. > A list of available Bluetooth devices (ones Making calls that have already been paired to the info- 1. In the center display, open Phone view. tainment system) will be displayed. 2. Initiate a call from: recently made calls, the 3. Tap the name of the phone to be deleted phone book (list of contacts) or enter a num- from the list. ber. Search for or scroll to a contact in the phone book. Tap in the phone book to add a contact to your list of Favorites. }}

409 INFOTAINMENT

|| 3. Tap Call or . 2. Tap End call to end a phone call. Handling text messages Text messages can be received and sent from a 4. Tap End call to end a phone call. Incoming calls while another call is in progress connected cell phone. Calls can also be made from the list of recent 1. Tap Answer/Reject. calls using the App menu, which can be opened Text message functionality has to be activated in using the right-side steering wheel keypad's 2. Tap End call to end a phone call. certain cell phones and not all phones offer full symbol. compatibility/functionality. Go to Privacy support.volvocars.com for additional information. Making multiple calls While a call is in progress: While a call is in progress: Reading text messages in the center – Tap Privacy. display 1. Tap Add call. > The vehicle's integrated microphone will 2. Select from the list of recent calls or from be turned off. the phone book. • Switch to mobile phone: the hands-free 3. Tap a line in the list of recent calls or to function will be disconnected and the call will continue in the cell phone. call a contact in the phone book. • Driver focused: the microphone in the ceil- 4. Tap Swap call to toggle between calls. ing liner on the passenger's side will be 5. Tap End call to end a phone call. muted and the call will continue using vehicle's the hands-free function on the driver's Group (conference) calls side. While multiple calls are in progress: Related information 1. Tap Join calls to merge ongoing calls. • Phone (p. 406) 2. Tap End call to end a phone call. • Voice control for cell phones (p. 118) Incoming calls • Using the center display (p. 47) Information about incoming calls is displayed in • Using the center display keyboard (p. 33) the instrument panel and the center display. Han- Phone settings (p. 411) dle the calls using the right-side steering wheel • keypad or the center display. 1. Tap Answer/Reject.

410 INFOTAINMENT

Sending text messages Phone settings The following settings can be made for a paired and connected cell phone.

Cell phones – Pull down the center display's Top view and 1. From App view, tap Messages to open. tap Settings Communication Phone 2. Tap the name of the contact who sent the 1. From App view, tap Messages to open. and choose among the following settings: message. 2. • To reply to a message: tap the name of • Ringtones: select a ring tone (tones from 3. Tap Read out to have the message read the contact who sent the message and the cell phone or the vehicle can be aloud or tap the message to be displayed. then tap Answer. used). Not all cell phones are fully compatible and it may not be possible to use To create a new message: tap Create Reading new text messages in the • their ring tones in the vehicle. Go to instrument panel new +. Select the contact who will www.volvocars.com for additional informa- receive the message or enter a phone Text messages are only displayed in the instru- tion. number. ment panel if this has been selected. See the • Sort order for contacts: select sort cri- article "Text message settings" for more informa- 3. Write the message. teria for the phone book (list of contacts). tion. 4. Tap Send. To show call notifications in the head-up dis- – Press the "down" arrow in the right-side play*, see the article "Head-up display." steering wheel keypad to display the mes- Message notification Related information sage. See the article "Text message settings" for a list of possible settings. • Text message settings (p. 412) To have the message read aloud, select Bluetooth settings (p. 423) Read out using the keypad. Related information • • Text message settings (p. 412) • Phone (p. 406) • Handling phone calls (p. 409) • Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 114)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 411 INFOTAINMENT

Text message settings Connecting a Bluetooth® device Connecting a device via the The following settings can be made for text mes- Bluetooth®-enabled devices can be paired and AUX/USB socket sages received through a paired and connected connected to the infotainment system to stream External audio sources such as an iPod® or mp3 cell phone. media and in some cases connect to the Inter- player can be connected to the infotainment sys- net. tem via the AUX and USB sockets in the tunnel Text message settings console. – Pull down the center display's Top view and Many cell phones and other devices currently on tap Settings Communication Text the market offer wireless Bluetooth® technology. Messages and choose among the following Consult your Volvo retailer or go to settings: support.volvocars.com for any questions regarding a device's compatibility with the vehicle's • Notification in center display: shows text messages in the center display's sta- infotainment system. tus bar. The procedure for pairing and connecting a • Notification in driver display: shows Bluetooth®-enabled device is the same as for a text messages in the instrument panel. cell phone. See the articles "Pairing a cell phone" With this alternative active, incoming mes- and "Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone" for sages can be handled from the right-side details. steering wheel keypad. Related information Text message tone: select an audible • Pairing a cell phone (p. 407) AUX/USB sockets in the tunnel console signal for incoming text messages. • • Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone Related information (p. 408) • Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone (p. 408) • Pairing a cell phone (p. 407) • Handling text messages (p. 410)

412 INFOTAINMENT

Media player • Apps (applications) (p. 422) The media player can play audio from a CD*, • CD (media) player* (p. 414) from external media devices connected to the • Playing media through the AUX/USB sock- USB/AUX sockets or it can stream audio from ets (p. 417) an external device connected to the infotainment system through a Bluetooth connection. Video can also be viewed from devices connected to the USB socket. If the vehicle is connected to the Internet, it may also be possible to listen to web radio, audio books and to use various music services through apps.

The media player is controlled from the center display but certain functions can also be controlled from the right-side steering wheel keypad or by using voice commands.

Related information • Playing media (p. 414) • Voice control for radio and media (p. 119) • Radio (p. 397)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 413 INFOTAINMENT

CD (media) player* Playing media 2. Open the CD app in the center display's App The CD (media) player can play commercially The media player can controlled from the right- view. purchased discs as well as ones that you have side steering wheel keypad, the center display or 3. Select a track. burned yourself. See the article "Media player by using voice commands. > Playback will begin. technical data" for information about compatible file formats. The radio is also controlled from the media USB flash drive player. See the articles relating to the radio. 1. Insert the flash drive in the USB socket. Starting a media source 2. Open the USB app in the center display's App view. 3. Select a track. > Playback will begin. Mp3 player and iPod®

NOTE Use the iPod app ( not the USB app) to start playback.

Location of the CD player in the tunnel console When an iPod is the media source, the infotainment system will use a menu structure Disc slot similar to the iPod's own menu structure. Eject button 1. Connect the device. Related information 2. Start playback in the connected device. • Media player technical data (p. 419) 3. Open the iPod, USB, AUX) app in the center display's App view. > Playback will begin.

CD 1. Insert a CD.

414 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INFOTAINMENT

Bluetooth-connected device Fast forward/reverse, move within a track: press 1. Connect the device. the time axis on the center display and drag from side to side, press and hold the < > buttons 2. Activate Bluetooth in the device. under the center display or use the keypad. 3. Start playback from the connected device. Change media source: Tap a media source under 4. Open the Bluetooth app in the center dis- Recents, tap the desired app in the center display's App view. play's App view or use the keypad. > Playback will begin. Library: tap to play a track from the library. Internet media Shuffle: tap to play tracks in random order. 1. Connect the vehicle to the Internet. Similar: tap to use Gracenote to search for simi- 2. Open the app in the center display's App lar music on the USB device and create a playlist view. based on the results. The playlist can contain up > Playback will begin. to 50 tracks. Video Change device: tap to toggle between USB 1. Connect the device. devices if more than one is connected. 2. Open the USB app in the center display's Video settings App view. The following can be adjusted with the video 3. Tap the title of the video content to be player in full screen or by opening the center displayed. play's Top view and tapping Settings Video: Volume: use the buttons on the keypad or turn Primary Audio Default Language, Subtitle > Playback will begin. the control under the center display to raise or and Primary Subtitle Default Language. Controlling and changing media lower the volume. The media player can be con- Play/pause: tap the track's image, press the trolled using voice commands, symbol on the keypad or press the button under the right-side steering wheel the center display. keypad or the center display. Change tracks: tap the desired track on the center display, press the < > buttons under the center display or use the keypad.

}}

415 INFOTAINMENT

|| Play DivX® Media searches 3. Tap Search. This DivX device must be registered in order to Searches can be made for information such as > The infotainment system will search play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) artists, composers, song titles, albums, video, through all connected devices and any movies. audio books, playlists and podcasts (digital results will be displayed by category. media on the Internet). 1. Open the center display's Top view and tap Related information Settings Video DivX® VOD to get a • Media player (p. 413) registration code. • Playing media (p. 414) 2. Go to vod.divx.com for additional information • Using the center display keyboard (p. 33) and to complete the registration process. Related information • CD (media) player* (p. 414) • Media player technical data (p. 419) • Media player (p. 413) • Voice control for radio and media (p. 119) • Apps (applications) (p. 422) • Connecting a Bluetooth® device (p. 412) • Connecting a device via the AUX/USB socket (p. 412) • Gracenote (p. 418) • Connecting to the Internet (p. 421) • Media searches (p. 416) • Video (p. 419)

1. Tap . > The center display's Search view opens and the keyboard will be displayed. 2. Enter a search word/phrase.

416 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INFOTAINMENT

Playing media through the Streaming media through a Media sound settings AUX/USB sockets Bluetooth connection Sound settings for the media player can be per- An external media device, such as an iPod or an The media player is equipped with Bluetooth® sonalized. mp-3 player can be connected to the infotain- for streaming audio files from external 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top ment system. Bluetooth®-enabled devices. view. A device with rechargeable batteries can be 2. Tap Sound and select among the following: recharged when it is connected to the USB Related information socket (if the ignition is on or the engine is run- • Connecting a Bluetooth® device (p. 412) • Sound Experience*: this feature offers several ways of adapting media sound settings ning). Playing media (p. 414) • to replicate e.g., a concert hall or a recording To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is • Voice control for radio and media (p. 119) studio. These settings override any of the advisable to only store files with compatible file • Media player (p. 413) ones below that may have been adjusted. formats on it. It will take considerably longer for Tone: personal settings for bass, treble, the system to index the files on the drive if it con- • Ignition modes (p. 362) • equalizer, etc. tains anything other than compatible files. • Media player technical data (p. 419) • Balance: adjust the front/rear and left/right In addition to audio, the vehicle's media player sound settings in the passenger compart- also supports video playback when the external ment. device is connected to the USB socket. System volumes for media Certain mp-3 players have proprietary file formats that are not supported by the infotainment sys- Open the center display's Top view and tap tem. Settings Sound System Volumes: AUX Related information • : an external device (e.g., an mp3 player, an iPod, etc.) connected to the AUX socket Connecting a device via the AUX/USB • may have a different volume level than the socket (p. 412) one set for the infotainment system (e.g., for the radio). This setting enables you to adjust the AUX socket's volume. Please note that if this volume is set too high, sound quality may be affected. • Speed and Volume Compensation: the infotainment system will compensate for dis- rupting noises in the passenger compart- }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 417 INFOTAINMENT

|| ment by increasing media volume in relation Gracenote Related information to the vehicle's speed. This can be set to one Gracenote identifies artists, albums, tracks and • Infotainment system license information of several different levels. any associated images that can be displayed (p. 427) Related information during playback. • Playing media (p. 414) • Playing media (p. 414) Gracenote MusicID® is a standard for music rec- • Sound settings (p. 396) ognition. Activating/deactivating Gracenote When activated, Gracenote data will replace original data. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap Media Gracenote®. 3. Activate/deactivate Gracenote by tapping the Gracenote® box. 4. Select among the following Gracenote alternatives: • Gracenote® Online Look Up: Gracenote will search through its online database for information about the currently playing media. • Gracenote® Multiple Results: select how Gracenote data is to be displayed if there are several search results. 1: the file's original data will be used. 2: Gracenote data will be used. 3: Gracenote or original data can be selected. • None: no results will be shown.

418 INFOTAINMENT

Video Media player technical data Format File extension The media player can play video from USB-con- The following tables list compatible file formats nected devices. and other technical specifications for the media AVI .avi player. No video will be available when the vehicle is AVI (DivX) .avi, .divx moving. Video will resume playing when the vehi- Audio files ASF .asf, .wmv cle is stationary. For- File extension Codec MKV .mkv See the article "Media player technical data" for a mat list of video formats supported by the media player. MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III, Subtitles MPEG2 Layer III, Format File extension Related information MP3 Pro (mp3 • Playing media (p. 414) compatible), SubViewer .sub • Media player (p. 413) MP3 HD (mp3 compatible) SubRip .srt • Media player technical data (p. 419) AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4 SSA .ssa part III Audio), HE-AAC (aacPlus v1/v2) WMA .wma WMA8/9, WMA9/10 Pro WAV .wav LPCM FLAC .flac FLAC

Video files Format File extension MP4 .mp4, .m4v MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v

}}

419 INFOTAINMENT

|| DivX® Storing information on a USB device Internet connected vehicle DivX Certified devices have been tested for high In order for the system to read data stored on a Connecting to the Internet makes it possible to quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you USB device, the following specifications must be e.g., use certain navigation services, listen to see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play met. Any folder structures will not be shown in web radio, stream music using apps, contact a your favorite DivX movies. the center display during playback. retailer and download software.

The vehicle can connect to the Internet using Profile DivX Home Theater Max. number Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, a cell phone connected by a Video codec DivX, MPEG-4 Files 15,000 cable to the USB socket or via the integrated modem. Resolution 720x576 Folders 1,000 Audio speed (bit 4.8Mbps Folder levels 8 rate) Playlists 100 Frame per sec- 30 fps Tracks in a playlist 1,000 ond Subfolders No limit File extension .divx, .avi Max. file size 4 GB Related information • CD (media) player* (p. 414) Audio codec MP3, AC3 Subtitles XSUB Special func- Multiple subtitles, multiple tions audio, resume play Reference Meets all requirements of the DivX® Home Theater profile. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX® Home Theater. video.

420 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INFOTAINMENT

When connected, it is possible to share (tether) a Connecting to the Internet 7. If a different connection was used previously, Wi-Fi-hotspot to allow other devices to use the Connect the vehicle to the Internet using confirm the connection change. connection5. Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, by connecting a phone through > The vehicle will connect to the network. a cable to the USB socket or via the vehicle's Connection status is shown in the center dis- When a phone is connected to the vehicle, it is integrated modem. play's status bar. saved for future use. When a max. number of 50 The cell phone and the network service provider have been saved, the first one connected will be must support Internet sharing (tethering) and the deleted. To show the list of saved networks or to subscription must included data transfer. manually delete a network, tap Settings Wi-Fi Saved networks. Connect using Bluetooth See the article "Pairing a cell phone." See the article "Wi-Fi technology and security" for network connection requirements. Connect using Wi-Fi Connect using a cable-connected to the USB socket 1. Connect the phone via a cable to the USB socket in the tunnel console storage compartment. Related information 2. Activate USB tethering in the cell phone. • Connecting to the Internet (p. 421) 1. Activate tethering/personal hotspot in the 3. If a different connection was used previously, • Apps (applications) (p. 422) cell phone. confirm the connection change. • Booking service and repairs (p. 465) 2. Tap Settings in the center display's Top > The vehicle will connect to the network. view. • System updates (p. 464) Connect using the vehicle's integrated • Volvo ID (p. 29) 3. Tap Communication Wi-Fi. modem • Symbols in the center display status bar 4. Tap Wi-Fi to activate/deactivate. When the vehicle is connected using the modem, (p. 45) Volvo On Call services will use the connection. 5. Tap the name of the network to be used. • Tethering (Wi-Fi sharing) (p. 425) 6. Enter the network password.

5 This does not apply to Wi-Fi connections. }}

421 INFOTAINMENT

|| 1. Insert a personal SIM card in the holder. • Connecting a device via the AUX/USB Apps (applications) socket (p. 412) Apps (applications) are programs used to con- • Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 426) trol some of the vehicle's features and functions.

2. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 3. Tap Communication Vehicle Modem Internet. 4. Tap Vehicle modem Internet to activate/ deactivate. 5. If a different connection was used previously, confirm the connection change. 6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code. The center display's App view > The vehicle will connect to the network. Several basic apps are always available and oth- Related information ers can be downloaded. Downloadable apps • Pairing a cell phone (p. 407) include navigation services, web radio, streaming • Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone music services, retailer contact and software (p. 408) downloads.

422 INFOTAINMENT

Some apps are only available if the vehicle is Bluetooth settings operated in conjunction with any other antenna connected to the Internet. The following settings apply to a Bluetooth-con- or transmitter. – In the center display's App view, tap an app nected cell phone. Canada to start it. Bluetooth This device complies with Industry Canada Related information 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is • Internet connected vehicle (p. 420) view. subject to the following two conditions: • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps 2. Tap Communication Bluetooth and (1) this device may not cause interference, and (p. 424) select among the following settings: (2) this device must accept any interference, Changing settings in different types of apps • Previously paired devices: lists the including interference that may cause undesired (p. 46) • devices that are paired and connected to operation of the device. the vehicle. Related information • Internet connection: select to connect • Internet connected vehicle (p. 420) to the Internet using the device's Pairing a cell phone (p. 407) Bluetooth connection. • Phone (p. 406) • Add device: begin the procedure to pair • a new device. • Media player (p. 413) • Remove device: remove a paired device. • Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone (p. 408) • Allowed services for this device: select the services that the device will be used for. Bluetooth compliance United States FCC CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or

423 INFOTAINMENT

Downloading, updating and 3. Select Install to start downloading the app. It Uninstalling an app uninstalling apps will remain in the list and a new download An app being used must be closed before it can Apps can be added (downloaded), kept up-to- can be initiated if necessary. be uninstalled. date or deleted. > Download status will be indicated while it 1. Open the Remote update service app. is in progress. NOTE 2. Select Application updates to open a list A message will be displayed if a download of apps that have been installed. Downloading data may affect other services cannot be started immediately. The app that transfer data such as web radio, stream- will remain in the list and a new download 3. Find the desired app and select Uninstall to ing music, etc. If this occurs, a download in can be initiated if necessary. begin uninstalling the app. progress can be cancelled or the other serv- Cancelling (aborting) a download > When the app has been uninstalled, it will ice can be temporarily turned off. be removed from the list. – Tap Abort to cancel a download that is currently underway. Related information Apps are managed via the Only a download can be cancelled. If the installa- • Internet connected vehicle (p. 420) Remote update service in tion phase has begun, it cannot be interrupted. the center display's App view. • Media player (p. 413) System updates (p. 464) To download, update or delete Updating apps • apps, the vehicle must be con- If an app is being used while an update is in pro- nected to the Internet. gress, it will be restarted to complete the update. Downloading an app Update (install) all 1. Open the Remote update service app. 1. Open the Remote update service app. 2. Select Install all. 2. Select Explore to open a list of apps that > The update will begin. are available but which are not installed in the vehicle. Tap anywhere in a line for an app Updating certain apps to expand the list for additional information. 1. Open the Remote update service app. 2. Select Application updates to open a list of available updates. 3. Find the desired app and select Install. > The update will begin.

424 INFOTAINMENT

Internet connection troubleshooting Tethering (Wi-Fi sharing) Tap Connected devices to see a list of con- The following are factors that may affect the When the vehicle is connected to the Internet, nected devices. vehicle's Internet connection. this connection can be shared (tethered) with Related information other devices6. The amount of data being transmitted depends • Internet connected vehicle (p. 420) on the services or apps that are currently in use. The network service provider (the SIM card) must • Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 426) For example, streaming audio requires a great support tethering. • Symbols in the center display status bar deal of data to be transmitted, which requires a 1. Open the center display's Top view. (p. 45) good connection and a strong signal. • Internet connection troubleshooting (p. 425) 2. Tap Settings Communication Cell phone to the vehicle Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot. Connection speed may vary depending on the location of the cell phone in the vehicle. Move the 3. Tap Network name and assign a name to phone closer to the center display to increase the hotspot. signal strength. Be sure that there are no 4. Tap Password and create a password to be obstructing/screening objects between the used by devices trying to connect (tether) to phone and the screen. the hotspot. Cell phone to the network operator 5. Tap Frequency band and select a fre- The speed of the mobile network may vary quency that the hotspot will use to transmit depending on coverage/reception in the vehicle's data. This may not be possible in all markets. location. Reception is generally poorer in tunnels, 6. Activate/deactivate by tapping the Vehicle in mountainous areas, in deep valleys or indoors. Wi-Fi Hotspot box. Connection speed may also depend on the type of subscription that you have with the service 7. If another connection has been used previ- provider. ously, confirm the change of connections. Contact your service provider in the event of data > It is now possible for external devices to transmission problems. connect to the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot. Connection status will be indicated in a symbol in Related information the center display's status bar. • Internet connected vehicle (p. 420) • Connecting to the Internet (p. 421)

6 Does not apply for a Wi-Fi connection.

425 INFOTAINMENT

Deleting Wi-Fi networks Wi-Fi technology and security Vehicle modem settings Networks that are not used can be deleted. The following are types of networks can be con- The vehicle is equipped with a modem that can nect to. be used to connect the vehicle to the Internet. It 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top is also possible to share (tether) this connection view. It is possible to connect to the following types of via Wi-Fi. networks: 2. Wi-Fi Saved networks Tap . 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top • Frequency: 2.4 or 5 GHz7. 3. Tap Forget to remove the network. view. • Standards: 802.11 a/b/g/n. 4. Confirm the selection. 2. Communication Vehicle Modem • Security type: WPA2-AES-CCMP. Tap > The vehicle will no longer connect to the Internet and choose among the following The vehicle's Wi-Fi system is designed to man- deleted network. settings: age Wi-Fi devices in the vehicle. Deleting all networks • Vehicle modem Internet: select to use the If several devices are using a frequency at the vehicle's modem to connect to the Internet. All networks can be deleted at the same time by same time, this may result in poorer performance. returning (resetting) to factory settings. • Data usage: %s: Tap Reset to restart Related information (reset) the counter for the amount of data If this is done, all user data and settings will be Internet connected vehicle (p. 420) sent/received. reset to their default settings. • • Connecting to the Internet (p. 421) • Network Related information • Tethering (Wi-Fi sharing) (p. 425) Select • Internet connected vehicle (p. 420) carrier: select a service provider automati- • Internet connection troubleshooting (p. 425) • Connecting to the Internet (p. 421) cally or manually. Data roaming: select to allow the vehicle to connect to another network if the standard network is not available (e.g., if you are driving in another country). This could entail additional charges, consult your service provider. • SIM card PIN

7 Selecting a frequency is not possible in all markets.

426 INFOTAINMENT

Change PIN: enter max. 4 digits. Infotainment system license Dirac Live technology has been used in the Disable information development and tuning of the sound in order to PIN: Allow access to the SIM card without The following license information pertains to Vol- ensure a world-class sound experience. Dirac requiring a PIN code. vo's agreements with certain manufacturers/ Live and the D-symbol are registered trademarks of Dirac Research AB. • Send request code: this is used to down- developers. load the balance remaining on a SIM card. DivX® This is specific to your service provider. Bowers & Wilkins Related information • Internet connected vehicle (p. 420) • Connecting to the Internet (p. 421)

® ® Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks of DivX , DivX Certified and asociated logos are the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of trademarks of DivZ, LLC and are used under B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered trademark license. och associerade logotyper är varumärken of DuPont. som tillhör Rovi Corporation eller dess dotterbo- lag och används på licens. Dirac Live Patent number Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274

}}

427 INFOTAINMENT

|| Gracenote® agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Grace- Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to note Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Grace- any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR note reserves the right to delete data from the EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACE- Gracenote Servers or to change data categories NOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that func- You agree that your non-exclusive license to use tioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate obligated to provide you with new enhanced or these restrictions. If your license terminates, you additional data types or categories that Grace- agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Gracenote, Gracenote logo and logotype, note may provide in the future and is free to dis- Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote "Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID continue its services at any time. Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Grace- are either registered trademarks or trademarks of note Data, the Gracenote Software, and the GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES Gracenote, Inc in the United States and/or other Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT countries. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER- Gracenote® End User License Agreement liable for any payment to you for any information CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR This application or device contains software from that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Grace- may enforce its rights under this Agreement GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE note”). The software from Gracenote (the “Grace- against you directly in its own name. RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR note Software”) enables this application to per- The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL form disc and/or file identification and obtain track queries for statistical purposes. The pur- GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSE- music-related information, including name, artist, pose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is QUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) to allow the Gracenote service to count queries FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES. from online servers or embedded databases (col- without knowing anything about who you are. For lectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform more information, see the web page for the © Gracenote, Inc. 2009 other functions. You may use Gracenote Data Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote serv- only by means of the intended End-User func- ice. Sensus software tions of this application or device. The Gracenote Software and each item of Grace- This software uses parts of sources from clib2 You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the note Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for makes no representations or warranties, express (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994), your own personal non-commercial use only. You and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990,

428 INFOTAINMENT

1993), The Regents of the University of SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in California. All or some portions are derived from USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS all copies or substantial portions of the Software. material licensed to the University of California by INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT herein with the permission of UNIX System (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A source and binary forms, with or without THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND modification, are permitted provided that the POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL following conditions are met: Redistributions of SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY This software is based in part on the work of the source code must retain the above copyright CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, Independent JPEG Group. notice, this list of conditions and the following WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must This software uses parts of sources from TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE conditions and the following disclaimer in the Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE documentation and/or other materials provided 26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, with the distribution. Neither the name of the Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be nor the names of its Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created used in advertising or otherwise to promote the contributors may be used to endorse or promote by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. sale, use or other dealings in this Software products derived from this software without All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] without prior written authorization from Silicon specific prior written permission. THIS Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Graphics, Inc. SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to This software is based in parts on the work of the HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND any person obtaining a copy of this software and FreeType Team. ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, associated documentation files (the "Software"), INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE to deal in the Software without restriction, This software uses parts of SSLeay Library: IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY including without limitation the rights to use, Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, ([email protected]). All rights reserved ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, Linux software COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE and to permit persons to whom the Software is LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, furnished to do so, subject to the following This product contains software licensed under INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR conditions: The above copyright notice including GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, the dates of first publication and either this Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc. BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF permission notice or a reference to http:// }}

429 INFOTAINMENT

|| You have the right of acquisition, modification, of conditions and the following disclaimer in "Data Files") or Unicode software and any and distribution of the source code of the GPL/ the documentation and/or other materials associated documentation (the "Software") to LGPL software. provided with the distribution. deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights You may download Source Code from the THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, following website at no charge: http:// IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/ WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or download/TVM_8351_013 TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) The website provides the Source Code "As Is" PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN the above copyright notice(s) and this permission and without warranty of any kind. NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or By downloading Source Code, you expressly DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) assume all risk and liability associated with EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES and this permission notice appear in associated downloading and using the Source Code and (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in complying with the user agreements that PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR each modified Data File or in the Software as accompany each Source Code. SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; well as in the documentation associated with the OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER Data File(s) or Software that the data or software Please note that we cannot respond to any CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, has been modified. inquiries regarding the source code. WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE camellia:1.2.0 OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF Copyright (c) 2006, 2007 OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A Corporation). All rights reserved. DAMAGE. PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND Redistribution and use in source and binary Unicode: 5.1.0 NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY forms, with or without modification, are permitted RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE provided that the following conditions are met: COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights 1. Redistributions of source code must retain INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR the above copyright notice, this list of reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR conditions and the following disclaimer as http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY the first lines of this file unmodified. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER 2. Redistributions in binary form must any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE reproduce the above copyright notice, this list files and any associated documentation (the

430 INFOTAINMENT

OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT Terms, conditions and OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR confidentiality PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR See terms and conditions for services and cus- SOFTWARE. tomer privacy policy at support.volvocars.com. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a Terms & Conditions for Services copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other Volvo offers the best possible services to make dealings in these Data Files or Software without owning and operating a Volvo safe, convenient, prior written authorization of the copyright holder. comfortable and enjoyable. Volvo offers a wide array of services, ranging from emergency assis- Bluetooth® declaration of conformity tance to navigation and infotainment. United States Customer privacy policy FCC CAUTION This policy applies to the way in which customer- Changes or modifications not expressly approved related and personal information are handled. Its by the party responsible for compliance could purpose is to provide our present, previous and void the user's authority to operate the equip- future customers a general understanding of: ment. This transmitter must not be co-located or • The circumstances under which we gather operated in conjunction with any other antenna and process your personal information. or transmitter. • The types of personal information gathered. Canada • The reasons for gathering your personal This device complies with Industry Canada information. licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is • How we deal with your personal information. subject to the following two conditions: (1) this This policy can be read in its entirety at device may not cause interference, and (2) this support.volvocars.com. device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

431

WHEELS AND TIRES WHEELS AND TIRES

Tires road holding on icy or snow-covered roads, we Tire age Your vehicle is equipped with tires according to recommend suitable winter tires on all four Tires degrade over time, even when they are not the vehicle's tire information placard on the B- wheels. being used. It is recommended that tires gener- pillar (the structural member at the side of the When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires ally be replaced after 6 years of normal service. vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). are the same size designation, type (radial) and Heat caused by hot climates, frequent high load- preferably from the same manufacturer, on all ing conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.) exposure can CAUTION four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering accelerate the aging process. The temporary spare1 should also be replaced at 6-year inter- Some Volvo models are equipped with an the car's roadholding and handling characteris- vals, even if it has never been used. A tire's age Ultra High Performance tire and wheel com- tics. can be determined by the DOT stamp on the bination designed to provide maximum dry New tires sidewall (see the illustration). A tire with e.g., visi- pavement performance with consideration for ble cracks or discoloration should be replaced hydroplaning resistance. They may be more immediately. susceptible to road hazard damage and, depending on driving conditions, may achieve Tire economy a tread life of less than 20,000 miles (30,000 • Maintain correct tire pressure. km). Even if this vehicle is equipped with Avoid fast starts, hard braking and tire Volvo’s advanced AWD or stability system, • screeching. these tires are not designed for winter driving, and should be replaced with winter tires when • Tire wear increases with speed. weather conditions dictate. • Correct front wheel alignment is very important. The tires have good road holding characteristics • Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy and and offer good handling on dry and wet surfaces. driving comfort. It should be noted however that the tires have Remember that tires are perishable goods. As of • Tires must maintain the same direction of been developed to give these features on snow/ 2000, the manufacturing week and year (Depart- rotation throughout their lifetime. ment of Transportation (DOT) stamp) will be indi- ice-free surfaces. • When replacing tires, the tires with the most cated with 4 digits (e.g., 0715 means that the tire Most models are equipped with "all-season" tires, tread should be mounted on the rear wheels illustrated was manufactured during week 7 of which provide a somewhat higher degree of road 2015). holding on slippery surfaces than tires without the "all-season" rating. However, for optimum

1 Not available in all models.

434 WHEELS AND TIRES

to reduce the chance of oversteer during Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on Tire sidewall designations hard braking. their sides or standing upright, but should not be The following information can be found on a • Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the suspended. tire's sidewall. tires and/or wheels permanently. CAUTION Tire rotation Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire Tires should preferably be stored in a cool, wear is affected by a number of factors such as dry, dark place, and should never be stored in tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving style, close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils, etc. etc. WARNING NOTE • The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo • If the tires are rotated, they should only are specified to meet stringent stability be moved from front to rear or vice versa. and handling requirements. Unapproved They should never be rotated left to wheel/tire size combinations can nega- right/right to left. tively affect your vehicle's stability and • Ideally, tire rotation should be done the handling. Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers first time after approximately 3,000 miles • Any damage caused by installation of place standardized information on the sidewall of (5,000 km) and thereafter at 6,000-mile unapproved wheel/tire size combinations all tires (see the illustration). (10,000-km) intervals. Some customers will not be covered by your new vehicle The vehicle has been certified with certain combi- find that tire rotation may help to get warranty. Volvo assumes no responsibility nations of wheels and tires. extra mileage from tire life. for death, injury, or expenses that may • Tire rotation should only be performed if result from such installations. The following information is listed on the tire front/rear tire wear is fairly even and sidewall: tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm). Related information The tire designation: • Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 441) Storing wheels and tires • Tread wear indicator (p. 439) When storing complete wheels (tires mounted on rims), they should be suspended off the floor or placed on their sides on the floor.

}}

435 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| NOTE NOTE 10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be Please be aware that the following tire desig- The tire's load index and speed rating may carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire nation is an example only and that this par- not appear on the sidewall because they are information placard located on the B-Pillar ticular tire may not be available on your vehi- not required by law. for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle. cle. 11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature 7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All Ter- grades. 1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters) rain, AS = All Season 12. Maximum permissible inflation from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The 8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number pressure: the greatest amount of air pres- larger the number, the wider the tire. (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" and sure that should ever be put in the tire. This 2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width indicates that the tire meets all federal limit is set by the tire manufacturer. in percent. standards. The next two numbers or letters Speed Symbol 3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the are the plant code where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and A tire's Speed Symbol (SS) indicates the maxi- symbol indicate that the vehicle is the last four numbers represent the week mum speed for which the tire has been certified equipped with optional self-supporting run and should be at least equivalent to the vehicle's 2 and year the tire was built. For example, flat tires . 1510 means that the tire was manufactured top speed. 4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in during week 15 of 2010. The numbers in Winter tires, with our without studs, are excep- inches). between are marketing codes used at the tions and may use a lower SS. When winter tires 5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a manufacturer's discretion. This information are installed, the vehicle may not be driven faster load index of 95 equals a maximum load of helps a tire manufacturer identify a tire for than the tires' SS. 1521 lbs (690 kg). safety recall purposes. The vehicle's speed should always be determined 9. Tire Ply Composition and Material 6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum by the posted speed limit and traffic and road Used: Indicates the number of plies indi- speed at which the tire is designed to be conditions, not the tire's SS. driven for extended periods of time, carrying cates or the number of layers of rubber- a permissible load for the vehicle, and with coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. The following table indicates the maximum per- correct inflation pressure. For example, H Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply missible speed for each SS. indicates a speed rating of 130 mph materials in the tire and the sidewall, which (210 km/h). include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

2 Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models

436 WHEELS AND TIRES

Speed Symbol Wheel (rim) designations Tire terminology Wheel and rim dimensions are shown in the fol- The following is a glossary of tire-related terms. M 81 mph (130 km/h) lowing table. The tire suppliers may have additional markings, Q 100 mph (160 km/h) The vehicle has been certified with certain combi- notes or warnings such as standard load, radial T 118 mph (190 km/h) nations of wheels and tires. tubeless, etc. The following table shows an example of wheel Tire information placard: A placard show- H 130 mph (210 km/h) • dimensions: 8Jx18x42.5. This wheel may not be ing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes, V 149 mph (240 km/h) available on your vehicle. recommended inflation pressure, and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry. W 168 mph (270 km/h) 8 Wheel width in inches • Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number Y 186 mph (300 km/h) on the sidewall of each tire providing infor- J Rim flange profile mation about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacturer. WARNING 18 Wheel diameter in inches • Inflation pressure: A measure of the • The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo 42.5 Offset in mm (distance from the center amount of air in a tire. of the wheel to the wheel's contact sur- are specified to meet stringent stability Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric face on the hub) • and handling requirements. Unapproved tires designed to carry a maximum load at wheel/tire size combinations can nega- 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. tively affect your vehicle's stability and Related information Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this handling. • Tire sidewall designations (p. 435) pressure will not increase the tires load car- • Any damage caused by installation of rying capability. unapproved wheel/tire size combinations • Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric will not be covered by your new vehicle tires designed to carry a heavier maximum warranty. Volvo assumes no responsibility load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric for death, injury, or expenses that may tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure result from such installations. beyond this pressure will not increase the tire's load carrying capability. • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure. • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.

}}

437 WHEELS AND TIRES

• B-pillar: The structural member at the side Tire direction of rotation Related information of the vehicle behind the front door. Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's braking • Tires (p. 434) • Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next properties and ability to force aside rain, snow to the rim. and slush. • Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread. • Tread area of the tire: Area of the perime- ter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle. • Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. • Maximum load rating: a figure indicating the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. This rating is established by the tire manufacturer. • Maximum permissible inflation pressure: The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the tire the greatest amount of air pressure that • The tires with the most tread should always should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set be on the rear axle (to help reduce the risk of by the tire manufacturer. skidding). • Recommended tire inflation pressure: • When switching between summer and winter inflation pressure, established by Volvo, tires, mark the tires to indicate where they which is based on the type of tires that are were mounted on the car, e.g., LF = left front, mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This RR = right rear information can be found on the tire inflation placard(s) located on the driver's side B-pillar • Tires with tread designed to roll in only one and in the tire inflation table in this chapter. direction are marked with an arrow on the sidewall. • Cold tires: The tires are considered to be cold when they have the same temperature • Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem- technician if you are unsure about the tread perature is normally reached after the vehicle depth. has been parked for at least 3 hours.

438 WHEELS AND TIRES

Tread wear indicator Loading specifications Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit The tires have wear indicator strips running Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi- 1. Locate the statement "the combined weight across or parallel to the tread. mum return of vehicle design performance. of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's plac- Weight designations ard. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver with the following terms for determining your and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer, vehicle. from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian Motor Vehi- 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver cle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label, and and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. the vehicle's tire information placard: 4. The resulting figure equals the available Curb weight amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. The weight of the vehicle including a full tank of For example, if the "XXX" amount equals fuel and all standard equipment. It does not 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. pas- include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment. sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa- The letters TWI are printed on the side of the tire. Capacity weight ble cargo and luggage load capacity is When approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on All weight added to the curb weight, including 650 lbs. (1400 – 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.) the tread, these strips become visible and indi- cargo and optional equipment. When towing, 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage cate that the tire should be replaced. Tires with trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor weight. weight may not safely exceed the available traction. Permissible axle weight cargo and luggage load capacity calculated When replacing worn tires, it is recommended The maximum allowable weight that can be car- in Step 4. that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size ried by a single axle (front or rear). These num- 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the bers are shown on the Federal/Canadian Motor from your trailer will be transferred to your same make (manufacturer) will help prevent Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label. vehicle. Consult this manual to determine alteration of the driving characteristics of the The total load on each axle must never exceed its how this reduces the available cargo and lug- vehicle. maximum permissible weight. gage load capacity of your vehicle. Gross vehicle weight (GVW) Related information The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passengers. • Tire direction of rotation (p. 438) • Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 441) }}

439 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| WARNING Uniform Tire Quality Grading (straight-ahead) traction tests and is not a meas- ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST ure of cornering (turning) traction. Exceeding the permissible axle weight, • CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY REQUIRE- gross vehicle weight, or any other weight MENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE GRADES. WARNING rating limits can cause tire overheating resulting in permanent deformation or Quality grades can be found, where applica- The traction grade assigned to this tire is catastrophic failure. ble, on the tire sidewall between the tread based on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is not a measure of cornering (turn- • Do not use replacement tires with lower shoulder and maximum section width. For ing) traction. load carrying capacities than the tires that example: were original equipment on the vehicle Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A because this will lower the vehicle's GVW TEMPERATURE rating. Use only tires with the correct load TREADWEAR The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, carrying capacity. Consult your Volvo and C, representing the tire's resistance to the The treadwear grade is a comparative rating retailer for information. generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat based on the wear rate of the tire when tested when tested under controlled conditions on a under controlled conditions on a specified gov- specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained Related information ernment test course. For example, a tire graded high temperature can cause the material of the • Label information (p. 508) 150 would wear one and one half (1 ½) times as tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces- well on the government course as a tire graded • Weights (p. 513) sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. 100. The relative performance of tires depends The grade C corresponds to a minimum level of upon the actual conditions of their use, however, performance that all passenger vehicle tires must and many depart significantly from the norm due meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard to variation in driving habits, maintenance practi- No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ces and differences in road characteristics and of performance on the laboratory test wheel than climate. the minimum required by law. TRACTION The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are WARNING AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled The temperature grade for this tire is estab- conditions on specified government test surfaces lished for a tire that is properly inflated and of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-infla- have poor traction performance. The traction tion, or excessive loading, either separately or grade assigned to this tire is based on braking in combination, can cause heat buildup and tire failure.

440 WHEELS AND TIRES

Snow tires and chains CAUTION Checking tire inflation pressure The use of snow chains and/or winter tires can Correct tire inflation pressure helps improve driv- Snow chains should not be used on help improve traction in winter driving conditions. • ing stability, save fuel and increase the service wheels larger than 19". life of the tires. Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with the • Always follow the chain manufacturer's following restrictions: installation instructions carefully. Install WARNING chains as tightly as possible and Snow chains should be installed on front • retighten periodically. • Under-inflation is the most common wheels only. Use only Volvo approved snow cause of tire failure and may result in Check local regulations regarding the use chains. • severe tire cracking, tread separation, or of snow chains before installing. • If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires "blow-out," with unexpected loss of vehi- and wheels are installed and are of a size dif- • Use single-sided snow chains only. cle control and increased risk of injury. ferent than the original tires and wheels, • Never exceed the chain manufacturer's • Under-inflated tires reduce the load car- chains in some cases CANNOT be used. specified maximum speed limit. (Under rying capacity of your vehicle. Sufficient clearances between chains and no circumstances should you exceed brakes, suspension and body components 31 mph (50 km/h). must be maintained. Cold tires • Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns when Inflation pressure should be checked when the • Some strap-on type chains will interfere with driving with snow chains. brake components and therefore CANNOT tires are cold. The handling of the vehicle can be be used. • The tires are considered to be cold when adversely affected when driving with • All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well they have the same temperature as the sur- should only be installed on the front wheels. as locked wheel braking. rounding (ambient) air. • Certain size tires may not allow the assembly This temperature is normally reached after the of snow chains/traction devices. vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours. Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile chain information. (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If you have to drive farther than this distance to pump your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump. When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree }}

441 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| temperature drop causes a corresponding drop of the factory-mounted tires on your vehicle, as 2. Add air to reach the recommended air pres- of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your well as load limits and inflation pressure. sure. tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the 3. Replace the valve cap. proper pressure, which can be found on the vehi- NOTE cle's tire information placard or certification label. • The placard shown indicates inflation CAUTION If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, pressure for the tires installed on the After inflating the tires, always reinstall the never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires vehicle at the factory only. • are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures valve cap to help avoid damage to the • A certain amount of air seepage from the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. to increase above recommended cold pressures. tires occurs naturally and tire pressure Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation fluctuates with seasonal changes in tem- • could corrode and become difficult to pressure could be significantly under-inflated. perature. Always check tire pressure reg- remove. ularly. Recommended inflation pressures 4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation • are no nails or other objects embedded that pressure, including the spare3, at least once could puncture the tire and cause an air leak. a month and before long trips. You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure 5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are gauge, as automatic service station gauges no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregulari- may be inaccurate. ties. • Use the recommended cold inflation pres- 6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including sure for optimum tire performance and wear. the spare. • Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns. NOTE Checking tire pressure Tire inflation placard If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, on the metal stem in the center of the valve. A tire inflation pressure placard is located on the then firmly press the tire gauge onto the Then recheck the pressure with your tire driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the valve. gauge. side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). This placard indicates the designation

3 Not available in all models.

442 WHEELS AND TIRES

Changing tires Tools in the cargo compartment Jack Tools for e.g., changing wheels, etc. are located The jack is used to raise the vehicle, for example When changing wheels to another dimension, under the cargo compartment floor. when mounting winter wheels, etc. always follow Volvo's instructions. WARNING When changing to tires of another The jack must correctly engage the jack dimension • attachment. If you mount tires with a dimension other than the factory-installed tires, contact an authorized • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non- Volvo retailer to update the vehicle's software. slippery surface. This may also be necessary when changing from • Never allow any part of your body to be summer to winter tires, or vice versa. extended under a vehicle supported by a jack. Related information • Use the jack intended for the vehicle • Snow tires and chains (p. 441) when changing a tire. For any other job, • Installing a wheel (p. 446) use stands to support the vehicle. • Removing a wheel (p. 444) • Apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in the Park (P) position. • Block the wheels standing on the ground, use rigid wooden blocks or large stones. • The jack should be kept well-greased and clean, and should not be damaged. • No objects should be placed between the base of jack and the ground, or between the jack and the attachment bar on the vehicle.

}}

443 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| CAUTION Wheel bolts Removing a wheel The wheel bolts hold the wheel in place. Wheel changes should always be carried out When not in use, the jack* should be kept • correctly. in its storage compartment under the CAUTION cargo compartment floor. 1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers if the • The jack provided with your vehicle is Wheel bolts should be tightened to 103 ft. wheel change has to be done near passing intended to be used only in temporary sit- lbs. (140 Nm). Over-tightening could damage traffic. uations such as changing wheels in the the threads. 2. Apply the parking brake and put the gear event of a flat tire. Only the jack that selector in P. came with your particular model should Only use wheels/rims that have been tested and be used to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle approved by Volvo and are included in Volvo's CAUTION needs to be lifted more frequently or for a product range. Use a torque wrench to check prolonged period, using a garage jack or that the wheel bolts are tightened correctly. Models with suspension and level con- hoist is recommended. Always follow this trol*: device’s instructions for use. Locking wheel bolts* A tool for removing locking wheel bolts can be Turn this function off before raising the vehicle. Models with leveling control* found in the foam block under the cargo com- If the vehicle is equipped with the optional pneu- partment floor. To do so, go to Settings Vehicle matic suspension, this feature must be turned off Related information Deactivate Suspension & Leveling Control before raising the vehicle with the jack. in the center display's Top view. • Changing tires (p. 443) To do so, go to Settings Vehicle • Installing a wheel (p. 446) Deactivate Suspension & Leveling Control in the center display's Top view.

444 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. WHEELS AND TIRES

WARNING NOTE 5. • The jack must correctly engage the jack The jack provided with your vehicle is attachment. intended to be used only in temporary situa- • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non- tions such as changing wheels in the event of slippery surface. a flat tire. Only the jack that came with your particular model should be used to lift the • Never allow any part of your body to be extended under a vehicle supported by a vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be lifted more jack. frequently or for a prolonged period, using a garage jack or hoist is recommended. Always • Use the jack intended for the vehicle when follow this device’s instructions for use. changing a tire. For any other job, use Lug wrench and towing eyelet stands to support the vehicle. 3. Screw the towing eyelet into the lug wrench Apply the parking brake and put the gear Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the tool for • as shown in the illustration. selector in the Park (P) position. removing the plastic covers on the wheel bolts and the towing eyelet stowed under the • Block the wheels standing on the ground, floor of the cargo compartment. CAUTION use rigid wooden blocks or large stones. • The jack should be kept well-greased and The towing eyelet must be screwed into the clean, and should not be damaged. lug wrench as far as possible. • No objects should be placed between the base of jack and the ground, or between 6. With the vehicle still on the ground, use the the jack and the attachment bar on the lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen the vehicle. wheel bolts ½ – 1 turn by exerting downward (counterclockwise) pressure.

Tool for removing the plastic covers on the wheel bolts

Remove the plastic covers on the wheel bolts. 4. Block the wheels that are on the ground with wooden blocks or large stones.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 445 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| 7. When hoisting the vehicle, it is essential that Installing a wheel CAUTION the jack (or garage lift arms) are positioned It is important to install wheels properly. correctly on the underside of the vehicle. • After inflating the tires, always reinstall There are two jack attachment points on 1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel and the valve cap to help avoid damage to the each side of the vehicle and there is a groove hub. valve from dirt, gravel, etc. Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps in the plastic cover at each attachment point. 2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub. • Position the jack under the attachment point could corrode and become difficult to to be used on a level, firm, non-slippery sur- remove. face and crank it up until it is correctly aligned and seated in the attachment point. Related information The pin on the jack's head must be posi- • Wheel bolts (p. 444) tioned in the hole in the attachment point. • Jack (p. 443)

3. Install the wheel bolts and tighten hand-tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten crosswise until all bolts are snug. 4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alternately tighten the bolts crosswise to 8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be 103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm). changed is lifted off the ground. Remove the 5. Press the plastic covers onto the wheel bolts. wheel bolts. Related information • Wheel bolts (p. 444) • Installing a wheel (p. 446) • Jack (p. 443)

446 WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire Pressure Monitoring System of a different size than the size indicated on the start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When (TPMS) vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- TPMS provides a warning if inflation pressure in should determine the proper tire inflation pres- tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire one or more tires is too low. It also uses a sym- sure for those tires.) pressure as intended. bol (called a telltale) that will flash for As an added safety feature, your vehicle has TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of 60 seconds and then glow steadily if there is a been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring reasons, including the installation of replacement system malfunction. system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that sure telltale when one or more of your tires is prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. TPMS uses sensors mounted in the tire valves to significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after check inflation pressure levels. When the vehicle low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should replacing one or more tires or wheels on your is moving at a speed of approximately 20 mph stop and check your tires as soon as possible, vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter- (30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit infla- and inflate them to the proper pressure. nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to con- tion pressure data to a receiver located in the tinue to function properly. vehicle. If inflation pressure is too low, an indica- Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire cau- tor symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel ses the tire to overheat and can lead to tire fail- Messages in the instrument panel and a text message will be displayed. ure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency When the TPMS symbol illuminates, the following and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's text messages may also be displayed: handling and stopping ability. Please note that Symbol Explanation Tire pressure low: the tire(s) affected will the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire main- • also be specified. The symbol illuminates to indicate tenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to low tire inflation pressure. maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-infla- • Tire needs air now: the tire(s) affected will also be specified. If a malfunction occurs in the sys- tion has not reached the level to trigger illumina- tem, the tire pressure warning sym- tion of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. • Tire pressure system Service required. bol will flash for approximately Your vehicle has also been equipped with a If TPMS cannot determine which tire(s) have low 1 minute and then remain illumi- TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the inflation pressure, general messages may be dis- nated. system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal- played, such as: function indicator is combined with the low tire • Tire pressure low Check tires Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should pressure telltale. • Tire needs air now Check tires be checked monthly when cold and inflated to When the system detects a malfunction, the tell- the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi- tale will flash for approximately one minute and TPMS sensors can be installed on the valve hole cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire then remain continuously illuminated. This area, on the factory-installed wheels as well as on inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle optional ones. }}

447 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| If a spare wheel or other wheel without a TPMS WARNING Checking inflation pressure sensor is used, a fault message will appear in the The Tire Pressure Monitoring System makes it instrument panel after driving for a few minutes. Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of the possible to view the current inflation pressure of After changing wheels, always check that the vehicle. all four tires. new wheels have TPMS sensors to avoid a sys- Checking inflation pressure tem malfunction warning. 4 Turning TPMS off Open the Car status app in TPMS does not replace the need for regular tire TPMS can be turned off in the center display's the center display's Application inspection and maintenance. Top view. view. Tap Status to see the current inflation pressure of all Recommendations 1. Park the vehicle and turn off the engine. four tires. TPMS sensors should be mounted on all wheels 2. Activate ignition mode I. used with the vehicle, including winter wheels. 3. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe The on-screen graphic displays the inflation pres- NOTE Tire Pressure Monitor in the Top view sure. and deselect (tap) the button. • If you change to tires with a different dimension than the factory-installed ones, > The function will remain off until it is reac- the TPMS system must be reconfigured tivated. for these tires. This must be done by a Related information trained and qualified Volvo service techni- Checking inflation pressure (p. 448) cian. • Reinflating tires equipped with the Tire If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sensor • • Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is moved to another wheel, the rubber (p. 449) valve and valve core should be replaced. Tire Pressure Monitoring System type appro- When installing TPMS sensors, the vehi- • • val (p. 451) cle must be parked for at least 15 minutes with the ignition off. If the • Ignition modes (p. 362) vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a The illustration is generic and may vary from model to TPMS error message will be displayed. model or after a software update

4 Certain markets only.

448 WHEELS AND TIRES

Color indications: Related information Reinflating tires equipped with the Calibrating the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tire Pressure Monitoring System • No color indicator: tire pressure is above • the threshold for a low inflation pressure System (TPMS) (p. 450) (TPMS) warning. • Reinflating tires equipped with the Tire When low tire pressure has been detected, a • Yellow: low tire pressure. Stop and check/ Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) message will be displayed in the instrument reinflate the tire(s) as soon as possible. (p. 449) panel and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System symbol will illuminate. • Red: inflation pressure is very low. Stop • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) immediately and check/reinflate the tire(s). (p. 447) Symbol Explanation • When no tire pressure values or updated tire pressure values are shown then system has Check and reinflate the tire(s) not learned the tire pressure values. It might when the TPMS symbol illuminates be necessary to drive at a speed of at least and a message is displayed. 20 mph (30 km/h) for several minutes. • If the TPMS symbol (telltale) flashes for 1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the infla- approx. 1 minute then glows steadily, and the tion pressure of the under-inflated tire(s). message Tire pressure system Service required is displayed: this indicates that the 2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure system is not functioning correctly. Have it (consult the tire pressure placard located on checked by a trained and qualified Volvo the driver's side B-pillar (the structural mem- service technician. ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). Please note that the sample tire pressures shown in the illustration are in bar. The unit of 3. In some cases, it may be necessary to drive measure can be changed (e.g., to pound per the vehicle for several minutes at a speed of scare inch (psi) in the center display's Settings at least 20 mph (30 km/h) to erase the menu, under System Units Tire Pressure. TPMS telltale warning and the text message. Please be aware that the TPMS telltale Tire Pressure Monitoring System settings warning will not go out until the low tire pres- The unit of measure for tire inflation pressure can sure has been corrected. be changed in the center display's Top view by selecting Settings System Units Tire Pressure and tapping the desired unit.

}}

449 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| NOTE WARNING Calibrating the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)6 To help avoid incorrect tire inflation pressure, • Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to if possible only inflate the tires when they are tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of In certain situations, a text pertaining to calibra- cold. The tires are considered to be cold the vehicle. tion requirements may appear in the center display. This text is generic and does not apply when they have the same temperature as the Tire monitoring systems cannot indicate • to North American models. surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is sudden tire damage caused by external normally reached after the vehicle has been factors (e.g., a blowout) in advance. parked for at least 3 hours. After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be warm. Related information • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (p. 447) CAUTION • Checking inflation pressure (p. 448) When inflating tires with TPMS sensors, press the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the valve to help avoid bending or otherwise damaging the valve.

CAUTION • After inflating the tires, always reinstall the valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps could corrode and become difficult to remove.

6 Certain markets only.

450 WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire Pressure Monitoring System WARNING Tire sealing system type approval The vehicle is equipped with a tire sealing sys- Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compli- tem that enables you to temporarily seal a hole in NOTE ance could void the user's authority to oper- the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire, or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure. USA ate the equipment. The term “IC:” before the radio certification number only signifies that FCC ID: MRXVHSS4 Industry Canada technical specifications were met. Canada IC:2546A-VHSS4 M :VHSS4 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with licence exempt RSS standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful inter- Location in the cargo compartment (generic illustration) ference, and Introduction (2) this device must accept any interference The tire sealing system consists of an air com- received, including interference that may pressor, a container for the sealing compound, cause undesired operation. wiring to connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a hose used to connect the system to the tire’s inflation valve.

NOTE The tire sealing system's compressor has been tested and approved by Volvo.

}}

451 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| The 12-volt sockets are located in the front tun- WARNING NOTE nel console, on the rear side of the center console in the rear seat and in the cargo area*. • After using the tire sealing system, the • After use, the sealing compound bottle, vehicle should not be driven farther than the hose, and certain other system com- Accessing the tire sealing system approximately 120 miles (200 km). ponents must be replaced. Please con- The tire sealing system is stowed under the floor • Have the tire inspected by a trained and sult your Volvo retailer for replacement of the cargo area. To access it: qualified Volvo service technician as soon parts. 1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area. as possible to determine if it can be per- • If the sealing compound bottle’s expira- manently repaired or must be replaced. tion date has passed, please take it to a 2. Lift out the tire sealing system. • The vehicle should not be driven faster Volvo retailer or a recycling station that than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire can properly dispose of harmful sub- NOTE that has been temporarily repaired with stances. • The tire sealing system is only intended the tire sealing system. to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not • After using the tire sealing system, drive the sidewall. carefully and avoid abrupt steering • Tires with large holes or tears cannot be maneuvers and sudden stops. repaired with the tire sealing system. • After use, stow the tire sealing system Sealing compound container properly to help prevent rattling. The sealing compound container must be replaced if the tire sealing system has been used to repair a tire or if the container’s expiration date has passed (see the date on decal).

452 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. WHEELS AND TIRES

WARNING • Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting Using the tire sealing system unless directed to do so by medical per- Please keep the following points in mind sonnel. Get medical attention. Overview when using the tire sealing system: • Disposal: Dispose of this material and its • The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in the container to a hazardous or special waste illustration) contains 1) rubber latex, natu- collection point. ral and 2) ethanediol. These substances are harmful if swallowed. Related information • The contents of this bottle may cause • Inflating a tire with the tire sealing system allergic skin reactions or otherwise be compressor (p. 457) potentially harmful to the respiratory tract, the skin, the central nervous system, and • Using the tire sealing system (p. 453) the eyes. Precautions: • Keep out of reach of children. • Do not ingest the contents. Electrical wire • Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with Hose the skin. • Wash thoroughly after handling. Air release valve First aid: Protective hose cover Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with • Bottle holder (orange cover) soap and water. Get medical attention if symptoms occur. Air pressure gauge • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting the upper Speed limit sticker (on the rear side of the and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if compressor) symptoms occur. Bottle with sealing compound • Inhalation: Move the exposed person to fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical On/Off switch attention.

}}

453 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| Connecting NOTE 7. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest 12-volt socket in the vehicle. Do not break the seal on the bottle. This occurs automatically when the bottle is NOTE screwed into the holder. Be sure that none of the other 12-volt sockets is being used while the compressor is in WARNING operation. Contact with the sealing compound may cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash the affected area immediately with soap and water.

4. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle 1. Activate the vehicle's hazard warning flashers holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle of if the tire sealing system is to be used in an sealing compound. area with traffic. 5. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder. If the flat tire was caused by a nail, etc., do not remove it from the tire. It will help to seal WARNING the hole. The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep it 2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it to securely in place and help prevent sealing the steering wheel hub where it will be compound leakage. Once in place, the bottle clearly visible to the driver. The vehicle should cannot be unscrewed. This must be done by a not be driven faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) trained and qualified Volvo service technician. while using a tire that has been temporarily repaired with the tire sealing system. 6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve and screw the tire sealing system’s 3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position 0 hose connector onto the valve as tightly as and take out the electrical wire and hose. possible by hand.

454 WHEELS AND TIRES

8. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor by 10. Switch off the compressor and check the 13. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi- pressing the on/off switch to position I. inflation pressure on the air pressure gauge. mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed Inflation pressure should be between of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal- WARNING 22—51 psi (1.8—3.5 bar). Use the air ing compound in the tire. During the tire's release valve to release some air from the first revolution, some sealing compound may • Never stand next to the tire being inflated tire if necessary. spray out of the puncture hole. when the compressor is in operation. • If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire, WARNING WARNING switch off the compressor immediately. If the pressure remains below 22 psi (1.8 bar) No one should stand closer to the vehicle • If there is visible damage to the sidewall or after approximately seven minutes, turn off than approx. 7 ft (2 m) when it drives away to the rim, the tire cannot be repaired. The the compressor. In this case, the hole is too help avoid being sprayed with sealing com- vehicle should not be driven if this occurs. large to be sealed and the vehicle should not pound. Contact a towing service or Volvo On Call be driven. Roadside Assistance if applicable. CAUTION 11. Switch off the compressor and disconnect NOTE the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket. If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pres- sure Monitoring System (TPMS), the use of 12. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation The air pressure gauge will temporarily show the sealing compound may lead to incorrect valve and reinstall the valve cap. an increase in pressure to approximately tire pressure readings or in rare cases, dam- 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing compound is age to the tire pressure sensor. Use the tire being pumped into the tire. The pressure CAUTION sealing system to check and adjust the dam- should return to a normal level after approxi- After inflating the tires, always reinstall the aged tire's inflation pressure. mately 30 seconds. • valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. NOTE 9. Pump the tire for 7 minutes. • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps could corrode and become difficult to • Safely stow the tire sealing system in a CAUTION remove. convenient place as it will soon be used again to check the tire’s inflation pressure. The compressor should not be used for more The empty bottle of sealing compound than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheat- • cannot be removed from the bottle holder. ing. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

}}}}

455 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| ice technician to have the bottle removed 15. Check the inflation pressure on the air pres- CAUTION and properly disposed of. sure gauge. • After inflating the tires, always reinstall • If the pressure is under 19 psi (1.3 bar), the valve cap to help avoid damage to the WARNING the puncture has not been sealed suffi- valve from dirt, gravel, etc. ciently and the vehicle should not be If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering behavior, driven. Have the vehicle towed to a trained • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps or noises should occur while driving, reduce and qualified Volvo service technician. could corrode and become difficult to speed and park the vehicle in a safe place. remove. Recheck the tire for bumps, cracks, or other • If the pressure is more than 19 psi visible damage, and recheck its inflation pres- (1.3 bar), inflate the tire to the correct sure. If the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), pressure (see the tire pressure decal on NOTE do not continue driving. Have the vehicle the on the driver's side B-pillar (the struc- After use, the sealing compound bottle, towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service tural member at the side of the vehicle, at • the hose, and certain other system com- technician. the rear of the driver's door opening). Use ponents must be replaced. Please con- the air release valve to release some air sult your Volvo retailer for replacement 14. Rechecking the pressure from the tire if necessary. parts. Reconnect the tire sealing system. 16. Switch off the compressor and disconnect • If the sealing compound bottle’s expira- the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket. tion date has passed, please take it to a Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation Volvo retailer or a recycling station that valve and reinstall the valve cap. can properly dispose of harmful sub- Do not attempt to remove the sealing com- stances. pound bottle from the tire sealing system. It cannot be turned counterclockwise. WARNING 17. Fold the hose into the sealing system box Always check tire inflation pressure regularly. and return the components to the cargo compartment. Volvo recommends driving to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the damaged tire repaired/ replaced. Inform the workshop that the tire contains sealing compound.

456 WHEELS AND TIRES

WARNING Inflating a tire with the tire sealing CAUTION system compressor After using the tire sealing system, the The compressor should not be used for more • The compressor can be used to inflate a tire. vehicle should not be driven farther than than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheat- approximately 120 miles (200 km). 1. The compressor should be switched off. ing. • Have the tire inspected by a trained and Ensure that the on/off switch is in position 0. qualified Volvo service technician as soon Take out the electrical wire and hose. 5. Inflate the tire to the correct pressure (see as possible to determine if it can be per- the tire pressure decal on the on the driver's manently repaired or must be replaced. 2. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve and screw the hose connector onto the side B-pillar (the structural member at the • The vehicle should not be driven faster valve as tightly as possible by hand. side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire door opening). Use the air release valve to that has been temporarily repaired with 3. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest release some air from the tire if necessary. the tire sealing system. 12-volt socket in the vehicle and start the • After using the tire sealing system, drive engine. carefully and avoid abrupt steering maneuvers and sudden stops. WARNING • The vehicle’s engine should be running Related information when the tire sealing system is used to • Tire sealing system (p. 451) avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place, Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 441) • or outdoors, before using the system. The parking brake should be securely applied and the gear selector should be in the P (park) position. • Children should never be left unattended in the vehicle when the engine is running.

4. Start the compressor by pressing the on/off switch to position I.

}}

457 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| 6. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off Refilling coolant switch to position 0) when the correct infla- Coolant helps keep the gasoline engine at the tion pressure has been reached. proper operating temperature. The heat transferred from the engine to the coolant can be used CAUTION to warm the passenger compartment.

• After inflating the tires, always reinstall the When refilling coolant, follow the instructions on valve cap to help avoid damage to the the package and use the recommended amount valve from dirt, gravel, etc. of coolant. Never fill the cooling system with • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps water only; this could lead to freezing, corrosion could corrode and become difficult to and engine damage. remove. WARNING 7. Disconnect the electrical wire from the 12- If the engine has been running, the coolant volt socket. will be very hot. Allow the engine to cool Related information before opening the coolant expansion tank. If this is not possible, open the cap very slowly • Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 441) to allow pressure to dissipate. • Tire sealing system (p. 451) Lift the rubber strip by pressing it inward in the engine compartment. Remove the plastic cover by folding out the catch and lifting the cover upward. Remove the expansion tank and add coolant. The level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the tank. Put the other components back in place in the reverse order.

458 WHEELS AND TIRES

CAUTION • High levels of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system. • Only use coolants with corrosion protection recommended by Volvo. • The ratio of coolant to water is 50/50. • Mix the coolant with tap water of drinka- ble quality. • If maintenance is performed on the cooling system or if the coolant is replaced, flush the cooling system with clean water before adding new a new coolant/water mixture. • The engine may only be operated with a properly filled cooling system. Otherwise, high temperatures and cracks in the cylinders may occur.

Related information • Coolant specifications and volumes (p. 516)

459

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Volvo's service program maintenance. Inspection and maintenance should Periodic maintenance helps minimize Periodic maintenance and service performed at also be performed anytime a malfunction is emissions the intervals specified in your Warranty and observed or suspected. Service Records Information booklet will help Applicable warranties – U.S./Canada NOTE keep your vehicle running well. In accordance with applicable U.S. and Canadian Refer to your Warranty and Service regulations, the following list of warranties is pro- • Introduction Records Information booklet for a com- vided. The maintenance services contain several checks prehensive service and maintenance that require special instruments and tools and • New Vehicle Limited Warranty schedule up to 150,000 miles (240,000 km). This program contains inspections therefore must be performed by a qualified tech- • Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty nician. To keep your Volvo in top condition, spec- and services necessary for the proper • Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty function of your vehicle and includes ify time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts components that affect vehicle emis- and Accessories. • Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys- tems Limited Warranty sions. The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S. • Emission Design and Defect Warranty • The Warranty and Service Records Infor- The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle manu- Emission Performance Warranty mation booklet also contains detailed facturers to furnish written instructions to the ulti- • information concerning the warranties mate purchaser to assure the proper servicing These are the federal warranties; other warran- that apply to your vehicle. and function of the components that control ties are provided as required by state/provincial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and Service emissions. These services, which are listed in the On-board Diagnostic System "Warranty and Service Records Information" Records Information booklet for detailed informa- OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized booklet, are not covered by the warranty. You will tion concerning each of the warranties. engine management system. It stores diagnostic be required to pay for labor and material used. information about your vehicle's emission con- Maintenance trols. It can light the Check Engine light (MIL) if it Your Volvo passed several major inspections detects an emission control "fault." A "fault" is a before it was delivered to you, in accordance with component or system that is not performing Volvo specifications. The maintenance proce- within an expected range. A fault may be perma- dures outlined in the Warranty and Service nent or temporary. OBD II will store a message Records Information booklet, many of which will about any fault. positively affect your vehicle's emissions, should be performed as indicated. It is recommended that receipts for vehicle emission maintenance be retained in case questions arise concerning

462 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Emission inspection readiness required disconnecting the battery, a period • Visually inspect battery terminals for corro- How do states use OBD II for emission of driving is necessary to bring the OBD II sion. Corrosion may indicate a loose terminal system to "ready" for inspection. Two half- connector, or a battery near the end of its inspections? hour trips of mixed stop-and-go/highway useful service life. Consult your Volvo retailer Many states connect a computer directly to a driving are typically needed to allow OBD II to for additional information. vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can then reach readiness. Your Volvo retailer can pro- As needed: read "faults." In some states, this type of inspec- vide you with more information on planning a Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to tion has replaced the tailpipe emission test. trip. reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup of How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission • Maintain your vehicle in accordance with your dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by salt res- inspection? vehicle's maintenance schedule. idues. Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspection Owner maintenance Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at for any of the following reasons. Periodic maintenance requirements and intervals the base of the windshield, and from other places • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your are described in your vehicle's Warranty and where they may collect. vehicle may fail inspection. Service Records Information booklet. • If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit, The following points can be carried out between NOTE but went out without any action on your part, the normally scheduled maintenance services. OBD II will still have a recorded fault. Your Complete service information for qualified vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the Each time the car is refueled: technicians is available online for purchase or inspection practices in your area. • Check the engine oil level. subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com. • If you had recent service that required dis- • Clean the windshield, windshield wipers, connecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic headlights, and taillights. Related information information may be incomplete and "not Monthly: • Climate system service (p. 469) ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect ready may fail inspection. • the tires for wear. How can I prepare for my next OBD II • Check that engine coolant and other fluid emission inspection? levels are between the indicated "min" and • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or was "max" markings. lit but went out without service, have your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, serviced • Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass by a qualified Volvo technician. cleaner and soft paper towels. • If you recently had service for a lit Check • Wipe driver information displays with a soft Engine light, or if you had service that cloth.

463 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

System updates NOTE Keep in mind that a download can be cancelled Updates are available for infotainment-related but an installation that has already begun cannot Downloading data may affect other system services and Internet connections. If system soft- be interrupted. features that share the Internet connection. A ware updates are available, they can be to be download can be cancelled at any time or the Allowing background searches or downloaded all at once or separately. other features can be temporarily turned off software updates System (software) updates are while the software download is underway. This function can be deactivated from the center handled through the Remote display: update service app in the NOTE 1. Go to the Settings in the center display's Top center display's App view. Tap view and select Remote Update Service. once to start a download app in An update may be interrupted when the igni- Home view's lower sub-view. If tion is switched off. 2. Tap System Remote Update Service. no search for updates has However, an update does not have to be 3. Tap to deselect Auto Software Update. been performed since the last time the infotain- completed when the ignition is switched off; it If an update is available, New software updates ment system was started, a search will be initi- will resume automatically when the ignition is available ated. switched on again. will appear in the center display's status bar. Tap the message to start a download app No search will begin if a software download is in Home view's lower sub-view. As soon as the underway. Updating all system software download app has started, an icon in the System An icon in the System updates button indicates – Select Install all at the bottom of the list. updates button will indicate the number of the number of updates that are currently availa- To avoid displaying a list, select Install all by the downloads available. ble. Tap the button to display a list of updates System updates button. that can be installed in the vehicle. Related information • Center display overview (p. 30) For additional information and answers to com- Updating individual programs monly asked questions pertaining to the function – Select Install to choose the software to be • Navigating in the center display's views and downloading system updates, go to sup- downloaded. (p. 40) port.volvocars.com. Cancelling a download Background searches for software updates – Tap the activity indicator that replaced the is activated by default when the vehicle is Install button on the screen when the down- delivered from the factory. load began.

464 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Remote updates Vehicle status Booking service and repairs With the vehicle connected to the Internet, The vehicle's general status can be displayed in Connected Service Booking (CSB) makes it updates for a number of the vehicle's systems the center display along with the possibility to possible to use the vehicle's Internet connection can be downloaded from the center display. book service1 to set up a time for service, maintenance and/or repairs. The Remote updates app is The Car status app is started started from the center dis- in the center display's App view The information is handled through the Car play's App view and makes it and has three tabs: status app, which can be opened from the cen- possible to: ter display's App view. Information about your vehicle is sent to your retailer, who will contact you to make a workshop • search for and update system software • Messages: stored messages appointment. The system will also send a reminder as the appointment approaches and the update the Sensus Navigation maps Status: tire pressure and engine oil level • • Sensus Navigation system will provide directions • download, update and uninstall apps • Appointments: booking service or repairs1 to the workshop if necessary. Related information Related information This feature makes it convenient to book a work- • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps • Using the center display (p. 47) shop appointment directly from your vehicle. (p. 424) Vehicle-related information is sent to your • Booking service and repairs (p. 465) • System updates (p. 464) retailer, who prepares your visit to the workshop. • Checking inflation pressure (p. 448) The retailer will send you an email with a link to • Checking and refilling engine oil (p. 494) the Volvo On-Line Service Scheduler where you can book a workshop appointment at a convenient time. Information about your retailer is also available in the vehicle so that you can contact the retailer/workshop at any time.

1 Certain markets only. }}

465 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

|| Before the service can be used Using the service 3. Under Appointments, tap Request Volvo ID When it is time for service or in certain cases if appoint.. • The owner (primary driver) must create or repairs are necessary, a message will appear in 4. Check that your Volvo ID is correct. have a Volvo ID (see the article "Volvo ID"). the instrument panel and in the center display. This message is triggered by: 5. Check that the correct retailer is listed. If you • Register your Volvo ID in the vehicle as prefer, simply tap the button to initiate a call the amount of time that has elapsed since explained in the article "Volvo ID". If you have • to the retailer. already registered a Volvo ID, use the same the last service email address that you used to create the • the number of hours the engine has run 6. Tap Send appointment request. Your Volvo ID. since the last service request and vehicle data will be sent to your retailer through the vehicle's Internet con- Changing a Volvo ID email address mileage since the last service. • nection. If you would like to register a different email • Specific warnings or fault codes in the vehi- > Volvo will send a booking invitation to your address, open the Volvo ID app and tap Change cle Volvo ID. Follow the instructions provided. See email address. Booking service or repairs also the article "Volvo ID" for additional informa- 7. Open the email and click the link to the Volvo Submit a booking request whenever you need a tion. On-Line Service Scheduler for your retailer workshop appointment or when a message and book a workshop appointment at a con- Selecting a Volvo retailer regarding the need for service or repairs has venient time with your preferred service advi- By default, the retailer where you purchased your been displayed in the instrument panel and in the sor. Add any additional preferences and free vehicle will be your preferred retailer/Volvo center display. authorized workshop who will perform service text to your booking. At this point in the Sending an appointment request and repairs on your vehicle. To change the pre- booking procedure, you can also change your ferred retailer, go to Dealer Locator at preferred retailer by selecting the second link volvocars.com and select a retailer, click "Service in the email, which leads you to the Volvo Scheduler" and book an appointment at the new Retailer Locator where you can select preferred retailer. another retailer. Click the "Service Appoint- ment" link to start your booking. Prerequisites for booking service from the vehicle 8. When you have submitted your workshop In order to book an appointment from the vehicle, 1. Open the Car status app in the center dis- booking in the Volvo On-Line Service Sched- it must be connected to the Internet (see the arti- play's App view. uler, your appointment will be confirmed online in an email and by a message in the cle "Internet connected vehicle"). 2. Tap Appointments. center display after a short delay.

466 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

9. One day prior to your appointment, you will 3. Under Appointments, tap Send vehicle be sent using the Internet connection. Informa- receive a reminder via email and a message data. tion about the vehicle includes: will appear on the center display. > A message confirming that vehicle infor- • service requirements mation has been sent via the Internet 10. On the day of your appointment, a reminder • time since service was last performed will appear again on the center display. connection will appear on the center display. Transmission of the vehicle informa- • function status Sending vehicle-related information tion can be cancelled at any time by tap- • fluid levels Information about the vehicle can be sent at any ping the X in the activity indicator. time using its Internet connection. • mileage (odometer reading) Viewing workshop information VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) Using this function does not sent a workshop • appointment request to your retailer; only • The vehicle's software version vehicle data will be transmitted to Volvo. This • Diagnostic information vehicle data can be accessed by any retailer if you call the retailer and provide your Vehicle Related information Identification Number (VIN). • Internet connected vehicle (p. 420) • Volvo ID (p. 29) 1. Open the Car status app in the center display's App view. 2. Tap Appointments. 3. Under Appointments, tap Workshop information. 1. Open the Car status app in the center dis- > A window with retailer information will play's App view. appear. 2. Tap Appointments. 4. If you prefer, call the retailer, or select an address or GPS coordinates to activate the navigation system. Booking and vehicle information When you make an appointment or send vehicle information from you vehicle, this information will

467 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Wi-Fi connection to a workshop vehicle is often parked near a workshop with an Changing the way a connection is made The time a vehicle is in a workshop for service or authorized Volvo network), the vehicle will switch The type of connection (manual or automatic) repairs can be reduced by transmitting trouble- to manual connection if the driver cancels a con- can be changed in the center display's Settings shooting information as soon as the car reaches nection request twice within 5 days. menu. the workshop. With driver confirmation 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and This is done most conveniently by selecting With this alternative, the driver must confirm a tap Settings. Automatically connect when I arrive in the connection. 2. Tap Communication Volvo Service center display's Settings menu. If the vehicle stops at a workshop and the engine Networks. is switched off using the start knob, a pop-up Each time the vehicle slows down to a sufficiently window will open in the center display. The vehi- 3. Select Automatically connect when I low speed, it begins searching for a Wi-Fi net- cle will be automatically connected when the driv- arrive, Ask before connecting or Never work. If an authorized Volvo network (at a retailer er's door is opened if the driver taps Connect in connect and never ask (manual connec- or workshop) is found, a message will be dis- the pop-up window. If the driver does nothing or tions). played or a pop-up window will open in the cen- taps the pop-up window's Abort button, no ter display (this applies to manual connections, Related information attempt will be made to establish a connection. see the section "Manually connecting to a work- • Internet connected vehicle (p. 420) shop" below). NOTE • Settings view (p. 108) Automatically connecting to a workshop To help prevent the driver from being distur- Without driver confirmation bed by unwanted requests to connect (e.g., if This is the most convenient way to transmit trou- the vehicle is often parked near a workshop ble-shooting data. The driver does not need to with an authorized Volvo network), the vehicle confirm that the vehicle will establish a connec- will switch to manual connection if the driver tion. cancels a connection request twice within 5 days. If the vehicle stops at a workshop and the engine is switched off using the start knob, a message will appear above the status bar in the center dis- Manually connecting to a workshop play. The vehicle will be automatically connected Manual connections are handled by the service when the driver's door is opened if the driver technician. does not tap the Cancel button in the message. To help prevent the driver from being disturbed by unwanted requests to connect (e.g., if the

468 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Climate system service Start battery WARNING Service and repairs on the air conditioning sys- The vehicle's electrical system is single pole and Never expose the battery to open flame tem should only be done by a trained and quali- uses the body and engine block as conductors. • or electric spark. fied Volvo service technician. The start (main) battery is used to power electri- • Do not smoke near the battery. cal components and systems. However, the Troubleshooting and repairs Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not hybrid battery is used to start the gasoline • The air conditioning system contains a floures- allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, engine. cent tracer substance. Ultraviolet light is used to fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact search for leaks in the system. The start battery should only be replaced by a occurs, flush the affected area immedi- Refrigerant R134a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. ately with water. Obtain medical help immediately if eyes are affected. The start battery is an Absorbed Glass Mat WARNING (AGM) 12-volt battery that is dimensioned for WARNING The air conditioning system contains the use in vehicles to support electrical systems and refrigerant R134a under pressure. Service functions. PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! and repairs on the system should only be The service life of a battery is affected by factors Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso- done by a trained and qualified Volvo service such as driving conditions/style, the number of ries contain lead and lead compounds, chemi- technician. starts, climate, etc. Extreme cold may also further cals known to the state of California to cause decrease the battery’s starting capacity. cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands Related information after handling. • Climate control system (p. 174) • Never disconnect the start battery while the engine is running. It is not possible to charge another vehicle's bat- • Check that the start battery is correctly con- tery using the connection points in the engine nected and that the clamps on its terminals compartment. If the connection points are used are properly tightened. to charge another vehicle's battery it may cause a fuse to blow, which means that the connection points will not function. If an external auxiliary battery is used to start the vehicle, use the connection points in the engine compartment. The start battery's terminals should never be used. See the following illustration.

}}

469 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

|| CAUTION NOTE • The infotainment system's energy-saving • The service life of the start battery is feature may not function correctly or at shortened if it becomes discharged all, and/or a message may be displayed if repeatedly. a battery charger or jumper cables are • The service life of the start battery is not connected properly. affected by factors such as driving condi- • The negative terminal on the battery must tions and climate. Extreme cold may also never be used to connect a jumper cable further decrease the battery's start or a battery charger. Only the ground capacity. point on the chassis may be used. • Because the battery’s starting capacity decreases with time, it may be necessary to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven Positive connection point for an extended period of time or if the Negative connection point vehicle is usually only driven short distances. Only modern battery chargers should be used to • Driving for at least 15 minutes a week or charge the start battery. Quick charge functions connecting the battery to a charger with should not be used and could damage the bat- automatic maintenance charging will help tery. keep it in good operating condition. If both the start and hybrid batteries are fully dis- • Keeping the start battery fully charged charged, both will have to be charged. Only will help maximize its service life. charging the hybrid battery in this situation is not possible. Before the hybrid battery can be charged, the start battery must be charged to a certain level.

470 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Hybrid battery The vehicle's electric motor is powered by a rechargeable, maintenance-free, lithium-ion hybrid battery. The vehicle cannot be started if the hybrid battery is completely discharged.

WARNING The vehicle's hybrid battery may only be serviced or replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. The start battery is located in the cargo compartment H8 AGM battery with strap There are two versions of the start battery, • When replacing the start battery an Battery coolant depending on the vehicle model. Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) must be used. The hybrid battery's cooling system has its own • When replacing the start battery, a new bat- expansion tank. Battery tery with the same specifications and dimensions must be used. The battery should only H8 AGM be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Current (V) 12 Related information Cold start capacity (Cold Cranking 850 • Jump starting (p. 357) Amperes - CCA) (A) • Battery symbols (p. 472) Dimensions, L×W×H 13.9×6.9×7.5 in. (mm) (353×175×190) Capacity (Ah) 95

The H8 AGM is held in place by a strap. Ensure Filling the hybrid battery's cooling system should that this strap is pulled taut. only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. }}

471 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

|| Related information Battery symbols Avoid smoking, open • Hybrid battery specifications (p. 515) There are information and warning symbols on flames, and/or sparks. • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 375) the battery.

Wear protective goggles.

Risk of explosion

See the owner's manual for additional information. Recycle properly

Keep batteries away from children.

NOTE A used battery should be disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner. Consult Batteries contain corrosive your Volvo retailer or take the battery to a acid. recycling station.

Related information • Start battery (p. 469)

472 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Fuses Location of the fuseboxes Replacing fuses The fuses help protect the vehicle's electrical The fuses help protect the vehicle's electrical components from overloading or short circuits. components from overloading or short circuits.

WARNING Fuse replacement 1. See the list of fuse boxes for their locations. Never use metal objects or fuses with higher amperage than those stated on the lists of 2. Pull the fuse straight out and examine it from fuses. Doing so could seriously damage or the side to see if the curved metal wire in the overload the vehicle's electrical system. fuse is intact. Orange wires may only be handled by trained 3. If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the and authorized Volvo service technicians or same color and amperage (written on the licensed electricians. fuse). A number of component in the vehicle used high voltage electrical current and can be very Engine compartment dangerous to touch. WARNING Do not touch any components that are not Under the glove compartment Never use metal objects or fuses with higher clearly described in this owner's information. amperage than those stated on the following Cargo compartment pages. Doing so could seriously damage or overload the vehicle's electrical system. If an electrical component fails to function, this Related information may be due to a blown fuse. If the same fuse Replacing fuses (p. 473) Related information blows repeatedly, this indicates a problem with • Fuses (p. 473) the component, which should be inspected by a • Fuses in the cargo compartment (p. 481) • trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 474) • Fuses in the cargo compartment (p. 481) • Fuses in the passenger compartment • Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 474) (p. 478) • Fuses in the passenger compartment (p. 478)

473 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Fuses in the engine compartment The fuses in the engine compartment help protect electrical components such as engine and brake functions.

Fusebox, rear section: fuses 1–54.

474 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Fusebox, front section: fuses 55–78

There is a fuse removal tool on the inside of the Function [A] Function [A] fuse box cover. Converter for controlling feed to 5 Control module for: charge mod- 5 Positions the rear axle electric motor ule, heat exchanger cut-off valve, There is a decal on the inside of the cover with a cut-off valve for coolant through list of fuses. – – the climate system • Fuses 1–13, 18–30, 35–37, 46–54 and – – Hybrid battery control module 5 55–70 are called "Micro". for high-voltage converter for • Fuses 14–17, 31–34 and 71–78 are called Control module for engaging/ 5 combined high-voltage genera- "MCase" and should only be replaced by a changing gears tor/starter motor with 500 V–12 trained and qualified Volvo service technician. High Voltage Coolant Heater 5 V voltage converter control module – –

Converter for controlling feed to 10 the rear axle electric motor }}

475 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

|| Function [A] Function [A] Function [A]

Hybrid battery control module 10 USB socket* 5 Brake system control module 40 for high-voltage converter for (valves, parking brake) USB-port* combined high-voltage genera- Windshield wipers 30 tor/starter motor with 500 V–12 12-volt socket in the cargo com- 15 V voltage converter partment* Tailgate window washer 25 Charging module 5 12-volt socket on the rear side 15 Heated windshield*, passenger 40 of the tunnel console Cut-off valve for hybrid battery 10 side coolant; coolant pump 1 for 12-volt socket in the front tun- 15 – – hybrid battery nel console Coolant pump for electric drive 10 – – Brake system control module 40 system (ABS pump) – – Hybrid component cooling fan 25 – – – – – – Heated windshield*, passenger Shunt – – side – – Feed when ignition is switched 5 Heated windshield* driver side Shunt – – on to: engine control module, Heated windshield* driver side 40 transmission components, elec- – – trical power steering, central Headlight washers* 25 electrical module; – – Windshield washer 25 Exterior vehicle sound (certain 5 – – markets) – – – – Passenger side headlight 7,5 Horn 20 – – – – Alarm siren* 5 – –

476 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Function [A] Function [A] Related information • Fuses (p. 473) – – – – • Replacing fuses (p. 473) Air bags; Occupant Weight Sen- 5 Heated oxygen sensors (front 15 sor (OWS) and rear) Driver side headlight 7,5 Oil pump solenoid; A/C mag- 15 netic coupling; heated oxygen Accelerator pedal sensor 5 sensor (center) Transmission control module; 15 – – Gear selector control module Engine control module 20 Engine control module 5 Ignition coil; Spark plugs 15 – – – – – – – – – – Transmission oil pump control 30 – – module Engine control module; Turbo- 20 Vacuum pump control module 40 charger valve Transmission actuator 25 Solenoids; Valves; Engine cool- 10 ing system thermostat – –

Vacuum regulators; Coolant fan 7,5 Starter motor Shunt relay winding; Valve Starter motor Shunt Spoiler shutter control module; 5 Radiator shutter control module; Fuel leakage detection

477 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Fuses in the passenger compartment The fuses in the passenger compartment help protect electrical components such as the 110- volt socket, displays and door modules.

Positions Function A Function A • Fuses 1, 3–21, 23–36, 39–53 and 55–59 are called "Micro". – – Instrument panel 5 Fuses 2, 22, 37–38 and 54 are called • 110-volt socket 30 Center console buttons 5 "MCase" and should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. – – Sun sensor 5

Alarm system movement sensorA 5 – –

Media player 5 – –

478 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Function A Function A Function A Steering wheel module 5 Control module for driver support 5 Multi-band antenna module 5 functions Module for start knob and parking 5 Seat Comfort module/Massage 5 brake Panorama roof and sun shade* 20 – – Heated steering wheel* module 15 Head-up display* 5 Tailgate window wiper 15 – – Courtesy lighting 5 Fuel pump control module 15 – – – – Relay windings for engine compart- 5 – – Ceiling console display (seat belt 5 ment electrical module; Relay wind- reminder, front passenger side air- ing for transmission oil pump – – bag indicator) – – Climate system control module 10 – – Driver side seat heating* 15 – – Humidity sensor 5 Passenger side seat heating* 15 On-board diagnostics (OBDII) 5 Rear passenger-side door module 20 Coolant pump 10 Center display 5 Fuses in the cargo compartment 10 – – Climate system blower module 40 Internet connection control module; 5 (front) Volvo On Call control module Front driver-side door module 20

– – Rear driver-side door module 20 Active chassis* 20

Instrument lighting; Courtesy light- 7.5 Infotainment control module 40 – – ing; Rearview mirror auto-dim func- (amplifier) tion; Rain and light sensor; Rear Sensus control module 10 Climate system blower module 40 tunnel console keypad*; Power (rear) front seats* – –

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 479 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

|| Function A – –

Front passenger-side door module 20

– –

Circuit breaker for fuses 53 and 58 15

A Certain markets only. Related information • Fuses (p. 473) • Replacing fuses (p. 473)

480 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Fuses in the cargo compartment The fuses in the cargo compartment help protect electrical components such as power seats*, airbags and seat belt tensioners.

The fuse box is under the storage compartment on the right side

Positions Function A Function A • Fuses 13–17 and 21–36 are called "Micro". • Fuses 1–12, 18–20 and 37 are called Pneumatic suspension* compressor 40 – – "MCase" and should only be replaced by a Rear electric heater (passenger 30 Power tailgate* 25 trained and qualified Volvo service technician. side) Function A Power passenger seat* module 20 – – Heated tailgate window 30 Trailer hitch* control module 40 Rear electric heater (driver side) 30 – – Seat belt tensioner module (pas- 40 – – senger side) }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 481 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

|| Function A Function A

Internal relay windings 5 Heated rear seat (driver side)* 15

– – – –

Foot movement detection module 5 BLIS* 5 for opening the power tailgate* – – – – Seat belt tensioner modules 5 Folding third row seats backrest 20 module* Emission system actuator 5

Trailer hitch* control module 25 – –

Power driver seat* module 20 – –

Seat belt tensioner module (driver 40 Heated rear seat (passenger side)* 15 side) – – Parking camera* 5

– – Related information • Replacing fuses (p. 473) – – • Fuses (p. 473) – –

Feed when ignition is switched on. 10

Airbag and seat belt tensioner 5 modules – –

482 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Replacing bulbs Release the pins in the plastic covering's NOTE The halogen headlight bulbs can be replaced by four clips by pressing them down with a For information regarding any bulbs not the owner. screwdriver or similar object and remove the • covering. mentioned in this section, please contact Before the bulbs can be replaced, that plastic your Volvo retailer or a trained and The turn signal, high/low beam, Daytime Running covering over the headlight housing has to be authorized Volvo service technician. Light and parking light bulbs will be accessible removed. • Always switch off the ignition before star- when the plastic covering has been removed. ting to replace a bulb. Put the covering back in place in the reverse • If an error message remains in the dis- order. play after a faulty bulb has been replaced, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. NOTE • Condensation may form temporarily on The pins in the clips have to be pressed back the inside of the lenses of exterior lights completely before the clips are placed in the such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. plastic covering. This is normal and the lights are designed to withstand moisture. Normally, When the covering is put back in place, the condensation will dissipate after the pins must be pressed so that their upper sur- lights have been on for a short time. face is flush with the surface of the clip. • The optional Active Bending Light bulbs contain trace amounts of mercury. These bulbs should always be disposed of by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

CAUTION Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fin- To do so: gers. Grease and oils from your fingers vapor- Lift the rubber strip by pressing in toward the ize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the engine compartment. reflector, which will damage it.

}}

483 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

|| WARNING Turn signal Related information • Bulb specifications (p. 488) • The ignition should be switched off com- (Not in use) pletely (be in ignition mode 0) when • Removing the rectangular headlight cover (p. 485) replacing bulbs. Taillight bulbs • If the engine has been running just prior • Replacing parking light bulbs (p. 487) to replacing bulbs in the headlight hous- • Replacing front turn signal bulbs (p. 487) ing, please keep in mind that components • Replacing High Beam headlight bulbs in the engine compartment will be hot. (p. 486) • Replacing low beam headlight bulbs (p. 485) Front bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlights)

Brake light (LED)

Side marker light (LED)

Backup light2 Taillight (LED)

Turn signal (LED) Side marker light Fog light (LED) Low beam High-mounted brake light (LED) High beam

Parking light/Daytime Running Light

2 Must be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

484 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Removing the rectangular headlight Related information Replacing low beam headlight bulbs cover • Replacing bulbs (p. 483) On models with halogen headlights, the low Most of the bulbs in the headlight housing can beam headlight bulb can be replaced by the be accessed when the rectangular cover has owner. been removed. Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic cov- Before the rectangular cover can be removed, the ering over the headlight housing has to be plastic covering must be removed, see the article removed, see the article "Replacing bulbs." "Replacing bulbs" for information.

1. Remove the round rubber cover from the 1. Loosen the cover's four screws with a T20 headlight housing. Torx screwdriver (1) but do not remove them 2. Remove the bulb by turning the bulb holder completely (turning them 3–4 turns is upward and then pulling it straight out. enough). 3. Carefully pry the plastic sleeve by the con- 2. Push the cover to the side. nector's locking lug to release it. 3. Remove the cover. 4. Remove the connector from the bulb. Put the cover back in place in the reverse order. 5. Insert a new bulb.

}}

485 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

|| 6. Insert the bulb in the socket and turn down- Replacing High Beam headlight Related information ward. It can only be inserted in one way. bulbs • Removing the rectangular headlight cover 7. Put the rubber cover back into place. On models with halogen headlights, the High (p. 485) Beam headlight bulb can be replaced by the • Bulb specifications (p. 488) Related information owner. • Replacing bulbs (p. 483) Before the bulb can be accessed, the headlight Bulb specifications (p. 488) • housing's rectangular cover must be removed, see the article "Removing the rectangular headlight cover."

1. Remove the bulb by turning the bulb holder upward and then pulling it straight out. 2. Carefully pry the plastic sleeve by the connector's locking lug to release it. 3. Remove the connector from the bulb. 4. Insert a new bulb. 5. Insert the bulb in the socket and turn downward. It can only be inserted in one way.

486 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Replacing parking light bulbs 5. If the high beam bulb was removed, insert Replacing front turn signal bulbs On models with halogen headlights, the front the bulb in the socket and turn downward. It On models with halogen headlights, the front parking light bulb can be replaced by the owner. can only be inserted in one way. turn signal bulb can be replaced by the owner.

Before the bulb can be accessed, the headlight Related information Before the bulb can be accessed, the headlight housing's rectangular cover must be removed, • Replacing bulbs (p. 483) housing's rectangular cover must be removed, see the article "Removing the rectangular head- • Bulb specifications (p. 488) see the article "Removing the rectangular headlight cover." • Removing the rectangular headlight cover light cover". Remove the high beam bulb first by turning the (p. 485) bulb holder upward and then pulling it straight out. This makes it easier to access the parking light bulb.

1. Press the retaining catches together and pull the bulb holder straight out. 2. The bulb holder and bulb must be replaced as one unit. 1. Pull the bulb holder straight out. 3. Press the new bulb holder into the socket. 2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. Related information 3. Insert a new bulb. • Removing the rectangular headlight cover 4. Insert the bulb holder in the socket and (p. 485) press it into place. • Replacing bulbs (p. 483) • Bulb specifications (p. 488)

487 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Bulb specifications The following specifications apply to models equipped with halogen headlights. If other bulbs need to be replaced, contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Function [W]A Type Low beam 55 H11 High Beam 65 H9 Turn signal 24 PY24W Daytime running light/ 21/5 W21/5W parking light

A Watt Related information • Replacing bulbs (p. 483)

488 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Hoisting the vehicle When the vehicle is hoisted, the jack or garage lift must be positioned correctly under the vehicle.

For vehicles equipped with leveling control*, if it is also equipped with the optional pneumatic suspension, this must be deactivated before the vehicle is hoisted. This is done from the center display: 1. Tap Settings in Top view. 2. Tap My Car Suspension . 3. Select Deactivate Suspension & Leveling Control.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 489 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Location of the jack attachment points (triangles)/lifting points (red areas)

NOTE WARNING The jack provided with your vehicle is • Ensure that the jack is positioned so that intended to be used only in temporary situa- the vehicle cannot slide off it. tions such as changing wheels in the event of • Always use axle stands or similar struc- a flat tire. Only the jack that came with your tures. particular model should be used to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be lifted more Related information frequently or for a prolonged period, using a Removing a wheel (p. 444) garage jack or hoist is recommended. Always • follow this device’s instructions for use. • Installing a wheel (p. 446) • Jack (p. 443)

490 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Opening and closing the hood Closing The hood is opened by releasing it from the pas- 1. Press down the hood until it begins to close senger compartment and then by using the han- due to its own weight. dle under the front edge of the hood. 2. When the handle under the front edge of the Opening hood is in the lock, press down on the hood to close it completely.

WARNING • Be sure the hood is completely unobstructed while it is being closed. • Check that the hood locks properly when Turn the handle under the front edge of the closed. It must audibly lock on both sides. hood counterclockwise to release it from the • Never drive if the hood is not completely lock and lift. closed and locked. Warning–hood not closed • While driving, if there are any indications that the hood is not locked in the closed When the hood lock has been composition, stop safely as soon as possible pletely released, this symbol and a With the hood completely closed, pull the and close it completely. graphic will illuminate in the instrument control (located to the left of the brake panel and an audible signal will be pedal). given. If the vehicle begins to roll, the audible signal will be repeated several times. For additional information, see also the article "Door and seat belt reminders."

NOTE If the warning symbol remains on or if the audible signal is given even if the hood is completely closed and locked, consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

}}

491 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

|| Engine compartment overview WARNING The engine compartment overview shows some Orange cables should only be handled by maintenance points. • a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- Some of the components in the vehicle's electri- nician. cal drive system are located in the engine com- • A number of the vehicle's components partment. use high voltage and can be very dangerous if handled improperly. • Do not touch any components that have not been clearly described/explained in this manual. • Use caution when checking/refilling fluids in the engine compartment. • The cooling fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start or continue to operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has been switched off. • Engine cleaning should only be done by a workshop. If engine cleaning agents are used when the engine has been running, there may a fire risk. • Before performing any operations in the engine compartment, the ignition should Hood completely closed always be completely switched off (in mode 0) and there should be no remote Related information keys in the passenger compartment. The • Engine compartment overview (p. 492) gear selector should be in the P (park) • Door and seat belt reminders (p. 65) position. If the engine has been running, wait until it has cooled before touching any components in the engine compartment.

492 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

• The distributor ignition system operates Air cleaner Engine oil at very high voltages. Special safety pre- The correct oil must be used for the stated oil Engine oil filler cap cautions must be followed to prevent change (service) intervals to apply. injury. Always turn the ignition off when replacing distributor ignition components Related information e.g. plugs, coil, etc. • Ignition modes (p. 362) • Do not touch any part of the distributor • Opening and closing the hood (p. 491) ignition system while the engine is run- Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir ning. This may result in unintended move- • (p. 498) ments and body injury.

Volvo recommends:

The layout of the engine compartment may differ slightly from model to model Coolant expansion tank

Brake fluid reservoir

Washer fluid reservoir

Relay/fuse box

}}

493 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

|| CAUTION Checking and refilling engine oil Checking the oil level The oil level is checked electronically. The oil level can be checked in • Not checking the oil level regularly can the center display when the result in serious engine damage if the oil engine is not running. level becomes too low. • Oil that is lower than the specified quality From the center display's can damage the engine. Home view, swipe the screen from right to left to open App • Volvo does not recommend the use of oil view. Tap Car status and then tap Status to additives. show the oil level. • Always add oil of the same type and viscosity as already used. • Oil changes should be carried out by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Using oil of higher than the specified • Oil filler cap3 quality is permitted and may be necessary for demanding driving. It may be necessary to top up engine oil between regularly scheduled services. Also, refer to the Warranty and Service Records No action is necessary until a message is dis- information booklet for information on oil change played in the instrument panel. intervals and oil specifications. WARNING Oil level graphic in the center display Related information The oil level should be checked at regular inter- • Checking and refilling engine oil (p. 494) Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into • vals, particularly during the period up to the first contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces. scheduled maintenance service. • If Engine oil level Service required is displayed, have the vehicle checked by a If the oil level sensor indicates that the level is trained and qualified Volvo service techni- too low, using the correct oil, top up with the cian. The oil level may be too high. amount of oil indicated as soon as possible.

3 Models with an electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

494 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

NOTE Windshield wipers in the service The service position can be activated in two ways position from the center display: The system cannot detect changes in the • The windshield wiper blades must be in the verti- oil level immediately. The vehicle must be Via Function view driven approximately 20 miles (30 km) or cal (service) position for replacement, washing have been parked on level ground with or to lift them away from the windshield when the engine off for 5 minutes before the e.g., removing ice or snow. oil level reading will be correct. • If the necessary conditions are not met for checking the oil level electronically (time interval after the engine was – From Function view, tap the Wiper Service switched off, if the vehicle is parked on Position button. The indicator light in the an incline, etc.), No values available will button will illuminate when the service posi- be displayed. This does not indicate a tion is activated. problem with the oil level sensor. > The windshield wipers will move to the vertical position. Related information • Engine oil (p. 493) Via Settings • Ignition modes (p. 362) 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top Wipers in the service position view. 2. My Car Wipers CAUTION Tap 3. Tap the Wiper Service Position box. Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in position before attempting to move them to > The windshield wipers will move to the the service position. vertical position. Deactivating service position Putting the windshield wipers in the The service position can be deactivated in two service position ways from the center display: The service position can be activated while the vehicle is stationary and the wipers are not activated.

}}

495 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

|| Via Function view CAUTION Replacing wiper blades The wiper blades should be replaced regularly If the wiper arms have been folded out from for best effect. the windshield while in the service position, fold them back against the windshield before The windshield wiper blades must be in the verti- returning the wipers to the normal position to cal (service) position for replacement, washing help avoid scratching the paint on the hood. or to lift them away from the windshield when e.g., removing ice or snow. – From Function view, tap the Wiper Service Related information Position button. The indicator light in the Replacing the windshield wiper blades Replacing wiper blades (p. 496) button will go out when the service position • is deactivated. • Using the windshield wipers (p. 153) Via Settings 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. My Car Wipers 3. Tap the Wiper Service Position to deselect the box. The wipers will also leave the service position if: • The wipers are activated. • The windshield/headlight washers are activated. • The rain sensor is activated.

496 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Replacing the tailgate wiper blade

With the wipers in the service position, fold out the wiper arm from the windshield. Press the button on the wiper blade attachment The windshield wiper blades are different lengths and pull the wiper blade straight out, parallel with the wiper arm. NOTE 1. Fold the wiper arm outward. Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks 2. Grasp the inner section of wiper blade (at the The windshield wiper blades are different into place. arrow). lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is Check that the blade is securely in place. longer than the one on the passenger side. 3. Turn the wiper blade counterclockwise to use one end as a lever to help release it from the 4. Press the wipers back against the wind- wiper arm. shield. Cleaning Keeping the windshield/tailgate window and 4. Press the new wiper blade until it clicks into wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and place and check that it seats securely. prolongs the service life of the wiper blades. 5. Fold the wiper arm back toward the tailgate Clean the wiper blades with a stiff-bristle brush window. and lukewarm soap solution or car washing detergent. Related information • Windshield wipers in the service position (p. 495) • Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir (p. 498)

497 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Refilling the windshield washer fluid Related information Cleaning the exterior reservoir • Opening and closing the hood (p. 491) The vehicle should be washed at regular inter- Washer fluid helps keep the windshield and • Engine compartment overview (p. 492) vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots headlights clean. adhere to the paint and may cause damage. To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly important to wash the car frequently in the wintertime. Hand washing The following points should be kept in mind when washing and cleaning the car: • Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight. Doing so may cause detergents and wax to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid scratching, use lukewarm water to soften the dirt before you wash with a soft sponge, and plenty of sudsy water. • Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork as The windshield and headlight washers* share a soon as possible. Otherwise the finish may common reservoir. Open the blue cap to refill be permanently damaged. washer fluid (see the illustration for the location • A car washing detergent can be used to of the reservoir). facilitate the softening of dirt and oil. During cold weather, the reservoir should be filled • Dry the car with a clean chamois and with windshield washer solvent containing anti- remember to clean the drain holes in the freeze. Use Volvo Original Washer Fluid or the doors and rocker panels. equivalent with a recommended pH value • Tar spots can be removed with tar remover between 6 and 8 in a 1:1 solution. after the car has been washed. When there is approx. 1 qt (1 liter) of washer • A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy fluid remaining in the reservoir, a text message water can be used to clean the wiper blades. Frequent cleaning of the windshield and and the symbol will be displayed in the wiper blades improves visibility considerably instrument panel. and also helps prolong the service life of the wiper blades.

498 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

• Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel Automatic car washes CAUTION housings, fenders, etc). • We do NOT recommend washing your car in When using an automatic car wash in which • In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre- an automatic wash during the first few quent washing is recommended. months (because the paint will not have the vehicle has to be able to roll freely, the hardened sufficiently). auto-hold brake function must be deactivated. If this is not done, the brakes will automati- CAUTION • An automatic wash is a simple and quick way to clean your car, but it is worth remembering cally be applied when the vehicle is stationary. During high pressure washing, the spray • that it may not be as thorough as when you To deactivate this function: mouthpiece must never be closer to the yourself go over the car with sponge and vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not spray water. Keeping the underbody clean is most 1. Drive the vehicle into the car wash into the locks. important, especially in the winter. Some 2. Put the gear selector in N • Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can automatic washers do not have facilities for 3. Switch off the ignition reduce lighting capacity considerably. washing the underbody. Clean the headlights regularly, for exam- The vehicle will then be able to roll freely. ple when refueling. NOTE Special laminated panoramic roof cau- Condensation may form temporarily on the CAUTION tions: inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as • Before driving into an automatic car • Always close the laminated panoramic headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is nor- wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to roof and sun shade before washing your mal and the lights are designed to withstand avoid damaging the windshield wipers. vehicle. moisture. Normally, condensation will dissi- • Make sure that side view mirrors, auxiliary • Never use abrasive cleaning agents on pate after the lights have been on for a short lamps, etc, are secure, and that any the laminated panoramic roof. time. antenna(s) are retracted or removed. Oth- • Never use wax on the rubber seals erwise there is risk of the machine dis- around the laminated panoramic roof. lodging them. • Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-plated wheels using the same detergents used NOTE for the body of the vehicle. Aggressive When washing the car, remember to remove wheel-cleaning agents can permanently dirt from the drain holes in the doors and sills. stain chrome-plated wheels.

}}

499 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

|| WARNING • Polishing and waxing (p. 505) Cleaning the interior Windshield wipers in the service position Only use cleaning agents and car care products When the vehicle is driven immediately • • (p. 495) recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and fol- after being washed, apply the brakes, low the instructions included with the car care including the parking brake, several times in order to remove any moisture from the product. brake linings. CAUTION • Engine cleaning agents should not be used when the engine is warm. This con- • Under no circumstances should gasoline, stitutes a fire risk. naphtha or similar cleaning agents be used on the plastic or the leather since these can cause damage. Exterior components Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning • Take extra care when removing stains products, available at your Volvo retailer, for such as ink or lipstick since the coloring can spread. cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental components such as chromed strips on the exte- • Use solvents sparingly. Too much solvent rior of your vehicle. The instructions for using can damage the seat padding. these products should be followed carefully. Sol- • Start from the outside of the stain and vents or stain removers should not be used. work toward the center. • Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a CAUTION pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing may damage the textile upholstery. • Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rubber components • Clothing that is not colorfast, such as new jeans or suede garments, may stain Polishing chromed strips can wear away • the upholstery. or damage the surface • Polishes containing abrasive substances should not be used Fabric upholstery and ceiling liner Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream, shoe pol- Related information ish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric stain • Paint damage (p. 503) remover. Consult your Volvo retailer. • Corrosion protection (p. 503)

500 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Leather* care Protecting leather upholstery Type 3 (dry soil or dust) Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured with a 1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on a 1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush. protectant to repel soiling. Over time, sunlight, cloth and apply a thin coating of cream to the grease and dirt can break down the protection. upholstery with light circular movements. 2. Same procedure as for type I stains. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and fading can result. 2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes. CAUTION Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy leather This will help the leather resist staining and pro- Sharp objects, such as rings, could damage care kit formulated to clean and beautify your tect against sunlight's harmful UV rays. vehicle's leather, and to renew the protective the leather on the steering wheel. qualities of its finish. The cleaner removes dirt Cleaning a leather-covered steering wheel and oil buildup. The light cream protectant • Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp sponge Leather panels* restores a barrier against soil and sunlight. and a neutral soap solution. Leather should be allowed to breath. Never cover Volvo also offers a special leather softener that • Leather should be allowed to breath. Never the upper side of the dashboard or door panels should be applied after the cleaner and protec- cover the steering wheel with a plastic pro- with a plastic protector. Ask your Volvo retailer tant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and tector. about Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather reduces friction between leather and other fin- • Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and Softener 943 7429. ishes in the vehicle. conditioning the steering wheel with Volvo's Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and con- Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429. surfaces ditioning your vehicle's leather two to four times a Cleaning interior plastic components should be year. Ask your Volvo retailer about Leather Care If there are stains on the steering wheel: done with a cleaning agent specially designed for Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429. Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood) this purpose. Consult your Volvo retailer. Cleaning leather upholstery – Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the wheel 1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge and with a solution with 5% ammonia. For blood squeeze it until the cleaner foams. stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl) of water and 2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the one ounce (25g) of salt and wipe the stain. sponge with circular movements. Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate) 3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the 1. Same procedure as for type I stains. sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain, do not rub. 2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorbent paper or a towel. 4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a towel, and allow the leather to dry completely. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 501 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

|| CAUTION WARNING Cleaning the center display Marks, stains, etc., on the center display may Do not use cleaning agents with high Never use more than one floor mat at a • • affect its performance and readability. Clean it alcohol content such as washer fluid to time on the driver's floor. Before driving, regularly with a microfiber cloth. clean instrument panel glass. remove the original mat from the driver's • Never spray cleaning agents or water seat floor before using any other type of directly onto components with electrical floor mat. Any mat used in this position buttons or controls. Clean components of should be securely and properly anchored this type by applying the cleaning agent/ in the attaching pins. An extra mat on the water sparingly to a cloth and wiping the driver's floor can cause the accelerator components so that no liquid penetrates and/or brake pedal to catch. Check that into these components. the movement of these pedals is not impeded. Cleaning the seat belts • Volvo's floor mats are specially manufactured for your car. They must be firmly Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild soap secured in the clips on the floor so that solution. they cannot slide and become trapped under the pedals on the driver's side. Cleaning floor mats Center display's Home button The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed clean regularly, especially during winter when Related information To clean the center display: they should be taken out for drying. Spots on tex- • Cleaning the center display (p. 502) 1. Turn off the display by pressing and holding tile mats can be removed with a mild detergent. the Home button. For best protection in winter, Volvo recommends 2. Wipe the screen clean with the microfiber the use of Volvo rubber floor mats. Consult your cloth provided or use a similar one, using a Volvo retailer. small, circular motion. If necessary, moisten the cloth slightly. 3. Reactivate the display by pressing the Home button briefly.

502 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

CAUTION Corrosion protection Paint damage Your vehicle is constructed with effective protec- Paint damage requires immediate attention to The microfiber cloth used should be free • tion against corrosion. avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish of sand, dirt or anything abrasive that regularly, for instance washing the vehicle. might scratch the screen. Inspection and maintenance Touch-up if necessary. • Do not use rough cloths, paper towels or The corrosion protection does not normally tissues that could scratch the screen. require maintenance but keeping the vehicle Paint repairs require special equipment and skill. • When cleaning the center display, apply clean helps prevent the onset of corrosion. The Contact your Volvo retailer for any extensive dam- only light pressure on the screen. Press- use of strong alkaline or acidic cleaning fluids age. ing too hard could cause damage. should always be avoided on shiny body compo- Minor scratches can be repaired by using Volvo • Do not spray any liquid or corrosive nents. Any stone chips in the paint should be touch-up paint. chemicals directly on the screen. Do not touched up as soon as possible. Color code use window cleaning liquid, cleaning Related information agents (particularly ones containing abra- sives), sprays, solvents, alcohol or ammo- • Paint damage (p. 503) nia to clean the screen. • Touching up paint damage (p. 504)

Related information • Cleaning the interior (p. 500) • Center display overview (p. 30)

Sample color code (1): US models

}}

503 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

|| NOTE Touching up paint damage Stone chips or other minor paint damage can be When touching up the vehicle, it should be repaired by the vehicle's owner. clean and dry. The surface temperature should be above 60 °F (15 °C). Repairing stone chips

Related information • Label information (p. 508) • Touching up paint damage (p. 504)

Sample color code (1): Canadian models Make sure you have the right color. See also the article "Label information" for the location of this label. Minor stone chips and scratches 1. Place a strip of masking tape over the dam- Material: aged surface. Pull the tape off so that any loose flakes of paint adhere to it. • Primer – can • Paint – touch-up pen 2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with a small brush. • Brush 3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint can Masking tape • be applied using a brush. Mix the paint thor- • Emery cloth oughly; apply several thin paint coats and let If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare dry after each application. metal and an undamaged color coat remains, you 4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want to can add paint immediately after removing dirt. protect surrounding paint by masking it off 5. After a few days, polish the touched-up areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of polish.

504 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Related information Polishing and waxing CAUTION • Paint damage (p. 503) Normally, polishing is not required during the Volvo does not recommend the use of long- Cleaning the exterior (p. 498) first year after delivery, however, waxing may be • life or durable paint protection coatings, some beneficial. of which may claim to prevent pitting, fading, • Before applying polish or wax the vehicle oxidation, etc. These coatings have not been must be washed and dried. Tar spots can be tested by Volvo for compatibility with your removed with kerosene or tar remover. Diffi- vehicle's clear coat. Some of them may cause cult spots may require a fine rubbing com- the clear coat to soften, crack, or cloud. Dam- pound. age caused by application of paint protection • After polishing use liquid or paste wax. coatings may not be covered under your vehicle's paint warranty. • Several commercially available products contain both polish and wax. • Waxing alone does not substitute for polish- Related information ing a dull surface. • Paint damage (p. 503) • A wide range of polymer-based waxes can • Touching up paint damage (p. 504) be purchased today. These waxes are easy to use and produce a long-lasting, high-gloss finish that protects the bodywork against oxidation, road dirt and fading. • Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).

505

SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS

Label information The labels in your vehicle provide information such as the chassis number, paint code, tire inflation pressure, etc.

508 SPECIFICATIONS

Location of labels

}}

509 SPECIFICATIONS

|| List of labels Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Vehicle Emission Control Information. (A) (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Minis- US models, (B) Canadian models. Your Volvo try of Transport (CMVSS) standards is designed to meet all applicable emission (Canada). Your Volvo is designed to meet all standards, as evidenced by the certification applicable safety standards, as evidenced by label on the underside of the hood. For fur- the certification label on the driver's side B- ther information regarding these regulations, pillar (the structural member at the side of please consult your Volvo retailer. the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door Engine oil. This label contains the recom- opening). This label also includes codes for mended engine oil specifications. paint color, etc. For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The Volvo retailer. U.S. models have the upper VIN plate is located on the top left surface of decal; Canadian models have the lower one. the dashboard. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) should always be quoted in all correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when ordering parts. Tire inflation pressures. This label indicates the correct inflation pressures for the tires that were on the vehicle when it left the factory.

510 SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions The following table lists your vehicle's most important dimensions.

Dimension In. Dimension In. Dimension In. (mm) (mm) (mm)

A Ground clearance (curb 9.1 (232) E Load length, floor 21.8 ( 554) H Track, front (models with- 65.9 (1673)C A weight + 2 people) out pneumatic suspen- D F Height 69.9 (1776) sion) 65.6 (1665) B Wheelbase 117.5 (2984) G Load height 32.1 (816) Track, front (models with 66.0 (1677)C C Length 194.9 (4950) pneumatic suspension) 65.7 (1669)D D Load length, floor, seat- 80.3 (2040) back down 49.6 (1260)B

}}

511 SPECIFICATIONS

|| Dimension In. (mm)

I Track, rear (models with- 65.8 (1675)C

out pneumatic suspen- D sion) 66.1 (1667)

Track, rear (models with 66.1 (1679)C pneumatic suspension) 65.8 (1671)D J Load width, floor 46.9 (1192)

K Width 75.7 (1923)E 76.0 (1931)F 77.1 (1958)G L Width incl. door mirrors 84.3 (2140) (folded out) M Width incl. door mirrors 79.1 (2008) (folded in)

A Varies slightly depending on tire size, chassis options, etc. B From the second row of seats*. C Models with 20, 21 and 22 in. wheels. D Models with 18 and 19 in. wheels. E Chassis width. F Width on models with 18 and 19 in. wheels. G Width on models with 20, 21 and 22 in. wheels.

512 SPECIFICATIONS

Weights The following table lists important weight data for your vehicle.

Category USA Canada Gross vehicle weight 6,635 lbs 3,010 kg 7-seat, 4-cyl. Capacity weight 1,210 lbs 550 kg 7-seat, 4-cyl. Permissible axle weights, front 3,130 lbs 1,420 7-seat, 4-cyl. Permissible axle weights, rear 3,590 lbs 1,630 kg 7-seat, 4-cyl. Curb weight, 7-seat 5,090 - 5,170 lbs 2,300 -2,350 kg Max. roof load 220 lbs 100 kg Max. trailer weights Without brakes: 1,650 lbs Without brakes: 750 kg With brakes: 5,000 lbs With brakes: 2,250 kg Max. tongue weight 500 lbs 225 kg

}}

513 SPECIFICATIONS

|| CAUTION • When loading the vehicle, the maximum gross vehicle weight and permissible axle weights may not be exceeded. • The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 3280 ft (1,000 m) above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and therefore the car's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced air density, so the maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the car and trailer must be reduced by 10% for every further 3280 ft (1,000 m) (or part thereof).

514 SPECIFICATIONS

Air conditioning refrigerant Compressor oil Hybrid battery specifications The air conditioning system in your car contains Volume Type The hybrid battery is used to power the electric a CFC-free refrigerant. motor for the rear wheels when the gasoline 4.0 fl. oz. (120 ml) PAG SP-A2 engine is not being used. A/C decal R134a decal Evaporator Type: lithium-ion The A/C system' s evaporator may never be Power reserve: 9.2 kWh repaired or replaced with a previously used evaporator. A new evaporator must be certified and NOTE marked according to SAE J2842. The capacity of the hybrid battery diminishes Related information somewhat with age and use, which could • Climate system service (p. 469) result in increased use of the gasoline engine and consequently, slightly higher fuel consumption.

Refrigerant Related information Models with R134a • Hybrid battery (p. 471) Charging the hybrid battery (p. 375) Weight Type • 2.35 lbs (1070 g) R134a

WARNING The air conditioning system contains R134a refrigerant under pressure. Service and repairs may only be carried out by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

515 SPECIFICATIONS

Brake fluid specification and volume Coolant specifications and volumes Brake fluid transfers braking force when the Coolant volumes and specifications. brake pedal is depressed to the master cylinder and to the slave cylinders on each wheel. Engine: T6 AWD Topping up or replacing brake fluid should only Specification: Coolant with corrosion inhibitor be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service mixed with water (50/50 mix), see packaging. technician. Different types of coolant should not be mixed to help avoid health risks. Specification: DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F (>280 °C) Related information • Engine compartment overview (p. 492)

516 SPECIFICATIONS

Engine specifications The following table provides technical data for the respective engines. Engine specifications for Special Edition vehicles may vary.

Specification T8 Engine designation B4204T28 Output (kW/rps) 233/100 Output (hp/rpm) 313/6000 Torque (Nm/rps) 400/37–90 Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 295/2200–5400 No. of cylinders 4

Electric motor Max. power:87/7000 (65 kW/117). Torque: 240 Nm/0-50 rpm. Related information • Engine oil specifications and volume (p. 518) • Coolant specifications and volumes (p. 516)

517 SPECIFICATIONS

Engine oil specifications and Oil viscosity Fuel tank volume volume Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life The fuel tank's volume is shown below. Full synthetic engine oil meeting the minimum under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide good ACEA A5/B5 must be used. Lower quality oils fuel economy and engine protection. See the vis- The fuel tank's refillable volume is approx. 13.2 may not offer the same fuel economy, engine cosity chart. US gallons (50 liters). performance, or engine protection. Related information Volvo recommends: • Octane rating (p. 354) • Opening/closing the fuel filler door (p. 355)

Viscosity chart Extreme engine operation Volvo oil VCC RBS0-2AE/SAE 0W20 is recom- Refer to the warranty and Service Records infor- mended for extreme driving conditions. mation booklet for information on oil change intervals and oil type requirements. Oil volume The oil volume for the engine is: NOTE 6.2 US qts (5.9 liters). This vehicle comes from the factory with syn- Related information thetic oil. • Checking and refilling engine oil (p. 494)

Oil additives must not be used.

518 SPECIFICATIONS

Tire inflation pressure table tion placard for information specific to the tires The following tire pressures are recommended installed on your vehicle at the factory. by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-

Tire sizes: XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid Cold tire pressure for up to five persons Front Rear psi (kPa) psi (kPa)

235/55 R19 42 (290) 42 (290) 275/45 R20 275/40 R21 275/35 R22 Temporary spare tire N/A N/A

Related information • Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 441)

519 SPECIFICATIONS

Transmission fluid specification and volume Under normal driving conditions the transmission fluid does not need to be changed during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.

Transmission: TG-81SC Specification: Transmission fluid AW-1

520 INDEX A Air vents 197, 198 general description 387 Alarm 220 oil 520 A/C (air conditioning) 194 automatically arming/disarming 222 shifting with steering wheel paddles 390 Accessory installation warning 24, 26 Deactivating 222 shiftlock override 389 Active high beams 140 All Wheel Drive 392 Axle weight 439 Active yaw control 316 Ambient temperature sensor 113 Adaptive brake lights 342 Antennas B Adaptive cruise control 258, 260, 261, passive entry system 224 263, 264, 265, 274, 275, 276, 278 Anti-freeze 350 Battery passing assistance 276 Applications (apps) 422 avoiding drain 364 radar sensor 275, 276 remote key, replacing 226 App menu 126 Adaptive Cruise Control warning symbols 472 Approach lighting 145 fault tracing 277 Battery – replacing 469 Apps Airbags Blind Spot Information 324, 325, 326 changing settings 46, 112 disconnecting the front passenger’s Bluetooth Apps (applications) 424 side 82 connecting devices 408 front 87 Audio system 396 Bluetooth® inflatable curtain 90 HD digital radio 399, 401, 402 hands-free 407 side impact 91 SiriusXM® Satellite radio 403, 404, 405 media 412, 417 Air conditioning 194 sound settings 396, 417 microphone 409 voice control 117 Air distribution 197, 198 streaming audio 417 Auto-hold brakes 341 Air distribution table 200 Bluetooth cell phone connection 409 Automatic locking retractor 68 Air filter 183 Booster cushion, integrated 79, 80, 81 Automatic transmission Air quality 182 Booster cushions 75 Eco (driving function) 386 Air quality sensor 182 gear shift indicator 390 Brake assist system 341

521 Brake lights 143, 342 Catalytic converter 356 infant seats 70 Brakes CD, USB, iPod, AUX, Bluetooth, Recents, ISOFIX/LATCH anchors 76 auto-hold 341 Library, Shuffle, Similar, Change device, Pri- top tether anchors 78 Brake system mary Audio Default Language, Subtitle, Pri- Child safety 66 Brake pad inspection 339 mary Subtitle Default Language, Video, booster cushions 75 fluid 516 DivX® VOD 414 child restraint systems 68, 77 general information 338, 340, 342 CD player 414 convertible seats 72 infant seats 70 Bulbs 487 Cell phone replacing 483 hands-free 406 Child safety locks 222 specifications 488 Pairing 407 Child seats Cell phone voice control 118 lower attachment points 77 Center display City safety 279, 285 C changing settings 32 City Safety cleaning 502 crossing traffic 283 Camera keyboard 33 detecting objects 282 driver support systems 246 navigating in 40 limitations 285 limitations 247 overview 30 rear collision warning 284 Camera, Park Assist 304, 306, 308 screen in the center console 47 symbols and messages 289 Capacity weight 439, 513 symbols in the status bar 45 troubleshooting 287 Cargo area, steel grid 215 Chains 441 City Safety, On/Off 281 Cargo area cover 217 Changing a wheel 443 Cleaning Cargo compartment Charging cable exterior 498 fuses 481 hybrid battery 367 interior 500 raising/lowering the level 211 Child restraints Clean Zone Interior Package 182 Cargo net 213 recalls and registration 68 Climate system 184 Cargo space 204 Child restraint systems 68 air distribution 197, 198, 200 air filter 183 Car wash 498 booster cushions 75 convertible seats 72 air vents 198

522 auto mode 183 Cruise control 254, 255, 256, 257 Driver distraction warning 24, 26 blower 187 adaptive 258, 260, 261, 263, 264, Driver support systems 246 center display controls 185 265, 274, 275, 276, 277, 278 Driving economically 347 Electronic Climate Control 184 Curb weight 439, 513 introduction 174, 184 Driving in cold weather 350 passenger compartment filter 182 Driving through water 349 preconditioning 175, 177 D rear controls 184, 186 recirculation 190 Daytime running lights 137, 139 E refrigerant 515 Defroster service 469 Eco (driving function) 386 rear window and mirrors 191 setting the temperature 188 Eco coast 386 voice commands 119 Detachable key blade 232, 242 Economical driving 347 Clock 114 Digital owner's manual 53, 54 Electrical sockets 208 Cold weather driving 350 Dimensions 511 Electric parking brake 344, 346 Collision warning system 280 Disconnecting the front passenger’s airbag 82 Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 184 Compass in rearview mirror 136 Display calibrate 136 head-up 114 Electronic stability control 316 Connected service booking 465 Distance Alert 322, 323 Emergency brake parking brake 344, 346 Convertible seats 72 Dome lighting 145 Emergency brake lights 342 Coolant 516 Door mirrors 102 refilling 458 defroster 191 Emergency locking retractor 68 Corrosion protection 503 Drive modes 383 Emergency starting 357 Courtesy lighting 145 Driver's seat Emergency towing 352 easy access 166 Crash event data 28 Emission inspection readiness 462 Driver alert 320, 321 Crash mode 85, 86 Lane Departure Warning 331, 335 Cross Traffic Alert 326, 327, 328, 330 Lane Keeping Aid 331, 335

523 Engine Front airbags 87 Gross vehicle weight 439 overheating 349 disconnecting passenger’s side airbag 82 Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 513 starting 364 Front park assist 299, 301, 303 turning off 366 Front seats Engine compartment heated 195 H fuses 474 multifunctional 162, 163, 164 Engine compartment overview 492 power 160, 161, 166 Hand brake (parking brake) 344, 346 Engine oil 518 Front seats, manual adjustment 159 Hazard warning flashers 144 checking 493, 494 Fuel filler door, opening 355 HD digital radio 399, 401, 402 Engine specifications 517 Fuel requirements 353, 354 Headlights Active Bending Lights 142 Environment 18 Function view 38 active high beams 140 Eyelet Fuses 473 daytime running lights 137, 139 towing 351 cargo compartment 481 high/low beams 140 Eyelets for anchoring loads 216 engine compartment 474 high beam flash 140 passenger compartment 478 removing cover 485 Fuses, replacing 473, 474, 478, 481 F Headlight washers 155 Head restraint - center, rear 167 Federal Clean Air Act 462 G Head restraints, rear seat 167 Flat tires Head-up display 114 repairing with tire sealing system 451, Garage door opener Heated front seats 195 453, 457 HomeLink® Heated oxygen sensors 356 Floor mats Wireless Control System 97, 98 Heated steering wheel 193 placing correctly 364 Gasoline requirements 353, 354 High beam bulb, replacing 486 Fluid specifications 516, 520 Glossary of tire terminology 437 High beams 140 Fog lights Glove compartment 205 active 140 rear 143 Grocery bag holder 213 Hill Descent Control 342

524 Hill Start Assist (HSA) 343 Immobilizer (start inhibitor) 225 Instrument panel Hoisting the vehicle 489 Indicator lights 134 hybrid information 127 HomeLink® Wireless Control System 97, 98 Infant seats 70 Intellisafe 19 Home safe lighting 145 Inflatable Curtain 90 Interior Air Quality System 182 Hood, opening/closing 491 Inflation pressure 441 Interior lighting 145 Horn, Keypad, Paddles, Signal 157 Inflation pressure table 519 Internet connection 420 applications (apps) 422 hybrid Information lights 134 bluetooth settings 423 battery 471 Infotainment 431 booking service 465 Hybrid Infotainment (Infotainment system) 396 establishing a connection 421 battery charge status 377 Infotainment system 399, 401, 402 troubleshooting 425 battery specifications 515 CD player 414 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors 76 charging cable circuit breaker 369 cell phone 406 charging current 379 general sound settings 396 charging the battery 374, 375, 379 Gracenote 418 drive systems 366 J introduction 396 electric motor in city driving 381 media player 412, 414 Jack 443 information in the instrument panel 127 media player sound settings 417 location of 443, 444 messages and symbols 370 media search 416 vehicle storage 380 Jump starting 352, 357 radio 397 Hybrid battery searching for radio stations 398 charging cable 367 sound settings 396, 417 K stopping the charging procedure 373 type approval 427 video 419 Key voice control 117 remote 229 I Inspection readiness 462 Key blade 232, 242 Instrument lighting 138 ID, Volvo 29 Keys 231 Instrument overview 100 Ignition modes 362

525 L M N

Labels Maintenance 462 Navigation system list of 510 hoisting the vehicle 489 voice commands 121 location of 509 performed by the owner 462 Net Laminated panoramic roof 103, 104 Malfunction indicator light 123 cargo 213 Lane Departure Warning Manual front seat adjustment 159 settings 333 Media player 412, 413 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 331, 335 compatible file formats 419 O

Lane Keeping Aid 331, 333, 335 Media player (infotainment system) 414 Occupant safety 58 settings 333 Menus Occupant weight sensor 82 LATCH anchors 76 instrument panel 148, 150, 151, 153 Octane recommendations 354 Leather care 500 Mirrors Odometer 94 Lighting panel 137 defroster 191 power door 102 Oil Load anchoring eyelets 216 retractable 102 checking 493, 494 Loading the vehicle 204, 211, 439 Mirrors, rearview mirror 107 Oil quality 518 Locking 236, 237 Modem 426 On-board diagnostics 462 Locks and alarm 220 Motor oil On-board Diagnostic socket 24 Low beam bulb, replacing 485 checking 493, 494 On Call Roadside Assistance 12 Low beams 139, 140 MP3 files 419 Opening the hood 491 Low Speed Control 391 Multifunctional front seats 162, 163, 164 Options 24 MY CAR 108, 109 Outside temperature sensor 113 Overhead courtesy lighting 145 Overheating, engine 349

526 Owner's information Plug-in hybrid Radio mobile applications 23 general information 14 RBDS 398 Owner's manual 19 Polishing 505 settings 397 SiriusXM® Satellite radio 403, 404, 405 Ownership, changing 113 Power front seat Radio functions Oxygen sensors, heated 356 memory function 161 HD digital radio 399, 401, 402 Power mirrors 102 defroster 191 Rain sensor 154 P Power steering Rear Collision Warning 284 adjustable 316 Rear fog lights 143 Paint, touching up 503, 504 Power tailgate 240 Rear park assist 299, 301, 303 Park assist 299, 301, 303 Power windows 106 Rear seat head restraints 167 Park Assist Camera 304, 306, 308 Preconditioning 175, 177 Rear seats 166 settings 304, 308 starting/stopping 180 accessing the third row 171 Park Assist Pilot 309, 310, 313, 315 symbols and messages 181 adjusting backrest tilt 168 Parking brake timer 178 center head restraint 167 electric, applying/releasing 344, 346 Preconditioning, folding 169, 171, 172 Parking light bulb, replacing 487 retaining climate comfort 177 moving forward/rearward 171 Passenger compartment Pregnancy, using seat belts during 60 Rearview mirror compass 136 fuses 478 PROPOSITION 65 WARNING 357 Passive Entry system Rear window defroster 191 location of antennas 224 Recalls 60 Permissible axle weight 513 R Recalls, child restraints 68 Phone Recirculation (climate system) 190 Radar receiving calls 409 driver support systems 250 Refrigerant (A/C system) 515 text messages 410, 412 Radar sensor Refueling 353, 354 Pilot Assist 265, 268, 269, 271, 272 limitations 251, 275 fuel filler door 355

527 Registering child restraints 68 Seat belts Sound settings Remote key 229, 231, 234 Automatic locking retractor/Emergency media 417 immobilizer 225 locking retractor 68 ringtones 411 range 229 buckling 63 Sound settings, audio system 396, 417 pretensioners 62, 63 replacing the battery 226 Specifications reminder 65 restricted (red) key 231 bulbs 488 securing child restraint systems 70, 72, 75 Remote updates 465 unbuckling 63 Speed camera alert 298 Replacing bulbs 483 use during pregnancy 60 Speed limiter 290, 291, 296 Replacing fuses 473, 474, 478, 481 using 62 automatic 292, 294 Reporting safety defects 59 Seats deactivating/reactivating 295 starting/activating 291 Roadside Assistance 12 rear 166 Spin control 316 Road sign information (RSI) 297, 298, 299 Sensus 20 Stability system 316 Rollover Protection System (ROPS) 320 Service connected service booking 465 sport mode 317 Roll Stability Control (RSC) 320 Settings view Start and lock system categories 109 type designations 224 S resetting 112 Starting and driving 338 system settings 111 Starting the engine 364 Safety, occupant 58 Shiftlock Starting the vehicle override 389 Safety defects, reporting 59 after a crash (crash mode) 85, 86 Side door mirrors 102 Safety locks, child 222 Start inhibitor (immobilizer) 225 Side impact airbags 91 Safety mode 85 Steel grid in cargo area 215 ® Seat SiriusXM Satellite radio Steering wheel 157 adjusting the passenger's seat from the traffic information 403, 404, 405 adjusting 158 driver's seat 161 Snow chains 441 heated 193 Seat belt Snow tires 441 horn 157 reminder 65 keypad 157

528 Steering wheel paddles 157 Tethering uniform tire quality grading 440 Stone chips, touching up 503, 504 wi-fi sharing 425 wheel bolts 444 Storage compartments 204 Three-way catalytic converter 356 Tire sealing system 451, 453, 457 Studded tires 441 Timer Top tether anchors (child restraint systems) 78 preconditioning 178 Sunroof Touching up paint 503, 504 laminated panoramic roof 103, 104 Tire inflation pressure 519 Towing a trailer 359, 361 Sun shade 106, 108 Tire Pressure Monitoring System 447, 449 trailer hitch 360 calibrating 450 Sun visor 207 Towing eyelet 351 type approval 451 Suspension 392 Towing the vehicle 352 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 450 System updates 464 Traction control 316 Tires 434 Trailer towing 359, 361 changing 443 trailer hitch 360 changing from summer to winter 438 T glossary of terms 437 Transmission improving economy 434 gear shift indicator 390 Tailgate inflation pressure 441 general description 387 locking/unlocking 238 inflation pressure table 519 Hill Start Assist 343 operating with the foot movement sen- installing (mounting) a wheel on the oil 520 sor 233 vehicle 446 shifting with steering wheel paddles 390 power operated 240 rotation 435 shiftlock override 389 wiper/washer 156 snow 441 Tread wear indicator 439 Tailgate wipers 496 specifications 435 Trip computer 94, 95, 96 Technician certification 55 storing 435 reset 95 studded 441 Temperature Trip odometers 94 tire pressure monitoring system 447, 449 perceived 174 tire sealing system 451, 453, 457 Trips, long distance 347 Temperature sensor tools in the cargo compartment 443 Trip statistics 96 ambient 113 tread wear indicator 439

529 Turn signals 148 Volvo and the environment 18 Windows changing bulbs 487 Volvo ID 29 laminated glass 55 power 106 Volvo maintenance 462 sun shade 106 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance 12 U Windshield Volvo programs 12 rain sensor 154 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 440 washers 155 Unlocking the tailgate 238 wipers/washers 153 Unlocking the vehicle 236, 237 W Windshield washer fluid reservoir 498

USB/AUX connection 412, 417 Warning flashers, hazard 144 Windshield wiper blades 496 Warning lights 134 Windshield wipers service position 495 Warning system, collision 280 V Wiper blades Warranties 462 replacing 495, 496 Vehicle Event Data 28 Washer fluid 498 replacing tailgate wiper 496 Vehicle information 12 Washers WMA files 419 headlight 155 Vehicle loading 211, 439 Workshop windshield 153 Vehicle maintenance 462 Wi-Fi connection 468 performed by the owner 462 Water, driving through 349 Vehicle status 465 Waxing 505 Vehicle weights 513 Weights Voice control trailer 359 cell phones 118 Wheels giving commands 118 changing 443, 444 introduction 117 storing 435 multimedia devices 119 Whiplash Protection System 61 radio 119 Wi-Fi 425, 426 settings 122

530